I LIBRARY UNIVERSITY • A 'm.-^ THE COMBINED SPANISH METHOD. A NEW PRACTICAL AND THEORETICAL SYSTEM OF LEARNING THE CASTILIAN LANGUAGE, BMBEACING THE MOST ADVANTAGEOUS FEATUEES OF THE BEST KNOWN- METHODS. WITH A PROIOUNCIXG VOCABULARY, CONTAINING ALL THE WORDS USED IN THE COURSE OF THE WORK, AND REFERENCES TO THE LESSONS IN WHICH EACH ONE IS EXPLAINED, THUS ENABLING ANY ONE TO BE HIS OWN INSTRUCTOR. BY ALBERTO DE TORNOS, A.M., POBMEBLT DIRECTOR OF frORMAL SCHOOLS IN SPAIN. AND NO"W TEACHER OF SPANISH \V THE NEW YORK MERCANTILE LIBRARY, NEW YORK EVENING HIGH SCHOOL, AND THE POLYTECHNIC AND PACKER INSTITUTES, BROOKLYN. JOH|« S. PRELL Civil & Mechanical Engineer. SAN FKANCISCO, CAL. NEW YOEK: D. APPLETOIsr AND COMPANY, 1, 3, AND 6 BOND STREET. 1892. Bntbbbd, according to Act of Congress, in the year 186T, hy D. APPLETON & COMPANY, Ijx the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for tne Sonthem District of New York, IrdMtolfo^ KoTiCE. — ^A Kej^ to the Exercises of this Grammar is published in a separate volume. Add toliib. I i 1 PREFACE. It is an undoubted fact that in teaching, not only lan- guages, but any other science or art, there neither is, nor can be, any other method than that of uniting theory with, practice ^ and the various modes of applying the one to the other, the extent of the application, and the time at which it should be commenced, have produced the great number of methods hitherto published. This fact is now universally acknowledged, and each new author proclaims himself to be the only one who has put it into execution. The most insignificant little phrase-book does not fail to announce, in its introduction, that it com- bines theory and jpractice / and grammars containing noth- ing more than confused masses of rules, heaped one upon another, are entitled " Theoretical and Practical^ It is admitted on all hands that much progress has been made within the last few years in the art of teaching languages ; and, in testimony of this, we have only to mention the ex- cellent oral and practical methods of Jacotot, Manesca, Ollen- dorff, Boulet, Hobertson, and others who have followed in their footsteps, all of which are ably treated, and have done much good in their way. But each one of the grammarians referred to, satisfied with his own invention, looked with disdain upon that of his predecessor. Hence the enmity 747 iV PEEPACE. and the almost unaccountable diversity of opinion which we observe amongst them. Had they studied each other with impartiality, and endeavored to profit by the experience and even the defects of the several systems, their labors would certainly have been attended with still more favora- ble results, and of course more considerable benefit would have accrued thereby to the art in general. Numberless points of excellence are to be found, scattered here and there, throughout the various ancient and modern systems, and chiefly those abeady alluded to; and it has been thouglit that, if carefully sifted out and judiciously com- bined, they would foi-m a new method which would be in details essentially superior to any of the old ones. This conviction, joined to twenty years' experience in teaching the Spanish language, sometimes through the medium of one, sometimes of another of the before-men- tioned systems, has led the author to prepare and publish the Combined Method, which he now offers to those desir- ing to learn the noble language of Cervantes. Wliether he has successfully attained his object, the pub- lic will decide. OBSEEYATION"S ON SOME OF THE ADVANTAGEOUS FEATURES OF THE " DE TORNOS'S COMBINED METHOD." 1st. The advantage of presenting the verb as the first and principal part of speech, which serves as the axis upon which all the other parts revolve. These, too, have been introduced in their turn, not in grammatical order, nor by mere chance, but in the logical and natural order in which they occur in discourse, whether written or spoken. 2d. That of explaining these parts of speech in the order just mentioned, not in an isolated manner, but united to form a homogeneous whole, and in such a way that the learner will have no difficulty in finding the explanation relative to the use of each one of them respectively, as often as occasion may require. 3d. These explanations, which embrace the whole theory, and form a complete grammar of the language, are separate from and independent of the exercises ; the latter being com- posed in strict accordance with the examples accompanying each lesson, in such a manner that those unacquainted with grammar in general, and those who have no desire to enter into the theory of the language, or, finally, those who are too young or too old to learn grammar, may acquire a thorough conversational knowledge of Spanish, by merely committing to memory the Vocabulary, studying the Compositions, and care- fully writing the Exercises. 4th. From the arrangement alluded to, arises another great advantage, namely, all the elements are found in the vocabu- lary of each lesson, separated and detached from the examples and rules given in the explanation ; thus enabling the student to see at one glance all that he has to commit to memory for each recitation. Vi OBSBBVATIONS. 6th. And this division of the lessons into Elements, Compo- sition, Explanation, Version, and Exercise, enables the teacher to divide each lesson into two, three, or even four parts, accord- ing to the age and capacity of the learner. 6tll. Repetition, and constant repetition, is indispensable for acquiring any language ; but by repetition should not be under- stood the simple reiteration of single words and easy phrases ; but repetition of the idioms, and of those forms of expression differing" most widely from the idiomatical construction of the learner's native tongue. It is true, that though this is the proper plan for acquiring a thorough knowledge of a language, that feature might tend to make the present work appear, at first sight, more difficult than the books hitherto used ; but such will not be found the case ; for when there is frequent change of matter there cannot be monotony ; and variety ren- ders study at the same time easy and agreeable. This repetition, then, of useful forms of expression, and contrast of idiom, will be found in every page of our " Combined Method," in which it has been our endeavor to introduce gradually and with the necessary explanations of each, the most important idioms of the Spanish language. 7th. Although we are of opinion that to learn a language, and, above all, to learn to pronounce it, it is always preferable to have the assistance of a skilful teacher, and one who speaks his native tongue with purity and correctness ; yet, as it is not always possible to procure such, we have placed at the end a Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the course of the work, and the pronunciation of each, so that nothing may be wanting to second the efforts of those who, from choice or necessity, may be their own instructors. 8th. The Vocabulary, besides giving the pronunciation and meaning of the words, indicates the lesson in which the expla- nation of each has been given in the Grammar. By this means the learner can with ease refer to the explanation of all those words of which it has been deemed essential to give one. CONTENTS. rkon PRKFACE, iii, iv A FEW REMABK3 ON THE CoifBIKED METHOD, . . . . . V, vl Contents, .......... vii-xvi Pbeliminart Lesson on Orthography and Pbonunciation, . xvii-xxiv LESSON I. BUI.B 1. Regular verts, classified in three conjugations, ..... 1 2. Eoots, .......... a 8. Terminations of the three model verbs, corresponding to all the regular verbs, 2 — . Suppression of the nominative pronouns, . .... 2 4. F. iUiied) requires the verb in the tliird person, ..... 8 LESSON II. 6. Senor, senorito, sefiora, senorita, use of these words, . . , . 4 6. Don and Bona, use of these words, ....... 5 7. iV'o, placed before the verb, ....... 5 LESSON III. 8. The conjunction y changed into I, .... , ,7 9. Que, interrogative pronoun, ... . . 7 10. Sino.—Wheu but is to be translated by sino, . . . . .7 11. P^ro.— When ftz/Ms to be translated by pen), ..... 7 12. jE'*:pam);, iM5'/es, &c., one word may belong to different parts of speech, , 7 LESSON IV. 13 10 A, preposition to, used after active verbs, when the object is a person, . lu 14. De, used to express position or the material of which any thing is made 10 15. ^, the article /ien, curd, qiie, de quien, used interrogatively do not take the article, . 32 89. When the interrogative is governed by a preposition, the same preposition must be repeated in the answer, . . . . . . .88 LESSON XI. W. Alrrt/ien, akruno, the difference between them, . . . .85 — . Any one or any body, when translated by cualquiera, ... 86 41. Nadie, ninfruno, their distinction, . . . • • . 8R 42. Alfjuno and nin/funo, when they lose the o, . ~. . » . 86 48 Algo, alguna cosa, used affirmatively, ...>.. 86 CONTENTS. ix 44. I^ada, ninguna cosa, used negatively, ...... 36 45. Negatives, when placed before the verb, . . . . . .36 — . Two negatives render the negation more emphatic than one, . . 36 46. A or an, when not translated, ....... 36 LESSON XII. 47. Tener and haber, their distinction, ...... 39 — . To have and to be, followed by an infinitive, how they are translated, . . 39 48. Preterit Indefirdte, ......... 40 LESSON XIII. 49. Mio, tuyo, «&c., change the into a for the feminine, . . . .43 BO. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the name of the thing possessed, ......... 43 51. As pronominal adjectives, mio, tuyo, myo precede the noun and drop their final syllable, .......... 43 52. Mio, when placed after the noun, ..... 44 53. Possessives used as pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns they represent, and take the article, . . . . . ,44 54. When used indefinitely they take the neuter article, ... 44 55. Whenconnected with the verb to &e, the article is omitted, . . .44 56. Vuestro, vuestra, when used, ....... 44 LESSON XIY. 57. Formation of compound numbers, ....... 48 58. Numbers are indeclinable, except ujio and the compounds of dento, , 48 59. Uno, its agreement ; when it loses the 0, . . . . . .48 60. Ciento, its agreement ; when it loses the last syllable, ... 48 LESSON XV. 61. Ordinals, their agreement and place, . . . . . .51 — . Primero and tercero, when they drop their final letter, ... 52 62. Ordinals, when used, ......... 52 — . N. B.— When ordinals do not require the definite article, ... 52 LESSON XVI. 63. Preterit Definite, 56 64. Ante, its meaning, .......•, 57 65. Mas and menos, how used, ....«.,. 57 LESSON XVII, 66. Qiiien, how used, ......... 61 67. Who, when translated by que, and when by quien^ . , . .61 68. 0>/al and qve relate to persons and things, ..... 61 69. Cijyo refers tc persons and things : its agreement, . . , • . 61 — . It partakes of the nature of the relatives and of the possessives, . . 61 CONTENTS BULK rA«< 70. The preposition placed before the relative, . . . • .61 71. Relative pronouns can never be suppressed in Spanish, , , • 61 LESSON XVIII. 72. Declension of the demonstrative pronouns este, ese, aqud, . . .66 78. Esie, how used, .....•••• 66 74. Este, ese, forming one word with the adjective otro^ . • • .67 75. The demonstrative pronouns used as neuter, ..... 67 78. The former and the latter, translated by aqud and este, . . - .67 T7. That of, that who, or that which, translated hYelde,elqm, . . 67 78. English personal pronouns rendered in Spanish by demonstrative pronouns, 67 79. Aqui, ahi, oca, aUd, how employed, . . . . • • . 6» LESSON XIX. 80. Para and ;?or, how they diflTer, ....... TO 81. Entre, its meaning, ......... "73 ^ Hasta^ its meaning, . 73 LESSON XX. 83. Tanto and cuanto, when they lose the last syllable, . . . .77 84. Comparison of equality, how formed, ...... 77 85. Cuan may be employed, ........ 77 86. Comparison of superiority, how formed, ..... 77 87. Comparison of inferiority, ........ 77 88. Mayor, menor, m^or, peor, are already in the comparative degree, . 77 89. Than, translated by de and que, ....... 78 90. Comparison relating to nouns, verbs, and adverbs. .... 78 LESSON XXI. 91. Superlatives ending in est, or formed by most, how translated, . . 82 92. 3fost, or most of, when translated by la mayor parte, or by mas, . . 83 93. In, preposition, when translated hy de, , . . . . .83 94. Superlatives formed by very, most, etc., when formed in Spanish by muy and when by isim/), ......... 83 95. Adjectives drop the last vowel on taking the termination isimo, . . 83 96. Other superlatives ending in errimo, ...... 83 97. Adjectives which change their endings before the termination isimo, . . 83 98. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed, ..... 84 99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives, . . . . . .84 — . These make also a superlative in isimo, ..... 84 — . Also with muy, and a comparative with mas or rTienos, . . . .84 100. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of comparison, . . 84 LESSON XXII. 101. Ser and estar, the distinction between them, 102. " " their employment, CONTENTS. XI LESSON XXIII. V.VL* PAOI 103. Ihiture simple, .......... 96 IW. The definite article used with numerals, indicating the hour of the day, . 96 105. Evening and night, translated by noche, . . . . . .96 106. The conjunction si, when it governs the subjunctive, and when the indica- tive, .......... 90 LESSON XXIV. 107. Compound future, ......... 100 108. Acabar de, its meaning, ........ 100 — . N. B.— How the pupil may learn a great number of words with little or no difficulty, 101- 109. Nouns ending in tion are the same in Spanish, changing the letter t into c, 101 110. The days of the month are counted by the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, .......... 101 LESSON XXV. 111. Saber and conocer, how they differ, . ..... 107 112. Aun, ya, todaiyh, their different meaning and uses, . . . .107 — . Once, twice, &c., translated by una vez, dos veces, &c., . . . 107 — . Mzedo, valor, &c., take the preposition de after them, . . . .107 11.3. To be afraid, to be thirsty, &c., how translated, .... 107 114. Jamas and nunca, how used, ........ 107 LESSON XXVI. 115. Pronoun subject, or nominative, ...... 112 116. Two objective cases of the personal pronouns, how used, . . .113 117. The objective case, when not preceded by a preposition, is affixed to infini- tives, gerunds, &c., ........ 113 118. When the verb drops the final letter followed by nosoros, . . . 113 — . The reason of this, ........ 113 119. When the objective case may follow the verb, . . . . .113 120. When the objective may be placed before the first verb, or after the second, 113 121. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the second objective case, . 113 122. Mi, ti, si, when preceded by con, . . . . . .Hi 123. Entre, how used, ......... 114 124. The second objective case is used after comparatives, ... 114 125. When the first objective case is used, . . . . , .114 126. The objective case of the third person is rendered by le, les, if the preposition to govern it in English, 114 LESSON XXVII. 127. The third person rendered in Sp^-nish hy se, . . . . . 119 128. The object of the verb is to be placed last, when two first objective cases occur in the sentence, ...... .119 129. Placed first when the object of the verb is the reflective pronoun, , . 12G 130. Both of the objective cases belonging to the same person used together, . 120 131. The expressions a ei quiero, a ti amo, are incorrect, . . .120 Xii CONTENTS 132. The pronouns U, la, lo, los, and las, how dibtingulshed from the artldes el, la, lo,los,la8, ^20 133. The adjective mismo, how used, .,..•.. 120 LESSON XXVIII. 134. When the imperfect is used, ....... 125 135. When the pluperfect is used, ........ 126 136. How the expressions to have just and to be just are translated before a past participle, ^26 LESSON XXIX. 137. The preterit anterior, its use, 130 138. Derivation of adverbs of manner and quality, .... 131 139. How adverbs are formed from adjectives, . . . . . . 131 140 Adverbs terminating in mente admit, like adjectives, the degrees of compari- 181 141. How these adverbs can be substituted, . . . . • .131 LESSON XXX. 142. What impersonal verbs are, ....••• ^^T 143. 144, Amanecer and anocher, used in the three persona, . . . .137 jEfofter and /tocer, and other verbs used impersonally, ... 137 145. The pronoun it, accompanying impersonal verbs, not translated, . . 138 — . Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article, .... 138 — . Nouns used in their most general sense take the article, . . .138 J46, Names of nations, countries, mountains, &c., take the article, , ,138 147, Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by a preposition, do not take the article, ,..••'••* — . Names of some places that always take the article 138 138 LESSON XXXI 148 144 148. Gttstar, Bignifying to give pimmre to, hocused, .... 149. G^^^ar, followed by the preposition rfe, . - • • ^^ 152. The\eThpesar,vfhenmiiaams to regret, LESSON XXXII 149 163, How the passive voice is ^"^^^^ , \^ ^,,i„ tbe present "and im'perfeci 154. When the passive form is used with tne vero set iu k, i' ^^^ tenses of the indicative, • • • ' * , ' haq 155. When the preposition d. or por is to be used after passive verbs, ^ ' . ' 1^ 156. Passive voice formed by ^e, • • ' / ' ' .150 157. When the passive, formed with ^€, is to be preferrca, . LESSON XXXIII. 168. Elective verbs, what they are, . 165 CONTENTS. XIU BULB PAOB 159. When are the verbs made reflective ? . . , . . .156 160. When a verb denotes reciprocity^ how it is conjugated, ... 156 LESSON XXXIV. 161. Which are the irre^lar verbs, 161 162. Verbs which, although they undergo slight changes in their radical letters, are not to be considered as irregular, ..... 161 163, 164. Verbs which change i into y, . . . . . . .162 165. How the irregular verbs are divided, ...... 162 166. What is to be observed relative to the object of the verb pagar, . . 163 LESSON XXXV. 167. Irregularity of the verb acostar, ....... 168 168. Imperative mood, when used, ....... 168 169. The s of the first person plural, and the d of the second, suppressed before nosaxidos, ... ...... 168 170. The subjunctive, used when the imperative is negative in English, . . 168 171. The future of the indicative, used for the imperative, ... 168 172. Adjectives ending in ous, how rendered into Spanish, . . . .168 173. Nouns and adjectives ending in Englie'h in ic or iccU, how rendered into Spanish, .......... 169 LESSON XXXVI. 174. Irregiilarity of the verb tnoKer, • . . . . 173 175. Se, as the Spanish indefinite personal pronoun, . . * , * . * 173 176. The pronoun se, in its four functions, . . .'.'.' 174 177. Nouns ending in English in «y, how rendered into Spanish * * 174 178. Doler, how used, ... *^ ' ' * .'* LESSON XXXVII. 179. Irregularity of the verb a fii, DO, flu, nydh. nyai. 7iy«. nyO, nyoo. cua, cue, cui, cuo, Tcwah kway. ifct^^. hwo. gua, giie, gtli, gao, gwah. gway. DIP] P'MJ^. gwo» HTHOXGS. ai, as in dabais, dah'-hah-eess. Yon gave. ay, (I hay, ah'-e. There is. au, u pawsa, pah'-oo-sa. Pause. ei, a veis, vai'-eess. You see. ey. u %, lai'-e. Law. ea, u linea, U'-nai-a. Line. eo, ii virgfneo, teer-he' -nai-o. Virginal. eu, i( dewda, dai'-oo-da. Debt. ia, i( gracia, grah'-the-a. Grace. ie, (( cielo, the-ai'-lo. Heaven. io, (1. precio, prai'-the-o. Price. iu, ik ciwdad, the-oo-dath .', Citj. oe, u h6r6>^, ai'-ro-ai. Hero. oi, u sois, 8o'-ee88. You are. oy, u Yoy, To-e. I go. ua, u {rsigua, frati-gwa. Forge. ue, il dwefio, doo-ain'-yo Owner. ui, a rwido, roo-e'-do. Noise. «y, (( mwi/, moo'-e. Very. uo, (( ard?/o, TRII ar'-doo-o. \, Ai-duous. •HTHOIVOS iai. 1 as in L prcc?Vig, prai-t?ie-ah'-ee98. H (( vacms, mh-the-ai'-eess. uaU i( BRnti^itais, mn -fe-fpraTi' -eess. vny, (t Tarnpvny, pal i-raTi-girah '-f. uei, i( averigwtfts, n^- mi-r^-gwai-eeM, twy, u bw^y, hwai-i. DE TOEI^OS^S SPANISH GRAMMAR LESSOISr I. REGULAR YERBS.— First Conjugation, Eabl-ax, | To speak. INDICATIVE PEESENT. Yo habl-0. I speak. Tti habl-as. Thou speakest. El or ella habl-a. He or she speaks. Usted (Y.) habl-a. You speak. Nosotros, or ) , , , Nosotras, [taW-amos. "We speak. Yosotros, or ) ,, . Yosotras, [ ^^^^■^^^• You speak. Ellos, or ellas, habl-an. They speak. Ustedes (Yds.) habl-an. You speak. Si (adverb). Yes. No " No, or not Sefior. Sir. COMPO 3ITI0N. iHablaV.? Do you speak ? Si, aenor, yo hablo. Yes, sir, I speak. i Hablan Yds. ? 1 Do you soeak ? LESSON I, No, senor, ellas hablan. ^ Hablais vosotras ? No, senor, ellos hablan. I Habla elk ? No, senor, ella no habla. i Hablas tu ? No, senor, ^1 habla. i Habla V. ? Si, senor, hablo. I Hablan ellas ? No, senor, no hablan. 6 Hablamos nosotros ? Si, senor, hablamos. I Hablais vosotras ? Nosotras no hablamos. No, sir, they speak. Do you speak ? No, sir, they speak. Does she speak ? No, sir, she does not speak. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, he speaks. Do you speak ? Yes, sir, I speak. Do they speak ? No, sir, they do not speak. Do we speak ? Yes, sir, we speak. Do you speak ? We do not speak. EXPLANATION. 1. Regular Veebs. — All the verbs of the Spanish language have their endings, in the infinitive mood, either in ar, er, or ir; hence their classification in three conjugations: 1st, those ending in ar; 2d, those ending in er; and 3d, in ir; as, habl-ar, aprend-er^ escrib-ir. 2. Roots. — The letters before the terminations «r, er, iV, in the preceding verbs, are hahl^ aprend, escrlb, and are called the roots. 3. Terminations. — All regular verbs of the^r^f conjugation vary the endings in their respective tenses, so as to correspond with those of the A^erb hahl-ar; all those of the second conjuga- tion correspond to the terminations of ap)'e7id-er ; and all those of the third correspond to escrib-ir. Consequently, when the student has learned how to conju- gate one of the regular verbs of each conjugation, lie can con* jugate all the regular verbs of the Spanish language (about 8,000). For this reason we recommend the scholars to devote |;beir attention, in the Jirst place, to committing to memory the different moods and tenses of these three model verbs. They will be found complete at the end of the book. The terminations of the verbs being diffiirent for each per- son, as well in the plural as in the singular number, the nomina- tive pronouns are ordinarily dispensed with, and are only used LESSON I. 3 i to give emphasis ; except the pronoun ZTsted^ which must always be expressed. — Usted, meaning You, is a contraction from vtcestra merced. Your Honor ; and, being a title, its omis- sion would be considered impolite. 4. You. — In addressing an individual in Spanish, the third person is used with the pronoun Usted: as, Usted hahla, you speak ; the second person is employed only in speaking to rela- tives or intimate friends. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Hablan ellas? Si, sefior, ellas hablan. 2. I Hablais vosotros ? No, sefior ; ellos hablan. 3. I Hablamos nosotras ? NTo, sefior ; ella habla. 4. I Hablais vosotros ? No, sefior ; ^1 habla. 5. I Habla ella ? Si, sefior, habla. 6. 2 Habla 61? No, sefior, no habla. 7. ^Hablas tii? Si, sefior, yo hablo. 8. ^Hablais vosotras? Si, sefior, nosotras hablamos. 9. I Hablo yo ? Si, sefior, Y. habla. 10. ^ Habla 61? No, sefior, no habla. 11. ^No hablan ellos? Si, sefior, ellos hablan. 12. I Habla Y . ? No, sefior, yo no hablo. 13. ^No habla Y.? No, sefior, yo no hablo. 14. ^No hablan ellas? Si, sefior, hablan. 15. I No hablais vosotras ? No, sefior, nosotras no hablamos. EXCERCISE. 1. Do you speak? I speak. 2. Do they speak ? Yes, sir, they speak. 3. Dost thou speak? No, sir, he speaks. 4. Do you speak ? No, sir, we do not speak. 5. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, I do not speak. 6. Does he not speak ? Yes, sir, he speaks. v. Do you not speak ? No, sir, we do not speak. 8. Does she not speak ? No, sir, she does not speak. 9. Do we not speak ? Yes, sir, we speak. 10. Do they {fern.) not speak? No, sir, they {fern.) do not speak. 11. Do we {fern.) not speak? Yes, sir, we {fern.) speak. 12. Do you speak? No, sir, I do not speak; they {fem.) speak. LESSON II, LESSON II. MASOTTLnfE NOrNS. FEMININE NOUNS. Sefior (Sr.). Oaballero. Sefiorito. Don. (Dn.jOr Sir, Mr., or Gentleman, Young geni D.). Mr., Esq. Emanuel. Lord. Sir. ieman. Sefiora (Sra.). Madam, or Mrs. Lady, or My Lady. Sefiorita (Srita). Miss, or younglady. Dofia (Da.) Mrs. Manuel. Espafiol. Ingl6s. Frances. Spanish. English. French. Luisa. Louisa. Aleman. German. COMPO 3ITI0N. Sefiorita, ^ habla Y. espanol ? Sf, senor, bablo espanol. Luisa, ^ hablas frances 1 No, senor, no hablo frances. 6 Hablan Vds. ingl6s ? Hablamos ingles. l Hablan alios, 6 ellas, frances ? Sefiora, i habla V. espanol ? Don Manuel, ^ habla V. aleraan? Caballero, i habla V. espanol ? Sefiorita Luisa, i habla V. frances ? Do you speak Spanish, Miss ? Yes, sir, I speak Spanish. Louisa, dost thou speak French ? No, sir, I do not speak French. Do you speak English ? We speak English. Do they speak French ? Madam, do you speak Spanish ? Mr. Emanuel, do you speak German ? Sir, do you speak Spanish ? Miss Louisa, do you speak French? EXPLANATION. B. SeS^or. — ^This word, used alone, i. e., in the vocative case, implies inferiority on the part of the speaker, and answers to the word Xorc? in English. It is used in addressing God, or the King ; or by servants when speaking to their masters. With an equal, the proper term is caballero, gentleman ; never- theless, Sefior may also be used among equals : in the affirma- tive, Si, sefior, or in the negative, no, sefior, in which cases it means sir ; or together with the name of the person ; as, Sefior Kemp, which means Mr. Kemp. Sefiora, Sefiorita. — In addressing ladies, the word Sefiora, Madam, and Sefiorita, Young Lady, or Miss, mny bo used LESSON II. 6 alone; as, Senora^ or Senmnta, ^hahla V. espanolf Madam, or Young Lady, or Miss, do you speak Spanish ? Senorito, like Senoi\ implies inferiority on the part of the speaker, for which reason it is seldom used, except by servants. 6. Don, Mr., applies to gentlemen, and Dona^ Mrs., to la- dies. These terms are only used in conjunction with the Christ- ian names ; as, Don Manuel^ Dona Luisa^ and, still more re- spectfully, Senor Don Manuel^ Senora Dona Duisa. This title, conferred, in old times, only upon members of noble families, is now used in addressing all persons, except those of very humble station, and is written in abbreviation thus, Dn., Da. 7. The negative no^ is always placed immediately before the verb. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Habla y. espafiol? Hablo espafiol. 2. Luisa, ^hablas frances? Hablo frances. 3. I Habla Manuel ingles ? Habla ingles. 4. Caballero, ^ habla V. aleman? Si, sefior, hablo aleman. 5. I Hablan Vds. frances ? Hablamos frances. 6. I Hablan eUos ingI6s? No, sefior, no hablan ingles, 7. I Hablan eUas espafiol ? No, sefior, no hablan espafiol. 8. ^ Habla Luisa frances? No, sefior, no habla frances; ella habla espafiol. 9. I No habla Manuel aleman ? No, sefior, no habla aleman ; 61 Labia ingles. 10. I Habla Y. espafiol ? No, sefior, no hablo espafiol. H. ^ Habla Manuel espafiol ? Si, sefior, 61 habla espafiol. 12. Don Manuel, i habla Y. frances ? No, sefior, no hablo frances. 13. Sefiora Da. Luisa, ^ habla Y. espafiol? No, sefior ; hablo ingles. 14. Sefiorita Da. Luisa, ^ habla Y. frances? Yo hablo frances. i5. Caballero, i habla Y. aleman ? No, sefiorita, hablo espafiol. EXERCISE. 1. Do they speak French? They speak French. 2. Do you speak English ? "We speak English. 3. Do they speak Spanish ? No, madam, they do not speak Spanish. 4. Sir, do you speak German ? Yes, madam, I speak Gennan. 5. Does Emanuel speak French? No, sir; he speaks English. 6 LESSON III. 6. Do you speak Spanish ? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish. 7. Does not Louisa speak German ? No, sir, she does not speak Ger- man ; she speaks French. 8. Emanuel, dost thou speak EngUsh ? I speak English. 9. Does Louisa speak Spanish ? Yes, sir, she speaks Spanish. 10. Do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak English. 11. Sir, do you speak French? No, sir. 12. Miss Louisa, do you speak Spanish ? Yes, madam. 13. (Don) Emanuel, do you speak English? Yes, sir, I speak Eng- lish. 14. Do we speak Spanish? We do not speak Spanish; we speak French. LESSON III Eatudi-Qi. To study. Estudi-o. I study. Estudi-as. Thou studiest. Estudi-a. lie studies. Estudi-amcs. We study. Estudi-aia. You study. Estudi-an. They study. El {masc. sing.),^ / . The. Y or 6. (i ' ^.C .)M**-f*'^ z . And. Qu6 {interrogative pronoun). What or which. Pero, sino.^, c But. Bien {adverl). WeU. Mai " Badly. ( ADJECTIVES. Espanol. Spaniard. Ingles. Englishman. Frances. Frenchman. Aleman. German. Americano. American. MASCULINE NOUNS. FEMININE NOUNS. aXv Alejandro. Alexander. I Margarita. Margaret. LESSON m, COMPOSITION. I Estudia V. espanol ? No, senor, el Frances estudia espanol ; pero yo estudio ingles. i Qu6 estudia el Americano ? Estudia espanol y frances. Alejandro, ^ estudias frances y aleman ? No, senor, estudio espanol e ingles. Manuel no estudia sino frances. I Qu6 hablan ellos sino espanol ? I Habla bien ingles el Espanol ? No, senor, el habla el ingles mal, pero habla bien el espanol. Do you study Spanish ? No, sir, the Frenchman studies Spanish ; but I study English. What does the American study ? He studies Spanish and French. Alexander, do you study French and German ? No, sir, I study Spanish and English. Emanuel studies but (only) French. What do they speak but Spanish ? Does the Spaniard speak English well ? No, sir, he speaks English badly, but speaks Spanish well. EXPLANATION. 8. Y. — The conjunction y is changed into ^ when the fol- lowing word begins with i or A^; as, espanol 'e ingles^ Spanish and English ; algodon 'e hilo^ cotton and thread. 9. Que, interrogative pronoun, is written with an accent, to distinguish it from que, relative pronoun, or conjunction. 10. Sino. — When we translate hut into Spanish, we must first ascertain its meaning; because this conjunction is used in English to express many very different things. In Spanish it is translated sino, when it is used in antithesis, that is, when it means except; and also after an interrogation, or a negation. The verb is not repeated with this conjunction ; as, £l no habla sino ingles. He speaks but (only) English. ^ Que habla sino espanol ? What (else) does he speak but Spanish ? 11. Pero is used when it is not preceded by a negative, and the verb is repeated ; as, hahlo espanol, pero no hablo frances. I speak Spanish, but do not speak French. N. B. — We will see hereafter that but, according to its dif- ferent meanings in English, must bo translated by different words in Spanish. 12. We have again introduced the words espanol, ingVes, frances, and aleman into this lesson, because, while they were given before as substantives, they are now employed as adjec- tives. The pupil will observe that, in Spanish, as in English, some words are, at different times, different parts of speech ; as, 8 LESSON III. El Espanol habla Men frances. The Spaniard speaks French well. Here the word Espanol is used as an adjective, meaning Spaniard-^ and the word frances as a substantive, meaning the French language \ hien is employed as an ad- verb, meaning well, and it will appear hereafter as a substan- tive, meaning good. Consequently, the learner, before trans' lating a word, must first ascertain the part of speech to whict it belongs. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. J Habla espafiol Margarita? Margarita no habla espailol, pero habla ingles. 2. I Habla V. espailol ? No, seflor, hablo frances y aleman. 3. Alejandro, i hablas ingles ? Si, sefior, hablo ingles. 4. I Hablan Vds. espailol ? Ilablamos espailol 6 ingles. . 5. I Qu6 hablan ellos ? Hablan aleman. 6. Oaballero, i estudia V. espafiol ? Si, sefior, estudio espafiol 6 in- gles. 7. I Qu6 estudia el Aleman ? Estudia espafiol. 8. jEstudian Vds. espafiol? Estudiamos frances y aleman. 9. I Habla bien Luisa el ingl6s ? Habla bien espafiol 6 ingles. 10. ^ Habla bien Manuel el aleman? No, sefior, habla mal el aleman, pero habla bien el frances. 11. ^ Habla bien ingles el Americano? Habla bien ingles, pero habla mal el espafiol. 12. Sefiora, j estudia V. frances? No, sefior, estudio espafiol. 13. ^ Que estudia Alejandro ? El no estudia sino frances. 14. I Qu6 hablan ellos sino espafiol ? EUos hablan frances. EXERCISE. 1. Do you study German? We study French and Spanish. 2. Does Alexander speak Spanish ? Alexander does not speak Span- ish, but he speaks English. 3. Margaret, do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak German and Spanish. 4. ^Vhat do they speak ? They speak Spanish and German, but do not speak French. 6. Do you speak Spanish? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish, but I speak English. 6. Does Louisa speak French well? She speaks French badly, but speaks German well. LESSON" IV 9 7. "What do you study? We study Spanish, and Alexander studies French. 8. What does the German study ? He studies Spanish. 9. Does he study well ? No, madam, he studies badly. - 10. Do you speak Spanish, madam? JSTo, sir, I do not speak Spanish, but I speak English and German. 11. Does the Frenchman speak English well? No, madam, he speaks English badly, but the Spaniard speaks English well. 12. What does the German study ? He studies English, and the Eng- lishman studies German. 13. What does Alexander study? He studies French only. ^ 14. What do they speak but Spanish ? What else do they speak but Spanish ' y ]r They speak French. LESSON IV. Cora'pT-2X To buy. Compr-o. I buy. Oompr-as. Thou buyest. Compr-a. He buys. Compr-amos. We bay. Compr-ais. You buy. Compr-an. They buy. Busc-an To look Tor, to seek. A. To. De. Of, or from. Al. To the. Del. Of the, or jfrom the. Tin irriasc, sing.). A, or an. Libro. Book. Cuaderno. Copy-book. Papel.; Paper. Madera. Wood. CabaJIo. Horse. Tintero. Inkstand. COMPO SITION. i Qud compra Y. ? What do you buy ? Compro un libro. I buy a book. 10 LESSON IV I Compran Vds. papel ? ^No, senor, no compramos papel, compramos un cuademo. Busco al Americano. ^1 busca el libro. El caballo del Frances. El tintero de madera. Do you buy paper ? No, sir, we do not buy paper, we buy a copy-book. I look for the American. He looks for the book. The Frenchman's horse. The wooden inkstand. EXPLANATION. 13. A. — The preposition d, to. Active verbs govern their objectives with the aid of the preposition d, if that objective be a person ; as, JBusco al Americano^ I look for the American ; Busco el papel, I look for the paper. 14. De. — The preposition de, of, ov from, is used to ex- press possession, being always placed before the possessor; as, ^l caballo del Frances: The Frenchman's horse. It is also used to denote the material of which any thing consists, or is made ; as, El tintero de madera, The wooden inkstand. 15. El. — The article el, the, is used to determine a noun masculine singular ; as, el libro, the book. N", B. — When the article el comes after the preposition d (to), or de (of, or from), the e is suppressed, and the two words compounded into one ; thus, al, del, instead of d el, de eL 16. Un. — Th« indefinite pronoun un is used before mascu- line nouns ; as, un ingles, an Englishman ; un caballo, a horse. N. B. — Uho is only used as a numeral adjective. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. jQu6 compra el Frances? Compra el caballo del Ingl6a 2. I Qu6 comprais vosotras ? Compramos un cuademo. 3. I Qu6 compra Y. ? Compro un libro. 4. I Compran Yds. un cuademo ? No, sefior, compramos un tintero de madera. 6. I Qu6 buscas tti ? Busco un libro espaflol. 6. I Qu6 buscais vosotros ? Nosotros buscamos un tintero. 7. ^Qu6 buscan ellas? Buscan el papel. 8. Alejandro, j buscas el papel? No, sefior, busco el cuademo. 9. ^Estudia Margarita ingl6s? No, sefior, estudia francos. LESSON IV. 11 10. I Qu6 estudia cl Americano ? Estudia espatiol. 11. gEstudian Vds. frances? No, sefior, estudiamos ingl^a. 12. ^Qu6 estudia ella? Estudia aleman. 13. ^Que compra V. ? Corapro el caballo del Espafiol. 14. gQu6 compran ellos? Compran un tintero de madera. 15. ^Buscais vosotros al Aleman? No, seiior, buscamos al Frances. 16. ^Ilablais vosotros aleman? Si, senor, hablamos aleman. IT. ^Hablan ellas espafiol? No, senor, hablan frances. 18. ^Que estudia V. ? Estudio ingles y espafiol. 19. ^Compra ella un libro? Si, sefior, compra un libro. 20. gBusca 61 al Frances? No, sefior, busca al Aleman. 21. ^ Que habla el Americano ? Habla espafiol. 22. Manuel i qu6 estudias tti ? Estudio aleman. 23. I Que compran ellos ? Compran un caballo. 24. I Que buscan Vds. ? Buscamos el libro espafiol. EXERCISE. 1. "What do they look for? They look for an inkstand. 2. What does she look for ? She looks for a book. 3. Do you look for a copy-book? Yes, sir, we (fern.) look for a copy-book. 4. Do they (Jem.) buy a wooden inkstand? Yes, sir, they buy a wooden inkstand. 5. What do you buy ? We buy the Frenchman's horse. 6. Do you buy paper? No, sir, I buy a book. v. Do you buy a copy-book ? Yes, sir, I buy a copy-book. - 8. What does the Frenchman study? He studies German, 9. Do you study Spanish ? No, sir, I study French. 10. What does she study ? She studies English. 11. What do they (fern.) study? They study Spanish. 12. Do you speak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French. 13. Does she speak English ? No, sir, she speaks German. 14. Do you speak German ? No, sir, we (fern.) speak English. 15. Do you look for the Frenchman? Yes, sir, I look for the French- man. 16. Do you look for paper? No, sir, I look for a copy-book. 17. What do they look for? They look for a book. 18. Do you look for the German? Yes, sir, we (fern.) look for the German. 19. Do you speak French? Yes, sir, I speak French. 20. What does Margaret speak ? She speaks English. 12 LESSON V. 21. What do they buy? They buy a wooden inkstand. 22. What dost thou look for? I look for a horse. 23. What do you study ? We {fern.) study Spanish, 24. What do you speak ? I speak English. LESSON V. Necesitar, , ^ Necesit-o. -t/uu/-"^-^^ Necesit-as. Necesit-a. -M- To need, or to be in want o£ I need. Thou needest. He needs. Necesit-amos. Necesit-ais. Necesit-an. Mi. Su. Su {n) de Y., or El {n) de V. We need. You need. They need. My. His, her, its, their. Your. GENDER. El papa. El abogado. El comerciante. El lacre. El polio. El algodon. ..^Eljabon. ,n^ El patiuelo. - (/t« El zapatero. The papa. The lawyer. The merchant. The sealing-wax. The chicken. The cotton. The soap. The handkerchief. The shoemaker. La mamd. La pluma. La tinta. La gramatica. La gallina. La seda. La lavandera. La camisa. COMPOSITION. The mamma. The pen. The ink. The grammar^ , The hen. Q^ ~y^ '^i^ The sUk. ^ ^ The washerwoman. . The shirt, fi^ -o^.f^ux. I Necesita el abogado la pluma ? Sf, senor, necesita la pluma y el tintero. i Qu6 necesita comprar la lavandera ? Necesita comprar jabon. i Necesita cl comerciante mi algodon? Does the lawyer want the pen ? Yes, sir, he wants the pen and the ink- stand. What does the washerwoman want to buy? She wants to buy soap. Does the merchant want my cotton ? LESSON V 13 Necesita comprar el algodon de V. y la seda del Frances. 6 Necesita V. su pafiuelo de algodon ? No, senora, necesito su pafiuelo de seda deV. i Que necesitan Yds. ? Necesitamos un polio y una gallina. He wants to buy your cotton, and the Frenchman's silk. Do you want your cotton handkerchief? No, madam, I want your silk handker- chief. What do you want ? We want a chicken and a hen. EXPLANATION. 1 7. Gender. — In Spanish all nouns are either masculine or feminine ; the neuter gender is only applied to those things so indefinitely used that their gender cannot be discovered. The gender of nouns may be ascertained either by their signification or their termination. Nouns which signify males, or which denote dignities or professions, &c., applicable to men, are masculine; and those which signify females, or professions, &c,, applicable to women, are feminine, without regard to their terminations: so that, hombre, man ; caballero, gentleman ; polio, chicken ; zapatero, shoemaker; ahogado, lawyer, are masculine; and mitjer, wo- man ; senora, lady ; gallina, hen ; lavandera, washerwoman, are feminine. Nounds ending in a, d, or ion, are generally feminine, and those ending in other letters are masculine ; as. 't Papel. Tintero. :^^'Billete. Paper. Inkstand. Billet. Leccion. Lesson. Pluma. Pen. Ciudad. City. N". B, — Una {indefinite article) is used before feminine nouns. To facilitate the pupils in the distinction of gender, the left- hand side, in the vocabulary, is reserved for masculine, the right for feminine nouns, 18. When your is preceded by you, it is sometimes trans- lated by Su ; otherwise, it is generally rendered by el de V., or su de V.': as. V. necesita su carta. / Que necesita el papd de V. ? Necesita su libro de V. You need your letter. What does your father need ? He needs your book. 14 LESSONV. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. jNecesita V. mi gramutica? No, sefior, no necesito sa gram^tica deV. 2. I Necesita ella el pafiuclo de seda? Si, sefior, ella necesita el pafiuelo de seda. 3. I Necesita Y. comprar un libro ? Necesito comprar un cuaderno. 4. ^ Necesitan ellas el lacre ? No, sefior, necesitan el pafiuelo de al- godon. 6. I Que necesita comprar el abogado ? Necesita comprar una pluma. 6. ^Qu6 necesita comprar la lavandera? Necesita comprar jabon. 7. I Busca V. su pafiuelo ? Si, sefior, busco mi pafiuelo. 8. I Busca V. el cuaderno de Manuel ? No, sefior, busco el cuaderno deV. 9. I Habla V. bien el aleraan ? No, sefiorita, hablo mal el aleman. 10. ^Estudian Vds. frances? No, sefior, estudiamos espafiol. 11. ^Compra V. un caballo ingles? Si, sefior, compro un caballo ingl6s. 12. ^ Qu6 compran ellos ? Compran una pluma j tinta, 13. ^Qu6 comprais vosotras? Nosotras compraraos un pafiuelo.de beda. 14. ^Qu6 compra la lavandera? Compra jabon. 15. I Busca V. k mi abogado ? Si, sefior, busco al abogado de V. 16. ^ Compra la lavandera un polio ? Compra una gallina. 17. i Compra jabon el comerciante? No, sefior, el comerciante com- pra algodon. 18. I Buscan ellas el pafiuelo de V. ? Buscan el pafiuelo de V. 19. ^ Necesita V. hablar al abogado? Si, sefiora, necesito hablar al abogado. 20. I Necesita V. comprar un libro ? No, sefior, necesito comprar una pluma y papel. 21. J Necesita V. estudiar ingles? Si, sefior, necesito estndiar ingles. 22. I Qu6 necesitais vosotras ? Necesitamos comprar lacre. 23. ^Necesita V. hablar al Frances? No, sefior, necesito hablar al Aleman. 24. I Qu6 necesita Y. ? Necesito un pafiuelo de algodon. EXERCISE. 1. What do you need ? I need a book and paper. 2. Wbat does she need ? She needs your handkerchief. 3. Do you need a horse ? Yes, sir, I need an English horse. 4. What do you need ? I need soap. LESSON VI. 15 5. Does the American need the Spanish book ? Yes, sir, he needs the Spanish book. 6. Do thej need a lawyer ? Yes, sir, they need a lawyer. 7. Do you buy a silk handkerchief? No, sir, we {fem.) buy a cot- ton handkerchief. 8. Do you look for the Frenchman's horse ? Ko, sir, I look for the Enghshman's horse. 9. Dost thou study German ? No, sir, I study English. 10. "What does the merchant buy ? He buys cotton. 11. What does the washerwoman buy ? She buys a hen and a chickei? 13. Does the lawyer buy a book ? No, sir, he buys paper. 13. Do they {fem,) speak well? No, sir, they speak badly. 14. Do you speak French, sir ? No, sir, I speak English. 15. Do yoH study much {muclio) ? No, sir, we study very Uttle {poco). 16. Do you study fast {aprisa) ? No, sir, I study slowly (despacio). 17. Do you buy cotton from the merchant? No, sir, I buy silk from your brother (hermano). 18. What does your papa need ? He needs the lawyer's book. 19. What are they looking tor ? They are looking for paper. 20. Do you need a copy-book? No, sir, I need a book. 21. Do you study Spanish ? Yes, madam, I study Spanish. 22. Do you need paper and pen ? Yes, sir, I need paper and pen. 23. What do they need ? They need a silk handkerchief, 24. What do you need ? I need an Enghsh horse. A" LESSON VI. Aprend-er, Aprend-o. Aprend-es. Aprend-e. Aprend-emos. Aprend-eis. Aprend-en. To leam. I learn. Thou leamest. He learns. We learn. You leam. They leam. Tender. To sell. 16 r^ /, i^^vO/C LESSON VI. / — Muy. 'yvx.ro -J^ Very. Mucho. Much, a great deal. Poco. /) , / ^^ Little. Aprisa. C^-^ j^ f Quickly. Despacio. cLoa^ ^jdi^ilz- o Slowly. Estudioso. n Holgazan. -Hjl -p^ dA^^^^^ Studious. Idle. Hombre. Mucliacho. Padre. t/ Hijo.-^-^^ Hermano. Man. Boy. Father. Son. Brother, n ^ Mujer. '^^^^ - '^^^^^^oraan. Muchacha. Girl. Madre. Mother. Hija. Daughter. Hermana. Sister. COMPOSITION. ^ Aprende muy aprisa el muchacho ? El muchacho estudioso aprende muy aprisa; pero el muchacho holgazan aprende muy despacio. ^Aprenden ingl6s su padre y su her- mano de V. ? Sf, senor, y mi madre y mi hermana aprenden frances. i Aprende mucho la muchacha ? No, senor, aprende poco. ^Aprenden aprisa su hijo y su hija deV.? No, senor, aprenden despacio. Does the boy learn very fast ? The studious boy learns very fast ; the idle one learns very slowly. but Do your father and brother learn Eng- lish? Yes, sir, and my mother and sister learn French. Does the girl learn much ? No, sir, she learns little. Do your son and daughter learn fast ? No, sir, they learn slowly. EXPLANATION. 19. The teemination of \h^ first person in the present in- dicative is always o in all the verbs of the Spanish language, to whatever conjugation they may belong, except six irregular verbs, as we shall see in future ; so that the only difference be- tween the termination of the second and first conjugations is the changing the a into e in the second and third persons singular, and in all the plural. 20. Muy is generally translated by very or very much ; as mxcy Men, very well ; muy bueno, very good, &c. ; but it can LESSON VI. 17 never qualify a verb nor stand alone in discourse ; as, Does he speak very well ? Yes, very. ^ Habla el 7nuy bien f jSi, mucho. 21. Many masculine nouns ending in o, change this letter into a for the feminine ; as, Hermano. Brother, Hennana. Sister. / Hijo. Son. Hija. Daughter. Muchacho. Boy. Muchacha. Girl. CONYERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Aprende Y. hien elfrances? No, sefior, aprendo muy mal el frances. 2. I Aprenden ellas aprisa ? No, seilor, aprenden despacio. 3. I Aprende mucho el muchacho holgazan ? No, seiior, aprende muy poco. 4. I Aprendeis vosotros aprisa ? Si, seiior, aprisa y bien. 5. g Que vende el hermano de su padre de Y. ? Yende algodon. 6. g Yenden eilas papel ? No, sefior, venden plumas y lacre. 7. I Qu^ vende Margarita ? Yende una gallina. 8. I Yende lacre el comerciante ? No, sefior, vende papel. 9. I Necesita Y. el pafiuelo de su hermana ? No, sefior, necesito el pafiuelo de su hija de Y. 10. ^Busca su mama de Y. el pafiuelo de seda? No, sefior, husca el pafiuelo de algodon. 11. ^Qu6 necesita su hija de Y. ? Necesita hablar al hermano de Y. 12. ^ Necesita la muchacha comprar papel ? No, sefiora, necesita com- prar un cuaderno. 13. g Habla Y. del Frances? No, sefiorita, hablo del Aleman. 14. I Que compra su padre de Y. ? Compra el caballo del hijo del abogado. 15. I Qu6 busca Y. ? Busco un libro y una pluma. 16. I Qu6 busca la muchacha? Busca el jabon de la hermana de Y. 17. g Aprende mucho el muchacho estudioso? Si, sefior, aprende mucho. 18. I Aprende Y. su leccion de frances ? No, sefior, aprendo mi lec- cion de aleman. 19. ^ Habla bien Don Manuel el espafiol? Si, sefior, habla muy bien el espafiol. 20. ^Estudia Y. gramatica inglesa? No, sefior, estudio gramatica francesa. 21. I Compra Y. un tiutero y papel ? No compro sino un tintero. 18 LESSON VI. 22. I Busca V. d mi padre ? Si, sefiorita, busco i su padre de V. 23. I Necesita "V . coraprar un tiutero ? No, sefiora, necesito hablar i mi hermana. 24. ^Necesitamos nosotras aprcnder espafiol? Si, sefior, necesitamos mucho aprender espafiol. EXERCLSK 1. Does your sister learn English ? Yes, sir, she learns English, 2. What does your brother learn ? My brother learns Spanish. 3. Do you learn quickly ? No, sir, we learn very slowly. 4. Does the studious boy learn well ? Yes, sir, he learns very welL 5. What does your brother sell ? He sells cotton and silk. 6. Do you sell paper ? No, sir, I sell sealing wax and ink. 7. Do they (fern.) need a French book ? No, sir, they need a copy- book, a pen, and ink. 8. Do you need the English grammar ? No, sir, I need the Spanish grammar. 9. Do you want to speak to my father ? Yes, sir, I iTant to speak to your father. 10. Do you want to speak to my sister's son ? No, sir, I want to speak to the Frenchman. 11. Does he want to buy a horse ? Yes, sir, he wants to buy a horse. 12. Do you need my book? No, madam, I need youi* wooden ink- stand. 13. Do you look for the merchant? No, sir, I look for your father. 14. Do they look for papa? No, sir, they look for the lawyer. 15. Do you buy a book ? No, sir, we buy a copy-book and paper. 1 6. Do they study English ? Yes, sir, they study English. 17. Do you study German, sir? No, I study Spanish, madam. 18. Do you speak English well ? No, sir, I speak English badly. 19. Does your sister speak French very well? No, sir, she speaks very little French. . :> ^i ; /- < 20. What does your father speak ? 'He speaks but (only) English. 21. Does he not speak German ? No, sir, he does not speak German. 22. Does your daughter speak to your sister ? Yes, sir, she speaks to my sister. 23. Do you learn very quickly ? Yes, sir, I learn very quickly. 24. Do you sell your book ? No, sir, I sell my paper. LESSON VII 19 LESSON Le-Q>v. Ji^uu^e*^^^^^^ Le-o. Le-es. Le-e. Le-emos. Le-eis. Le-en. Comer. . JrU ■- ^^^-^yux^LA^' Beber. 4-CiA^~ 'v-ccU^iJ MASCULINE ADJECTIVES. Good, ^^-uatx-^^-^-vu^ Handsome. ^ Ugly. -^c^yL-^O Little or small. Grande {rn. &/.)• Large. Espafiol. Spanish, also Spaniard. Americano. American. Bueno. Hermoso. Feo. Pequeno. Pan. ^ ^fudv-^ Pescado. ^c>u> Queso. ■tJ-y^"^ Vino. r ,'fc>^ Billete. Bread. Fisb. Cbeese. Wine. Billet or note. VII. To read. I read. Thou readest. He reads. We read. You read. Tbey read. To eat, to dine. To drink. FEMININE ADJECTIVES. Bucna. Good. ^ ^ Hermosa. Handsome. (^^--^^^^^-^Ji-w Fea. Ugly. Pequciia. Little or small. , ^4 Espafiola. Spanish, cu^i/i -.a,**-*^ Americana. American. Carne. Meat. , x/ p ' Lecbe. Milk. ^^^- (^4^c^^, seflor, somos panaderoe. LESSON XI. 37 6. ^Es bueno el libro de sii hermano de V. ? Si, seflor, lo es. 6. ^Son buenos sus zapatos de V. ? No, seflor, son muy raalos. 7. ^Tiene alguno mi sombrero? Si, sefior, alguien lo (le) tiene. 8. I Tiene alguien papel ? No, seflor, ningnno tiene papel. 9. g Tiene V. alguna cosa? No, sefior, no tcngo nada. 10. ^No tiene V. cosa alguna? Si, sefior, tengo alguna cosa. 11. ^Compran pan todos Yds. ? Si, sefior, todos compramos pan. 12. ^D6nde compran Yds. todo su pan? Lo (le) compramos en la panaderia. 13. gSon Yds. panaderos? No, sefior, nosotros somos zapateros. 14. ^ Tiene alguien mi sombrero bueno? Si, sefior, alguien le (lo) tiene. 15. ^No compra Y. algo? Si, sefior, compro alguna cosa. 16. ^Escribe Y. algo? No, sefior, no Cscribo nada. 17. t Necesita Y. todo el papel ? Si, sefior, lo (le) neccsito todo. 18. ^Necesita Y. todas las plumas? Si, sefior, las necesito todas. 19. gEs Y. sastre? Si, sefior, yo soy sastre. 20. ^Dondc tiene Y. su sastreria? La tengo en Nueva York. 21. gEs su padre de Y. librero? Si, sefior, lo es. 22. ^ Yende muclios libros? Si, sefior, vende muchos. 23. I Donde tiene 61 su libreria ? La tiene en Francia. 24. ^ Tiene Y. una panaderia? No, sefior, tengo una carniceria. 25. I Habla Y. a alguien ? No, sefior, no hablo a nadie. EXERCISE. 1. Are you an Englishman? No, sir, I am an American. 2. Are you good boys ? Yes, sir, we are very good boys. 3. Is Louisa a good girl ? Yes, sir, she is a very good girl. 4. Art thou a Frenchman ? No, sir, I am a German. 5. Is yours a good book ? Yes, sir, mine is a very good one. 6. Are they (/em.) studious ? Yes, sir, they are very studious. 7. Have you anything ? No, sir, I have nothing. 8. Have you nothing ? Yes, sir, I have something. 9. Has anybody a good grammar ? Yes, sir, the Frenchman has one. 10. Who speaks French ? The American speaks French. j 11. Do you write an exercise? Yes, sir, I write an exercise. M 12. Where do you buy all your books ? I buy them in the bookstore. 13. Are you a bookseller? No, sir, I am a baker. 14. Where have you your bakery ? I have it in New York. 15. Where do you buy your coats ? In the tailor's shop. 16. Have you all of your books ? Yes, sir, I have all. 38 LE660X XII. 17. Do yon all reside in the United States ? Yes, sir, we reside in the United States. 18. Have you any bread ? No, sir, I have none. 19. Do you speak to anybody ? Yes, sir, I speak to the Americans. 20. Do you buy anything ? No, sir, I buy nothing. 21. Are you a baker? No, sir, T am a tailor. 22. Are they French ? No, sir, they are English. 23. Art thou a Spaniard ? No, sir, I am an American, 24. Who is studious ? Emanuel is very studious. LESSON XII Jlaber. To have. He. t^^ Has. A>^'^ Catorce. JfeaA.-"t<»-t-''— tA^o Quince. ■i'^JU2^\A,^'W^p*^ Diez y seis. Diez y siete. Diez y ocho. Diez y nueve. . ^ Veinte. '^-^'- --^^^ "ttX-i Veinte y imo, etc Treinta. /(/t/rimero and tercero lose the tinal letter when they immediately precede their noun, or arc separ- ated from it only by an adjective. We may observe here, that tercero is by some written entire; the contracted form, how- ever, is much to be preferred ; as, El tcrccr tomo. | The third volume. 62. The ordinals are not so frequently used in Spanish as in English ; and, except primero^ first, their place is generally supplied by the cardinal numbers ; as, for instance, in speaking of the days of the month, which are expressed by cl dos, tres, ciiatro^ etc.^ the second, third, fourth, &c. The following are the principal cases in whir*.h the ordinals are employed: 1st with the names of sovereigns, popes, &c. ; 2d, in the enum eration of books, chapters, lessons, &c., and a few others but, even in tliese cases, after decimo, tenth, they are, by rea- son of their great length, generally replaced by the numerals as. Carlos Quinto. Pio Nono. Capftulo d6cimo. Calle Veinte y trcs. Luis Catorce. Charles the Fifth. Pius the Ninth. Chapter tenth. Twenty-third street. Louis the Fourteenth. N. B. — The definite article is not required in the above ex- amples. COXTERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Pronuncia V. bien el ingl6s? No, sefior, lo pronuncio maL 2. I Es V. cantor ? No, sefior, pero toco. 8. {Qu6 toca v.? Toco el violin. LESSOKXV. 63 4. gCanta bien su hermana de Y. ? No, seCor, ella canta mal; pero toca bien el piano. 5. I Que lecoion estudia V. ? Estudio la cuarta. 6. ^En qu6 calle vive su padre de V. ? Vive en la calle Catorce. 7. I Que tomos ha leido V. ? He leido el primero, segundo, tercero y cuarto. 8. I Cuantos toraos tiene la obra? Tiene seis. 9. I Que libro lee V. ? • Leo la historia de Carlos Quinto. 10. I Ha leido Y. la historia de Enrique Octavo de Inglaterra ? Si, sefior, la he leido. 11. ^ Que tomo Ice su hermana de Y. ? Leo el noveno. 12. I Cuanto dinero ha recibido Y. hoy ? He recibido cincuenta y un pesos. 13. ^Cuantos hermanos tiene Y.? Tengo cinco. 14. ^Cuantos afios tiene su hermana de Y.? Tiene quince. 15. I Cuanto ticmpo ha vivido Y. en Pai'is ? He vivido seis afios. 16. ^Que niimero tiene su casa? El doscientos seis (206). 17. gQue dia de la semana es hoy? Hoy cs miercoles. 18. ^ Que hora tiene Y. ? Las diez. 19. ^ Cuantos dias tiene una scmana? Tiene siete. 20. Ocho y docc i cuantos son ? Son veinte. 21. I Cuantos afios tiene su papa de Y. ? Tiene sesenta. 22. I Cuantos dias tiene el afio ? Tiene trescientos sesenta y cinco (365). 23. I Como ha leido Y. ? He leido despacio. 24. I Ha llevado Y. mi piano al pianista ? Si, sefior, lo he Uevado. 25. I Ha cantado Y. muclio hoy ? Hoy ho cantado poco. 26. ^ Cuando ha vcndido Y. su caballo ? Lo he vendido hoy. EXERCISE. 1. "What book have you? A music-book. 2. How many volumes has it? Three. 3. Which volume have you read ? The first. 4. Has your father not read the second volume ? No, sir ; but my cousin has read it. 5. What arc you reading, miss? I am reading the History of Charles the Fifth. 6. Who has sold your sister's History of England? She has sold it. 7. Who has bought the violin? The pianist. 8. Where does he live ? In Seventeenth street. 9. In what street does the butcher live ? In Sixth avenue. 10. Have you bought good meat in the butcher's shop ? The most (which) I have bought is very bad. 54 LESSON ZVI. 11. What things have you sent to the tailor? I have sent stockings, vests, and pocket-handkercliiefs. 12. What day of the week is to-day? Monday. 13. Is Monday the first day of the week? No, sir, it Ls the second; Sunday is the first. 14. How much money does tlic merchant require ? He requires $ 1,500. 15. How much money do you wish to send to your friend? I wiih to, send my friend $50. 16. Does he need much money? Yes, madam, he is very poor. 17. How many letters have your brothers written to Emanuel? Very fewj^ -"TS. How do your sisters pronounce Spanish ? They pronounce it well when tliey read, but not when they speak. 19. When do they write their exercises? When they have studied their lessons. 20. And you, when do you write yours? When my brothers write theirs. 21. How do the poor buy? The poor buy dear, and the rich buy cheap. ^,^^22. Has your father sold his old horse? He has sold it. 23. Have you read the History of Louis X VI. ? I have read volumes first, second, and third. LESSON XVI. Fiit&T CONJUGATION — Preterit Definite. EalU, Habl-aste. Habl-6. I spoke. Thou spokest. He spoke. Habl-dmos. Habl-asteis. Habl-aron. We spoke. You spoke. They spoke. SECOND CO NVUOATION. Aprend-i, Aprend-iste. Aprend-io. I learned. Thou learn edst He learned. Aprend-imos. Aprend-isteis. Aprend-ieron. We learned. You learned. They learned. LESSON" XVI. 55 Escrib-i. Escrib-iste. Escrib-io. Escrib-imos. Escrib-isteis. Escrib-ieron. Pasar. Aycr. Anocbe. Antes de ayer, or anteayer. El alio pasado. El mes pasado. La semana pasada. Ante {prep.). Ante todas cosas. Ante todo. Antes («^.). / ^ n ' 4^ Delantc (a^^.).**^^^'^ • Despues (ac?.)» C^^c\.<^ -^Uvu.'t/^ Mas {ad^. ^ ^ Menos (ac?.)./>v*^^' Que {conj.). THIRD CONJUGATION. I wrote. Thou wrote. He wrote. TVe wrote. You wrote. They wrote. To pass, to spend {in relation to time). Yesterday. Last night. The day before yesterday. Last year. Last month. Last week. Eefore, in the presence of. Before all things. Above all. Before {refers to time). Before {refers to place). Afterwards, after. More. Less, fewer. That, than. COMPOSITION. I Hablo V. con mi padre ? Si, boaor, hable con el ^ntes dc ayer. ^ Han aprendido Yds. su leccion ? Si, seiioi-, la hemos aprendido hoy. <: Cuando ..^cribio V. a su hermana ? Escribi la semana pasada a mi hermana. I Ha recibido V. sus periodicos del mes pasado ? Sf, scnor, los he recibido hoy. 6 Cuando vendio V. su caballo ? Lo vendi el ano pasado. ^ Estudia Y. antes despues de comer ? Estudio &ntes de comer. i Habl6 V. mucho ante el juez ? Did you speak with my father ? Yes, sir, I spoke with him the day be- fore yesterday. Have you learned your lesson ? Yes, sir, we have learned it to-day. When did you write to your sister ? I wrote to my sister last week. Have you received your newspapers of last month (last month's newspapers)?, Yes, sir, I have received them to-day. When did you sell your horse ? I sold it last year. Do you study before or after dining (or dinner) ? I study before dining. Did you speak much before the judge f 66 LESSON XVI. No, senor, habl6 muy poco. I Que libro tiene V. delantc ? Tcngo la gramatica espanola. j Escribio V. sus cartas ? Si, sefior, las escribi el domingo pasa- do. I Come V. m6no8 que yo ? Ko, senor, como mas que V. I Ha visto V. a su amigo ? Si, senor, lo vi ayer. gDonde lo vio V.? Lo vi delante dc la iglesia. i Hablo V. con 6\ ? Si, senor ; pero muy poco. I Ha comido V. ? Si, sciiora, he comido pan y lie bebido vino. i Ha Icido V. y estudiado sus ejercicios ? Si, seiior, los he leido y estudiado. I Ha escrito V. h su padre ? Si, sefior, escribi ayer. i Cuando ha recibido V. las cartas de el? Las he recibido hoy. I Ha enviado V. mis cartas despues de las suyas ? Las he enviado Antes. i Hablo V. ante el rey ? No, seiior, hable ante el juez. i CuAnto tiempo ? No, sir, I spoke very little. What book have you before you ? I have the Spanish grammar. Did you write your letters ? Yes, sir, I wrote them last Sunday. Do you eat less than I ? No, sir, I eat more than you. Have you seen your friend ? Yes, sir, I saw him yesterday. Where did you see him ? I saw him before (in front of) the church. Did you speak with him ? Yes, sir ; but very little. Have you dined ? Yes, sir, I have eaten bread and drunk wine. Have you read and studied your exer- cises ? Yes, sir, I have read and studied them. Have you written to your father ? Yes, sir, I wrote yesterday. When have you received the letters from him ? I have received them to-day. Have you sent my letters after yours ? I (have) sent them before. Bid you speak before the king ? No, sir, I spoke before the judge. How Ions ? EXPLANATION. 63. The Preterite Definite refers to a time past, and generally specitied in the sentence, and denotes the thing or Action past in such a manner that nothing remains of that time in which it was done; as. Escribi & mi padre en el afio 1804. Aprendi el francos el afio pasado. I wrote to my father in the year 1864. I learned French last year. In colloquial language, the preterite indefinite (which has been treated of in Lesson xii.), is sometimes, though incorrect' LESSON XVI. 57 ly, substituted for the preterite definite. The following example will show the impropriety of such a substitution : He eserito k mi padre ayer. | I have written to my father yesterday. Nothing remains of yesterday ; it is time past, and has no connection with the present ; and, as it has been already seen that the preterite indefinite conveys an allusion to the pi'esent time, the incorrectness of tbe foregoing example is at once apparent. We may, however, say with propriety : Escribi la carta a las tres, a las cua- I I wrote the letter at three o'clock, at tro, etc. I four o'clock, &c. for the time specified is completely past. 64. Ante. — This preposition means be/ore, or in the pres- ence of', as, Hablo ante el juez. j He spoke before the judge. And it sometimes denotes priority, antecedence, &c. ; as, Ante todas cosas. | Before all things. 65. Mas, fnoi*e ; Meitos, less, fewer. — These two adverbs are used to form the comparative degree of several adjectives, which last they always precede in the sentence ; as, El vino es mas caro que la cerveza. I Wine is dearer than beer. Yo soy mas rico que V. | I am richer than you. When used to express some quality or circumstance re- specting verbs, their usual place in the sentence is immediate- ly after these last ; as, Yo escribo mas. I I write more. Tu hablas menos. \ Thou speakest less. It is needless to observe here, that mas and menos are then> selves the comparatives of mucho and poco, respectively. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. I Cndndo habl6 V. con el abogado ? Habl6 con 61 anteayer. 2. jHa hablado V. con mi hermana? No, senor, hable ayer con su atnigo de V. 3. ^Ha hablado V. con cl pianisfca ? Si, senor, le habl6 ayer. 68 LESSON XVI. 4. J Ha aprendido V. su leccion? No, scflor; pero he escrito el ejcrcicio. 5. I llan aprendido ellos sus lecciones de frances ? Si, seflor, ban aprendido las de frances y de espanol. , G. I Cuando aprendi6 su herinana d tocar el piano ? Aprendi6 el afio pasado. 7. I Ha leido Y. la historia de los Estados Unidos ? He leido el tomo priniero y el segundo. 8. ^Ha leido V. la carta de su hermana y la de su amiga? He leido la de mi hennana; pero no la de mi amiga. 9. I Qu6 ha leido V. hoy ? He leido los ejercicios de la semana pasada. 10. i Cuando compr6 V. su caballo ? Lo corapr6 el mes pasado. 11. jDonde haldo V. con mi padre? Delante de su casa de V. 12. iLcy6 V. la carta de su padre antes que la de su hermano? No, sellor, la lei despucs. 13. ^Cuando rcsidio V. en Paris? Residi fintes que V. 14. I Cudntos afios tiene su hermana ? Tiene veinte. 15. jCuantos pesos pago V. el mes pasado al comerciante? Quinien- tos. 16. I Ha llevado V. mis zapatos al zapatero? Si, sefior, los llcv6 ayer. 17. ^Cudndo ha recibido V. su dinero? Lo recibi anteayer. 18. I Ha escrito V. despues quo escribi6 mi padre? No, sefior, cscribi dntes. 19. ^Escribi6 V. su carta despues que recibio la de su hermano? SI, sefior, la cscribi mucho despues. 20. ilia hablado V. con la madre dntes que con la hija? No, sclior, habl6 dntcs con la hija que con la madre. 21. ^Estudio V. su leccion de ayer? No, sefior, estudi^ la de dntes de ayer ; pero no he estudiado la de ayer ni la de hoy. 22. I ITabl6 V. ante el jucz ? Si, sefior, habl6 ante cl juez y ante cl rey. 23. I Habla V. mas que yo ? No, sefior, hablo m6nos ; pero cscribo mas. EXERCISE. 1. Did you speak more yesterday than to-day? I spoke less; but I read more. 2. IIow many newspapers did your father read yesterday ? Very few. 8. How old is your sister ? She is nineteen. 4. Who took the vest to the tailor last year? The baker took it. 6. How mucb did the tailor pay to the baker afterwards? $59.10. 6. Did he receive the vest after or before the coat ? Ho received ii after. LESSON XVII. 59 7. Did yonr sisters sing yesterday ? Yes, sir, they sang and played. 8. What did they sing ? They sang S[)anish songs and played on tho piano. 9. Have you (j^lural) played to-day ? No, madara, we have not played ; but we have written our French exercises. 10. How many words have your brotlicrs written in Spanish to-day? Fewer than last Thursday. 11. Do they speak more English than Spanish? Ko, madam, they speak more Spanish. 12. What have the singers received from Paris ? They have received some good songs and French music. 13. Have the singers (fern,) enough Spanish music? Yes, sir, they have received some to-day. 14. Did they sing well last month? Not very well. 15. Who sang in your house the day before yesterday ? Nobody sang. 16. How long did you reside in Vienna? Five years, six months, and thirteen dnys. 17. How many churches has Paris? Paris has many churches. 18. How did your cousins pronounce their Spanish yesterday? Very well. 19. Are you a musician? Yes, madam. 20. Is your sister a pianist or a singerj or does she play on tlK3 guitar? She sings and plays on the piano. 21. When did you speak before the judge? Tho day before yesterday and last week. 22. Do you sing much with the musicians? I sing a little; but be- fore all things I study my Spanish lessons. r . LESSON XVII Trabajar, viyCLXy-^^&e^Ui^' ^(.^^ Mandar ' Quien, quicnes, A quien, a quicnes. iQu6? Cual, cuales. Cuyo {maac. sing.\ cuya {/em.' sing.). Cuyos {masc. plural)^ cuyas (fern, plural). Varios. Algunas veces. To work. To command, to send. Who. Whom, to whom. What (inter.), who, that, or which.' Which one, which ones. Whose, which, or of whom. Several. Sometimes. , f, Ketrato. Criado. Concicrto. Teatro. Mcrcado. Parque. f ^^jJuan. f.i^'Trabajador. /y jc Ultimo (a). LESSON XVII Portrait. Pantaloons. Servant. Concert. Theatre. Market. Park. John. Workman. Last. Criada. ^ ^ Servant Iglesia.€--^^- Church. Calle.A^^J^i; Street. V\txzai.U^^^^^^ Square, market, y Company. ^V**<4.y^ Compania. ^ Juana. '^^'^t-^i^^t^t/ Jane CL^ COMPOSITION. i Es viejo el caballero d guien V. hablo en el concierto ? No, senor, pero lo es la senora que ha hablado con V. en el teatro. I A qui en busca V. ? Busco a la scnorita d quien V. busca. i Qui6n es el joven que ha hablado con v.? Es un criado del hotel. El rauchacho que lee, y alcual V. man- do trabajar, es mi hermano. La gramatica qite el tiene, y en la cual estudia, es mia. El caballero cuija casa Y. compro es amigo mio. -VXS^'n^L^ El comerciante cxiyo vino V. compro, vende muy barato. El libro en que Iccmos. La senora d quien habl6 cs mi madrc. ^Manda V. bus niuos al Parque Cen- tral ? i A qui6n manda V. tralwyar ? A mis criados. I Juan I I Sciior ! ^ qu6 manda V. ? Quiero la comida. iEn donde trabajan hoy los trabaja. dores ? Trabjyan en la calle. Is the gentleman to whom you spoke at the concert old ? No, sir ; but the lady who spoke to you at the theatre is (so). For whom do you look ? I am looking for the young lady that you look for. Who is the young man that has spoken with you ? He is a servant in the hotel. The boy that reads, and whom you commanded to work is my brother., The grammar which he has, and in which he studies, is mine. The gentleman whose house you bought is my friend. The merchant whose wine you bought sells very cheap. The book in which we read (or which we read in). The lady I spoke to Is my mother. Do you send your children to the Cen- tral Park ? Whom do you command to work ? My servants. John ! Sir ! what do you wish ? I wish my dinner. Where do the workmen work t'Vday? They work in the street LESSON XVII. 61 EXPLANATION. 66. QtiiEN. — The relative pronoun quien refers to persons only, and is always preceded by the preposition d, when gov- erned by a verb ; as, El hombre d quien V. quiere. I The man whom you love. 67. Who, coining immediately after its antecedent, is translated by que ; when it stands alone, or is governed by a preposition, it is rendered by quien ; as, El muchacho que estudia. I The boy who studies. La muchacha con quien hablas. | The girl with whom you speak. 68. CuAL and que relate to persons and things ; as, The boy that reads, and whom you commanded to work, is my brother. The grammar which he has, and in which he studies, is mine. El muchacho qite lee, y al cual V. mando trabajar, es mi hermano. La gramatica que el tiene, y en la cual estudia, es mia. 69. CuYO also refers to persons and things, but agrees with the word by which it is immediately followed ; as, El caballero cuya casa V. compro es amigo mio. El comerciante cuyo vino Y. compro vende muy barato. The gentleman whose house you bought is my friend. The merchant whose wine you bought sells very cheap. This pronoun partakes of the nature, both of the relatives and the possessives. 70. In English the preposition does not always precede the relative pronoun ; but in Spanish it is indispensable to place the preposition before the relative ; as. El lit^ro en que leemos. I The book which we read in (or, in I which we read). 71. The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Span- ish ; so that we cannot say, as in English, the lady I spoke to, but, in full ; as. La senora d quien hable, es mi I The lady to whom I spoke is my madre. | mother. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. £ A qui^n mand6 V. ayer al mercado ? Maiid6 d mi criado Juan. 2. ^Cuul do sus criados trabaja mas? Juan trabaja mas que todos. 3. I Qui6n cs el hombre d qui^n V. busca? El hombre 4 quien busco es trab^ador. 62 LESSON XVII. 4. I Quien es el caballero con quien liablo V. ayer en el concicrtot Es ua Cibcipulo mio. 6. ^ A quien quiere V. hablar ? Quiero hablar a la seflorita que toca cl piano. 6. I Como pasaron Vds. el tiempo en el carapo ? Lo pasamos muy bien en compaflia de nuestros amigos. 7. ^Es frances el comerciante a quien compro V. el caballo ? Si, sefior, es el Frances cuja casa compr6 V. 8. ^Manda (en via) V. sus niflos al Parqno Central? Si, sefior, Ids mando al Parque Central. 9. I Con quien los en via V. ? Con sus primos. 10. ^Que libro quiere V. leer? Quiero leer el de Manuel. 11. ^No quiere V. leer el que yo tengo? No, sefior, quisro leer el de Alejandro. 12. ^ A quien manda V. trabajar ? A mis criados. 13. J Juan! ; Sefior! ^ Que manda V. ? Quiero la comida. 14. ^Canta Y. bien? No, sefior; pero la sefiorita que reside en sa casa de V. canta muy bien. 15. ^Estudia V. mucho? No, sefior, pero trabajo mucbo. 16. ilia estudiado V. hoy su leccion? No, sefior, la estudie ayer; hoy ho escrito los cjercicios. IT. ^Como pronuncia su maestro de V. el espafiol? Lo pronuncia bien ; pero pronuncia muy mal el ingles. 18. ^ Toco y. ayer el piano en casa de sus amigos ? Si, sefior, tocamos y can tamos. 19. ^Qu6 cantaron Vds.? Cantamos canciones espafiolas y la can- cion americana llamada, " The Star Spangled Banner." 20. jCaballeros! ^Quieren Vds. tomar chocolate 6 caf6? Queremos beber vino. 21. I Cuantos dias pas6 V. en el campo ? Pas6 toda una semana. 22. jPorqu6 no pasa V. un mes en el campo con nosotros? Porquo necesito residir en la ciudad. 23. I Cual de sus amigos habla bien espafiol ? El que estudia mucho habla bien. 24. I Cual do sus hermanos estudia mas ? El mas pequefio. 25. I De quien recibe V. cartas ? De mi padre y mis hermanos. 26. I Es de V. el libro en el cual estudia su hermano ? No, sefior, es suyo. 27. iTrabaj6 V. mucho ayer? No, sefior; pero he trabtyado mucho hoy. 28. I Cuando estudia V. sus lecciones ? Las estudio los nii6rcoles j los sdbados. LESSON XVII. 63 EXERCISE. 1. "Whose is the portrait (which) you sent me yesterday ? It is the portrait of my brother who lives in Germany. 2. Which portrait have you sent to Charles? I have sent no portrait to Charles; but I have sent mine to the musician. 8. With whom did you spend last week ? I spent last week with my cousin John. 4. In which city of France does the pianist's brother live ? He lives in the city in which your sister Jane resides. 5. To whom did you send the first volume of your work ? I sent it to Louis. 6. Whom do you order to work ? My servant John. 7. Who is the lady you are looking for ? She is the mother of the singer (fern.) whose piano Charles bought last year. 8. W^ith whom did you send your children to the concert last night? I sent them with a servant. 9. With which servant did you send them ? With one of mine (my own). 10. In which church does Miss Garcia sing ? She sings in Twenty- eighth street church. 11. How did you {plural) pass the time in Philadelphia? Yery well. 12. Did you study many lessons ? We studied very little, and neither read nor wrote our exercises. 13. How much did you write the day before yesterday? I studied a good deal, but wrote little. 14. Which volumes of Robertson's History has your son ? He has re- ceived the first, second, third and fourth. 15. Did you buy any books at the bookstore in Walker street? Yes, madam, I bought the History of Charles V. and some music books. 16. Whom have yon paid with the money I sent you? I have paid the man who worked in my house yesterday. 17. Does your servant work much ? No, sir ; but she reads a great deal. 18. From whom do you receive letters every day ? I receive letters from Henry on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, and from my father on Tuesdays. 19. Who has the boots that I bought in Fourth avenue? John has taken them to his cousin who lives in Philadelphia. 20. Has your servant bought any good meat in the market ? Ho has not bought any to-day. 21. How many songs have you received from Spain ? I have received several from Spain and two from England. 64 LESSON XVIII. 22. Have yon sung any of them ? None ; but my sister sang one or two last night at the concert. 23. Are they very good ? One of them is very good, and my cousin {fern.) sings it very well. 24:. How many pencils does the hatter wish ? He wants twelve pen- cils and three penknives. 25. Does Louisa play much on the piano? No, sir, she is very lazy, and will neither play nor study. 26. The tailor has a handsome vest, very cheap ; will you buy it ? I do not wish to buy a^vest ; but I want pantaloons. 27. Has he any pantaloons ? He has none, he sold them all last week. LESSOR XYIII, Ir, Togo. PEESENT. Voy. I go (or, am gomg). Vas. Thou goest. Va. He, or she, goes. Vamos. We go. Vais. You go. Van. They go. PEETEBIT DEFINITE. Fui. I went. Fuisto. Thou wentcst Fu6. He, or she, went. Fuimos. We Went. Fuisteis. You went. Fueron. They went PEES ENT. Yenir, To come. Vengo. I come (or, am coming). Vienes. Thou com est. Vicne. He, or slie, comes. Vcniraos. Wo come. Venis. You come. Vienen. They come. LESSON XVIII. 65 PEliTEJilT DEFINITE. Vine. I came. Viniste. Thou earnest. Vino He, or she, came. Vinimos. "We came. Yinisteis. You came. Vinieron. Thc7 came. DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS. Singular. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Este. Esta. Esto. This. Ese. Esa. Eso. That. Aquel. Aquella. Aquell d. That (yonder). Plural. Estos. Estas. No neuter. These. Esos. Esas. (( Those. Aqucllos. Aquellas. a Those (yonder). EUo. 1 It. Aqui, aca. Here. Ahi. iCUlll Alii, alld, i There. Porqud. Why. Porque. Because. L4J0S. Far. Cerca. ITcar. Otro. Ambos. Another. Both. Ni uno ni otro (ind. pro.). Neither. Profesor. Professor. Juana. Jane. Discipulo. Pupi I. Discipula. Pupil. Lado. Side. Zapateria. Shoemaker's shop. Jardin. Garden. Manteca. Butter. COMPO SITION. e Y. | He is less rich than you. 88. Mayoe, greater or larger; menok, smaller; mejob, bet- 18 LESSON XX, ter, and peob, worse, are already in the comparative degree, and do not require mas or menos before them ; as, Esta casa es mayor 6 menor que esa. I This house is larger or tmaUcr than ll that one. Este caballo es mejor 6 peor que el |Thi8 horse is better or wone than mine, mio. n 89. Than^ after comparatives coming before numeral ad- jectives, is also generally tran^ted by de in the affirmative, and que in the negative ; as, Tengo mas de cincuenta libros. I I have more than fifty books. No tengo mas que veinte pesos. | I have not more than twenty dollars. 90, Comparison may also take place with relation to nouns, verbs, and adverbs ; but its form is so similar to that laid down for the adjectives that the learner will not require any other explanation than the examples given in the Composition. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. J Sale V. tanto como su hermano? No, sefior, mi hermano sale mas que yo. 2. I Cudndo salimos nosotros ? Nosotros, salimos mny pronto. 8. I Salio su hermano temprano de casa ? No, sefior, salio tarde. 4. jSalieron Vds. pronto del teatro? Si, sefior, salimos muy pronto. 6. I Sale V. presto d la calle ? Si, sefior, salgo muy presto. 6. jSalieron Vds. temprano de la iglesia? Salimos tarde. 7. ^Cudl de estas dos gramaticases mejor? La que V. tiene delante es mejor que la otra. 8. jEs malo este caballo? Es peor que el de V. 9. I Es buena la pluma do su hermano de V. ? Es mejor que la mia y peor que la de V. 10. I Cudnto dinero tiene V. ? Tengo cuarenta pesos. 11. J Cuantos libros tiene su hermana? Tiene tantos como su prima. . 12. gCuiinto tiempo vivi6 V. en Paris? Vivi cuatro alios. 13. J Es su hermano mayor 6 menor que V. ? Es mayor. 14. jQui6n de su familia de V. habla mejor el ingl6s? Mi hermano racnor lo habla mejor que todos. 15. jD6nde lo aprendi6? En L6ndres. 16. J Cudnto tiempo vivi6 alld? Seis afios. 17. j Cudndo vino de alld? Vino el afio pasado. 18. ^Cudl do Vds. dos estudia mas? £1 estudia m6nos que yo; pero aprendo mas. LESSOK XX. 79 19. ^ Cual de sus liermanos de V. es^as prudente? El mayor es muy callado j prudente; pero el menor es'vivo 6 imprudente. 20. I Salieron Vds. del concierto antes que nosotros ? No, sefior, sali- mos despues. 21. I Cuando salio su amigo de Yds. de Nueva York ? Sali6 el mes pasado para Paris. 22. ^ Cuando sale V. para Filadelfia ? No salgo hasta la semana qua viene. 23. gllacia d6nde vive su amigo de Y. ? Yive hacia la plaza. 24. I Por donde vino Y. de Paris ? Yine por Inglaterra. 25. ^En d6nde vive Y. ? En la Quinta avenida entre las calles Treinta J Treinta y una. 26. 2Qu6 caballo es mejor, el de Y. 6 el mio? El de Y. es mayor; pero no tan bueno como el mio. 27. ^ Tiene Y. mas de cien pesos ? Tengo mas de ciento. 28. ^ No tiene Y. mas que tres pesos ? No, sefior, no tengo mas que dos. 29. ^Habla Y. espafiol mejor que Luisa? No, sefior, lo hablo peor; pero lo escribo mejor que ella. 30. I Sali6 Y. ayer temprano ? Sali temprano ; pero hoy he salido muy tarde. EXERCISK 1. Have you written your letter? Yes, sir, I have written it, 2. What is the date of it (what date has it)? The first of this month. 3. Do you (plural) go out much ? We go out this year as much as last year. \ 4. Which is the better grammar, mine or yours? Yours is better than mine, but not so large. 5. Wliich of the two goes out earlier, you or your cousin ? I go out earlier than he. 6. Are merchants as rich as singers ? Some singers are richer than merchants. 7. Is this horse not as lively as that one? That one is a little more lively than this one. 8. Is Mexico as large as the United States ? No, miss, the latter ar« much larger than the former. 9. When do the musicians leave for Havana? They leave next week (the week that is coming). 10. When did you take your music lesson? I took it the day before yesterday, early. 80 LESSON XX. 11. Did your brothers take theirs as early as you ? Ko, sir, they took theirs very late. 12. Which of you two speaks Italian better? lie speaks it better than I ; but I write it better than he. 13. Do you sing much every day ? I do not sing as much as last month. 14. Does the notary write as well as the physician? The former writes better than the latter. 16. Is that man not very tiresome ? He is very talkative and very tiresome. 16. Is Lewis as prudent as his uncle? He is more prudent than he; but not so taciturn. 17. Are you less taU {alto) than Louisa? No, she is less tall than J. 18. Is your uncle, the merchant, as rich as your father? No, sir, my father is richer than he. )jftA.A 19. When do your cousins leave for Paris? They leave very soon. I ^ 20. Is your servant as cleanly as ours ? Ours is more cleanly than yours, but not so talkative. 21. Have you any paper for writing? I have as much paper and as much ink as I wish for. 22. Is Henry very prudent ? He is as imprudent as talkative. 23. Who goes to the bakery quicker than John? Nobody goes as quick as he. 24. Have the merchants sent as much silver to France as to Spain? They have sent more to France. 25. Did the shoemaker make the shoes as quickly as the tailor made the coat ? The former made the shoes quicker, because he worked more than the latter. 26. Which works the later, the tailor or the baker ? The latter does not work so late as the former. 27. Are your father's books larger than ours? Yours are smaller than his. 28. Are those horses bad? They are worse than the others. 29. Will you go with your friend (fern.) to the concert ? I will not go. 30. Why will you not go ? Because it is very late, and I have to play on the piano. 31. Where did your mother learn Spanish ? She learned it here. 32. And does she speak it well ? She does not speak it as well as she writes it. . 83. How much money have you ? I have not more than seven dollars. 84. Has your friend as much as you ? He has more than I ; he has received more than two hundred dollars from Spain. LESSON XXI. 81 LESSON XXI Saber. To know. Sabiendo. Knowing. Sabido. Known. S^. I know. Sabes. Thou knowest. Sabe. He knows. Saberaos. We know. Sabeis. You know. Saben. They know. Supe. I knew. Supiste. Thou knewest. Supo. He knew. Supimos. We knew. Supisteis. You knew. Supieron. Tliey knew. Amar. To love. Viaja/r. To travel. Trinidad (fern). \ Trinity. Sabio, sapientisimo. Wise, learned ; very, most or ex- tremely wise. Habil, liabilisirao. Clever, skilful ; very clever. Dificil, dificilisimo. Difficult, very or most difficult. Facil, facilisimo. Fa sy ; very or most easy. Corto, cortisimo. Short; very or most short. Alegre, alegrisimo. Cheerful ; very or most cheerful Triste, tristisimo. Sad ; very or most sad. Feliz, felicisirao. Happy ; very or most happy. Largo, larguisimo. Long ; very or most long. Fuerte, fortisimo. Strong ; very or most strong. Nuevo, novisimo. New ; very or most new. Fiel, fidelisimo. Faithful ; very or most faithful. Alto, altisimo. Tall ; very or most tall. 4* 82 LESSON XXI. IRREGULAR COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. Baeno, mejor, 6ptimo. Malo, peor, p6siiiio. Grande, major, maximo. Pequeflo, menor, minirao. Alto, superior, supremo. Bajo, inferior, infimo, Good, better, best. Bad, worse, worst. Great, greater, greatest. Small, smaller, smallest, nigh i Jiigher, highest. ' ( superior, supreme. ^'"'' {Inferior, Jlo'^^'t- Gombinada. Combined. COMPOSITION. Es el mas sabio de mis discipulos. fista senorita es la mas amable. La mayor parte del regimiento. La mai/or parte, 6 los mas, de los solda- dos. La major casa de la calle. Manuel, ^ cuales son los profesores que saben mas en tu escuela ? 61 profesor de aritmdtica sabe mucho, el de francos, sabe mas ; pero el profesor de historia es el que mas sabe. f, Es bueno este caballo ? Este caballo es rauy bueno ; pero el de V. es mejor, y el mio es el mejor de los tres. i Es esta leccion mwy facil ? Es facilisima. i Es su casa de V. tan alia come la mia ? La mia es mas alta que la de V., y la de su hermano de V. es la mas alta. Ese Frances es muy cahallero. i Es alegre 6 triste su amigo de V. ? Us alegrisimo ; pero es muy niiio. ^Es muy j6ven? No, scuor, es viejo. He is the wisest of my pupils. This young lady is the most amiable. The greater parfr of the re^ment. The greater part, or the most, of the soldiers. The best house in the street. Emanuel, which are the professors in your school who know the most ? The professor of arithmetic is learned, the French professor is more learned ; but the professor of history is the most learned. Is this horse good ? This horse is very good ; but yours is better, and mine is the best of the three. Is this lesson very easy ? It is most, or very easy. Is your house as high as mine ? Mine is higher than yours, and your brother's is the highest That Frenchman is very gentlemanly. Is your friend cheerful or sad ? He is most cheerful; but he is very childish. Is lie very young ? * No, sir, he is old. EXPLANATION 91. English superluiivcs ending in est, or formed by most^ LESSON XXI. 83 are rendered by placing the definite article before the Spanish comparative; as, El mas sabio. [ The wisest. La mas amable. | The most amiable. 92. 3Iost^ or most of, when followed by a noun (singular), is translated by la mayor parte ; as. La mayor parte del regimiento. | Most of the regiment. But if the noun is in the plural, most may also be translated by m,as, with the corresponding article ; as, La mayor parte, 6 los mas, de los I Most of the soldiers, soldados. | 93. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is translated by de in Spanish ; as. La mejor casa de la calle. | The best house in the street. 94. Those superlatives which in English are formed with the aid of very, most, &c., may in Spanish be formed either with the help of muy before the adjective, or by adding to the latter the termination tsimo ; as, Muy hdbil, or habilistmo. I Very clever. Muy facil, or fa.cilisimo, J Very, or most easy. The termination isimo is, however, more expressive of the positive superlative degree than is the adverb muy. 95. Observe that adjectives ending in a vowel drop that vowel on taking the termination isimo ; as, Corto, coTtisimo. Sliort, very short. Alegre, alegrisimo. Cheerful, most cheerful. Triste, trist^stmo. Sad, very sad. 96. There are other superlatives ending in ^rrimo\ as, Celebre, celebmtmo. I Celebrated, most celebrated. Salubre, saluberWmo. | Salubrious, very salubrious. But these forms are not the most used. 97. Adjectives ending in the following letters change them before admitting the termination isinio : Co becomes qu ; as, rico, rig'wlsimo. Go " gu ; as, largo, laiywisimo. JUe " hil\ as, amable, ama6v7isimo. Z " c; as, feliz, felicisirao. 84 LESSONXXI. 98. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed : BuenOy good, makes bonisimo, very good. Fuertey strong, makes fortisimOy very strong. NuevOy new, makes noviisimOy very new. BahiOy wise, makes sapieniisimOy very wise. JSacrOy sacred, makes sacratisimOy very sacred. Mely faithful, makes JidelUsimo, very faithful. 99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives: Bueno, mejor, 6ptimo. Malo, peor, p^simo. Grande, mayor, maximo. Pequeno, menor, minimo. Alto, superior, supremo. B written. Habra escrito. He will have i Habr6mos escrito. We shall have ) Habreis escrito. You will have y written. Habran escrito. They will have ) Coser. To sew. Lavar. To wash. Barrer. To sweep. Pasear. To walk (take a walk). Dedal. Thimble. Aguja. Needle. Hilo. Thread. Primavera. Spring. Verano. Summer. Accion. Action. Invierno. Winter. Nacion. Nation. Otofio. Autumn (Fall). Afectacion. Affectation. Enero. January. Navegacion. Navigation. Febrero. February. A^tacion. Agitation. Marzo. March. Aprobacion. Approbation. Abril. April. Aceptacion. Acceptation. Mayo. May. Atraccion. Attraction. Junio. June. Oonversacion. Conversation. Julio. July. Direccion. Direction. Agosto. August. Circunspeccion. Circumspection, 100 LESSON XXIV, Setiembre. Octubre. Noviembre. Diciembre. September, October. November. December* Clasificacion. Coleccion. Combinacion. Comparacion. Composicion. Reputacion. Classification. Collection. Combination. Comparison. Composition. Reputation. COMPOSITION. Habr6 escrito mi leccion 4ntes de ir a casa del profesor. Habr^ acabado a las diez. El abogado acaba de hablar. Yo acabo de estudiar mi leccion. La lavandera habra acabado de lavar k las cuatro. i A cu&ntos estamos ? Estamos & seis. ^ Que dia del mcs es hoy ? Es el primero. 6 Qu6 fecha tiene esa carta ? El primero de Enero de mil ochocientos sesenta y seis. 4 En que ano fu6 V. a Mejico ? Fui en Setiembre de mil ochocientos cincuenta y dos. ^ Ir& V. este verano k Europa ? No, seSor, ir6 en el inviemo. I Pasear4 V. mucho esta primavera ? No, sefior, trabajar^ mucho. 1 shall have written my lesson before going to the professor's. I shall have finished at ten o'clock. The lawyer has just spoken. I have just studied my lesson. The washerwoman will have finished washing at four o'clock. What day of the month is it ? It is the sixth. What day of the month is to-day ? It is the first. What is the date of that letter ? January 1st, 1866. In what year did you go to Mexico ? I went in September, 1852. Will you go to Europe this summer ? No, sir, I shall go in the winter. Will you walk much this spring ? No, sir, I shall work a great deal EXPLANATION. 107. The COMPOUND future affirms something future that will have taken place before or at the time of some other future action or event expressed in the sentence ; and is composed of the simple future of the verb haber, to have, and the past parti- ciple of another verb ; as, Habr6 escrito mi ejercicio Antes de ir & casa del profesor. IIabr6 acabado k las diez. I will have written my exercise before going to the professor's. I will have finished at ten o'clock. 108. AcABAB DB is employed before an infinitive in the LESSON XXIV. 101 sense of to have just, and the infinitive is translated in English as a past participle ; as, Acaba de hablar. I He has just spoken. Acaho de estudiar. | 1 have just studied. N . B. — In order to facilitate the acquisition of words, we shall give now and then a few rules, with the help of which the learner will be enabled to convert several thousand English words into Spanish. And, although we have proposed not to introduce many new words or elements at one time, these observations will enable the pupil to learn a greater number of words with little or no difficulty at all, from the striking re- semblance that those words bear to the English ones. 109. The greater part of English nouns ending in tion are rendered into Spanish by changing the letter t into c ; as, appro- bation, aprohacion. It is to be observed that the only conso- nants that can be doubled in Spanish are c, n and r. All nouns of the above termination are feminine. HO. The days of the month are all counted in Spanish by the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, except the first day; and there are several forms of asking the day of the month : e. a.^ J ^ Que dia del mes tenemos ? 4 Que dia es hoy ? ^ A cuantos estamos del mes ? What day of the month is it ? There is no preference between these ; but the answer must be made in the same form as the question ; as. ^ Que dia tenemos ? Tenemos el seis. ^ A cuantos estamos ? Estamos a dos. ^ Que dia es hoy ? Es el primero. What day of the month is it ? It is the sixth. What day of the month is it ? It is the second. What day of the month is to-day ? It is the first. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. V 1. g Ilabra Y. acabado de escribir su leccion a las diez y media ? No, 8^; pero la habr6 acabado antes de ir a casa del profesor. 2. I Ha hablado aquel abogado ? No, sefior, acaba de hablar este. 3. ^Ha hablado bien? Muy bien, pero con afectacion. 102 LESSON XXIV. 4. I Hard V. una buena composicion para la leccion pr6xima ? SI, Befior, si tengo tiempo, la har6. 5. ^Lava bien su lavandera de V. ? Lava muy bien. 6. ^ A d6nde envia V. sus nifios ? Los envio i pasear con la criada. 7. I A donde ? A la plaza de Madison. 8. I Estd cerca de su casa de V. ? Esta. muy cerca. 9. ^Barri6 el criado ayer mi cuarto? No, sefior, no lo barri6 ayer< pero lo ha barrido hoy. 10. ^Lo barrera maflana ? Lo habrd barrido dntes de las nueve. 11. Muchacho, gcsta el sastre en la sastreria? No, sefior, acaba do salir. 12. ^ A qu6 hora principiaron Yds. a bailar? Principiamos i las diez de la noche. IB. I Desea Y. practicar el ingles ? Si, sefior, si tengo tiempo princi- piar6 pasado mafiana. 14. ^ Donde esta su amigo ? Estd viajando por Francia. 15. ^ Ama su hermana de Y. mucho d sus hijos? Si, sefior, los ama uiuchisimo. 16. jSaldrd Y. muy pronto para Europa? Quiero salir mafiana. 17. jSabe Y. bailar el vals? No, sefior, pero s6 bailar el rigodon y la polka. 18. ^De donde vienen Yds.? Yenimos de Francia, y vamos para Filadelfia. 19. ^ Quiere Y. salir d pasear ? Muy bien, ir6mos al Parque Central. 20. I Qui6n lavo estos pafiuelos ? Estan muy mal lavados. Su lavan- dera de Y. los lav6. 21. ^D6nde paso Y. el verano? Lo pas6 en el campo. ^Yelinviemo? En la ciudad. 22. I Cudles son los meses mas alegres del afio? Los de la primavera, 23. I Sabe Y. la direccion de la casa de su hermano de Y. ? Si, sefior, ealle Catorce, ntiraero ciento veinte y cinco. 24. I A qu6 hora comen Yds. ? Coraemos d las tres de la tarde. 25. I Qu6 hora tiene Y. ? Tengo las dos y veinte. 26. j A qu6 hora salieron sus hcrmanas para el parque ? Salieron a las seis y media de la mafiana. 27. J Y d qu6 hora volvieron ? A las once m6nos cuarto. 28. i Buenos dias! — Buenos dias. — ^Esta Y. bueno ? Muy bueno, grtk das. i Y su familia de Y. ? Muy buena, gracias. 29. I Baila Y. la polca ? No, sefior, estoy principiando d aprenderla. LESSON XXIV, 103 EXERCISE. 1. When shall your uncle have finished his letter ? He shall have it finished at eight o'clock. 2. When shall you have your letter written ? I shall have it written before going to the professor's. 3. When shall the notary make the conveyance (writing) ? He has jusi taade it. 4. Shall your servant have swept my room before the lesson hour to- morrow ? Yes, sir, she shall have it swept at six o'clock. 5. What day of the month is it? It is the thirteenth. 6. Does your washerwoman come to wash in your house ? She does not, but she washes very well. 7. How many lessons do those gentlemen take every month ? They take four every week ; that makes sixteen every month. 8. Which are the best months for walking? The three months of spring, and the three of autumn (or fall). 9. Where are you coming (do you come) irom ? I am coming from walking. 10. Will you give* me a needle and thread and a thimble to sew? Here is the needle ; I am going to look for the thread and thimble. 11. In what year did your sister Margaret go to England? She went in June, 1865. 12. What is the date of that letter? Madrid, Tth July, 1866. 13. Shall you go to Europe this summer ? Ko, madam, I shall not go befone next spring. 14. Is December a good month for travelling? No, it is one of the worst in tlie year. 15. How did you {plural) spend the day yesterday? We walked in t\iQ Central Park. 16. Did you walk the whole day ? No, we walked until twelve o'clock, and then we read and played on the piano. 17. Did you not pass the evening at Mr. Martinez's? No, we did not go out all (in all) the evening, Margaret was a little sick. 18. Do you know which are the longest months ? Yes ; they are Jan- uary, March, May, July, August, October and December. 19. And which are the shortest? April, June, September and No- vember. 20. But what do you do with February ? February is the shortest of all ; it has but twenty-eight days. 21. Shall you walk much this spring? No, miss, I shall work a great deal. * Dar. 104 LESSON XXV, v^ 22. When shall the tailor sew my vest ? He shall sew it to-morrow evening. 23. Has the lawyer not spoken ? He has just spoken. 24. Until what hour did he speak ? Until half-past one. 25. Did he speak in Spanish ? No, he spoke in French to-day ; but to-morrow he shall speak in Spanish. 26. Do you not wish to practise Italian ? Yes, sir, and I shall prac- tise the day after to-morrow, if I have time. 27. If your teacher comes to-day, will you take a lesson ? I shall take it if he comes. 28. Does he pronounce weU? He pronounces very well, but with some aifectation. 29. How many Spanish words do you know that end in cion ? I know very many. 30. Which are they ? Conversation, approbation, agitation, complica- tion, classification, intention, desertion, circumspection, nation, naviga- tion, and very many others. LESSON XXY Conocer. I To know, to be acquainted with. PRESENT INDICATIVE. Conozco. I know. Conoces. Thou knowest. Conoce. He knows. Conocemos. We know. Coneceis. You know. Conocen. They know. PRETERIT DEFmriE. Conoci. I knew. Conociste. Thou knewest. Conoci6. He knew. Conocimos. We knew. Conocisteis. You knew. Conocieron. Tliey knew. LESSON XXV. 105 FUTUEE SIMPLE. Conocer^. I shall know. Conoceras. Thou wilt know. Conocera. He will know. Conocer6mos. We shall know. Conocer^is. You will know. Conoceran. They will know. PEETEBIT CNDEFINITE. He conociilo. 1 I have known. COMPOUND FUTUEE. Habre conocido. 1 I shall have known. Gozar. To enjoy. Prometer. To promise. Una vez. Once. Dos veces, &c. Twice. Alto. High, loud. Bajo. Low. Siempre. Always. Nunca. Never. Jamas. Never. Ya. Already, yet {interrogativelyy Ya {with a negative). No longer. Aun. StiU, yet, even. Todavia. Still, yet, even. A menudo. Often. Demasiado. Too, too much. Bastante. Enough, pretty. Frio. Cold (the). Verguenza. Shame. Calor. Heat. Eazon. Reason. Miedo. Fear. Sed. Thirst. Sueflo. Sleep. Ldstima. Pity. Harabre. Hunger. Salud. Health. Valor. Courage, worth, value. Maestro. Master, teacher. Moda. Fashion. Maestra. Mistress (school) V I Conoce V. k ese hombre ? Ko lo conozco ; pero se quien le co- noce. COMPOSITION. Do you know that man ? I do not know him ; but I know who knows him. :% 106 LESSON XXV, V i Porqu6 no aprende V. bus lecciones ? Conozco que he hccho mal en no aprenderlas ; pero prometo saber- las para maiiana. ^ Sabe V. francos ? No, senor, pero voy & aprenderlo; i conoce V. un buen maestro ? i Estudia Y. aun (todavia) el espanol ? Ya no lo estudio. 6 Sabe V. hablarlo ya ? No, todavia. V 6 Ha principiado ya su hermano de V. 8U3 lecciones ? ^ Ta ha principiado ; pero no las apren- dera jara4s (nunca), porque no estu- dia bastante. j Cuantas veces ha estado V. este mes en el teatro ? He estado una vez ; pero el mes pasa- do estuve tres veces. I Tiene V. miedo de su maestro ? No tengo miedo de 61 ; pero tengo ver- giienza de 61. ^ De qui6n tiene V. 14stima ? Tengo 14stima de ese pobre hombre. i Tiene V. calor 6 frio ? No tengo ni calor ni frio ; tengo ham- bre y sed. I Tiene razon el abogado ? El abogado no tiene razon. i Tiene 61 razon alguna vez ? Tiene razon algunas veces, pero no siempre. *i Hard V. eso otra vez ? No lo har6 jam&s (nunca). i Amar& V. & su amigo ? Le amar6 por siempre jam&s. i Ha leido V. jara.48 ese libro ? ^ Nunca jam&s lo har6. i Tiene su madre de V. buena salud ? Si, senor, goza de muy buena salud. i Tiene V. hambre 6 sed ? No tengo ni hambre ni sod, tengo sueno. Why do you not learn your lessons ? I know that I have done wrong in not learning them ; but I promise to know them for to-morrow. Do you know French ? No, sir, but I am going to learn it ; do you know a good teacher ? Do you still study Spanish ? I study it no longer. Do you know how to speak it already ? Not yet. Has your brother commenced hia les- sons yet ? He has (already) commenced ; but he will never learn them, for he does not study enough. How many times have you been in the theatre this month ? I have been once ; but last month I was there three times. Are you afraid of your master? I am not afraid of him ; but I am ashamed before him. On whom do you take pity ? I take pity on that poor man. Are you warm or cold ? I am neither warm nor cold ; I am hungry and thirsty. Is the lawyer right ? The lawyer is not right Is he right sometimes ? He is right sometimes, but not alwaya Will you do that again (another time) t I will never do it. Will you love your friend ? I shall love him always (for ever). Have you ever read that book ? I shall never do it. Is your mother in good health (hat your mother good health)? Yes, sir, she enjoys very good health. Are you hungry or thirsty ? I am neither hungry nor thirsty, I am sleepy. LESSON XXV. 107 EXPLANATION. 111. Saeer, to know, and conocee, to be acquainted with. '—It must be observed, in order not to confound these two verbs, that saber is employed to signify the act of knowing, being informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of something ; whereas conocer is used to express the fact of being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distinguish persons or things ; as, I Sabe V. quien conoce a este hombre ? | Do you know who knows that man ? 112. AuN, YA, ToDAViA. — The adverb aun indicates that the subject of the sentence continues in the same state as be- fore; quite the reverse with the adverb pa, which always signifies discontinuance of a former state (expressed or under- stood) ; e. g., I Escribe Y. aun ? I Do you write yet ? No escribo ya. | I do not write any longer, Todavia, yet, still, is synonimous with aun ; as, Est4 trabajando todavia (or aun). | He is still working. Once, twice, &c., are rendered in Spanish by una vez, dos veces, &G. Miedo, valor, vergilenza, Idstima, tiempo, take the preposi- tion de after them ; as, Tengo miedo de salir. I I am afraid to go out. Tengo verguenea de ese hombre. | I am ashamed of that man. 113. When in English the verb to he precedes the adjec- tives hungry, thirsty, afraid, ashamed, right, wrong, warm, cold^ sleepy, it is changed into the Spanish verb tener, and the adjec- tive into a corresponding substantive ; as, ^ Tiene Y. miedo ? Are you afraid ? 6 Tiene Y. sed ? Are you thirsty ? ^ Tiene Y. calor. Are you warm ? ^ Tiene Y. frio ? Are you cold ? 114. Jamas and nunca may be used indiscriminately, or one for the other ; as, Jamds (or nunca) le he conocido. ( I have never been acquainted with him. 108 LBSSON XXV. Sometimes they are used together, to give more energy to the expression ; as, Nunca jamas lo har6. j Never, no never, shall I do so. But Jamds has the peculiarity of being used after the words por siempre and para siempre, for ever ; where, instead of being ^ negative, it affirms, meaning eternally ; as, Le amar6 por siempre jamds. | I will love him forever. Sometimes it is used alone interrogatively, meaning ever ; as, I Ha leido V. jamds ese libro ? | Have you ever read that book ? CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^D6nde conoci6 Y. a su araigo? Le conoci en Paris el inviemo pasado. 2. I Sabe V. qm6n conoce a ese horabre ? Mi padre le conoce muj bien. 3. I Cudndo conocer6 a su hermano de V. ? En el otofio le conocera V. 4. I Ha conocido V. en L6ndres a ese caballero ? Si, seftor, le conoci alii el ano pasado. 5. I C6mo esta su hijo de Y. ? Mai ; no goza de buena salud. 6. I Bail6 Y. mucho en el baile de anoche ? Si, sefior, muchisimo. 7. I Quien es ese caballero ? Es un escritor de gran reputacion. 8. I Tienen mucha aceptacion sus obras ? Tieneu muchisima. 9. I Sabe Y. lo que ban prometido sus amigas de Y. ? No lo s4. — ^Han prometido estudiar sus lecciones. 10. i Yendra Y. maflana 4 comer con nosotros? No, sefior, he prome- tido comer con mis amigos los Alemanes. 11. ^ Ilabla ya espaflol su primo de Y. ? No lo habla aun, y no lo hablarti jamas (nunca), porque no estudia bastante. >|l2. ^Barrio Y. mi cuarto? No, sefior, pero prometo barrerlo mafiana temprano. 13. J Cuantas veces prometi6 Y. buscar mi sombrero ? Jamas lo pro- meti. 14. I No desea Y. ya ir d su pais? Lo deseo muchisimo. 15. I Sale Y. ya d pasear todos losdias ? No salgo sino algunas veces. 16. I L]ev6 Y. ya mi carta al correo ? Todavia no la he Uevado. 17. I No ha estado Y. jamds en Paris ? No, sefior, jamds he estado. 18. J No ha Icido Y. jamds la historia de los Estados Unidos? Si, la he leido una vez. 19. i Ilabla bien el abogado? Habla. hien, pero mny b^o. 20. I Comprende Y. ya el espafiol ? Si hablan alto, y despacio, si, sefior LESSON XXV. 109 21. gTiene V. bastante que hacer ? Tengo demasiado. 22. I Cuantos anos tiene Y. ? Tengo veinte j uno. 23. I Cuando vi6 Y. por ^tima vez a su familia ? El dia seis de Se- tiembre del afio de mil ochocientos cincuenta y cinco. 24. I Cuando conoci6 Y. al pianista ? Le conoci ayer por primera vez. 25. ^ Han salido sus heraianas para el campo ? Todavia no, pero sal- dran muy pronto. 26. I Que hace su padre de Yds. ? Esta gozando del buen tiempo en el campo. 27.« g Qu6 tiene su nii5o de Y. ? Tiene frio j sueQo. 28. I Tienen ellos hambre ? No, sefior, tienen sed. 29. 2 Tiene Y. valor para hacerlo ? Si, sefior, pero tengo verguenza. 30. I'^o tiene Y. lastima de esa mujer? Si, sefior, tengo lastima de ella, porque no tiene buena salud. 31. g Tiene suefio su madre de Y. ? No, sefior, pero esta muy cansada. EXERCISE. 1. Do you know that man? Yes, sir, that gentleman is my uncle. 2. Are you still writmg ? No, I am no longer writing. 3. Has Charles come from the country yet ? No, he has not come yet. 4. Have you (plural) ever read the History of Civilization by Guizot? No, but we shall read it next spring. 5. Are you not ashamed of not having read the History of the United States ? I am not ashamed, because I am too young to read his- tory. 6. When shall you commence to read it? I shall commence next year. 7. Yery well ; it is a useful study (estudio), 8. Does your aunt enjoy good health ? Yes, sir, thank you, she en- joys very good health. 9. Are you cold, madam ? No, thank you, I wish to go out a minute, because I am very warm in this room. 10. Is it ten o'clock yet ? No, it is but a quarter past eight. 11. Who is that gentleman to whom your cousin spoke last night at Tthe concert ? I do not know him. 12. And that gentleman who came this morning to your house, who is he ? He is- a Spanish writer who enjoys a high (great) reputation. 13. Has he written many works? He has already written many books, and he is going to write a history of Spain. 14. Do you know Sir Walter Scott's works ? Yes, I have read them all. 15. Are they not much esteemed in Europe (have they not much esti' mation) ? Yes, very much. 110 LESSON XXV. 16. When did your brother become acquainted with his {el) Spanish friend? Last year, in London. 17. Are you sleepy, young ladies? Yes, we are very tired, thirsty and sleepy {tener sed y sueno), 18. Will you take a little wine ? No, thank you, we never take wine. 19. Does your mother know Emanuel's address (direction) ? Yes, here it is in this letter. 20. Will you read it ? With much pleasure. Emanuel Martmez, Esq. (don), 113 Broadway. A thousand thanks. 21. Did your cousin's {fern.) friends commence their lessons the other day ? Yes, they commenced, and are much pleased (content) with them. 22. Why does the lawyer speak so low ? I do not know. 23. Does he not speak as low as his brother loud ? He speaks low from (by) affectation. 24.- Which of your servants {fern.) sews the best? None of them sews. 25. How many conjugations has the Spanish language ? Three regu- lar {regular) coiyugations, and several irregular {irregular) ones. 26. Have you ever been in Philadelphia ? I have never been there yet ; but I shall go next year. 27. Did your father write the letter for Peter yesterday ? No, but he promised to write it the day after to-morrow. 28. Has your shoemaker enough to do ? Yes, sir, he has too much to do. 29. Will you always love your brothers and sisters? Yes, I shall love them forever. 30. Do you not pity that man ? I do pity him, for he has nothing to do. 81. Have you money enough to buy a house? Yes, sir, I have enough. LESSON XXVI. La/r. I To give. PRESENT rNDIOATTVE. Doy, das, da. 1 1 give, tliou givest, he gives. Damos, dais, dan. I We give, you give, they give. LESSON XXVI. Ill PEETEEIT DEFINITE, Bi, diste, di6. I I gave, tliou gavest, he gave. Dimos, disteis, dieron. I We gave, you gave, they gave. Dar6, daras, dara. Dar^mos, dar6is, daran. FUTUEE SIMPLE. I shall give, thou wilt give, he will give. We shall give, you shall give, they shall give. PEETEEIT mDEFINIE. He dado, has dado, etc. | I have given, thou hast given, &c COMPOUND FUTIJEE. Habr6 dado, etc. I shall have given, &o. Ganar To gain, earn, win. Sing. Nbm. Yo. L l8t Obj, 2d Obj, Me. Ami. \ Me, or to me. Plur. Kom. Nosotros. We. l8t Obj. 2d Obj. Nos. A nosotros. f Us, or to us. Sing, Nom, Tii. Thou. \8t Obj. 2d Obj, T6. Ati. Thee, or to thee. Plur, Horn, Yosotros. Ye, you. \8t Obj, 2d Obj, Os. A vosotros. Ye, you, or to you. Sing. Nom. £1. He. \8t Obj. 2d Obj. Le. A a. Him, or to him. J*lur. Nom. Ellos. They. l8t Obj. 2d Obj. Los, les. A ellos. Them, to them. Sing. Nom, Ella. She. l8t Obj. 2d Obj. La,le. A ella. Her, to her 112 LESSON XXVI Plur, Nom. Ellas. \st 01)j. Las, les. 2d Ohj. A ellas. Sing, arid Plur. Ut Ohj. Se. . 2d Obj. A si. Neuter Form, Nbm. Ello. 1st Ohj. Lo. 2d Ohj. A ello. They. Them, to them. f Himself, herself^ itself, them- < selves; or to himself, to her [ self, to itself, to themselves. It. It. To it. COMPOSITION. i Conoce V. aquellas senoras ? Deseo conocerlas. Conociendolas las amar4 V. i Me promete V. llevanne k su casa ? Doy 4 V. mi palabra. }, Qu^ le di6 k V. mi prime ? Quiso darme unas flores ; pero yo no quise recibirlas. ^ Quieres venir comnigo al teatro ? No ir4 contigo, porque mi padre quiere llevarme consigo. i Son estas flores para ti ? No son para mi ; son para Y. Yo te necesito. Ella nos hablo en el teatro. t\ me amara eon el tiempo. Nosotros le hablamos en el concierto. Yo le escribi una carta. Ella lea did un libro. Do you know those ladies ? I desire to know them. On knowing them you will love them. Do you promise me to take me to their house? I will give you my word. What did my cousin give you ? He wanted to give me some flowers ; but I would not receive them. Wilt thou come with me to the theatre ? I will not go with thee, because my father wants to take me with him. Are these flowers for thee ? They are not for me, they are for you. I want thee. She spoke to us in the theatre. He will love me in time. We spoke to him at the concert I wrote him a letter. She gave them a book. EXPLANATION. 115. Subject or Nominative. — To what has already been said, in Lesson X., relative to pronouns as subjects or nominative 'cases to verbs, we shall here simply add, that they may at all times precede their verbs, unless the latter be in the imperative mood, or be used interrogatively ; examples : Yo estudio. Til escribes. Vengan ellos. i Lee ella i I study. Thou writest. Let them come. Does she read. LESSON XXVI. 113 116. Personal Peonouns. — ^In Spanish there is a pecu- liarity to be observed amongst the personal pronouns : that is, that they have two objective cases ; one of which can never be used with prepositions, and the other never without one. 117. The Objective Case, when not preceded by aprepo- Bition, is affixed to infinitives, imperatives and gerunds ; as, Amar/a. Amemos/e. AmandoZos. Habiendo/a amado. C6mpra?e.s algo. Habiendo/os hallado. To love her. Let us love him. Loving them. Having loved her. Buy them something. Having found them. 118. In some tenses the verb drops the final letter in the first and second persons plural, when they are followed by nos or 08 ; as, Amdmonos instead of amdmosnos, I "We loved each other. Amaxfs instead of amados. \ Love each other. In the first case, the reason of this is perhaps to soften the pronunciation of the first word ; and in the second the d is dropped, in order that the imperative be not confounded with the past participle. Nevertheless, we say idos^ go, and not 108 ; but this is the only exception to the rule. 119. The objective case may sometimes elegantly follow the verb, but rarely when the sentence does not begm by the vei'b ; as, Llevome al teatro. | He took me to the theatre. 120. When one verb governs another in the infinitive mood, the objective case referring to the second verb may be placed either before the govermng verb, or after the governed .one; as, Quiero llevarle, or le quiero Uevar. | I wish to take him. 121. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the second objective case ; as, Para mi. Sin ti. Hacla ellos. For me. Without thee. Towards them. 114 LESSON XXVI. 122. Mf, Tf, sf, when preceded by con, take go after them, and are joined to the preposition ; as, Conmigo. Contigo. Con«igo. With me. With thee. With him, her, them, it. 123. Entee is used with the nominative case of the first person singular, in this expression, -EWrc tu y yo. | Between thee and me ; but in every other instance it governs the second objective case; as, U7itre si. j Between themselves. £!nire nosotros. j Between us. 124. The second objective case is always used after com- paratives ; as, Te quiero mas que d H. | I love thee better than bun. 125. When in English the objective case of the first or second person is the object of the verb, or of the preposition to, expressed or understood, we use the first case ; as, Yo te necesito. Ella nos hablo. El me amara. I want thee. She spoke to us. He will love me. 126. In Lesson X. we explained the objective case of the third person when it is the object of the English verb ; but if the third person in English be governed by the preposition to, expressed or understood, we render it by le, les, for both genders ; as. Nosotros le habl&mos. Yo le escribi. Ella les did. We spoke to him. I wrote to her. She gave them. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. { Qu6 me dard V. ? Le dar6 dV. las gracias. 2. I Qu6 les di6 V. k sus nifios ? Les di veinte centavos. 8. J Me dards algo por mi trabfyo? Algo te dar6 si \o haces bien ^ 8in6, nada. LESSON XXVI. 115 4. I Qu6 OS dieron en casa de tu primo ? Nos dieron chocolate. 6. I Que le has prometido a tu prima ? Bailar hoy con ella. 6. g C6mo ser6mos mas felices ? Amandonos los unos a los otros. 7. I Cuando vendra el con nosotros ? Yendra mafiana temprano. 8. ^Oaando saldra V. conmigo a paseo? Tendre ese gusto pasado mafiana. 9. I Qui^n ira conmigo al teatro esta noche ? Yo ir6 contigo. 10. ^Donde habiaste a mis amigos ? Les habl6 en el Parque Central. 11. 2 Les Iey6 V. mi carta? No, les lei la de su hermana de Y. 12. ^Me envio Y. los libros? No, sefior, los envi^ a su hermano deY. 13. ^06mo supo Y. de sus amigos? Escribi^ndoles. 14. 1 06mo conoci6 Y. a su amiga ? Bailando con ella en casa de su hermano. 15. I Que le prometi6 Y. a su prima ? Le prometi Uevarla a la opera. 16. I'Nos hablaron ellos alguna vez? Nos hablaron una 6 dos veces en el paseo. 17. ^Porque no les habl6 Y. ? Porque no los conozco bien. 18. ^Que le han escrito a Y. sus amigos? Que vendran a hablarnos. 19. ^Quieres salir conmigo a paseo ? Si, saldr6 contigo. 20. g Cuando iremos a casa de tus amigos? Ir^mos hoy, porque ellos tendran mucho gusto en conocerte. 21. ^Quiere Y. pasarme el pan ? Con mucho gusto. — Gracias. 22. I Qu6 le prometiste d tu prima ? Le prometi ir a su casa mafiana y llevarle un pafiuelo de seda. 23. I Cuando le habl6 Y. ? Le habl6 anoche en casa de su madre. 24. ^Quiere Y. venir a pasear? Mejor sera estarnos aquL 25. I A qu6 vienen Yds. ? Yenimos a hablarle d Y. 26. g Cuando iremos al campo con nuestros amigos ? Iremos mafiana. 27. ^Como les gan6 a Yds. la lavandera tanto dinero? Lavandonos los vestidos y trabajando mucho. 28. I Cuantas veces d la semana habla Y. con sus amigos ? Nos ha- blamos todos los dias. 29. ^ Yendra hoy su primo de Y. a comer con nosotras ? Si, porque quiere conocerlas d Yds. \^ 30. I Le di6 Y. los buenos dias a su prima? Le di los buenos dias ayei* en la plaza y le habl6 de Y. 31. Le doy d Y. las gracias. g Tien 3 buena salud ahora? Si, sefiora, estd muy buena. 32. ^Le di6 d Y. los peri6dicos? No, sefiora, pero prometi6 mandar- los mafiana. 116 LESSON XXVI. EXERCISR 1. What was* that you gave to your friend last night at the theatre? I gave him the second volume of Mr. Romanos' new work. 2. Why do you not give him the first volume ? I have already given it to my cousin. • 3. Did you not promise last week to give me those two volumes ? Yes ; and you shall have them the day after to-morrow. 4. Will you come with me to the country in the summer? I will go if you set out on the first of July. 5. Will you and your uncle come with us to walk this afternoon ? This evening we have to go to the concert. 6. When will you go out with us? I do not know ; but I think (that) to-morrow {creo que maflana). 7. Have you heard (sabido) from your father this week ? No ; but we heard from our brother John last week. 8. How often has he written to you from Boston? We have received seven or eight letters from him. 9. How much did that singer make (gain) in New York ? Which one? I do not know any singers. 10. Do you not know the singer who spent last week at your uncle's ii the country? Yes; but it was in Philadelphia that he sang, not in New York. 11. Are you cold? No, sir; but I am hungry and thirsty. 12. When will you take Emanuel to see your children ? I shall take him to-morrow. — ^They will have much pleasure in making his acquaintance. 13. How many languages does that gentleman speak? He only speaks his own ; but his cousin speaks five. 14. Which are they' Ho speaks French, German, Spanish, English, and Italian. 15. How did he learn so many languages? By studying the grammar of each one of them (cada una de ellas), reading the works of the best writers, and practising with the natives {natural). 16. Does he write all those languages as well as he speaks them ? He writes them better than he speaks them. 17. Did I not see you {plural) speaking to the notary yesterday in the park ? No, it was the day before yesterday. 18. What has he done in that affair {negocio) of your brother's? He has done nothing yet; and as he has to leave town {la ciudad) this after- noon, he will do nothing all this week. 19. Who is the young lady who danced so well last night at youi house? Do you not know her? she is my cousin. * See the conjugation of the verb Seb, at the end of the book. LESSON XXVII. 117 20. When did you see our friend Mr. Perez ? I saw him the other day in Twenty-sixth street, and we talked for more than two hours about {de) theatres and concerts. 21. I saw him the night before last; but we did not talk about thea- tres and concerts. In whose house did you see him ? At Mr. de la Rosa's. 22. At what o'clock did you go there? I went at a quarter to eight, and left at half-past ten. 23. Did you see many Mexicans there? I only saw one: that Mexi- can lawyer who has just written a history of bis country. 24. Does he leave soon for Europe ? He wishes to set out next week. 25. Did John write to his father the day before yesterday ? Yes, and he has heard {saber) since that he set out last week for France. 26. Has your sister read the books yet which she received from Louisa last week ? Yes ; and she wishes to read them again (ptra vez). 27. I shall see her this evening; and if you wish (it) I shall take them to her {se los). 28. Thank you. Have you much to do now ? No, I never have much to do in summer. 29. Is Peter tired ? No ; but he is the most tiresome boy I know. LESSON XXVII. Decir. j To say, to tell. PEESENT OF INDICATIVE. Digo, dices, dice, decimos, de- I I say, or tell, &c. PEETERIT DEFINITE. Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, di- I I said, or told, &c. jisteis, dijeron. I FUTUEE SIMPLE. Dir6, dirds, dird, dir^mos, di- I I shall or wiU say, or tell, &c. r^is, diran. I PEETEEIT INDEFINITE. He dicho, has dicho, etc. | I have said, or told, &c. COMPOTTND FUTUEE. Habr6 dicho, etc. | I shall or will have said, or told, &c. 118 LESSON XXVII. Excusar. To excuse. Perdonar. To pardon. Creer. To believe, to think. Ofender. To offend. Llamar. To call, to knock. Ensefiar. To teach, to show. Ahora. Now. Mismo {adverb). Just, very. Mismo. Same, self. Necesario. Necessary. Precise. Precise, needful. Kegular. Kegular, middling. Parte. Despatch, Parte. Part. Estudio. Study. Falta. Fault, mistake. Humor. Humor, disposition. Esperanzft. Hope. Sugeto. A person, subject, topic. Puerta. Door. Asunto. Subject, business, matter. Noticia. News. Eamillete. Bouquet. COMPO 3ITI0N. Le compro un ramillete, y se lo mando. He bought her a bouquet, and sent It to her. Les escribir^ tres cartas, y se las man- I shall write them three letters, and date. send them to them. Ella se lo ha prometido. She has promised it to her. I Qu6 esta V. hacienJo con ese libro ? What are you doing with that book f Estoy enseniindose^o t Manuel. I am showing it to Emanuel i Le leiste la carta ? Did you read the letter to him ? Ya se la lei. I did. (I read it to him aheody.) Ella me lo dijo. She told it to me. Yo se lo di. I gave it to him. Mi madre me ama d mi. My mother loves me. Tu amigo tc busca d ti. Thy friend looks for thee. Yo hs d( las noticias d ellos. I told them the news. Yo se las dar^ d V. f I will tell them to you. A lite arao, or te amo & tl. I love thee. i Qu6 le ha dioho d V. su hermano ? What has your brother told youf No me ha dicho nada. He has told me nothing. /Xedyeyo eso d VJ Did I tell you that ? Y, no me lo dijo. You did not tell it to me. LESSON XXVII. 119 / Se lo ha dicho el a V,? Me Zo ha dicho. ^ Quiere V. decir eso a sus amigos ? Quiero decirscZo d ellos. g Qui en llama 4 la puerta ? Soy yo mismo. I Tiene buen humor su amigo de V. .^ J^i, seiior, tiene buen humor cuando le / van bien los negocios. I Gana ese sugeto mucho en ese asunto ? El no gana para si mismo ; pero gana para otros. Tengo esperanza de que me perdonar4. Has he told it to you ? He has told it to me. Will you tell your friends that ? I will tell it to them. "Who knocks at the door ? It is I (myself). Has your friend a good disposition ? Yes, sir, he is good humored when busi- ness goes well with him. Does that man make (or earn) much in that business ? He does not make for himself ; but he makes for others. I have hopes he will pardon me. EXPLANATION. 127. Objective pronouns, continued. — The third person being governed by to in English, either expressed or under- stood, is in Spanish rendered by se, if the object of the verb be a pronoun in the third person ; as, Le compro un raraillete, y se lomando. Les escribire tres cartas, y se las mandare. Mi criado se lo dara. He bought her a bouquet, and sent it to her. I shall write thera three letters, and send them to them. My servant will give it to him. This is done for the sake of euphony, changing the first of the two pronouns, whatever its full form may be {le, la or les), into se. This rule applies to all pronouns, after as well as be- fore the verb ; as, Ella se lo ha prometido (instead of eUa le lo). Prometiendosel^ (instead of prome- iiindolelo). She has promised it to her. Promising it to him. Did you read the letter to him ? I read it to him (already). (, Le leiste la carta ? Ya se la lei, instead of ya le la lei. 128. When two first objective cases occur in the sentence, one of which is the object of the verb, and the other is gov- erned, in English, by the preposition to, either expressed or anderstood, the object of the verb is to be placed last ; as, Ella me lo dijo. I She told it to me. Yo se lo 6i. I I gave it to him. 120 LESSON XXVII. 129. But if the object of the verb be the reflective pro- noun, it must be placed first ; as, Luego se me excuso. j He excused himself immediately to me. 130. Both the objective cases belonging to the same per- son are sometimes used together in Spanish, in order to give more energy to the expression, and then the second must al- ways be preceded by <^ ; as, Mi madre me ama d mi. Tu amigo ie busca d ti. El se lo dijo d ellas. Yo les di las noticias d ellos. Yo se las dar^ d Vd,. ? My mother loves me. Thy friend seeks thee. He told it to them. I told them the news. I will tell them to you. 131. The second objective case of any of the persons should never be used in the sentence, preceded by d, as the object of the verb, without being accompanied by the first (except after comparatives) ; therefore, such expressions as these: d el quiero, d ti amo^ are incorrect, and should be thus: d el le quiero^ d ti te amo. The place of the second objective case in sentences of this kind is restricted to the following rules : 1st. If the first objective case precede the verb, the second may be placed either before the first, or after the verb ; as, A ti te amo, or te amo d ti. | I love thee. 2d. If the first objective case follows the verb, the second must be placed after the first ; as, Am&ndoZc d el. j Loving him. 132. It may appear that the personal pronouns ^, la, lo, los and las might be confounded with the articles el, la, lo, los, las, having the same form ; but they are easily distinguished, since the articles must always be occompanied by and precede nouns ; as, el tiempo, la salud, los soldados, las obras, lo hucno ; while, on the other hand, the personal pronouns are Only em- ployed with verbs, and placed before or after them ; as, La llcvaroHj or Uevdronla. I They carried it. Lo bicscaroH, or buscdronlo. \ They looked for it 133. Whenever emphasis is required to be laid on any LESSON XXVII. 121 noun or pronoun, the adjective mismo is used in Spanish for that purpose ; as, El no ama 4 nadie mas que k si mismo. Este mismo hombre lo har4, Yo mismo lo har6. He loves no one but himself. This very man will do it I will do it myself. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Le dijo V. eso al ingles ? Se lo dije. 2. ^Se lo dijo V. en ingles 6 en espafiol? Se lo dije en ingl6s. 8. I Le comprendio a V. ? Si, senor, muy bien. 4. g Y qu6 le ensefi6 a V. ? Me ensefio el retrato de su hermana. 5. iJjO tiene Y. ? No ; se lo envi6 ya. 6. I Me lo ensenard V. ? Se lo ensefiare a Y. la semana pr6xima. 7. i Ha Uamado Y. a la criada ? La he llamado y no ha venido. 8. ^ No le perdonara Y. esa falta ? No qniero perdonarsela. 9. ^ A qui^n llama mi padre ? Te llama a tt 10. I Quieres ensefiarme tu vestido nuevo ? Te lo ensefiar6 con mucho gusto. 11. ^ Yendran tiis amigos a darnos los buenos dias ? Creo que vendran k darnoslos. 12. I Nos han enviado los peri6dicos ? Os los enviardn mafiapa. 13. ^Cuanto le gan6 Y. a ese sugeto? Le gan6 dos mil trcscientos cincuenta y ouatro pesos. 14. I Qu6 les dieron & sus amigas de Y. ? Prometi^ronles Uevarlas 4 paseo ; pero no les dieron nada. 15. I Qui6n dijo eso ? Yo mismo lo dije. 16. ^Para quien son estos libros ? Para ti mismo. 17. ^Han mandado mis cartas al correo? Si, senor, yo mismo las he mandado. 18. gQui^n me ha enviado este ramillete? Su amiga misma se lo ha enviado. 19. ^ Le leiste a tu padre las noticias de Francia ? El mismo las ha leido. 20. I Quieres ensefiarme tu reloj ? Quiero enseflartelo. 21. g Quien llam6 a la puerta ? Yo mismo WamL 22. ^ Tiene Y. esperanza de vcr su pais ? Si, sefior, tengo esperanza de verlo muy pronto. 23. I Cantaron bien anoche en el concierto ? Cantaron bien la primera parte ; pero la segunda muy mal. 24. I C6mo esta su tio de Y. ? Esta bueno ; pero de muy mal humor. 25. I Es hombre de mal humor ? No, sefior, es hombre muy amable ; pero hoy esta de mal humor por asuntos de familia. 6 122 LESSON XXVII. 26. I Creen ellos ganar dinero 4 ese hombre ? Creen gandrselo. 27. ^Necesita V. enviar este periodico a su hennano? Necesito eiy viarsclo. 28. ^Cudndo quiere Y. mandar su piano al pianista? Se lo quiero mandar ahora. 29. iCudndo necesita Y. hablar al abogado? Necesito hablarle abora JDttismo. 30. ^Es esta la carta que Y. recibi6 ayer ? Es la misma. 81. ^ A qui^u ama el Mejicano ? No ama d nadie mas que d d mismo. 32. I Para qui6ii trabaja esa mujer ? Trabaja para si misma. 83. I Qu6 le ha dicbo Y. boy a su padre ? Lo mismo que le dije ayer, EXERCISK 1. Good morning, sir; how are you? Yery well, thank yotu 2. How is your family ? Yery well, thank you. 8. When did you hear from your cousin Jane ? I received a letter from her yesterday. But will you excuse mo an instant? some one is knocking at the door. 4. Have you sent your sister the bouquet I bought for her the other day ? Not yet ; but I shall send it to her to-morrow morning. 5. "Will you write to her at the same time and (to) tell her what Charles said ? I am going to write to her just now, and I shall tell it to her, 6. Do you think my father will pardon us ? I do (I think so), because Emanuel showed me a letter he received from him, in which he says he will pardon both jof us. 7. And what does 9enry think of the matter? He thinks the same. 8. Have the pupils shown itheir new books to their teacher yet? Yes, they showed them to him yesterday. v.. 9. Does he think they are good ? He says they are very good. 10. What else (more) did he say? He said that if they study them with attention they will very soon speak Spanish. 11. Is that all * he said ? That is all. 12. Who is knocking at the door ? is it you, Peter ? Tes, it is L 13. Why did you not come earUer? I was (have been) reading tho news from Italy. 14. What is the news (what news have we)? The papers say that the Italians have gained another victory (victoria). 15. What did that man promise you last night ? He promised to bring me some volumes of the History of the United States. • Lo que. LESSON XXVII. 123 16. Has he brought (traido) them to you yet? Not yet. 17. When do you think he will bring* them? He lias to come to our house this evening, and I think he will bring them with him. 18. What do you wish toe see? I wish to see your new dress, if you will have the goodness (bondad) to show it to me. 19. Will you tell the Englishman what I have told you? I shall not tell it to the Englishman ; but I shall tell it to the Frenchman this very day. , 20. Will he believe it ? Yes, he will (believe it) ; he believes every- ithing I tell him. 21. Have they taken my letters to the post-office ? I took them my self, sir. 22. Who is my father calling? He is calling you to send you to the bookstore for a book. 23. Do you know why Louis does not send us the papers any more (ya) ? He promised to send them ; but you know that no steamer (va' por) has arrived t this week yet. 24. When does the merchant want to see the notary ? He wants to see him just now. 25. There he is talking to a gentleman ; will you go and (to) tell him that my father wishes to speak to him a moment (momento) ? 26. Good morning, sir; father wishes to tell you something; will you come now? Yes, I shall go just now. 27. How is your son, Mr. Alexander ? He is much better, thank you ; but he would not come out this morning, because he has to study his lesson. 28. What language is he learning ? He is not learning any now ; he commenced to learn Spanish in the winter. 29. What is he studying, then ? He takes lessons in (of) writing, his* tory and music. 30. What part of the grammar are yon in now, Peter ? I have just got to (arrived at) J the twenty-seventh lesson. 31. Do you require to send this paper to your brother? I require to send it to him this very day. • Traerfi. t Llegar. t Acabo de. 124 LESSON XXVIII. LESSON XXVIII. IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. Habl-aba, habl-abas, habl-aba. Habl-abamos, babl-abais, habl-aban. IMPEEFECT, First Conjugation. I spoke, was speaking, or used to speak, &c., &c. We spoke, &c. Second Conjugation. Aprend-ia, aprend-ias, aprend-ia. Aprend-iamos, aprend-iais, aprend- ian. I learned, was learning, or used to learn, &c., &c. Third Conjugation. Escrib-ia, escrib-ias, escrib-ia. i I wrote, was writing, or used to Escrib-iamos, escrib-i^, escrib-ian. | write, &c., &c. PLUPEEFECT. Habia hablado. I had ^ spoken. Habiais aprendido. Thou hadst learned. Habia escrito. He had written. Habiamos "] hablado. We had spoken. Habiais |- aprendido. You had learned. Habian J escrito. They had written. Acabar. To finish. Entrar. Deber. To enter, come in, go in. To owe. Deber. Diidar. Should, ought, must, to be to, to be one's duty to. To doubt. Temer. Abrir, abierto (irregular in this past participle only). To fear, be afraid of. To open, opened. Ambos. 1 "i^th. Cuidado. Care. Oabeza. Head. Deber. Duty. Mano. Hand. Pr6jiino. Neighbor. Ropa. Clothes. LESSON XXVIII. Vecino. Neighbor. Yentana. Wmdow. 'fieloj. Clock, watch. Visita. Visit. Cuenta. Bill, accoimt. Marido, esposo. Husband. Esposa. ■Wife. COMPOSITION. 125 Yo escribia cuando Y. vino. El estudiaba sus lecciones todos los dias. Margarita bailaba mucho cuando era joven. Yo acababa de salir cuando Y. entro. ^ Abria V. la puerta 6 la ventana en el invierno ? En el invierno no abria ni la una ni la otra ; pero en el verano abria ambas. ^Habia V. eserito los ejercicios antes de dar su leccion ? No los habia eserito ; pero habia estu- diado la leccion, Tebe Y. tener cuidado no solo de estu- diar la leccion, sino de escribir los ejercicios, porque si no V. no apren- dera nada. I En donde esta su vecino de V. ? Acaba de entrar. i Qu6 hora tiene su reloj de Y. ? Son las doce y cuarto. I Tenia su vecino de V. cuidado de su ropa? Debia hacerlo, pero no lo hacia. Debemos amar al projimo tanto como a nosotros mismos ; pero mi vecino no me ama k mi ni yo le amo a 41. No dudo lo que Y. dice. I was writing when you came. He used to study his lessons every day. Margaret used to dance much when she was young. I had just gone out when you came in. Used you to open the door or the win- dow in winter ? In winter I used to open neither ; but in summer I used to open both. Had you written your exercises before taking your lesson ? I had not written them; but I had studied my lesson. You must take care, not only to study your lesson, but (also) to write your exercises ; for if not, you will learn nothing. Where is your neighbor ? He has just come in (entered). What o'clock is it by your watch (what hour has your watch) ? It is a quarter past twelve. Used your neighbor to take care of his clothes ? He should have done so, but did not. We should love our neighbor as our- selves ; but my neighbor does not love me, nor do I love him. I do not doubt what you say. EXPLANATION. 134, The imperfect is used to express what is past, and, at the same time present, with regard to something else which is past ; that is, it is a past tense which was still present at the time spoken of. It may always be employed in Spanish when in English the word was can be used with the present parti* 126 LESSON XXVIII. ciple, or icsed to with the infinitive, or when we ppeak of ha- bitual actions ; as, Yo escribia cuando V. vino. I was writing when you came. El estudiaba sua lecciones todoa los He used to study his lessons every dias. day. 135. The PLUPERFECT is used to express what is past, and took place before some other past action or event, expressed or understood ; as, To habia leido ya los periodicos cuando I I had already read the newspapers when V. me los dio. | you gave them to me. 136.* AcABAB DE. — ^The English expressions, to have Just, and to he just, before a past participle, are translated into Spanish by acabar de, preceding an infinitiA'^e ; as, Acaho de entrar. I I have just come in. El acaba de abrir la ventana. | He has just opened the window. CONYERSATION A^TD VERSION. 1. gHa hablado Y. con la senorita? No, ella acababa de salir cuando vo toqu6 4 la puerta. 2. jDudaba Y. entrar? Si. porque temia ofender d Y. 3. No seilor; ^qu6 hora es? Mi reloj tiene las once y cuarto. 4. g Y qu6 hora tiene Y. ? Yo ten go las once y media. 5. ^Sabe Y. qii6 hora es en el reloj de la iglesia? Cuando yo pasaba estaban dando las once. 6. ^Ent6nces ahora deberau ser no mas que las once y vcinte 6 veinte y cinco minutos ? Creo que serdu un poco m6no8. 1. I Ha hablado Y. con mi vecino ? He ido d hacerle una visita, pero habia salido. 8. ^No habl6 Y. con la sefiora? Si, estaba en la ventana cuando yo pas6. 9. I Tiene una mano muy hermosa ? SI, pero los ojos son mas her- niosos. 10. iQu6 tenia cu la cabeza? Dos flores. 11. iQui6n llama d la puerta? La lavandera, que viene d buscar la ropa. 12. I Cudnto le dcbo d Y. ? Me debe Y. veinte y cinco centavos de la ropa de la semana pasada. 18. J No se los ha pagado.4 V. mi Tiaridof No, sellora, no tenia di- nero. 14. iDuda Y. lo que le digo? No, sefiora, lo creo. LESSOK XXVIII. 127 15. ^Esta Men lavada la ropa? Muy bien ; yo misraa la lav6. 16. ^Hizo V. la visita a su vecino ? Fui a su casa; pero habia salido. 17. ^Ya V. muchas veces al teatro? Cuando vivia en Paris iba a jnenudo ; pero aqui voy muy pocas veces. 18. I Como debemos amar al pr6jimo ? Tanto como d nosotros mismos. 19. gQuien es el projimo ? Todos los bombres son nuestros pr6jimos. 20. I Esta mala su hermana de Y. ? Si, sefiora, y de cuidado (seriously)* 21. ^Ouantas visitas le ba becbo el medico? Muchisimas. 22. I Deb en Yds. tener muclio cuidado de ella ? Si, sefiora, ya lo te- nemos. 23. I Cuantas visitas le debo yo a Y. ? Con esta son tres. 24. I No vendra Y. a comer mafiana con nosotras ? Mafiana ir6 al campo con mis vecinos. 25. ^ Habia Y. recibido la carta del Frances cuando recibi6 la mia ? La recibi despues. 26. I Porqu6 trabaja Y. tanto ? Porque es mi deber. 27. I Yendran Y. y su bermana 4 pasar una semana con nosotros ? Si, sefiora, la semana proxima vendr^mos ambos. 28. I Quien abri6 mi ventana, Juan ? Sefior, yo mismo la abrL 29. I Hablo Y. con el sastre ? Fui alia, pero habia salido. 30. I Cuando vino Y. ? Abora mismo acabo de entrar. 31. gD6nde esta mi padre ? Acaba de salir d la calle. 32. I Sabes a d6nde fu6 ? Fu6 a coraprar ropa. 38. ^Habrd ido a la Cuarta avenida? No, sefior, creo que fu6 d Broadway. 34. I Que bora es? El reloj de su cuarto de Y. acaba de dar las doce. EXERCISE. 1. What were you doing when Alexander went into your room? I was talking to my father. 2. I thought you were writing your exercises. No, I had written them already. ^ 3. Does the servant take care to sweep your room every day ? Yes, he knows very well it is his duty. 4. Why did you not come before ? you were to come at nine o'clock. I know I have done wrong in not coming earlier;^ but I have been writing all the morning. 5. Does your sister Margaret dance now as much as she used? When (she was) in the city she used to dance very much, but now she has no time. 6. When you lived in the country did you open both the doors and the windows ? J opened neither. 128 LESSON XXVIII. V. Had you finished your work before going to the concert? I had (finished it). 8. Do you doubt what I tell you ? No, sir, I never doubted anything you told me. 9. Is your neighbor afraid to open his windows in winter ? He ia not afraid to open them. 10. Who was it that went out last night after ten o'clock ? Ko one went out ; my brother came in at that hour. 11. Did Alexander go out when your cousin came in ? He had already gone out when my cousin came in. 12. Where is he now ? He has just gone out to walk. 13. Will he be very long (much time) ? He will not be long ; he is to take his Spanish lesson this evening. 14. Did you pay (make) a visit to my neighbor last week ? I went to his house, but he was not at home. 15. When did you see the pianist? He came to see me the other day, but I had gone out. 16. Do you think we shall have studied our lessons before going to thw teacher's ? I think we shall. 17. What o'clock is it by (in) your watch? It is seventeen minutes past three by mine ; what time have you ? 18. It must be (deben ser) half-past three; has the mosio teacher come ? Not yet. 19. Will you have the kindness to go to his house and Cell him I shall not take my lesson this afternoon ? With much pleasure. 20. So soon 1 Well, did you see the teacher ? No, madam, he had just gone out. 21. How much do you owe the tailor now ? I owb him very little ; you know I sent him some money last month. 22. I know (it) ; but did he not send (pasar) in anothor bill on Mon- day ? If ho has sent in another I have not seen (visto) it. 23. I thought you were in the country, Mr. Emanuel i I was there last week. 24. Why did you not come yesterday ? I saw you were writing and I feared to offend you. 25. But you know it was your duty to come in ; you knew I wanted you. Well, if you pardon me this time (vez), I shall couie in again (another time). 26. How often do you go to the theatre? Not very often now; 1 used to go every night in the week. 27. How are we to love our neighbor? As ourselves. 28. Who is our neighbor ? All mankind (men) are our neighbors. LESSOliT XXIX, 129 29. How many visits has the physician made to your uncle ? He be- gan his visits on the 30th of December, and visited him twice a week until April 4th. 80. How many visits do I owe you for now? You owed me for twelve, but you paid me for nine, and so you only owe for three now. 31. Whose letter did you receive first, mine or Jane's ? When yours came to hand (my hands), I had already received Jane's. 32. Will you take your lesson to-day? I am to go to the Central Park this afternoon with my mother, and so I shall not take my lesson until to-morrow. lesso:n^ XXIX. PEETEETT ANTEEIOE. Hube Hubiste Hubo Hubimos Hubisteis Hubieron Ver. Mirar. Esperar. 1 hablado. I aprendido. J escrito. 1 hablado. I aprendido. J escrito. Asi que. Ap6nas. No bien. Tampoco (conj.). Tambien (adverli). Tambien (conj.). Ademas. Primeramente, or en primer lu- gar. Segundamente, or en segundo lugar. Frecuente. Frecuentemente. C6modo. Comodamente. 6* I had Thou hadst He had We had You had They had "1 spoken. y learned. J written. } spoken, learned, written. To see. (See the end of the hook) To look. To hope, to wait for. As soon as. Scarcely. No sooner. Neither, not either. Also, hkewise. As well, moreover. Moreover, besides. Firstly. Secondly, &c. Frequent. Frequently. Convenient, comfortable. Conveniently, comfortably. 130 LESSON XXIX. Incomodo. Inconvenient, uncomfortable. Inc6modamente. Inconveniently, uncomfortabiy. Probable. Probable, likely. Probablemente. Probably, likely. Perfecto. Perfect. Perfectamente. Perfectly. Correcto, Correct. Correctamente. Correctly. Ojo. Eye. 1 Vista. Sight, view. Correo. Post, post-office, Comodidad. Convenience, courier. comfort. Lugar. Place. COMPO MiUa. SITION. MUe. Cuando le hube conocido le ain6. Ap^nas hubo salido 61 cuando yo entr^. No bien le hube visto cuando le conocf. Asi que hube escrito la carta la llev6 al correo. Cuando le conoci le am6. ^•Iba V. frecuentemente al teatro el afio pasado ? Iba frecuentisimamente, or muy frecuen- temente. El vive en esa casa comodamente, or* con comodidad. El escribe correcta y perfectamente ; pero V. escribe mas facilmente. When I had known him I loved him. Scarcely had he gone out when 1 came in. No sooner had I seen him than I knew him. As soon as I had written the letter I took it to the post-office. When I knew him I loved him. Did you go often to the theatre last year ? I went very often. He lives comfortably, or with comfort, in that house. He writes correctly and perfectly ; but you write more easily. EXPLANATION. 137, The PRETERIT ANTERIOR Is used to cxpress a past action or event that took place immediately before another action or event also past. It is never used except after some of the adverbs of time ; cuando^ when ; asi qtie, as soon as ; no bie7i, no sooner ; ap^nas, scarcely ; luego que, immediately after ; despues que, soon after ; as, Cuando le hube conocido. Ap6nas hubo salido cuando yo vine. No bien le hube visto cuando le conoci. When I had made his acquaintance. Scarcely had he gone out when I came. No sooner had I seen him tlian I knew him. LESSON XXIX. 131 This tense is very little used, not only for the reason already mentioned, of its being preceded by an adverb of time, but also because its place may be elegantly supplied by the pbeteeit DEFINITE ; as. Cuando le conoci. Apenas salio cuando yo vine. No bien le vi cuando le conoci. When I had knovra him. Scarcely had he gone out when I came. No sooner had I seen him than I knew him. 138. The adverbs of manner and quality, in Spanish as well as in English, are generally derived from adjectives. 139. To form an adverb from an adjective, it is sufficient to add mente to the adjective, if the latter has the same ter- mination in both genders ; as, Frecuente, frecuentewen^^. Gramatical, gramaticalmcn/e. If the adjective has a different termination for each gender, then mente is added to the feminine ; as, Inc6moda, incomodamewjfe. Perfecta, perfectamewfe. When two or more of these adverbs follow each other, only the last one takes mente, the others taking the feminine termi- nation a ; as, Ciceron hablo sabia y elocuentemen^. j Cicero spoke learnedly and eloquently. 140. These adverbs terminating in mente, being derived from adjectives, admit like these the degrees of comparison ; as, Facilmente. Mas facilmente. Menos facilmente. Tan facilmente. Muy facilmente, or facilisimamente. Easily. More easily. Less easily. As, or so easily. Yery easily, or most easily. 141. Those adverbs may, without any change in the sense, be substituted by a substantive governed by the prepo- sition con ; as, til vive comodamente, or con comodi- | He lives comfortably, dad. 132 LEB80N XXIX. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Ye V. aquella flor tan hermosa? Miro, poro no la veo. 2. I Ye V. qu6 hora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? No, pero mirar6 en mi reloj. 3. I Ha visto V. d su herraano ? Si, seflor, le vi ap^nas hubo salido del teatro. 4. ^Le conoci6 a V. mi vecino? No bien le Lube hablado, me co- nooi6. ' 5. ^Han venido mis amigos? Yinieron asi que hubo V. salido. 6. ^Le dieron 4 Y. mis libros? Me los dieron, no bien les hube hablado de ello. 7. ^ Y se marcharon muy pronto ? Se marcharon asi que hubieron escrito sus cartas. 8. I Qu6 hizo Y. despues ? Primoramente (or primero) fui al correo y despues al mercado. 9. ^Qu6 quiere Y. hacer? Primeraraente escribir los ejercicios y despues estudiar la leccion. 10. ^Porqu6 nolo hizo Y. dntes? En primer lugar porque no tenia humor j en segundo porque ap^nas tuve tiempo. 11. ^Habla Y. frances frecuentemente ? Si, sefior, lo hablo con fre- cuencia. 12. ^Lo escribe Y. correctamente ? Cuando lo estudiaba lo escribia con mas correccion que ahora. 13. ^ Aprende Y. ingl6s 6 espaflol ? Aprendo dmbos. 14. ^ Y su hermano de Y. ? Mi hermano los aprende tambien. 15. I Los hablan Yds. con perfeccion ? Si, seflor, el ingles lo hablamos perfectamente ; pero el espafiol ni yo, ni el tampoco. 16. ^Ha enviado Y. su carta al correo? No, sefior, la enviar6 ma- Ilana. 17. J La ha escrito Y. ? Tampoco la he escrito, porque quiero hacerlo con comodidad. 18. ^Ha aprendido Y. la leccion de hoy? He aprendido la de hoy y la de mafiana tambien. 19. jOudndo piensa Y. sahr para Paris? Probablemente saldr^ la semana pr6xima. 20. ^No Yive Y. c6modamente aqui ? Si, sefior, pero vivo mah c6mo- do en Francia. 21. jYivia Y. c6modamente cuando estaba en L6ndres? No, sefior, vivia inc6modamente porque no hablaba ingles. 22. jTiene Y. otro libro ademds do cse? Si, sefior, tengo otros dos 28. iEst4 Y. male de la vista? Si, sefior, tengo malo un ojo. LESSON XXIX. 133 24. I Porque no ba venido aun su primo de V. ? Porque quiere venir con comodidad. 25. ^Tiene Y. buena vista? Si, seilor, pero abora tengo los ojos maJos. 26. ^ Cuando estudia Y. sus lecciones ? Las estudio de dia porque el estudio de nocbe es malo para la vista. 27. I Donde estan sus bermanos de Y. ? Salieron a paseo no bien bu- bieron escrito sus ejercicios. 28. I Ouando escribieron las cartas ? Asi que bubieron aprendido sus 7ecciones. 29. I Llev6 Y. mis cartas al correo ? Si, sefior, asi que Y. bubo salido. 30. I Ya Y. con frecuencia al correo ? Si, seflor, voy frecuentemente : voy todos los dias. EXERCISE. 1. Did you go to tbe lawyer's as I told you ? I went as soon as you told me. 2. Was be at home ? did you see bim ? He was not in when I went ; but I waited until he came. 8. Bid you show bim tbe letter ? I opened it and showed it to bim ; but be would * not read it. 4. What did your children do after taking their lesson ? They had scarcely finished their lesson when they went to bed. 5. Did you look at the horses your brother bought on Monday. I did (look at them), and I think they are very fine. 6. Have you ever taken your family to Italy ? Yes, several times ; last year we travelled in Italy. 7. Did you spend some time in the principal cities ? Yes ; but prin- cipally in Kome (Soma), Florence (Florencia) and Milan (Milan). 8. Where were you on tbe 15th of December, 1865 ? On the 15th we were in Florence in the morning, and in Kome at night. 9. Did you all enjoy good health in Europe ? Yes, all, except (menos) Alexander, who had a sore (malo) eye the greater part of thQ time. 10. Did you go often to the theatre? We generally went every evening. ' 11. Had you any difficulty (dificultad) in understanding f tbe lan- guage? None; you know Emanuel speaks Itahan very correctly: he bad learned it before setting out for Europe. 12. Did you see many Americans when you were travelling? Yery many; some of them we knew very well, and others were friends of ours. Quiso. t Comprender. 134 LESSON XXIX. 13. Where is the letter you were writing this morning? Ab soon as 1 had finished it John took it to the post-oflace. 14. Do you ever write to your uncle ? Very little since we left New York ; but there I used to write to him very frequently. 15. Which of you three writes French the most correctly*? I know it is not I ; and as to {en cuanto d) Peter and Louis, I think Peter writes best, but Louis writes with more ease (more easily). 16. Do you see that beautiful flower? I am looking; but I do not see it. 17. Will you tell me what o'clock it is by the church clock? I am looking at the church ; but I see no clock. 18. Have you not good sight ? Yes, very good ; but I have a very sore eye. 19. Did my cousins not come ? They came as soon as you went out. 20. Did you show them my portrait ? I did ; but they scarcely had time to look at it. 21. Did they say where they were going? They said they were going to the country. 22. How long are they to be there ? They did not tell me that 23. Ai'e they not coming for me to-morrow ? Yes, sir, they are com- ing for you to go and pay a visit to Mrs. Pefiaverde. 24. Have you ever seen a more comfortable little room than this one ? Besides being comfortable it is very handsome. 25. Why do you not speak Spanish with Mr. Eiberas ? In the first place, because I do not speak it well enough ; and in the second, because he speaks English very correctly. 26. I thought you were studying Spanish ? I am studying it ; but studying and speaking are two distinct {distinto) things. 27. Did you tell the music teacher that Louisa wishes to take lessons? Not yet ; but I shall see him to-morrow and tell him so. 28. Why did you not take your lesson yesterday ? I was sick. 29. Have you studied yesterday's lesson, and to-day's ? I have studied both. 80. Will you come to-morrow at the same hour ? Probably I shall. ♦M^Jor. LESSON XXX. 136 LESSOK XXX. IMPEESONAL VEEBS. Llover. To rain. Lloviendo. Eainiag. Llovido. Eained. Indicative. Present. Llneve. It rains. Imperfect. Llovia. It was raining. Preterit definite. Llovi6. It rained. Future simple. Lloverd. It wUl rain. Compoun d Tenses. Preterit definite. Ha llovido. It has rained. Pluperfect. Habia llovido. It had rained. Anterior. Hubo llovido. It had rained. Future compound . Habrd llovido. It will have rained. Amanecer. To grow light. Anochecer. To grow dark. Diluviar. To rain like a deluge, to rain h torrents. Granizar. To hail. Helar. To freeze. Lloviznar. To drizzle. Nevar. To snow. Kelampaguear. To lighten. Tronar. To thunder. PEESONAL V3EBS U6 JED IMPEESONALLT. Bastar. To be sufficient. Haber. (Signifying) there to be. Hacer. (Signifying) to be. Ser. To be. Convenir. To suit, to be proper. Pareoer. To seem, to appear. Brasil. Brazil. Habana. Havana. Menester. Necessity. Nieve. Snow. Hielo. Ice. Lluvia. Rain. J6 LESSON XXX. Helado. Ice cream. Tarde. Afternoon Trueno. Thunder. La mafiana. Morning. Medio dia. Noon. Media noche. Midnight. Viento. Wind. Especie. Kind. COMPOSITION. ^Es necesario estudiar mucho para aprender el espanol ? Es menester estudiar mucho, pero no tanto como para aprender el inglds. En Nueva York Uueve y llovizna mucho, pero no dlluvia como en la Habana. En Madrid amanece muy temprano y anochece muy tarde en el verano. En la Habana amanece y anochece siem- pre a la misma hora, en todos los dias del ano. En el Brasil no nieva ; pero truena y relampaguea mucho siempre que llueve. En la Habana no hay hielo, porque no hace bastante frio para helar ; y por eso lo Uevan de Nueva York. En Nueva York ha helado y nevado mucho este ano ; pero en el pasado nevo y helo muy poco. I Hace mucho calor en este pais ? En los meses de Noviembre, Diciembre y Enero hace mucho frio ; pero en Junio, Julio y Agosto hace mucho calor. i Qu6 tiempo hace ? Parece que va & Hover, porque hay mucho viento y hace calor. Cuatro anos ha, or hay cuatro afios, que no veo & mi padre. Pero V. tiene esperanza de verle pron- to, porque llegar& hoy h, Nueva York en el vapor "Etna" que viene de Europa. En verano voy d pascar todos los dias al amancccr. Is it necessary to study much to learo Spanish ? It is necessary to study a great deal, but not 80 much as to learn English. In New York it rains and drizzles a great deal, but it does not rain in torrents as in Havana. In Madrid day breaks very early and night falls very late in summer. In Havana day breaks and night falls at the same hours every day in the year. In Brazil it does not snow ; but it thun- ders and lightens much whenever it rains. In Havana there is no ice, because it is not cold enough to freeze; and for that reason they take it from New York. In New York it has frozen and snowed much this year; but last year it snowed and froze very little. Is it very warm in this country ? In the months of November, December and January it is very cold ; but in June, July and August it is very warm. What kind of weather is it ? It appears it is going to rain, because it is very windy and hot. I have not seen my father for foul years. But you (have) hope to see him soon | for he will arrive to-day in New York by the steamer "Etna" (that is) coming from Europe. In summer I go to walk every morning at daybreak. LESSON^ XXX. 137 lY&Y. k la cama temprano ? No, senor, tarde ; k la media noche. I Come V. al medio dia ? No, senor, como al anochecer. ^ Va V. a la Habana ? No, senor, voy a Francia. La Francia es mas alegre que la Ingla- / terra. El muchacho estudia mucho. El estudio de la gramatica es necesario. El hombre necesita trabajar. La conversacion es muy util para apren- der una lengua. Do you go to bed early ? No, sir, late ; at midnight. Do you dine at noon ? No, sir, I dine at nightfall. Are you going to Havana ? No, sir, I am going to France. France is more pleasant than England, The boy studies much. The study of grammar is necessary. Man requires to work. Conversation is very useful for learning a language. EXPLANATION. 142. Impeesonal veebs are those which are used only in the infinitive mood and in the third person singular of all the tenses, and have no definite subject ; as, Llueve. It rains. Tronard. It will thunder. Nevaba. It was snowing. 143. The verbs amanecer and anochecer are sometimes used in the three persons, both numbers ; but then they are not impersonal, but neuter ; as, Yo amaneci en Nueva York, y ano- | I was in New York at daybreak, and chec^ en Filadelfia. | in Philadelphia at nightfall. 144. Habeb and hacee are often used impersonally, and are in such cases to be rendered into English by the corre- sponding tenses of the verb to be. The verb haber, when conjugated impersonally, has the peculiarity of taking a y in the third person of the present iiv dicative; as. Hay mucha fruta. Habra muchos hombres. Hizo frio. Hace muchos anos. . There is much fruit. There will be many men. It was cold. Many years ago. N. B. — Sd is sometimes elegantly used for 7iai/ ; as, Doce anos ha, or hay doce anos. I Twelve years ago ; 138 LESSON XXX but it is to be observed that hd always follows the time, while hay precedes it. There are many other verbs which, although not impersonal, are sometimes used as such ; as, Es muy tarde. It is very late. Es precise. It is necessary. Es menester. There is necessity. Parece. It seems, it appears. Conviene. It suits, it is proper. Basta. It is sufficient, it will do. 145. As it may have been observed, the pronoun ii^ which accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated into Spanish. Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article ; as, El muchacho estudia. I The boy studies. El estudio de la gramatica es util. J The study of grammar is useful. Nouns used in their most general sense are preceded by the article ; as, El hombre necesita trabajar. Man requires to work. La conversacion es muy util para Conversation is very useful for learn- aprender una lengua. ing a language. 146. Names of nations, countries, provinces, mountains, rivers and seasons, generally take the article ; as, La Espana. Spain. La Inglaterra. England. El inviemo. Winter. 147. Nations, countries and provinces, when preceded by a preposition, do not take the article unless they are personi- fied; as, Las provincias de Espafia. j The provinces of Spain. El valor de la Espana. | The courage of Spain. Nevertheless, the article is employed under all circumstances with the names of some places ; as. El Brasil. La Habana. El Ferrol. La China. El Japon. El Perii. Brazil. Havana, FerroU China. Japan. Peru. LESSON XXX. 139 CONYERSATION AND VERSION. 1. iQn^ tiempo hace? Ahora hace calor; antes hacia frio. 2. I Llovera maiiana ? Creo que nevara. 3. g Llueve mucho en Nueva York ? Llueve j llovizna bastante ; pero raramente diluvia. 4. I Hace mucho frio en la Habana en el mes de Enero ? Hace algu-; no, pero nunca nieva ni Mela. 5. I Relampaguea ? Relampaguea j llovizna. 6. gPorqu6 escribe Y. tantos ejercicios? Porque para aprender una lengua no basta hablarla, esnecesario tambien saber escribirla. 7. I Nieva mucho en el Brasil ? En el Brasil no nieva, mas que en las montanas, donde hay nieve todo el afio. 8. ^Quiere V. tomar un helado? No, sefior, los helados no soq buenos en este tiempo. 9. I Cuanto tiempo hace que no ve V. d su familia ? El dos de Setiem- bre proximo hard once alios. 10. 2 Porqu6 no vino Y. anoche ? Porque llovia y hacia mucho viento. 11. ^Tiene Y. miedo de los truenos? Cuando relampaguea mucho, si sefior. 12. jPorqu6 no fue Y. anoche al concierto? Porque lloviznaba y estaba nevando. 13. ^Aqu6horas come Y. ? Al amanecer tomo chocolate; al medio dia como, y al anochecer tomo el t6. 14. I Se levanta Y. al amanecer todos los dias ? Cuando es menester, si sefior. 15. I A que hora salio Y. del teatro el sdbado? A media noche. 16. ^Cuando saheron sus hermanas para el campo? Ayer al medio dia. 17. ^ Cuando volveran ? Pasado mafiana por la noche. 18. ^A que hora amanece en el verano? En verano amanece a las cinco y anochece a las siete y media. 19. ^ Porqu6 se maroha Y. tan pronto ? Porque es menester. 20. I Es menester salir al amanecer ? No, basta salir al medio dia. 21. ^Hay muchos Alcmanes en Nueva York? Si, sefior, hay muchi-/ simos. 22. I Cuahtos dias hace que no le ve Y. ? No hace mas que uno. 23. ^Hay algun Frances en sucasade Y.? Hay cuatro Franceses y una Francesa. 24. I Cuando vinieron Yds. ? Ayer al medio dia. 25. I Cree Y. qu6 llovera hoy ? Parece que si, porque hace mucho viento y mucho calor. 140 LESSON XXX. 26. ^Llovi6 mucho aqni el afiopasado? Aqui llovi6 mucho, pero en la Habana llovi6 mas. 27. ^Nieva raucho en este pais? En el invierno nieva mncho. 28. ^Se hiela el agua? Muchas veces. 29. I Habra mncho hielo el afio pr6ximo ? En el invierno babrd mn- cho hielo. 80. I Hace mncho frio ? Si, sefior, y al amanecer llovia y granizaba. 81. I Porqu6 hace tanto frio hoy ? Porque nev6 ayer, EXERCISE. 1. Is it raining ? I do not know. 2. You do not know ? How, are you still in bed ? — Yes, and I shall be until 7 o'clock. 8. At what o'clock did you go to bed? At midnight. 4. What is it necessary to do in order to learn Spanish ? It is neces- sary to study a good grammar, talk a great deal with Spaniards, and read the works of good authors. 5. What were you doiog in the garden this morning at daybreak ? I was walking. 6. Have you read the Spanish newspaper yet that I lent* yon? Yes, sir, here it is. Thank you. 7. What language do they speak in Brazil ? Portuguese (portugues). 8. Do yon see that lightning f ? Yes, it is lightening and thundering very much. 9. Is it proper to have the windows open when it thunders? No, it is better to have them shut (cerradas). 10. I think (it appears to me) it will soon rain. Yes, I think so too ; it is already drizzling. 11. John ! Sir. Is there any water in my room ? — No, sir, but if you wish, I shall take some there now. 12. In what months of the year does it freeze most in New York ? During (durante) the months of January and February. 13. I believe there is a great deal of ice used (se usa) in New York during the summer. A great deal, and it is very cheap. 14. It appears that there will be little ice next summer. Very little, the winter has not been cold enough to have much. 15. What watch is that you have there ? It is the one I always hiid. 16. I thought you had given your watch to Charles, and bought your (the) neighbor's ? No, Charles has a very pretty little watch. 17. What o'clock is it by your watch ? It is just four o'clock {son la$ ciiatro en punto). * Prostar. t Relimpaga LESSON XXXI. 141 18. Who knocked at the door just now? It was Mrs. Martinez ; it is thundering, and you know she is afraid of the lightning. 19. Why did she not come in ? She did not like to (would not) disturb you {molestarla a V.) madam. 20. Do you know whether Alexander has sent the papers to his brother yet? lt\i\nk\iQh2iS> {me parece que si). 21. Did you take him the two volumes I showed him yesterday ? I took them to him this morning. 22. Was he in the house when you went ? No, madam, he had just gone out. 23. Will you open that window, if yon please ? With pleasure. 24. And this one also ? No, thank you ; it is better to have that one shut. 25. What kind of weather is it to-day ? Very bad ; it has been raining and hailing ever since {desde) daybreak. 26. Madam, here are two beautiful bouquets that Mrs. Garcia has sent you from her garden. She is very kind (buena). 27. Who brought them ? Her servant {fern.). 28. When did she bring them? You had no sooner gone out than she came. 29. How windy it was last night! Yes, and it rained in torrents the whole night, from nightfall until daybreak this morning. 30. What news is there from Europe ? I do not know ; I have not yet seen the newspapers. LESSON XXXI. Gustar. | To like, to please. (A mi) me gusta or gustan. (A ti) te gusta " (A 61) le gusta " (A nosotros) nos gusta, or gustan. (A vosotros) OS gusta, " (A ellos) les gusta. " I like it or them. Thou likest it or them. He likes it " We like it " You like it " They like it " IMPEKFECT. (A mi) me gustaba or gustaban. I I liked it or them. (A ti) te gustaba, etc. I Thou likedst it, &c. 142 LESSON XXXI. Gustar de. Gusto de. Gustas de. Gusta de. Gustamos de. Gustais de. Gustan de. Gustaba de. Gustabas de, etc. I To be fond of. PRESENT. I am fond of. Thou art fond o£ He is fond of. "We are fond of. You are fond of. They are fond ot IMPERFECT. I was or used to be fond ofl Thou wast or used to be fond of, &c. Gustar. To taste. Placer. To please. Pesar (impersonal). To regret Pesar (in all its persons). To weigh. Faltar or hacer falta. To want. Faltar. To fail, to be wanting or missing. Acorn odar. To suit, to accommodate. Convenir. To suit, to be convenient. Importar. To be important. Cerca. Near. L6J0S. Far. Dentro. Within. Fuera. Without. Bello. Beautifiil, fine. Posible. Possible. Imposiblo. Impossible. Poeta. Pintor. Escultor. Placer. Dios. Pesar. Melon. Melocoton. Arte. Poet. Painter. Sculptor. Pleasure. God. Regret, sorrow. Melon. Peach. Ai-t, skill. Poesla. Pintura. Escultura. Prosa. Fruta. Manzana. Naranja. Artes (plu.), Arroba. Poetry, poem. Painting. Sculpture. Prose. Fruit. Apple. Orange. Arts. Arroba. LESSON XXXI, 143 COMPOSITION. g Le gusta a Y. la fruta ? Si, senor, me gustan las naranjas y los melones. A ml me gustan los melocotones y las manzanas. |Cual de las bellas artes le gusta a Y. mas? Me gustan todas, la musica, la poesia, ' la pintura y la escultura. I Ya Y. 4 la opera muy k menudo ? Yoy dos 6 tres veces por semana. Me parece que Uovera pronto, y me gusta porque tengo un gran placer en ver Hover. j Es posible ! A mf no me gusta ver llover; pero me gusta muchisimo ver nevar. (4 Le acomoda a Y. ese caballo ? No me conviene, porque es muy viejo asi que no lo comprare. I Yive Y. cerca 6 16jos de aqul ? Yivo muy cerca. I Yive Y. dentro 6 fuera de la ciudad ? Ahora en la ciudad ; pero en el verano vivo en el campo. i Qu6 le falta k Y. para ser feliz ? No me falta nada, gracias k Dios. Deseo conocer al pintor cuya pintura tiene Y. en su cuarto. I Le pesa k Y. de no haber estado en el concierto ? Me pesa mucho de no haber estado, porque no tuve el placer de ver k su amigo de Y. A ml me pesa de ello tambien. Do you like fruit ? Yes, sir, I like oranges and melons. I like peaches and apples. Which of the fine arts do you like best? I Uke them all, music, poetry, painting and sculpture. Do you go to the opera very often ? I go two or three times a week. It appears to me that it will soon rain, and I am glad of it (I like it), because I find (have a) great pleasure in see- ing it rain. Is it possible ! I do not Uke to see it rain ; but I like to see it snow. Does that horse suit you ? It does not suit (or answer) me, because it is very old, so that I shall not buy it. Do you live near here, or far away ? I Uve very near. Do you live in or out of town ? In town now, but in the country in summer. What do you want (is wanting to you) to be happy ? I want nothing, thank God. I desire (or wish) to know the painter whose painting you have in your room. Do you regret not having been at the concert ? I deeply (very much) regret not having been there, for I had not the pleasun* of seeing your friend. I regret it too (also). EXPLANATION. 148. GusTAR, derived from the noun gusto, pleasure, and signifying literally to give pleasure to, is the verb by which we 144 LESSON XXXI. translate to li7ce; but in passing from English to Spanish, the nominative case or subject becomes the objective, and the latter is preceded by the preposition d ; as, 6 Le gusta a V. la poesia ? I Do you like poetry ? Me gusta {or k mi me gusta) mucho. | I like it very much. 149. GxjSTAB, followed by the preposition de, means to he fond q/*, and sentences in which it is used are constructed as in English ; as, Yo gusto de la musica. I I am fond of music. El gusta de la poesia. | He is fond of poetry. 150. GusTAE, used as an active verb, means to taste^ and governs the objective, without the aid of any preposition what- ever; as, ^ Gusta Y. la sopa ? I Do you taste the soup ? No, senor, gusto la carne. | No, sir, I taste the meat 151. The verbs joesar, to regret; f altar, in the sense of to want, or hacerfalta, to have need of; a^omodar, to suit ; con- venir, to suit ; importar, to be important ; placer, to please, and some others, require the same idiomatic construction of the sentence as that explained in the case of gustar / as. Nos falta {or nos hace falta) dinero. A Y. le importa ese negocio. Mucho me place. We want {or are in want of) money. That business is important to you. It pleases me much. This last verb is defective, and is very little used, except in the present and imperfect of the subjunctive mood, as will be seen in the proper place. 152. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret, generally takes the preposition de after it ; as. Me pesa de ello. | I am sorry for it. CONYERSATION AND YERSION. 1. jLe gusta 4 V. la 6pera? Cuando era j6vcn me gustaba mas que ahora. 2. I Vendrd V. mafiana d comer con nosotros ? Si, sellor, no faltar6. 3. I Necesita Y. hoy su reloj ? Iloy no me hace falta, manana me convendrd tenerlo. 4. jQuiere Y. saber lo que he hecho hoy? No me importa saberlo. LESSON XXXI. 145 5. I Compra Y. el caballo del ingles ? No, sefior, no me conviene : es muj caro. 6. Dicen que es muy bueno. No importa. 7. I Porque vive V. tan l^jos de la ciudad ? Porque no me gustan veoinos. 8. Antes vivia Y. comodamente cerca de la poblacion. Si; pero ahora no me gusta. 9. I Cuantas arrobas pesa Y. ? Peso ocho arrobas y cinco libras. 10. j Ha visto Y. a su prima? No, sefior, j me pesa mucho de ello. 11. ^Cuanto pesa su nifio de Y.? No s6, porque no lo hemos pesado aun. 12. ^Quiere Y. ir d paseo con D. Carlos, nuestro vecino? No quiero ii' con 61 porque habla mucho, 7 no me gustan los habladores. 13. No obstante, el afio pasado estaba Y. en buena amistad con 6l. Si ; pero abora me pesa j me pesara siempre. 14. ^Nunca seran Yds. amigos otra \ez'( Jamas : es imposible, 15. ^Porque? No puedo decirselo a Y. 16. ^Eso no le gustara a 61 ? Nada me importa. 17. jEstan Yds. comiendo pan? No, sefior, estamos comiendo fruta, 18. ^ Gusta Y. ?* Si, com ere una manzana. 19. ^No le gustan 4 Y. los melones? Si, sefior; pero me gustan mas los melocotones y las naranjas. 20. I Quien es aquella sefiorita tan bella que paseaba ayer con Y. en el parque ? Es una amiga mia. 21. I Qu6 son los bombres que vinieron antes de ayer con Y. ? El uno es poeta, el otro pintor y escultor el otro. 22. ^Oual de las bellas artes le gusta a Y. mas? Todas me gustan; pero la poesia mas que las otras. 23. I Le gusta 4 Y. leer una bella poesia ? Si, sefior, me gusta mucho. 24. ^.Hace mucho frio hoy? Fuera hace bastante; pero dentro de casa hace muy poco. 25. I Porque no fLi6 Y. al baile anoche ? Porque no me gustan Iob bailea. 20. ^Es posible que siendo tan j5ven no le gustan a Y.? A mi me importa estudiar ; no bailar. 27. I Porqu6 no quiere Y. bailar ? Porque estoy cansado. . 28. I Qu6 es lo que le hace falta a Y. para ser feliz ? Nada me hace falta por ahora, gracias a Dios. 29. I Qu6 le falta 4 Y. ? Me falta el sombrero. 80. Aqui estl ^Se marcha Y.?— Si, sefior, si Y. no manda otra ^^^^' +00 you wish? 1 146 LESSON XXX I. EXERCISE. 1. Are your brothers and sisters fond of study ? They are not so fond of it as some children I have known. 2. Do they ever read poetry ? Sometimes, hut not very often. 3. Do you linderstand Spanish poetry ? Not yet ; but I understand prose perfectly well. 4. Do you ever eat fruit ? Yes, I am very fond of apples, oranges, peaches and melons. 6. Is that gentleman a sculptor ? No, madam, he is a painter, and enjoys a high reputation. 6. Do you know that it is raining ? Raining ! no, I did not (know it). 7. Do you think it is going to thunder ? I think it is (I think so). 8. Then it is imposible to go out ? By no means {de ningun modo) ; we are not afraid of hghtning. 9. Does it always lighten when it rains ? Not always. 10. Good morning, Mr. Retortillo, how do you do ? Very well, thank you ; and how are you (and you) ? 11. What do you wish ? I have come to see if this letter is correctly written. It is perfectly correct. 12. Who wrote that letter ? A friend of mine, who writes Spanish very well. 13. Why do you not learn Spanish yourself? I have no time, and I regret it very much. 14. What profession (profesion) do you like best? Of all professions I like that of a physician best. 15. When did you see Miss Mel6ndez ? I had the pleasure of seeing her the other day. 16. How do you like (que tat) your new piano? Very much. 17. Who is your music teacher? I have none just now; but I used to have a German teacher. 18. How much do you weigh? I weigh a hundred and sixty-five pounds {lihras). 19. Does Charles weigh as much as Alexander? No, sir, Alexander weighs twenty pounds more. 20. Is Mr. Martinez at home? No, sir, he is out. 21. When will he be in? I do not know; he did not say (it) when he was going out (al salir). 22. Does your uncle live in or out of town ? In summer he lives out of town. 23. When he is in town where does he live ? lu Twenty-second street, pear Fifth Aycpue, LESSON XXXII, 147 24. How did you spend your time when you were in the country ? I walked morning and evening, and during the day I read the beautiful poems of Zorrilla and Espronceda. 26. Have you ever read any of Martinez de la Eosa's poems ? Yes, but I do not like them so well as those of MeMndez. 26. Which is the greatest Spanish painter? Spain has had a great number of excellent painters, but the most celebrated of aU are Murillo and Velazquez. 2T. Are your cousins pleased with their new house ? I believe so ; but they say they liked the old one better. 28. Where did they live before taking the house in which they reside now ? In Fourteenth street, near Seventh avenue. 29. Are they not comfortable in the new one ? It is not for that ; but they are very fond of flowers, and they have no garden now. 30. Will you come out and take a walk with me ? Yes, if Emanuel comes with us ; if not, I shall go and practise on the piano. LESSON XXXII. Poder. {See this verb at the end of the booh) Esperar. Castigar. Engaflar. Quemar. Tratar. Tratar de. Tratar en. Seguir. (See this verb at the end of the booJc.) To be able ; may, &c. To expect, to wait for, to hope. To punish. To deceive, to cheat. To burn. To treat ; to have intercourse with. To endeavor, to try, to treat of. To deal in. To follow. ADVEEBS AND ADVERBIAL PHEASES. Casi. I Cudnto tiempo ? Cuanto dntes. De Moda. Debalde. ) Gratis. ) De cuando eu cuando. Almost, nearly. How long? As soon as possible. Fashionable. Gratis ; for nothing. From time to time ; now and then. 148 LESSON XXXII. De improviso. De veras. Verdaderarnente. En lo sucesivo. Hasta no mas. Poco a poco. Por supuesto. Tal vez. ) Acaso. Picaro. Bribon. Ejemplo. Eogue (roguish). Rascal. Example ; instance. Suddenly, unexpectedly, un- awares. Indeed, truly. In future. To the utmost, to the extreme. Little by little, by degrees, gently.. Of course. Perhaps. Coqueta. Coquette. Sociedad. Society. Politica. Politics. COMPOSITIOX. y Mi hermano cs castigado algunaa veces por no saber sus lecciones. Y su amigo de V. Alejandro, ^ lo es al- guna vez ? Lo es de cuando en cuando ; pero mi hermana no ha sido castigada jam&s, porque sabe siempre sus lecciones. " ^ Ha sido V. enganado alguna vez ? Hasta no mas, porque hay muchos pi- caros en la sociedad. Esta casa est4 bien situada. La carta estaba mal escrita. Manuel es amado de {or por) Margarita. El libro ha sido escrito por un Frances. Se quemd {or fu6 quemada) la casa. Esta casa so hizo en seis i En cuanto tiempo so liizo la do V. ? En cosa de tres meses. I Cu&nto tiempo neceeita V. para escri- bir esa carta ? Esta casi acabada ; estoy con Y. en un minuto. "^ Poco k poco ; va V. muy aprisa. 'J Tal vez ; pero tengo prisa y quiero aca- bar pronto. My brother is sometimes punished for not knowing bis lessons. And your friend Alexander, is he ever punished (ever so) ? He is, now and then ; but my sister has never been pimished, because she always knows her lessons. Have you ever been deceived ? To the utmost, for there are a great many rogues in society. This house is well situated. The letter was badly written. Emanuel is loved by Margaret. The book was written by a Frenchman. The house was burnt This house was built (made) in six months. How long was yours in building (mak- ing) ? About three months. How long shall you be in writing that letter ? It is almost finished ; I shall be (am) with you in a moment (minute). Gently : you go very quick. Perhaps so ; but I am in hast«, and 1 want to get done (finish) soon. LESSON XXXII. 149 I De veras ? Por supuesto : tengo que ir al correo. » Dios esta en todas partes, lo sabe y lo puede todo, y nos perdonara si trata- mos de hacer nuestro deber. \/ 6 Es su reloj de V. de moda ? V Si, senor ; pero no me gusta, porque es muy pequeno. Indeed ? Of course : I have to go to the post- office. God is everywhere; He knows all things, and nothing is impossible for Him (can do all); and He will pardon us, if we endeavor to do our duty. Is your watch fashionable ? Yes, sir ; but I do not like it, because it is too small. EXPLANATION. 153. Passive Voice. — This voice is formed by the different tenses of the auxiliary ser added to the past participle of the verb, care being taken that the participle agree with the sub- ject, in gender and number, like an adjective ; as, Soy amado. Hemos sido amados. Habeis sido amados. Seras amada. I am loved. We have been loved. You have been loved. Thou wilt be loved. (or). The passive voice is, however, formed in Spanish, by estar, instead of ser, when the past participle is used adjective- ly, that is to say, when the state or condition of the subject is described without any reference to an action ; as, Esta casa esid bien siiuada. j This house is well located. La carta esiaha mal escrita. | The letter was badly written. 154. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in the present and imperfect of the indicative mood, only when it is designed to express a mental act ; as, Manuel es amado de Margarita. | Emanuel is loved by Margaret. When a mental act is not expressed, the passive verb being in the present or imperfect of the indicative mood, estar is the auxiliary to be used, and not ser ; as, El libro ha sido escrito por un Fran- ces, or el libro estd escrito por un Frances (instead of es escrito). 155. When the action of the verb refers to the mind, the The book was written by a French- man. 150 LESSON XXXII. preposition de orpor may be used after the passive verb, before the agent, and por only, when otherwise ; as, Manuel es amado de (or por) Marga- I Emanuel is loved by Margaret rita. I 156. The passive voice in English is very frequently turned into Spanish by putting the verb which is in the parti- ciple past in English, in the same person and number as the auxiliary to be in the English sentence, and placing the pronoun se before it. 157. The latter form is preferred when the object, or re- ceiver, of the action is an inanimate thing, or when the sub- ject, or agent, remains undetermined ; as, The house was burnt. This house was built (made) in six months. Se quem6 la casa. Esta casa se hizo en seis meses. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^N"© puede Y. esperar? Esperar6 un poco. 2. I No me engafiara V. ? Por supnesto que no ; yo no soy ningun picaro. 3. Buenos dias. i De qu6 estan Vds. tratando ? — Estabamos hablando de modas. 4. I Puede Y. decirme si mi sombrero es de moda ? No es de la tilti- ma (moda). 6. i, Cuanto tiempo hace que pas6 esta moda ? Habrd ya un mes, poco mas 6 m6no3. 6. I Quiere Y. quemar las cartas de esa sefiorital Si, sefior, porqtfe es una coqueta. 7. jDe veras? Yo creia que era una seflorita de mucha circuns- peccion. Hace aJgun tiempo lo era ; pero poco 4 poco ha ido siguiendo el ejemplo do otras. 8. I Tal vez el aer coqueta es de moda en la sociedad del dia ? Asi lo creo. 9. Y. dobe excusar d las niflas ; ellas son inocentes y no creen hacer mal en eso. 10. jHa sido Y. engaflado alguna vez? Hasta no mas; porque hay muchos picaros. 11. ^Ilan sido castigados sus niflos de Y.? Si, sefior, ban sido casti- gados por no saber sus lecciones. LESSON XXXII. 151 12. ^Y aquel criado tan bueno que V. tenia? Es un bribon; no lo quiero ni de balde. 13. gDe veras? V. lo trataba muj Men. Acaso por lo mismo que yo lo trataba bieD, me ha tratado 61 tan mal. 14. I Le gusta a V. la sociedad ? Si, seiior, de cuando en cuando. 15. g Porqu6 no vive V., entonces, en la ciudad? Porque se me querad la casa. 16. ^Ouanto tiempo hace? Casi un mes. 17. Y ahora, i no va V. nunca alia ? Yoy de cuando en cuando. 18. Eso es verdaderamente un gran mal ; pero en lo sucesivo tendra V. mas cuidado. — Por supuesto que si. 19. gNo pudo V. saber quien le quem6 la casa? No; pero creo que fue un bribon, que me queria mal. 20. I Quiere Y. acabar ya? Si, cuanto antes ; no puedo esperar mas. 21. I Qu(§ piensa Y. liacer ahora ? Trato de castigar al que me quem6 la casa. 22. ^Y despues? Despues ver6 si puedo hacer otra. 23. ^ Y no tiene Y. ahora ninguna alia ? Tengo una hecha de impro- viso. 24. Poco a poco ira Y. haciendo otra. Asi lo espero. 25. ^Por supuesto que su sefiora vivira en la ciudad? Si; pero va alia de cuando en cuando ; el otro dia llego de improviso, cuando menos la esperaba. 26. I No puede Y. volver mafiana por aqui ? Mafiana tal vez no, pero pasado si. 27. Entonces lo espero a Y. sin falta. Puede Y. esperarme ; no faltar6. 28. ^Ira Y. hoy a la comedia 6 4 la 6pera? Tal vez ire d la 6pera, porque es mas de moda. 29. I ISTunca va Y. 4 la comedia ? Si ; voy de cuando en cuando. 80. I Sabe Y. que se ha quemado la Academia (academy) de Mdsica ? Si ; anoche lo lei en los periddicos. EXERCISE. 1. Papa, may I go out ? Yes, you may go out for half an hour. 2. How long is it since your house was burnt ? Only three weeks. 3. Why does that woman punish her children so much? She al- ways punishes them when they do wrong (pbrar mal). 4. Does she reward {recompensar) them when they do right ? I be- lieve she does. 5. Why do you burn all that young lady's letters ? Because she is only a coquette. 152 LESSON xxxn. 6. I tliink you are not rigLt ; I have known her a long time, and I believe she is very circumspect {circumspecta). 7. Why do your family alwaysT live in the country ? Because we do not like society. ^ 8. And is it not possible to live in town without going into society? It is impossible. 9. We always live in town, and yet {nn erribargo) we never go into society. 10. Peter, can you write that letter for me now ? I can. 11. When do you want it? As soon as possible. v 12. Have you ever been deceived by that man? Yes, very often ; he is a rascal. 13. How long have you known him ? Kot long ; but each time I have V had business with him, he has deceived me. 14. Indeed! What business is he in ? I cannot tell you. 15. Do you often go to the theatre ? Never to the theatre ; I go to the opera now and then. 16. Can you tell me whether my hat is fashionable? Yes, it is in the latest fashion. 17. Is Peter's the fashion too? No, those hats went out of fashion last year. 18. Where is your old servant ? He lives with us no longer. 19. Did you give Charles the fruit you were to buy for him ? No, he came for it tlie other day, but I had not had time to buy it. 20. Why did you come so late to-day to your lesson ? My exercise was very difficult, and I could not finish it in time. 21. Well, I hope you will come in time in future ? Yes, in future I shall come at four o'clock precisely. 22. I hope you will not deceive me ? Of course I shall not ; I never deceive anybody. 23. Will that yoang gentleman * be at the concert with you to-morrow night? Perhaps he will come with us. 24. Does he not go every night ? Indeed I do not know. 25. How long is it since you began to take lessons? About {cerca de) four months. 26. And do your brother and sister take their lessons at the same hour as you ? No, my brother takes his at ten o'clock, and ray sister at twelve. 27. Where did you become acquainted with the gentleman who danced last with your cousin {fern.) yesterday evening ? I made his acquaint- ance in Madrid the year before last (hace dos aflos). 28. Has this young man deceived you as often as his father? He has; Caballerito. LESSON XXXIII. 153 you know cMldren almost always follow the example of their parents {padres). 29. Do you think Charles is loved by Louisa? I think she loves him as much as it is possible to love. 30. "What did you tell the tailor ? I told him you wanted your coat and vest for tlie day after to-morrow. LESSON XXXIII Lavars^. Haber«(3 lavado. Haber«6 de lavar. Lavandos, the c is changed into z before a and o; as. Veneer. Venzo (instead of venco). Resarcir. Resarzo (instead of resarco). To vanquish. I vanquish. To indemnify. I indemnify ; and lastly, those in gar take a u after the g and before e ; as, Pagar. | To pay. Pagw6 (instead of pag6). | I paid. For the same reason delinquir changes qu into c, before a and o ; as, ddinco, delinca, ddincarnos ; and escogery to choose, changes the g into J before a and o ; as, escojo, escoja, 163. The verbs which terminate in eer, as creer, to believe ; leer, to read ; pafeer, to possess ; proveer, to provide, in those terminations which contain an i, change it into y whenever it is to be joined with another vowel ; as, crei, creyd ; le% leyeron ; posei, poseyere ; provei, proveyeremos, &c. 164. The same change is made in the verbs ending in uir, when the w and the i make a part of two diflferent syllables. Thus huir, to fly, makes, in the third person of the preterit defi- nite, huyd ; argUir, to argue, makes arguyd, c? person plural of the present of the indicative mood, in the present of the subjunctive, and in the imperative. (See list of the irregular verbs at the end of the book.) In all the other tenses and moods those verbs are regu- lar, and the learner can easily form them according to their respective conjugations. 166. Pagar may take for its direct object either the value paid or the thing paid for, while the person paid is the indi- rect object. JPor may be used before the thing paid for ; as, Pago los caballos, or pago por los caballos. Pago mil pesos por los caballos. Pago al comerciante mil pesos jwr los caballos. I pay for the horses. I pay a thousand dollars for the horses. I pay the merchant a thousand dol- lars for the horses. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. I Accrtara Y. la casa de su prima ? Si, sefior, yo la acertar6. 2. I Podra Y. acertar qui^n estuvo aqui ayer ? No acierto. 3. I No entiende su hermano de Y. lo que le digo ? Si, sefior ; pero DO acierta d responder. 4. I Se calienta Y. al faego ? Si, sefior, porque hace mucho frio. 5. ^Porqu6 no cierra Y. entonces la pue5*ta? Confieso que no habia pensado en ello. 6. ^ A que hora despert6 Y. esta niafiana? Despert6 A las diez. 7. J El que gobierna una casa y una familia, no debe levantarse tem- prano? No lo niego. 8. ^Pietisa Y. merendar hoy? Si, sefior, nosotros merendamos todos los dias. 164 LESSON XXXIV. 9. ^Porqud no se sienta V. en aquella silla, que es mejor? Porquo tengo miedo de romperla. 10. I Le pag6 V. d su criado ? Si, sefior, le pagu6 ayer y hoy se ha huido. 11. jNo le perdonara V. ? No, sefior, porque quien delinquid una vez delinquira dos. 12. ^Y no se resarci6 de su trabjyo? Si, sefior, dntes sq provey6 do ropa en mi casa. 13. ^ Qu6 lenguas posee 61 ? El ingles, el frances y el italiauo. 14. I Qui^n posee ahora la casa de campo de Y. ? El americano la posee. 15. ^Se la ha pagado a V. ? No, sefior, no me pag6 nada. 16. ^Compro V. flores al jardinero? Le compr6 verdnras y mi her- mana le compr6 flores. lY. ^Le pagaron Vds. al jardinero por ellas? Yo le pagu6 las verdn- ras y mi hermana pag6 por las flores. 18. ^ A quidn le gustan mas las flores, 4 V. 6 d su hermana? Creo que 4 ella le gustan mas las flores; pero d mi me gusta mas la fruta. 19. ^ Qu6 fruta le gusta a V. mas ? Me gustan las naraiyas y las man- zanas. 20. ^Paga V. siempre sus deudas? Las page cuando tengo dinero. 21. ^Piensa V. ir al campo este verano ? Deseo ir & cualquiera parte, porque confieso que tengo mucho miedo del colera. 22. ^ No tiene V. vergiienza de confesarlo ? Hay muchos que niegan tener miedo ; pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo francamente. 23. ^A qu6 hora despert6 V. ayer? Ayer, creo que despert^ a laa cinco. Despierto todos los dias d las cuatro y media. 24. ^ Y a qu6 hora se desayuna V. ? Me desayuno a las siete, meriendo d las dos y como d las seis. 25. I Me promete V. venir hoy d comer conmigo ? No puedo prome- t6rselo, porque no sd si tendrd tiempo. EXCERCISE. 1. How cold it is this morning! Yes, it is very cold. 2. Will you not come and warm yourself at the fire ? No, thank you ; I do not like to warm myself at the fire. 3. In that case it is better to shut the doors and the windows. Perhaps it is* 4. Do you intend remaining (estarse) here during the winter? If my uncle remains, I will too. 5. Will you not choose other rooms if you remain ? Yes, I intend to do so. * English words prlDtod in italica do not reqaire to be translated Into Spanish. LESSON XXXIV. 165 6. Good evening, Charles ; will yon not sit down for a few minutes ? With pleasure. 7. Did you find out (make out) the musician's house yesterday ? I made out the house without much difficulty, but I did not see him. 8. How was that ? He must have been out, for I knocked at his door. 9. At what hour do you dine? I generally dine at six o'clock. 10. Then you lunch at noon ? Yes, sir, I generally lunch about tliat hour. 11. Do you eat fcuit every day at dinner? Not every day. 12. Did your brother pay for the fruit he bought last week ? No ; but he has to go out to-morrow, and perhaps he will go and pay for it. 13. Let us go and take a walk. Where do you wish to go ? 14. We can go to the Central Park. Yery well, let us go there ; I think it is the finest promenade in the city. 15. At what time do they open the park in the morning? I beHeve it is open in summer at five o'clock: 16. And at what time is it shut? At eleven o'clock, I believe, or per- haps a little later. 17. In that case it will be better not to go there until to-morrow ; it is now rather too late {algo tarde). 18. How too late? It is only half-past seven, so that we have three hours and a half for walking. 19. Where are they taking that man to ? They are taking him to prison {la cdrceV). 20. What are they taking him to prison for ? He must be guilty of ^ome misdemeanor (delinquir), 21. Has the servant taken the letter to the pianist yet ? He took it to him yesterday afternoon. 22. Have you seen the news this morning ? No ; what news is there ? 23. There was a great fire last night in Fourth street, and twelve houses were burned. 24. Where is Alexander ? He is up stairs. 25. Have any of you seen my Spanish dictionary? Yes, I had it this morning in my room. 26. What were you doing with it? I was looking for a new word which I met with * while reading the history you lent me. 27. How did you manage (aeertar) to wake so early this morning ? My brother awoke me singing in my room, at five o'clock. 28. At what time do you generally wake ? If no one comes to inter- rupt {interrumpir) my sleep, I never wake before nine. * English words in UaUca do not require to be translated. 166 LESSON XXXV. 29. Is it not better for the health to rise early ? Certainly; but then it is necessary to go to bed early also. 30. "Why do you not go to bed early ? I am fond of reading and study, and so I rarely go to bed before two o'clock in the morning {de la mO' drugada). Acostar. LESSON XXXV. IRREGULAR Y^BB^— Continued, I To put in bed. INDICATIVE. Acuesto, acuestas, acuesta. Acostaraos, acostais, acuestan. ■Present. 1 put in bed, &c. We put in bed, &o IMPEEATIVE. Acuesta tti, acueste ^1, acoste- Put in bed, &c. mos nosotros, acostad voso- tros, acxiesten eUos. SUBJUNCTIVE. — Present. Acueste^ acuestes^ acueste^ acos- l I may, or can, put in bed, &o» temos, acosteis, acuesten. VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE ACOSTAR. Acostarse. Aprobar. Almorzar. Contar. Oonsolar. Encontrar. Mostrar. Probar. Recordar. Reprobar. Rogar. Sonar. Delicioso. Espacioso. Industrioso. Religioso. To go to bed, to lie down. To approve. To breakfast. To count ; to relate, or tell. To console. To meet To show. To prove ; to try ; to taste. To remind ; to remember. To reprove. To entreat To dream. Delicious. Spacious. Industrious. Religious. LESSOiq- XXXV. 16? Aristocratico. Aristocratic. Clasico. Classic. Fanatico. Fanatic. Monarquico. Monarchical. Tiranico. Tyrannical. Tragico. Tragic. Portico. Poetical. Analitico. Analytical. Satii-ico. Satirical. rilos6fico. Philosophical. C6mico. Comic, comical. Econdmico. Economical. Lac6iiico. Laconic. Metodico. Methodical. Cr6iiico. Chronic. Yaso. Tumbler, glass. Taza. Cup. Sermon. Sermon. Moral. Moral. Mundo. World. Republica. Republic. Capital 0. Chapter. Independencia. Independence. Perro. Dog. COMPOS Religion. Religion. ITION. Manuel, acuestate temprano y levantate temprano tambien. Alejandro, cuentame lo que te dijo Luisa. >/Ayudate y Dies te ayudar^. Ama 4 tu projimo como a ti mismo. V S6 religiose, pero no seas fanatico. V S6 industrioso y economico y no seras pobre. Sentemonos, que estoy cansado. Amaos como hermanos y no hableis mal uno del otro. Entre Y., Dn. Pedro, y tome V. asiento, or si6ntese Y. No puedo, estoy de prisa. Juan, cierra la puerta, pero no cierres la ventana. Caballeros, entren Yds., y les mostrar^ mis libros. Alejandro, confiesa tu falta y te la per- cionar^. Emanuel, go to bed early and rise early too. Alexander, tell me what Louisa told thee. Help thyself, and God will help thee. Love thy neighbor as thyself. Be religious, but not a fanatic. Be industrious and economical and thou shalt not be poor. Let us sit down, for I am tired. Love each other as brothers, and speak no evil one of another. Come in, Mr. Peter, take a seat, or be I cannot, I am in a hurry. John, shut the door, but do not shut the window. Come in, gentlemen, and I shall show you my books. Alexander, confess your fault, and I will pardon you. 168 LESSON XXXV \ No los ofendamos. Amigos, cantemos y bailemos y seamos felices. No tomaras en vano el Nombre del Se- nor tu Dios Let us not offend them. My friends, let us sing, dance and be merry. Thou shalt not take the Name of the Lord thy God in vain. EXPLANATION. 167. The verb acostar changes the radical o into ue in the same tenses and persons as those in which the verb acertar is irregular; ^. €., in the present indicative, the imperative and the present subjunctive. {See this verb and those conjugated like it at the end of the hooJc). 168. The imperative mood is not used in the first person singular ; nor is it used in Spanish for forbidding ; that is, it is not employed in the negative form; but the persons of the present subjunctive are used when a negative command or a prohibition is expressed ; as, No lo hagas. ) I ^ , ,-r , , . >• Do not do so. No lo hagais. J | 169. As has already been said, the s of the first person plural, and the d of the second, are suppressed before nos and OS; as, Am^monos. I Let us love each other. Amao«. I Love one another. 170. When the imperative is negative in English, as the subjunctive is employed in Spanish, the objective pronouns are placed before it ; as, No lo digas. I Do not tell it. No los ofendamos. | Let us not offend them. 171. The future of the indicative is often used for the im perative; as, No tomaras en vano el Nombre I Thou shalt not take the Name of del Sefior tu Dios. | the Lord thy God in vain. 172. Many adjectives ending in o^is are rendered into Spanish by changing tliis termination into oso ; as, Delicioso. I Delicious. Espacioso. | Spacious, &;c. LESsoir XXXV. 169 173. Many nouns and adjectives ending in English in ic or ical have in Spanish the termination ico ; as, Fsjiktico, j Fanatic, fanatical Foetico. J Poetic, poetical CONYERSATION AND VERSION. 1. Luisa, estudia bien tu leccion de espafiol y escribe los ejercicios. 2. I Que me dara V., papa, si la estudio bien. y no hago faltas en los ejercicios? Te Uevare conmigo al Parque Central 3. Papa, I no llevara Y, a Alejandro y a Manuel con nosotros ? Si son buenos muchachos y estudiosos los Uevare tambien. 4. Alejandro, ven aca y cuentame que hiciste ayer en el campo. — Con mucho gusto. Por la mafiana me levants temprano, me lave y almorc6 y despues me fui a pasear. Volvi muy cansado y me acost6 k las nueve. 5. I Juan ! i Seiior ? Mafiana me despertaras a las cinco, me limpia- rds las botas y me traeras el caballo temprano, porque quiero ir a ^ar un paseo y toraar un vaso de leche en el hotel del Parque Central, 6. Araigo mio, no seas fanatico, pero s^ religioso. No seas satirico ni hablador, pero s§ prudente, econ6mico 6 industrioso y seras feliz. 7. Por Dios, Don Pedro, no hable V. mas, le prometod V, estudiar y ser buen muchacho. 8. No seas respondon, haz tu deber, ayiidate y Dios te ayudani 9. Don Pedro, a mi no me gustan los sermo.nes largos, si^ntese V. y hablemos de otra cosa. 10. Mire V., Dn. .Juan, d aquella sefiorita que est^ en la ventana del vecino ; jla conoce V. ? Si, sefior, la conoci en Filadelfia. 11. jQu6 tal le gusta d V.? MucMsimQ; es una sefiorita perfecta, y habla el espafiol tan bien como el ingles. 12. g Quiere V. llevarme d su casa? Tengo deseo de conocerla. — Con mucho gusto, pero antes neoesito su aprobacion. 13. gLe araan a V. muoho sus nifios? Me aman y yo los amo; y toda la familia nos amamos los unos d los otros, asi es que somos felicisimos. 14. ^ Se aman Yds. los unos a los otros tanto como se aman Yds. mis- mos ? Oreo que si. 15. Hable Y. alto y despacio si Y. gusta y ent6nces entendere todo lo que Y. dice. — Asi lo har6 ; pero Y. no pensara en otra cosa que en lo que yo digo, porque si no, no hablar6 mas, 16. ^Le conviene a Y. comprar aquella casa? No me conviene, por- que es muy cara y estd muy 16jos de la ciudad. 17. ^Qu6 le parece a Y. del tiempo? Hoy es el cuatro de Julio do 8 170 LESSON XXXV. 1866, y por snpnesto hace calor; pero hace nrny bnen tiempo para la celebracioii de la independencia de esta gran Reptiblica. 18. i Cuantos alios hace hoy que los Estados Unidos celebran sa inde- pendencia ? Noventa y un afios. 19. I Parece imposible ! En m^nos de cien anos ha llegado esta nacion 6 ser una de las potencias (powers) mas grandes del mundo. 20. Eso debia ser asi, y no dude V. que llegara un dia en que la liber- tad y la religion reinaran en el mundo haciendo felices & todas las na- ciones como d otras tantas familias que tienen un mismo padre. EXERCISE. 1. Did you get up late to-day ? No ; I got up at daybreak to go and walk in the country. 2. Where did you walk? I went first to the Central Park, and then to Ilarlcm. 3. What is the first thing we read in Telemachus ? We read that Calypso could not console herself for the departure (partida) of Ulysses. 4. Where have you been all this time, sir ? it is more than a week since you last came to see us ; that is not right {estar lien). I confess I am rather negligent (negUgente) sometimes. 5. You have doubtless already gone to see your old friend? Yes, and he wanted to make me spend a month with him at his country house. 6. What part of the country does he live in ? On Long Island, about ten miles from the city. 7. Was he not glad to see you ? We looked at each other for about ten minutes without being able to say a word ; at last {en fin) he broke the silence {rompio el 8ilencio\ and said to me : " What 1 is it you, my dear friend? After seven years' absence (ausencia) I How glad I am I 8. Did he know you as soon as he saw you ? Yes, and I knew him, though I met him at some distance from his father's house. Q. Doubtless he asked you about your travels (voyages) ? Of course. " Where have you been ? " said he. " What have you done ? what have you seen? are you rich? arc you happy? Tell me all you have done eince you went away (me); all your adventures. I wish it; I desire it; T beg of you ; it will give (you will do) me the greatest pleasure.'* 10. All that proves his joy at seeing you. yes, I know that; but how many questions I 11. Did he want an answer to each one of them? Of course; and I answered them as well as I could. 12. What did you tell him? I told him that after having left France, LESSON XXXVI. 171 I went to Spain, and from there into Portugal {Portugal)^ and tliat after a few months passed in Lisbon {Lishoa) I went on to Italy, where I re- mained four years. 13. What are the hours for breakfast and dinner amongst the Italians? The Italians, like the French, usually (generally) breakfast at eleven o'clock, and dine from five to seven in the evening. 14. And do they never eat anything before the breakfast hour ? Al- most everybody takes a cup of coffee or chocolate in the morning soon after rising. ' 15. What kind of governments are there in Europe? In Europe we find almost every form {forma) of government, repubhcan and monar- chical. 16. What is that book you have in your hand? An analytical treatise {tratado) of Spanish poetry that I was going to show to your cousin. 17. Have you seen Boileau's satirical poems? My uncle has promised to bring me that work from Paris. 18. Are you fond of reading? Yes, I take (find) great pleasure in reading books of all kinds, classical, poetical, religious, analytical, satiri- cal, philosophical, e ha entendido ; creo que debe hablarse de todo, pero no siempre del tiempo. EXERCISE. 1. Why do you not come quicker when I call you? I cannot come any quicker, my head aches. 2. Where do you think Spanish is spoken best? In Madrid, and in all parts of Old and New Castile {Costilla). 3. And is it not well spoken in South America? There is some difference in the pronunciation; but, in general, persons of education speak correctly, whether they bet South Americans or Spaniards. 4. William, will you be good enough to take this letter to the post- office when you are going to take 'your lesson? I shall take it in the afternoon, I have not time now. 5. Are there many organists in the United States?' Yes; and in New York, principally, there are a great many excellent organists and pianists. 6. Do you like that man's manner of speaking? No, I do not; ho is too much of a* purist. 7. Is your brother studying natural history? I cannot tell you * Euglibh words io italics not to be traaslaled into SpauLsb. t Ya scan. LESSON XXXVI. 177 ■whether (si) he is studying it or not; but I know he has just bought the complete works of Buffon. 8. Who is Buffon ? A celebrated French naturalist. 9. What did that man do that was taken to prison this morning? They say he was arrested (arrestar) for cruelty to animals. 10. Will he be punished for it? Of course; transgressors of that kind are rarely let off unpunished (pardoned). 11. What is the matter with Alexander ? A dog bit him in the hand. 12. Come here, Alexander; show me your hand. Is this the one? No, it is the other. 13. Does it pain you much ? It was very sore (pained) when I got bitten, but now it is less painful. 14. I have always told you how necessary it is to take care with dogs. I know that ; and I shaU do so in future. 15. Does your new watch go well ? Not very well ; it stops (itself) three or four times a day. 16. Is your son getting on well in his studies? Pretty well; he has a great deal of capacity, and is fond of study. 17. Look here, Charles. What do you wish? 18. Count from one to a thousand in Spanish. Oh! I can do that with the greatest ease. 19. Well, let us see ? One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty-one, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, a hundred, a hundred and one, two hundred, three hun- dred, four hundred, five hundred, six hundred, seven hundred, eight hundred, nine hundred, a thousand. 20. How do they write that last word in Spanish ? I do not remember. 21. What is that? you do not remember 1 Did you not learn in the lesson on pronunciation, at the beginning of the grammar, that in Spanish every word is written just as it is pronounced? Oh, yes, now I remember. 22. Tell me, if you please, Mr. R., is French as easy to pronounce as Spanish ? They say it is much more difficult, on the contrary. 23. But it is not impossible to learn French pronunciation ? I did not say that ; I only said that they say it is more difficult than Spanish pro- nunciation. 24. How do I pronounce? Very well ; but, when reading or speaking, take a little more care with the z. 25. Please to pronounce the name of that letter again (to return to pronounce)? With the greatest pleasure ; it is called z. 26. What other letter (letra) is pronounced like (the) z f C^ when it comes (finds itself) before an e or an i. 178 LESSON XXXVII. LESSON XXXVII. Subir. Atender. To go, or come np, to ascend. To attend. INDICATIVE — Presen t. Atiendo, atiendeSy atiendey aten- I I attend, &c. demos, atendeis, atienden, I IMPERATIVE. Atiende td, atienda el, atenda- mos nosotros, atended voso- tros, atiendan ellos. Attend, &c SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. Atienda, atiendas, atienda, aten- I I may, or can, attend, &c. damos, atendais, atiendan. I Verbs conjugated like atendeb. A scender. Descender. Defender. Entender. Encender. Perder. Alegrarse. Charlar. Hallar. Llegar. Enviar. Preparar. Con tal que. Puesto que. Dado caso que. Hasta. Aun cuando. Por tanto. Por cuanto. A m6nos do. A m6nos qu To ascend, to mount. To descend. To defend. To understand. To light, to kindle. To lose. ;.( To be glad, to rejoice. To prattle, to chat. To find. To arrive. To send. To prepare. CONJUNCTIONS. On condition that ; provided (that). Since, inasmuch as ; supposing that. In case. Until, till. Even, although. Therefore. Seeing that, for. Unless. LESSON XXXVII. Tambien. Also, too. Ademas. Moreover, besides. Ya. Whether, either. Tampoco. Neither. Ojala. Steamer. Would to God, God grant. Vapor. Altura. Height. Globo. Balloon. Friolera. Trifle. Eesfriado. Cold. Estada, perma- Stay, perma- nencia. nence. COMPOSITION. 179 Deseo que este estudiando su leccion. Oreo que la estd estudiando, ^ Piensa Y. que tiene razon ? No pienso que la tenga. %/No lo creere aunque me lo digan mil. Lo creo aunque el lo nicga. Dudo que venga hoy. ^ Dudo que faaya venido. Dado caso que V. no me encuentre en casa, esp6reme Y. hasta que venga. Asi lo hare con tal que V. me prometa volver pronto. \/ Volvere tan pronto como pueda. Temo que no haya recibido mi carta. i Ojala no la reciba r pero yo temo que la recibira. ^A menos que Y. venga primero k ver- me, yo no ire a verlo k V. Puesto que 61 haya venido, ^ le hablara v.? Aunque haya venido no le hablare an- tes que el me hable. ^, I wish that he may be studying his lesson. I think he is studying it. Do you think he is right ? I do not think he is. I will not believe it though a thousand tell it to me. I believe it, although he denies it. I doubt whether he will come to-day. I doubt his having come. In case you should not find me at home, wait for me till I come. I will do so, on condition that you promise me to come back soon (or quickly). I shall return as soon as I can. I fear he has not received my letter. God grant that he may not receive it ! but I fear he will (receive it). Unless you come first to see me, I will not go to see you. Supposing that he has come, will you speak to him ? Although he may have come I will not speak to him before he speaks to me. EXPLANATION. 179, Atendee, to attend, and all the verbs conjugated like it, take an before the last e of the radical letters, in the same tenses and persons as the verb acertar^ and the same tense in which acostar and mover change the o into ue ; i. e., in the first, 180 LESSON XXXVII. second and third persons singular, and third plural of the present indicative, the present subjunctive, and the imperative. {See, at page 394, this verb and those conjugated like it.) 180. Subjunctive Mood. — Unlike the indicative, this mood cannot of itself express an action or mode of being in such a manner as to form complete sense ; but its signification is de- termined by another verb, to which it is subordinate, as its name indicates,* and by which it is goveraed, usually with the help of a conjunction, such as que, aunque, or a conjunctive ex- pression, such as d Jin de que, con tal que, &c. As none of the moods of the English verb correspond ex- actly to the Spanish subjunctive; and as the tenses of the latter are often employed to express, in the Castilian language, ideas which, in English, are conveyed by those of the indica- tive or the potential, and, not unfrequently, by the infinitive, learners experience much difficulty in determining when the subjunctive is to be used. Were we to give all the rules neces- sary for the correct application of this mood, a whole volume might be filled ; we shall, however, give here those most likely to guide the student in all ordinary cases. 181. The subordinate verb is put in the subjunctive when the leading verb means admiration, wish, will, desire, consent, prohibition, hinderance, necessity, command, doubt, regret, joy, "Mefulness, contentment, hope, fear, surprise, ignorance, prefer- ence, negation, permission, sorrow, &c. The subjunctive mood is here required because we are not positive that what we wish, command, &c., will be accom- plished ; but the same verb which governs the subordinate one in any of the tenses of the subjunctive, when the accomplish- ment of the action is doubtful, governs it in any of those of the indicative when the action is regarded as certain to take place ; as, D6selo V. & lo8 que ) , ^ , hat/an vemuo. ) -^ Ddselo V. h los ciiatro ) _, X ., y Certain. que nan venido. ) In the first example, the verb is put in the subjunctive, be- • Suhjunctlvc, sometliJng joined, in a subordinate manner, to what has already been said Give it to those who (may) have come. Give it to the four who have (or arc) come. LESSON XXXVII. 181 cause the speaker is not positive how many have come, or whether any have as yet come. In the second, the indicative is employed, because the speaker is certain of the arrival of the persons alluded to, and also of their number. 182. There are in Spanish certain conjunctions which re- quire the subjunctive mood after them, on account of the in- detinite and uncertain meaning which they commonly have. Some of them, however, it will be seen, occasionally occur with a positive signification, and may, in that case, be used with the indicative after them ; as, No lo creere aunque me ) I will not believe it though a thou- \OorUingent, sand tell it to me. I believe it, although he denies it (to me). 183. Finally, there are other parts of speech, and even whole phrases, which, on account of their indeterminate and doubtful, or contingent, meaning, requii-e the subjunctive after them. 184. The present tense of the subjunctive marks a contingent action as going on at the present moment, or to take place at some future time ; as, Dudo que venga. J I doubt whether he will come. N. B. — Another use of this tense has been already noticed when treating of the imperative. (See Lesson XXXY.) 185. The perfect tense expresses a doubtful or contin- gent action or event, as having been completed some time past, or that will have taken place before the completion of another future action or event ; as. lo digan mil. Lo creo aunque 61 me ) ^^ ^:^„^ c Certain, lo mega. J Dudo que haya venido. Yo le dare su libro cuando 61 me haya dado el mio. I doubt whether he has come. I shall give him his book when h« will have given me mine. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Espera V. que Uegue hoy el vapor de Europa? Creo que ha lle- gado esta mafiana. 2. Yo dudo que haya llegado todavia. i Quiere Y. enviar su criado i preguntar si ha llegado el vapor ? Con mucho gusto, porque yo tam- bien deseo tener noticias do Europa. 3. I Creo V. que Uegara un dia en que podamos ir a Europa en globos 182 LESSON XXXVII. aereostaticos ? Mucho mo alegrare que Ueguo ese dia, pero creo que no lo ver6mos nosotros, porque es muy dificil, y quiza iuiposible, el liallar la direccion de los globos. 4. I Suben muy alto los globos ? No creo que suban d mas de dos 6 tres mil pi6s, pero si se quiere pueden subir hasta la altura de quince 6 diez y seis mil pi6s. 5. Dado caso que llegue hoy el vapor; ^espera Y. a su amigo? Por supuesto que si, puesto que me escribe que llegara en este niismo vapor. 6. Ojala llegue, pero temo mucho que haya tornado otro vapor y que no llegue hasta la semana pr6xima. 7. ^Duda V. que haya estudiado su leccion ? Dudo que la haya estu- diado, porque es muy holgazan. 8. A m6nos que V. estudie bien las lecciones y haga con mucho cui- dado los ejercicios de la gramdtica, no aprendera Y. el espafiol. 9. Si, pero yo creia que se podia aprender una lengua con la practica solamente. — Asi es ; pero ent6nces se necesita practicar todos los dias con quien la hable muy bien. 10. ^En cuiinto tiempo picnsa Y. que hablar6 yo el espafiol? Y. lo hablara cuando sepa bien todas las lecciones de la gramatica, y haya practicado y escrito los ejercicios. 11. Y despues que haya aprendido toda la gramdtica, practicado, y escrito los ejercicios, ^hablar6 perfectamente el espafiol? No, scfior; pero hablard Y. bastante correctamente para llevar una conversacion, es- cribir una correspondencia, y poder hacer negocios en esta lengua. 12. Yo pensaba que el espafiol era una lengua muy facil. — Yerdadera- mente lo es para aprender lo que acabo de decirlo d Y. ; pero para ha- blarlo perfectamente como Y. quiere, todas las lenguas son dificilcs. 13. Y si Y. no lo cree, hdgame el favor de decirrae si habla Y. su pro- pia lengua y la escribe perfectamente.— Yo conlieso que todavia tengo algo que aprender en el ingl6s. 14. Cr6ame Y., amigo raio, el estudio de una lengua no es una friolera. — Creo que tiene Y. mucha razon ; pero hay muchos quo quieren aprenderlo todo y muy pocos que quieran estudiar. 15. ^Mo promote Y. venir d verme cuando venga d la ciudad? Aun- que venga d la ciudad no podr6 venir d vcr d Y. d ra6nos que acabe tem- prano mis negocios. 16. ^Sabo Y. hacer frases {sentences) en espafiol con todos los tiempos del modo indicativo? Si, sefior, y tambien con el imperativo, el presente y el perfecto do subjuntivo. 17. Muy bien, ent<5noos hdgame Y. ocho frases con los echo tiempos de indicativo, una con el imperativo y dos con el presente y perfecto de subjuntivo do cunlquiera verbo. LESSON XXXVII. 183 18. I Esta y. malo ? i Ha estado Y. hoy en el escritorio ? i Estaba V. en su casa cuando su amigo fue a verle ? g Habia V. estado en el teatro ^tes de Ir al baile ? i Estuvo V. ayer en la ciudad ? i Qu6 bizo V. asi que bubo estado algun tiempo en el botel ? i Estara V. en casa mafiana todo el dia ? g Habra escrito Y. su ejercicio antes de las cuatro ? Estu- dia tus leociones y escribe los ejercicios. IsTo pierdas el tiempo. ^Duda Y. que yo sepa mi leccion ? i Duda Y. que yo la baya estudiado ? EXERCISE. /v^ 1. John, there is some one at the door; go and see who it is. Yes, sir. 2. Is Mr. Eetortillo in ? Yes, sir ; who shall I say wishes to see him? Tell him that Mr. Perez wishes to speak to him a moment. 3. Mr. Perez wishes to see you a moment, sir. Let (que) him come up. 4. Oh! I am so glad to see you! How are you? how have you been ? wljen did you return ? — I arrived by the steamer Na'poleon III.^ on Wednesday last. 5. Did you receive all the letters I wrote you during {durante) my absence? I received one in March, dated from Eome. 6. How did you spend the time ? did you pass through Spain, as you had intended ? No ; while I was still in Paris, and preparing to set out for Madrid, I learned that my brother was very ill in Florence. 7. Indeed! I am very sorry to hear that. What was the matter with him Cwhat had he) ? A heavy (strong) cold, that he had caught on his way from Turin to Florence. 8. He had not, I believe, enjoyed very good health for a long time be- fore leaving home ? No, he has always been sickly ; but principally for about a year before his voyage to Europe, he had colds almost every month, and I may say that he was never without headaches, day or night. 9. Had he an Italian physician to attend him ? No, Dr. Perez, his family physician, who was travelling through Italy that same winter, just arrived at Florence the same day as my brother, and, hearing of his ill- ness, went at once {inmediatamente) to see him. 10. How long was he ill ? Nearly three weeks. 11. How ? Are you going away so soon ? Sit down and let us chat for half an hour about your family. Thank you ; I cannot stay any longer now, but I shall have the pleasure of seeing you again to-morrow. 12. Where are your brothers ? They are gone to see the balloon that is to go up this afternoon. 13. Indeed ? I thought the balloon was not to go up until Saturday. It was not to have gone up before Saturday; but, on account of the fine weather, it is to go up this afternoon. 184 LESSON XXXVIII. 14. Will many persons go up in it ? Very few, I think ; people in general do not like to go to such a height. 15. Do you understand all that is said in Spanish ? I understand more and more every day ; but there are still many words and constructions that I do not know. 16. How long do you think it will be before I can understand all, and speak like a native ? That is a hard question to answer ; provided you study with attention, read a great deal, and practice with Spaniards, you will soon understand and speak with ease ; but it is difficult for a foreigner to speak any language exactly like a native. 17. But do you believe it to be impossible ? No, I do not say it is im-. possible, but it is very difficult ; and, besides, I do not think it is neces^ sary. All that is required (wanted) is correctness, and to be able to con- verse with ease. 18. Has John's servant lighted the fire ? Not yet ; John does not wish it to be lighted until he returns. 19. Well, Charles, have you found out* the meaning of the word you Asked me for yesterday ? No, sir ; I have searched for it in all the dic- tionaries, and it is not to be found in any of them. 20. Why do you not ask your teacher ? he can tell you at once. Yes, I know that very well ; but I do not hke to ask him so many questions : every day he comes I have a new one to ask him. 21. Do not stop at trifles of that kind ; your teacher is very glad to be able to answer all questions, knowing that by that means (medio) you will learn better and more quickly. 22. I am very glad to see you defend him, for Alexander said he was not fond of answering questions, and did not like inquisitive persons. — • Neither he does ; but an inquisitive person is one thing, and a person who asks questions in order to gam. knowledge is another. LESSON XXXVIII. Sentir. (Look for the conjugation I To feel, to be sorry for* of this verb at p. 896). I Arrepentirse. Oonsentir, Preferir. Verba conjugated lile sextir. To repent. To consent. To prefer. * English words itcUiclsed not to be translated. LESSON SXXVIII. 185 A^segurar. To secure, to insure, to assure. Animar. To animate, duce. to encourage, to in- Desanimar. To dishearten, to discourage. Ayudar. To aid, to help. Enfermar, To fall (or sick. get) sick, to make Exigir. To exact, to ] require. Quedar. To remain. Perfeccioiiar. To perfect, to finish. Usar. To use, to wear. Generalmentd, Generally. De memoria. By heart. Ambos. Both. De continuo. Continually. Perezoso. Lazy. Examen. Examination. Helena. Ellen. Oficio. Trade, office. Persona. Person. Alberto. Albert. Lectura. Reading, lecture. Norte. North. Profesion. Profession. Sur, or sud. South. Escuela. School. Este, oriente. East. Muerte. Death. Oeste, \ Occidente. ) West. Vida. Life. Promesa. Promise. List of tTie present participles or verl }al nouns and adjectives formed from the verls alrea dy introduced. Viviente. Living being. Paseante. "Walker, passer- Estiidiante. Student. by, promeuader. Escribiente. A lawyer's clerk. Creyente. Believer. a writer in a Conveniente. Convenient, suita commercial ble. house. Importante. Important. Eesident. Tratante. Dealer. Tocante (en 6r- Concerning. Cortante. Sharp, edged. dena). Gobernante. Governing. Eeinante. Reigning. Contante. Ready. Saliente. Salient. Dohente. Sad, afflicted, Amante. Lover. moumfuL Practicante. Practitioner. Principiante. Beginner. 186 LESSON XXXVIII. COMPOSITION. Tocante & lo que Y. me dijo el otro dia, deseo que no se hable mas de ello. Entraron cantando. Le eneontraron leycndb. f, Qu6 est4 V. haciendo ? Estoy leyendo. Vengo de comer. Trabaja sin descansar. El trabajar es bueno para mucha^ cosas. V El descansar despues de trabajar es necesario. La vimos bailar. Emanuel es un estudiante industrioso. I Es V. residente de los Estados Unidos ? El es buen crejente. . Concerning what you told me the other day, I wish no more to be said about it They came in singing. They foimd him reading. What are you doing ? I am reading. I am coming from dinner. He labors without resting. Work is good for many things. Rest after labor is necessary. We saw her dancing. Emanuel is an industrious student Are you a resident of the United States ? He is a good believer. EXPLANATION. 186. Present Participles. — Many Spanish verbs have, besides the past or passive participle, another called the present or active participle. Those formed from verbs of the first con- jugation end in ante; as, amante, loving, lover; and those formed from the second and third end in ie/ite or ente ; as, asis- tente, assistant, obediente, obedient. Participles of this kind cannot be formed from all verbs, and indeed those already in existence can only be regarded as mere verbal nouns or adjectives, inasmuch as, with the excep- tion of a very limited number to be found in use, such as to- cante, they do not follow the regimen of the verbs from which they are derived. 187. Gerunds. — Instead of the present participle, ao a i>aiu of the verb, the gerund is now employed, and it corresponds, therefore, exactly to the English progressive form in ing; as, Entraron cantando. I They came in singing. Le eneontraron leyendo. | They found him reading. 188. The verb estar, as has already been mentioned, can LESSON XXXVIII. 187 be used with the gerund in Spanish, as in English the verb to be, with the present participle ; as, Yo estoy leyendo. I I am reading. EUos estan escribiendo. \ They are writing. 189. The iNTiNiTiVE is used in Spanish when in English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; as^ Se fue sin verle. I He went away without seeing him. Trabaja sin descansar. \ He labors without resting. 190. The INFINITIVE is also used as a verbal noun or pres- ent participle, in which case it takes the masculine definite article before it ; as, Work is good for the health. Rest is necessary after much work. El trdbajar es bueno para la salud. El descansar despues de trabajar mucho es necesario. 191. The INFINITIVE is often rendered in English by the present participle, when in Spanish it is governed by another ^ verb; as. La vimos hailar. \ We saw her dancing. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Le gusta a Y. mas leer que escribir? Me gustan dmbas cosas, pero creo que leyendo se aprende mas que escribiendo. 2. I Es estudioso ese muchacho ? No, sefior, pero hoy estudia mucho porque mafiana tienen examenes en su escuela. 3. I Piensa V. que sea conveniente ese negocio ? Yo pienso que lo es, pero quizd no lo sea. 4. I Que esta V. haciendo ? Estoy ostudiando mi leccion de espaflol. 6. I Sinti6 Helena mucho la muerte de su amiga ? La sintio tanto que enferm6. 6. I Como se siente ahora? Esta un poco mejor. — Me alegro que est6 mejor, porque es muy buena muchacha. 7. I Puede Y. prestarme trescientos pesos ? Puedo prestarselos d Y., pero no me gusta el prestar dinero (to lend). 8. I Como se aprende a hablar el espanol ? Hablando se aprende a hablar ; del misrao modo que bailando se aprende a bailar j haciendo zapatos se aprende a zapatero. 9. I Se arrepinti6 aquel hombre de su mala accion ? No lo creo por- que es un picaro que vive de engafiar. 10. iQue profesion li oficio tieue? No tiene ni oficio, ni profesion ninguna, es un paseante. 188 LESSON XXXVIII. 11. jDe donde viene V. ? Vengo de corner. 12. ^De d6iide viene el viento ? Viene del Sar, pero esta malian^ venia del Este. 13. ^Llueve en Nueva York cuando estd el viento al Este ? No, sefior, generalmente llueve cuando el viento esta al Oeste. 14. Alberto, animate, se estudioso y aprende de memoria la leccion para maflana. Papd, hace mucho calor y estoy cansado. 15. Bien, no te desanimes, descansa un poco y vuelve a trabajar des- pues. — y. quiere que yo est6 trabajando continuamente. 16. No, querido, no quiero que trabajes demasiado ; pero acu^rdate que en este mundo no se logra nada sin trab^ar. — Bien, papa, yo 86 que V. tiene siempre razon, descansar6 un poco ahora y despues acabar6 de esta- diar mi leccion. 17. ^ Se qued6 mucho tiempo su amigo de V. en el concierto ? Ambos nos quedamos haata que se acab6. 18. jTuvieron Vds. ayer examenes en la escuela? Ayer tuvimos ex^ men de gramatica, antes de ayer de liistoria, hoy de espafiol y mafiana lo tendr6mos de aritm6tica. 19. Manuel, levantate y vete d la escuela. ^No sabes qu6 hora es? No, seller, yo pensaba que era temprano. 20. I C6mo, temprano ? Ya son las siete y media y todavia tienes que lavarte y almorzar ; i vamos, vamos, perezoso, arriba ! — Alia voy papd^ alia voy ; y exctiseme V., no sabia que era tan tarde. EXERCISE. 1. Have you heard any more concerning the matter we were speak- ing of the other day? Nothing further; but I expect by to-morrow to be able to tell you something more. 2. When does your friend intend setting out* on his travel to the South ? Probably by the latter end (uUimos) ot November, or beginning of December. 3. Is he to be long absent ? He knows nothing as yet of how long he may be absent (ausente). 4. Concerning books to bo read in order to perfect one's self in a language, what kind do you think the best ? There is little dilTerence between books to be used for that purpose (proposito). 5. Are there not some better than all the others? Not that I know of: each student will prefer those that treat of the subject he is fondest of. 6. But beginners cannot do so, for there are many books too difScuU for them; is it not so? Certainly; I thought it needless to say that beginners must search for books easy to bo read. • Emprender, LESSON XXXVIII. 189 7. It seems to me that newspaper reading is very useful ; what do you think ? Yes, and especially for those who take pleasure in studying the politics of the day. 8. Do you. think I shall be able to understand Cervantes' great work after I have gone through {recorrer) the whole of the grammar ? No sir, you will not ; you will have to read and study a great deal before you will be able to understand thoroughly the writings of any of the; Spanish classic authors. 9. Who is that young man we met when walking, and to whom you spoke ? He is a lawyer's clerk. 10. Does he make much money at that occupation? I cannot tell you; but he is undoubtedly a man of talent {talento). 11. Are the children gone to school yet, Louisa? All but Henry, who wishes not to go to-day, if you will consent to it. 12. I am afraid he is a very lazy boy ; he is continually asking not to be sent to school. 13. How can he expect to learn if he neither goes to school nor studies at home ? He wants to study at home ; he says that if you consent to his staying at home, he will study anything you please. 14. WeU, I shall give him something to learn by heart, and we shall see what he does. — Very well ; but do not give him too much to do at the beginning, for he is easily disheartened. 15. I never require of any one more than he is able to do. — That is perfectly right. 16. Tell Charles and Albert that I want to see them, and that I have two books for them. — I need not go to tell them ; here they are coming. 17. Come here, boys. — Well, papa, what do you want us for ? 18. To give you these two books: one for each.— How beautiful! — Yes, that is true; but they are something more than beautiful: they are good. 19. What do they treat of? This one treats of man in hfe and of all living beings ; and that one of man's state after death. 20. Now, I wish you to read a chapter each one in his book every day, after your lessons ; and then you may go out and walk for an hour. — Thank you, sir ; and we can assure you that we shall do so with tha greatest pleasure. 21. Tell me, Albert, where did you buy that hat ? That is one of those hats that were worn three summers ago. I know that very well, for I bought it at the time they were being worn, and I have worn it ever since. 22. This author seems to have travelled a great deal ; have you read any of his travels? Yes, and I like them exceedingly (micchisimo). 190 LESSON XXXIX, 23. I am going to read them, too, as soon as I have time. In what countries did he travel principally ? lie has been in nearly every coun- try in the world, East, West, North and South. 24. What is the trade or profession of that person, just gone out ? He is a physician ; he has been in this city for noto nearly five years. He is an excellent practitioner. LESSON XXXIX. Pedir. (Looh for the conjugation I To petition, to ask for. of this verb at p. Z9Q.) I VerJ}8 conjugated like pedib. Competir. To contend, to compete. Elejir. To elect, to choose. Medir. To measure. Renir. To quarrel, to scold. Seguir. To foUow. Rendir. To render ; to exhaust, to do out. to wear out. Repetir. To repeat. Servir. To serve. Tefiir. To dye. Vestir. To dress. Divertirse. To amuse one's self. Casarse. To marry ; to get (or be) married. Besar. To kiss. Enamorarse. To fall in love. Celebrar. To celebrate, to praise, to be glad. Cenar. To sup. Presentar. To present, to introduce one per- son to the acquaintance of another. Reconocer. To recognize, to examine closely. Estimar. To estimate, to value, to esteem. Agradecer, To thank, to be thankful, to be obliged. En hora buena. It is well well and good. Asi asi. So so. LESSON XXXIX. 191 Tal cual. Middling, so so. Hasta la vista. Till I see you again. Hasta luego. Good-bye for a while. Sin novedad. Well, in a good state of health. Medianamente Middling. I Ah! {int.) Ah! \0h\ {int.) Oh! - Respetable. Respectable. Delicado. Delicate, weak. Infiuito. Infinite. Junto. Near, close to, together. Discreto. Encantador. Discreet. Charming. Favor. Favor. Tertuha. Party, soiree. Beso. Kiss. Novedad. Novelty. Servidor. Servant. Celebracion. Celebration. Pi6. Foot. Servidora. Servant. Honor. Honor. Ocasion. Occasion. Vestido. Dress. Coraplacencia. Complaisance. Esposo. Husband. Bondad. Goodness, kind- Asiento. Seat. ness. Capitulo. Chapter. Esposa. Wife. Sobrino. Nephew. Orden. Order, command. Memorias. Regards. Enhorabuena. Congratulation. COMPO SITION. I Qu6 le pide k V. ese hombre ? No me pide nada; me pregunta que hora es. Beso a V. la mano, caballer©. Beso k Y. la suya. 6 Como esta su familia de V. ? Todos estan bien, gracias ; ^ y la de V. ? Asi asi; los nines estan muy buenos, pero mi esposa no se siente bien. A los pi6s de V., senora. Beso k Y. la mano, caballero. A la orden de V., Don Pedro. What is that man asking for ? He is asking me for nothing ; he is ask- ing me what o'clock it is. {A Spanish expression of courtesy, used at meeting or parting. No equivalent in English.) {Reply to tlie above.) How is your family ? All are well, thank you ; and yours ? So so ; the children are very well, but my wife does not feel well. {Spanish expression of courtesy, tised to ladies. No English equivalent.) {77ie lady\ reply to the above.) At your service, Mr. Pet«r. 192 LESSON XXXIX, Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan. Buenos dias, Doua Luisa, ^ como lo pasa V. hoy ? Bien, para servir & V. ; ij Y.^ Sin novedad a la disposicion de V. Sen or D. M., tengo el honor de pre- sentarle al Sr. D. P. Caballero, celebro la ocasion de conocer & V. Tenga V. la bondad de darme el cu- chillo. Con mucho gusto. Mil gracias. Hagame V. el favor de decirme, como se llama esto en espanol. Sirvase V. tomar asiento. Lo siento mucho, pero no puedo, tengo que marcharme. Tenga V. la complacencia de ponerme & los pi6s de su esposa de V. God be with you, Mr. John. Good morning, Miss Louisa, how do you do to-day? Well, thank you ; and you ? I am very well too, thank you. Mr. M., I have the honor to introduce (or present) you to Mr. P. I am happy to make your acquaintance, sir. Have the goodness to give me the knife. "With much pleasure. Thank you. Be kind enough to tell me what you call this in Spanish. Please to take a seat. I am very sorry, but I cannot, I must be off. Eave the goodness to present my re- gards to your lady (or wife). EXPLANATION. 192. Pedir. — A paradigm will be found at the end of the grammar, showing the tenses and persons in which this verb and all those conjugated like it change the e of their root into i. 193. The usual foems of salutations, among gentlemen in greeting each other, are the following : Beso k V. la mano. I kiss your hand. Servidor de V., caballero. Your servant, sir. A la 6rden de V. Your most obedient. Vaya V. con Dios. Adieu, or God be with you. Tenga V. muy buenos dias. Good day to yoiL This last expression is used from the earliest part of the morning till two or three hours after meridian ; from which time till dark is used, Buenas tardes. | Good afternoon ; and from dark until the following morning, both on meeting and taking leave, Buenas noches. | Good night. All these expressions arc always used in Spanish in the plural number. LESSON XXXIX. 193 In saluting a lady, the first expression most frequently made use of is : A los pies de V., senora. | MaJam, at your feet. The lady's reply is : Beso a V. la mano, caballero. j I kias your hand, sir. To inquire after another's health : C6mo lo pasa Y. ? or como est4 V, ? j How do you do ? To answer : Medianamente bien. Perfectamente bien. Para servir 4 V. Muy bien, gracias. Asl asf, or tal cual ; y V., ^ como lo Middling well. Perfectly well. At your service. Very well, thank you. So so ; and how do you do ? Sin novedad, A la disposicion de V, For introducing one person to Senor Don M., tengo el honor de pre- J gentarle al Senor Don P. | And the reply is : Caballero, celebro la ocasion de cono- cer a V., or Reconozcame V. por un servidor suyo. For asking or requesting : Tenga Y. la bondad de darme. Hagame Y. el favor de decirme. Sirvase Y., or tenga Y, la coinpla- cencia de. And for returning thanks : Mil gracias, or Muchisimas gracias. Se lo agradezco a Y. infinito. Always well. At your service. another : Mr. M., I have the honor of intro- ducing Mr. P. to you. Sir, I am happy to make your ac- quaintance. I am entirely at your service. Have the goodness to ^ve me. Do me the favor to tell me. Have the kindness to. A thousand thanks. Many thanks. I am very much obliged to you. CONYERSATION AND YERSION. 1. Senor D. Juan, i qu6 le pide d Y. mi muchacho ? No me pide nada ; me pregunta qu6 hora es. 2. Yo creia que le pedia k Y. dinero, porque ^1 estd siempre pidiendo 9 194 LESSON XXXIX. centavos d todo el mundo, — Vaya! no le rifia V. ; d todos los nifios les gusta que les den centavos. — Verdad es, pero d mi no me gusta que los mios los pidan. 3. Digame V., D. Pedro, i quien es aquella sefiorita que estd sentada en el sofa junto d su esposa de V. ? Esa es una sefiorita muy araable, hija del Sefior D. Luis Martinez, familia muj respetable d quien conoci hace muchos afios. 4. I Quiere V. hacerme el favor de presentarme d ella ? Con mucho gusto; pero le advierto que no se enamore de la Sefiorita Martinez, por- que esta para casarse. 5. Pierda V. cuidado ; yo solo deseo conocerla para gozar de sa dis- creta conversacion. — En hora buena venga V. y lo presentar6. 6. Sefiorita Martinez, tengo el honor de presentar d V. el Sefior Don Juan McLeren. — Caballero, celebro la ocasion de conocer d V. — Sefiorita, recon6zcame V. por su servidor. 7. i All I aqui viene Don Alberto y su esposa. — Slrvanse Vds. pasar adelante. 8. J Oh ! Sefior Don Pedro, me alegro mucho de encontrar d V. poi aca. Mil gracias, sefiora, soy muy feliz en volver d ver d Vds. 9. A los pi6s de Y., Sefiorita Martinez. — Beso d V. la mano, caballero. 10. Dofla Margarita, ^ c6mo estd su familia de V. ? Todos estan bien, gracias, ^ y la de V. ? Asi asi ; los nifios estan muy buenos, pero mi esposa estd delicada. 11. Sirvase Y. tomar asiento, D. Alberto. — Lo siento mucho, pero d/4. Do you know who sent the first dispatch by the cable ? I am not sure ; but I remember that the first, at the time of the former cable, in 1858, was that sent by the President of the United States to the Queen of England. 5. What was the reason of laying a second cable ? Ah, come now ! do you not know that the first one, having broken shortly after it had been laid, became entu-ely useless (inutil) ? 6. Have you seen the news to-day by Atlantic telegraph ? l^o ; what is the news ? That a treaty of peace has been signed {celebrar) between Prussia and Austria. 7. Charles, go and find the comb, wherever you put it when you had done with it. I have not seen it since Henry was using it ; and even if I had, I would not tell you where it was. 8. Ah, you little rogue ! there, you have broken the wash-basin. It is not ray fault, Henry wanted it first, and I had already commenced to . wash myself; but he persisted and would take it from me.* >/ 9. horror ! just look at the state his hair {pelo) is in ! Go this Persistio en quitiirmela. 240 LESSON XLVI. instant and get the comb and comb your hair before you dare to appear before me. 10. Have you a pin to give me? Yes, here is a paper of pins; take all you want and give me back the rest. 11. Did you know your lessons well this morning? Yes, very well, and the proof is that papa allowed me to go to see the procession. 12. Wliat did you kill that poor little fly for ? Have I not told you many times that I don't wish you to catch or kill flies ? 13. Is that bread fresh ? Yes, sir, the baker has just brought it a few minutes ago. 14. We were to have gone to the yard to play at twelve o'clock. You may go now ; but do not make much noise. 15. Where were you going when I met you? We were coming home to dine. 16. Has the shoemaker- sent you his bill ? Yes, but it is not correct. 17. Has not your uncle written to you since he went away? He has sent several telegraphic dispatches to my father on business; but he has not written to us once {una sola vez). 18. Is there not to be a new opera to-night ? No ; but I understand there is to be a new play (comedia) at the theatre. 19. That is nothing extraordinary ; there are new pieces very often now. 20. If Louisa were a little taller would she not be handsomer than Jane ? She would at least be quite as handsome. 21. Would you vrish to have the window opened ? I think it would be much cooler if it were open. 22. Would you not like me to repeat to you that story I told you the other day ? If you had time I should be much obliged to you to tell it to me once more. 23. Would not quietness be much better for that gentleman than so much noise ? He could not live without noise. 24. Might you not have broken your arm or your leg when you fell out of your carriage ? Yes, if 1 had not taken care. 25. If I had wanted money when I was in the country would you not have brought me some ? If I could have got (conseguir) it I would. 26. Would your aunt not have been disappointed if she had not been in time to take the three o'clock train ? She would have been terribly disappointed, for she was going to spend the day at a friend's, about ten miles out of town. LESSON XLVII. 241 LESSON XLVII. Acorapafiar . To accompany. Cargar. To load, to charge. Ourar. To cure, to attend (as a physician). Dafiar. To injure, to damage. Deleitar. To delight. Incomodar. To incommode. Incomodarse. To get out of temper. Equivocar. To mistake. Evitar. To avoid, to shun. Instruir. To instruct. Ocupar. To occupy. Padecer. To suffer. Solicitar. To solicit, to apply for, to urgeu Dimes j dir6tes. Ifs and ands. El no se qu^ i. An inexplicable something. Dolor de cabeza. Headache. Masculino, Masculine. Amable. Amiable. Agradable. Agreeable. Extrangero. Foreign, foreigner. Interesante. Interesting. Moribundo. Dying. Valiente. Valiant, arrant. Femenino. Feminine. Acento. Accent. Alma. Soul. Bolsillo. Purse. Comedia. Comedy. Alitor. Author. Vara. Rod, yard (weo*- Esfuerzo. Effort, bravery. ure). Efecto. Effect. [ness. Libra. Pound. Fastidio. Unease, uneasi- Manteca, or Butter. Ciudadano. Citizen. Mantequilla. Hospital. Hospital. Calidad. Quality. M6todo. Method. Cantidad. Quantity. Trabajo. Labor, work. Napoles. Naples. Real. Real. Sonido. Sound. Chelin. Shilling. 11 242 LESSON XLVII. COMPOSITION. El porqu6 de todaa las cosas. Los ayes del moribundo. Los dimes y dir6tes. El cuando. El no se qu6. El tener amigos no dana. V Hay horabres de un saber extraordi-y nario. Un nada le incomoda. sj La constancia y el trabajo son necesa- rios al hombre en todas sus empresas. «4 La America es mayor que la Europa. La Francia es una nacion muy poblada. El clima de Espana. Los esfuerzos de la EspaHa. Cuatro pesos la vara. Dos reales la libra. Treinta centavos la docena. Dos veces al dia. Cuatro pesos por vara. La f6, la esperanza y la caridad. El Senor De Vargas tiene tres niiios. La Seiiora Martinez es muy prudente. Ella me dio la mano. Puso la mano en el bolsillo. Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi mano. El caballero a quien vio Y. ayer en mi casa. The why and the wherefore of all things. The groans of the dying. The ifs and ands. The time. I know not what It is hurtful to no one to have friends. There are men of extraordinary knowl- edge. A mere nothing incommodes him. Constancy and labor are necessary tc mankind in all their enterprises (or undertakings). America is larger than Europe. France is a very populous nation. The climate of Spain, The bravery of Spain. Four dollars a yard. Two reals a pound. Thirty cents a dozen. Twice a day. Four dollars a yard. Faith, hope and charity. Mr. Vargas has three children. Mrs. Martinez is very prudent. She shook hands with me. He put his hand in his pocket. Many gentlemen have solicited my hand. The gentleman whom you saw yesterday in my house. EXPLANATION. 227. Use of the Article. — AU or any of the parts of speech, and sometimes even whole sentences, may be used as nouns, and as such admit the article, as has just been observed in the Composition of the present lesson, in which we see exam- ples of verbs, adverbs and interjections preceded by the article, and treated in every respect as nouns substantive. 228. The definite aeticle is to be used before all com' LESSON XLVII. 243 mon nouns, taken in a general sense and in the full extent of their signification ; as, La constancia y el trabajo son necesa- I Constancy and labor are necessary to rios al hombre en todas sus empresas. | mankind in all undertakings. 229. The article is expressed before the names of the four parts of the globe : before the names of empires, kingdoms, provinces and countries ; and before the four seasons of the year; as, La America es mayor que la Europa. America is larger than Europe. La Francia es una nacion muy po- France is a very populous nation. blada. El inviemo en el Sur es mas agradable The winter in the South is more agree- que el verano. able than the summer. But it is omitted before the names of kingdoms, provinces, &c., when they are preceded by a preposition ; unless they be personified, as has been observed in Lesson XXX. ; as. El clima cfe Espana. I The climate of Spain. Los esfuerzos de la Espana. \ The bravery of Spain. Kingdoms bearing the same name as their capitals do not admit the article ; as, NdpoUs^ Naples. 230. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when preceded by the indefinite article in English, as an equivalent to each, re- quire the article ; as, Cuatro pesos la vara. Four dollars a yard. Dos reales la libra. Two reals a pound. Treinta centavos la docena. Thirty cents a dozen. Dos veces al dia. Twice a day. If the preposition por be used, we omit the article ; as, cuatro pesos por vara, &c. 231. The article is generally repeated before every noun enumerated, especially if they difier in gender ; as, La fe, la esperanza y la caridad. I Faith, hope and charity. Los dias y las noches. | The days and nights. 232. The definite article is used before nouns indicating rank, office, profession or titles of persons, when these are spoken of, but not when spoken to ; as. El General Sheridan es valiente. El Senor De Vargas tiene tres ninos. La Senora Martinez, es muy prudente. General Sheridan is brave. Mr. De Vargas has three children. Mrs. Martinez is very prudent. 244 LESSON XLVII. 233. The definite article is used instead of the possessive ad* jective when the possessives refer to parts of our own body ; as, Me he cortado la mano. I I have cut my hand. Me duele la cahcza. \ My head aches. This applies even to parts of the body of other persons ; as, Ella me dio la mano. She gave me her hand (or shook hands with me). Fuse la mano en el bolsillo. He put his hand in his pocket. But the pronoun must be used when the personal article would occasion ambiguity ; as, Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi mano. j Many gentlemen solicited my hand. 234. The definite article is also employed, as in English, before nouns taken in 2i particular or definite sense ; as, El caballero k quien vio Y. ayer en mi I The gentleman whom you saw yester- casa. j day in my house. We forbear from adding many more rules which we might give, if they were not subject to numerous exceptions, and, especially, if we were not of opinion that practice and reading will teach better than any rules when to employ and when to omit the article. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. I Cuul de las partes del mundo es la mayor ? El Asia es la major. 2. jEs Asia nombre masculine? No, seflor, es feraenino. 8. Ent6nces, jporqu6 le pone V. el articulo masculiuo? Por evitar el mal sonido que resultaria de poner dos des juntas. 4. I Luego, V. pone siempre el articulo masculino delante de todo nombre feraenino que empieza por a? No, sellor; esto solo sucede en singular, y cuando sobre dicha vocal carga el acento de la palabra. 5. ^Ila leido V. el "Si de las niflas" de Moratin? Si, sefior, lo lei h ace muchos aflos; pero d ml me gusta mas la "Comedia nueva"del mismo autor. 6. iQu6 tal le gusta d V. su nueva vecinita? Dicen que es may honita. — En efocto lo es ; pero d mi no me gusta, porque anda siempre en dimes y dir6tos, y un nada la incomoda. 7. iCudles son las virtudes del alma? La f6, la esperanza y la ca- ridad. 8. jTiene V. alguna cosa interesante que decirme hoy? Mucbisimas LESSO]S^XLVJI. , 245 interesantisimas 6 importantisimas para practicar y aprender el espanol. 9. i Uf ! JO. va V. a principiar con gus adverbios, preposiciones j arti- culos ; va Y. a decirrae, por supuesto, que estas partes de la oracion unas veces se ponen antes las unas que las otras, j vice versa ; que las unas gobiernan a las otras j las gobernadas gobiernan a su vez a otras, que se acuerden 6 no eutre si. i Cre6 Y. que todo eso sera interesante para mi con el fastidio que tengo, j el dolor de cabeza que padezco ? j Calle I ent6nces, caballerito, Y. ha equivocado la casa. 10. I Qu6 quiere Y. decir con eso de equivocar la casa ? Quiero decir que, en lugar de venir a la clase, debio Y. ir hoy al hospital y de alii al teatro. 11. ^Para que ? Para que le curasen en una parte de sus dolores y en la otra del fastidio. 12. Si ; pero, Senor Profesor, yo siempre creia que el mejor metodo de ensefianza es aquel que "instruye deleitando." Y. tiene mil razones, pero ha olvidado una pequena circunstancia que requiere su metodo. 13. ^Y cual es esa circunstancia? Que no puede aplicarse sino con aquellos discipulos que se deleitan aprendiendo. 14. Y ahora volviendo al articulo. — Seiior Profesor, Y. me escusara, pero no volvamos al articulo porque no puedo quedarme mas aqui hoy. 15. ^06mo es eso? el tierapo de la leccion no ha acabado todavia. — - Y. tiene razon ; pero hoy es necesario que me vaya teraprano, porque he prometido acompanar a unas sefioritas a la opera. 16. jOh! entonces es necesario no faltar a su palabra. — Sefior Pro- fesor, buenas noches (este buen sefior me fastidia con sus explicaciones). — Diviertase Y. mucho, Sefior Don Pepito (este amable j6ven aprender^ espafiol, para el tiempo que yo compre una casa en la Quinta Avenida, ensefiandolo). EXERCISE. 1. If I should come for you this evening, would you come with m© to see the Martinez ? I would, with great pleasure, if Charlotte would accompany us. 2. How does that lady speak French ? They say she speaks very correctly, though with a slightly foreign accent. 3. Might he not be cured if he called in a good physician ? He is of opinion that physicians do more injury than good to mankind. 4. Do you know any thing of the author of that play ? Yes, I have read (or heard) all his plays ; they are very interestiug, and delighted me exceedingly. 6. "What is death ? The separation of soul and body. 246 LESSON XLVII. 6. Can one be a citizen of the United States without having been born (nacer) in the country ? Yes, after having resided in the United States a certain number of years any one may become a citizen. T. Where is that poor man going ? To the hospital ; he has broken his leg. 8. Pardon me, I think you are mistaken ; it is rather his arm that Is broken, for if his leg were broken he could not walk. 9. Do you remember the name of the principal city of Naples ? Yea, the name of the principal city is that of the kingdom also. 10. Did you shake hands with that young lady ? Yes, as soon as she saw me she came towards me and gave me her hand. 11. Is that cloth (jpaUo) sold very high? 2^ot very; it costs only three dollars a yard. 12. How often do you take your Spanish lessons ? Twice a week. 13. Would you not learn faster if you took a lesson every other day {un dia si y otro no) ? My teacher says I would ; but I have not time to take lessons so often. 14. Would you like summer to return again ? No, thank you, I am glad it is past, for I assure you I have suffered enough with the heat. 15. How sad it is on the field of battle {campo de latalla) to hear the groans of the dying I Yes ; and, notwithstanding, men will persist ia killing each other for a foot* of ground (terreno). 16. How is butter sold a pound? Thirty cents for one kind, and forty cents a pound for the best. 17. Do you think it can injure any one to have friends ? No, it can injure nobody to have friends. 18. Is not that person very amiable and agreeable? Very rarely, for a mere nothing incommodes him. 19. Are there many learned men in that country? There have been and there are at present men of extraordinary learning. 20. Which are the three principal virtues ? Faith, hope and charity. 21. Is Miss Cabargas married yet? Not yet, although a large number of gentleman have solicited her hand. 22. I suppose you have all read some Spanish comedies? Several Spanish and some French comedies, by the best dramatists. 23. Which of all the French comedies that you have read do you like best ? Those of Moli^re. Falmo Giterally a span). LESSON XLVIII. 247 LESSON XLVIII, Afirmar. Afligir. Adraitir. Atreverse. Criticar. Condescender, Convencer. Declarar. Depender. Disponer. Diferenciar. Edificar. Entretenerse. Fabricar. Suponer. Nombrar. Influir. Ocultar. Observar. Obedecer. Proporcionar. Pretender. Publicar. Que) arse. Kegularizar. Reflexionar. Ridiculizar. Reformar. Lo que s6 decir. Sin que V. me lo diga, Volver d las andadas. Para mi tengo. A trueque. Sin embargo. Odndidamente. De modo. To affirm. To afflict. To admit, to accept. To dare. To criticise. To condescend, to consent To convince. To declare. To depend. To dispose, to arrange. To differ. To edifj, to build. To amuse. To construct, to make, to build. To suppose. To name, to appoint To influence, to affect. To conceal, to hide. To observe. To obey. To proportion, to procure, to offer, to afford. To pretend, to lay claim to, to aspire to, to sue for. To publish. To complain, to moan. To regulate. To reflect. To ridicule. To reform. What I knoTT. Without you telling me. To do so again, to return to (one's) old habits. It is my opinion. On condition. Nevertheless, notwithstanding. Candidly. In such a manner, that, so that 248 LESSON XLVIII. I Bravo! I Very good ! Bravo 1 Bruto. Brutish. Cierto. Certain. A6reo. Airy, aeriaL Angelical. Angelical. Meal. Ideal. Interior. Interior. Incomplete, Incomplete. Imperfecto. Imperfect. Exterior. Exterior. Extrafio. Strange. Ignal. Equal, the same. Human o- Humane. Positivo. Positive. Real. Real, royal. Arquitecto. Anciano. Oiego. Cal y canto. Bruto. Idiota. Espacio. Oomplemento. Goce. Mai. Material. Objeto. Palacio. Pujaro. Enfermo, Prisionero. Pensamiento. Castillos en el aire. Architect. Old man. Blind. Stone. Brute. Idiot. Space. Complement. Enjoyment. Evil. Material. Object. Palace. Bird. Sick. Prisoner. Thought. Castles in the air. Oarrera. Desgracia. Diferencia. Curiosidad. Exageracion. Franqueza. Juventud. Ilusion. Felicidad. Risa. Realidad. Ruindad. Riquezas. Career. vMisfortuue. Difference. Curiosity. '^Exaggeration. >iFrankness. Youth. Illusion. Happiness. Laugh, laughter. '^Reality. Meanness. Riches. AfHvino el raotivo por cl cual nos ha- bian adulado los mismos que des- pues nos critican, criticaban, critica- ron, ban criticado, criticaran. \/Leiamo8 una noticia que acababa {or acaba) de publicarse. COMPOSITION. I guess the motive for which those samw persons who bad flattered us before, criticise, did criticise, criticised, have criticised, will criticise us afterward. We were reading some news just pub. Ushed (that had just been published, or has just been published). LESSON XLYIIT. 249 x/Contaba la desgracia que los afligio. No sere yo el primero que se atreva. Aprended vosotros, los que os quejais, quejabais, quejasteis, habeia quejado, quejareis. El quiere jugar. Nosotros queremos estudiar. y v/El hubo de condescender. Tengo que eallar. > EUos deben estar muy ocupados. Quiero {or pienso) salir. Afirmo {or declare) que saldre. Digo que saldre. y/ Es util estudiar las lenguas. Conviene a los hombres instruirse. El estudio de las lenguas es util. La instruccion conviene a los hombre^ Conviene que yo estudie. I/- Es util que los hombres se instruyan. He was telling the misfortune that aflOict- ed them. ^I shall not be the first to dare./^ Know, you who complain, vvere com- plaining, complained, had complained, will complain. ^ He will (is determined to) play. We will study. He had to consent. I have to be silent. They must be very busy. I wish (or intend to) go out. I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out. I say that I shall go out. It is useful to study languages. At is man's interest to acquire knowl- objeto de las leyes. Deseo que me comprendas. No lograras que le castiguen. Les mando eallar. ) vliCS mando que callasen. ) Impedir que se cometan injusticias es el L'To prevent the commission of injustice,/^' The study of languages is useful. Knowledge is useful to man. It is my interest to study. It is useful to mankind to possess knowledge. He ordered them to be silent. Se le ayudara si fuere necesario. He sentido que no se convenza (con- venciera or convenciese). Habr4 Uamado para que le abran (abrie- ran or abriesen) la puerta. Creo que le convencer^ facilmente. ^ Reflexionare lo que he de hacer. v Pense que iba a matarla. V Pense que enviara {or enviaria) la carta. \ such is the object of laws. ^ "^I wish you to understand me. >r You will not succeed in having him punished. He shall have help if it be necessary. I was sorry he would not be convinced (or was not convinced.) He knocked, of course, in order that the door may (or might) be opened. I think I shall convince him easily. I shall reflect on what I shall do. I thought he was going to kill her. I thought he would send the letter. EXPLANATION. 235. Correspondence of the Tenses with each other. — When one verb is connected with another by a relative, there are many combinations in which the determining and the de- ll* 250 LESSON XLVIII, termined verbs may be found ; both may be in the indicative or in the subjunctive mood, or one in the indicative and the other in the subjunctive; but both cannot be in the infinitive or in the imperative ; as, I guess the motive for which those same persons who have flattered us before^ criticise, did criticise, criticised, have criticised, will criticise us afterward. We were reading some news that had (or has) just been published. He was telling the misfortune that afiflicted them. I shall not be the first to dare. Learn, you who complain, were com- plaining, complained,had complained, will complain. Adivino el motivo por el cual nos ha- bian adulado los mismos que nos critican^ criticaban^ criticaron, han criticado, criticardn. Leiamos una noticia que acdbaha (or acaha) de publicarse. Contaha la desgracia que los afligid. No sere yo el primero que se atreva. Apr ended vosotros los que os quejai% quejabais, quejasieis^ habeis quejado, quejareis. 236. The determined verb is put in the infinitive whenever tt has the same subject as the determining verb j as, !l^l quiere jugar, Nosotros queremos estudiar. He wishes to play. We wish to study. This is the reason why the auxiliaries hdber de, tener que, deber, always require the governed verb in the infinitive, be- cause the subject, or nominative, is the same for both verbs ; as, tel hubo de condescender. Tengo que callar. Ellos deben estar muy ocupados. He had to consent. I have to be silent. They must be very busy. An exception to this rule occurs when the determining verb expresses a firm and decided affirmation ; and so we say : Quiero {or pienso) salir. I I wish (or intend) to go out. Afirmo (dcclaro) que saldre. \ I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out "We must also except the verb decir, which cannot govern another verb in the infinitive, because whenever we employ it to announce our own actions it is not with the purpose of re* lating them, but to manifest our resolution to execute them ; as, Digo que saldrL | I say I shall go out. 237. When the determining verb is «6r, or any impcrson- LESSON XLVIII. 261 Es titil estudiar las lenguas. Conviene a los hombres instruirse. al verb, and the governed verb has no subject, the latter is placed in the infinitive ; as, It is useful to study languages. It is the interest of mankind to acquire knowledge. And such is the natural construction, because the true sub- ject of this proposition is the very infinitive itself, which stands there as a noun, an office that cannot be performed by the other moods. The above sentences are equivalent to these : El estudio de las lenguas es util. The study of languages is useful. La instruccion conviene a los hombres. It is the interest of mankind to acquire knowledge. 238. But if the determined verb also has a nominative, then it must be placed in the subjunctive; as, Conviene que yo estudie. Ea util que los hombres se instniyan. It is my interest to study. It is useful to mankind to possess knowledge. Those verbs that express command, govern either of the two forms, since we say equally well : Les mando collar. \ I Les mando que callasen. \ | ^^ «^^^^^^ *^^"^ *« ^^ ^^^^^*- 239. When the determining verb is in the infinitive, in the present or future of the indicative, or in the imperative, connected with the governed verb by a conjunction, this latter verb is put in the subjunctive mood, ordinarily in the present or in the future ; as. Impedir que se comeian injusticias es el objeto de las leyes. Deseo que me coniprendas. No hgrards que le castigiten. Se le ayudard si fuere necesario. To prevent the commission of injustice, such is the object of the laws. I wish you to understand me. You will not succeed in having him punished. He will have help if it be necessary. 240. The preterit indefinite and compound future of the indicative govern the determined verb in the present or imper- fect of the subjunctive ; as. He sentido que no se convenza {conven- ciera or convenciese). Habr& Ham ado para que le abran {abrieran or abriesen) la puerta. I was sorry he should not be (or was not) convinced. He knocked, of course, in order that the door may (or might) be opened. 252 LESSON XLVIII. 241. When the determining verb is in the indicative, it gen- erally governs the determined one in the same mood, if the nominative is the same for both verbs ; as, Oreo que le convencere facilmente. I I think I shall convince him easily. Rejlexionare lo que he de hacer. | I shall reflect on what I have to do. But if each verb has a different nominative, the second verb may be placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive ; as, I thought he was going to kill her. I thought he would send me the letter. Pense que iba k matarla. Perwe que me enviara (or enviaria) la carta. Much more might be said upon this subject, did we not fear to exceed the limits prescribed by the nature of the present work. CONYERSATION AND VEPwSION. 1. Dofla Luisita, ^Le gusta d Y. formar castillos en el aire ? Mncho ; pero creo que fonno demasiados. 2. Me alegro mucho que, como d mi, le guste d Y. el mundo de las ilu- siones, y tambien apruebo su frajiqueza de Y. en confeearlo. — Y iporqa6 lo habia de ocultar? ^Qu6 mal hay en eso? 3. No s6 si hay mal 6 no, lo que s6 decir es, que todo el mundo afecta no formarlos y con cierta risita burlona pretenden ridiculizar a los que, como Y. y yo, confesamos candidamente que los hacemos. 4. g Y cree Y., D. Jos6, que esas gentes vivan sin ilusiones de ninguna especie? No, senorita, no lo creo. Dios ha dado d todo hombre, d diferencia del bruto, un mundo ideal interior ademds del mundo positive exterior, d excepcion de los idiotas. 5. I Cudnto me alegro de oirlo ! ; porque yo tenia tanta vergtlenza de mis pobres castillos en el aire 1 i De modo es que Y. cree que yo no soy sola ? De ningun raodo, todo el mnndo los forma, la diferencia solo existe en la manera. 6. j Ah ! Don Jos6, Y. me va pareciendo un buen arquitecto de casti- llos en el aire y uno de estos dias voy d pedirle que me muestre uno de los muchos que habrd edificado.— Con mucho gusto, seflorita, d trueque, sin embargo, de que Y. me admita en uno de sus palacios a6reos. 7. No, eso no, jamds podria yo poner en evidencia mis castillos ; pero Y. dice que la diferencia solo existe en la manera de formarlos ; explique- me Y. esto, quiza asl lograr6 reformar los mios, porque he observado que ton incompletes ; siempre Ics fulta algo. — Pues es extraflo, scftorit/i, por« LESSON XLVIII. 253 que yo creia que solo las cosas humanas eran imperfectas y sus ilusiones de V. siendo 8. For supuesto, jangelicalesi j Vamos! dejeseV. de cumplimientos, ya sabe V. que no me gustan, y respondame V. a mi pregunta si V. gusta, porque tengo curiosidad de saber c6mo forman otros sus castillos. —Obedezco, seilorita, y para principiar debo decir que yo me equivoqu6 cuando dije que solo se diferenciaban en la manera, porque tambien in- fluye mucho el material. 9. I Como el material ? ; si se fabncan en el aire I j Espero que no loa fabrique Y. de cal y canto ! — No, sefiorita, no de cal y canto ; pero se fa- brican ; y si se fabrican, de algo se fabrican. 10. I Pero de qu6, senor, de que ? Yo formo castillos, pero no necesito nada para hacerlos ; vuelo mas que los pajaros, mando hasta en las vo- luntades de los otros, hago volver al tiempo en su carrera, dispongo del espacio, de la fortuna, y hago que me obedezca basta el amor. — Eso lo creo sin que V. me lo diga, sefiorita. IJ.. I Dale ! no vuelva V. a las andadas, y cu^nteme V. qu6 materiales son esos de que V. me hablaba. — V. raisma acaba de nombrar algunos. 12. I Ouales ? j C6mo ! i qu6 mas materiales quiere V. para formar un Castillo en el aire, que poder disponer, como V. dice que puede, de las voluntades de los otros, del tiempo, del espacio, la fortuna y basta del amor? 13. jToma! Pero yo no poseo ninguna de esas cosas en realidad, y sin embargo mis castillos me entretienen y divierten mucho.— Perd one Y., sefiorita, Y. las posee y con ellas forma Y. ese bonito mundo interior, que le proporciona d Y. los goces que no le da el exterior. 14. Y en eso tiene Y. razon, que mis ilusiones, 6 sea como Y. las llama, mi mundo interior, me consuelan much as veces de la ruin dad del mundo exterior. — Eso sucede d todo el mundo, de ese modo, el ciego ve, el en- fermo goza de salud, el prisionero de libertad, el pobre de las riquezas y el anciano de la juventud, las ilusiones hacen los males menores. En este mundo ideal es en donde los hombres son verdaderamente iguales, y para mi tengo que no es ilusorio, sino real, puesto que de 61 depende nuestra feUcidad 15. I'^o crce Y. que hay alguna exageracion en lo que Y. dice? Ko, sefiora, pero si, creo, que debemos tener buen cuidado de regularizar nuestros pensamientos y de basar siempre nuestros castillos en el aire en la virtud y la religion. 16. I Bravo ! bravo ! muy bien, asi me gustan a mi los castillos en el aire. 254 LESSON XLVIII. EXERCISE. ^1. Who built the house you are hving in at present? An excellent architect, a friend of my father. V 2. Are you certain it was an old man that was suing for her hand ? I cannot affirm that it was an old man. 3. What a misfortune that he will not study I It would be a real misfortune if it were true ; I think it is not true. x^A. Do you ever build castles in the air ? Seldom ; for, in my opinion, real castles built of stone are to be preferred to the atrial ones you speak of. 5. What a pretty bird you have there 1 does it sing ? It sings the whole day long. 6. Do you think our young friend is really as happy as he appears to be ? No, there must be some exaggeration in what he says. 7. In what respect do these two authors differ from each other ? Read the works of both, and you will observe for yourself. 8. Do th'ey both write equally well ? No, one of them arranges his thoughts in a very strange manner, so that it is sometimes impossible to understand his meaning* and at all times disagreeable to read him. 9. Is Peter punished now' in school as often as formerly ? As often as ever ; but it is useless to punish him, for tliough he is good for a few days, yet he always gets back to his old habits. 10. Does that man always say what he thinks? lam surelfiannot say ; but it seems to me that there is in his manner of speaking a some- thing I cannot explain that hides his real thoughts. 11. Is he liked in general by those who know him ? On the contrary, everybody hates him and ridicules him for his meanness. 12. Have you any curiosity to see the interior of a royal palace ? If the occasion offered (presented itself), I would like to see it ; otherwise I am perfectly content with the interior of my own house. 13. You are wise for that; happiness is not at all times to be found in palaces. Ah 1 I see you aret something of a philosopher. 14. How is this, sir ? your exercise is incomplete. I confess that had I wished I might have finished it ; but you will find that, as far as it goes, it is not imperfect. 15. That is to say that the quality does not depend on the quantity. Precisely so ; you may complain of my not having done the whole of the exercise, but I do not think you can criticise the part I have brought to you. 16. What sizej is the book your friend has just published ? The same eize as the one he published before. * Logiue quiere dedr. t Tiene V, X TamaHa. LESSON XLIX 255 LESSON XLIX. Acudir. Agregar. Afiadir. Componer. Contener. Incluir. racilitar. Ofrecer. To hasten (to a place), to refer. To add. To add. To compose, to mend, to fix. To contain. To include. To facilitate. To offer. Por instruldo que sea. However learned he m Anteriormente. Formerly, previously. Comparativamente. Comparatively. Corrientemente. Currently, fluently. riuidamente. Fluently. Suficiente. SuflBxjient. En general. In general. Generalmente. Generally. Considerablemente. Considerably. Particularmente. Particularly, privately. En cuanto i. Artificial. Anterior. Aborrecible. Celeste, azul celeste. Celestial. Calico. Chinesco. Creible. Despreciable. Familiar. Gigantesco. Terrestre. Territorial. Terroso. Terrado, terrero. Terrenal. Terron. I As to, as for. Artificial. Anterior, previous. Hateful. Celestial, sky-blue. Celestial, heavenly. Celestial, heavenly. Chinese. Credible. Despicable. Familiar. Gigantic. Terrestrial, earthly. Territorial. Terreous, earthy. Terrace. Terrestrial, earthly. Lump (or clod) of earth. 256 LBSSON XLIX. Ricacho. Very rich. Picaresco. Roguish. Patronimico. Patronymic. Propio. Proper, own Mudable. Changeable. Verbal. Verbal. Arenal. Sandy (ground). Arboleda. Grove. Ascenso. Promotion. Ascension. Ascension. Alvarez. Alvarez. Carnuza. Bad meat. Calvinista. Calvinist. Creencia. Belief, credences Catolicismo. Catholicism. Ciencia. Science. Diccionario. Dictionary. Gentualla. Rabble. Escobajo. A bad broom. Madrastra. Step-mother. Boticario. Druggist, apothe- Terminacion. Termination. cary. Dicha. Happiness. Dominguez. Dominguez. Isla. Island. Fernandez. Fernandez. Educacion. Education. Idiotismo. Idionu Escoba. Broom. Filosofastro. Philosophaster. Excusa. Excuse. Hijastro. Step-son. Explicacion. Explanation. Herman astro. Step-brother. Espada. Sword. Hombracho. Corpulent. Exclamacion. Exclamation. Libraco. A contemptible Firma. Signature. book. Gota. Drop. Pajarraco. An ugly bird. Figura. Figure, appear- Latinajo. Dog Latin. ance. Manzanar. Apple orchard. Faccion. Feature. Pinar. Pine grove. Factura. Invoice. Protestante. Protestant. Facultad. Faculty, power. Padrastro. Step-father. Adquisicion. Acquirement Significado. Signification, Astronomia. Astronomy. meaning. Afluencia, fluido2 :. Fluency. Vinacho. Bad wine. Protestantismo. Protestantism. Ilabanero. Ilavanese. Madrilcflo. Madrilenian, Rodrfguez. Rodriguez. Sanchez. Sanchez, [heart. Amante. Lover, sweet- Arbol. Tree. Amador. Lover. LESSON XLIX. 257 COMPOSITION. /l Porqu^ lee V. ese libraco ? Porque no tengo otro ; pero V. se equi- voca, es uu libro clasico excelente. ^Conoce V. a aquel ricacho ? Le conozco ; pero no le trato, porque es^ iin hombracho que solo le gusta tra- tarse con gentualla. J'lan, no barras con ese escobajo, que ensucia mas que limpia. vLa came buena se vende h treinta cen- tavos la libra ; la carnuza a veinte. Ese estudiante suele decir latinajos, pero no sabe Latin. En la America del Norte hay mas pro- testantes que catolicos. Los boticarios en los Estados Unidos, no solo venden medicinas, sino per- fumeria, cigarros y otras muchas cosas. iVive el Senor Fernandez con su pa- dre? No, sefior, porque no quiere vivir con su madrastra y hermanastros. I Es V. madrileiio ? No, senor, soy Habanero. \<2Lquel filosofastro es despreciable. Esa senorita es muy amable ; pero muy mudable. Why do you read that contemi)tible old book? Because I have no other ; but you are mistaken, it is an excellent classic (book). Do you know that rich man ? I know him ; but I have no intercourse with him, because he is a low man, whose taste is to associate only with the rabble. /John, do not sweep with that old stump of a broom ; it dirties more than it cleans. Good meat sells at thirty cents a pound, poor (bad) meat at twenty. That student is in the habit of reciting dog Latin, but he does not know Latin. There are more Protestants than Catho- lics in North America. In the United States the druggists sell not only medicines, but perfumery, cigars, and many other things. Does Mr. Fernandez live with his father ? No, sir ; because he does not wish to live with his step-mother and step- brothers. Are you a Madrilenian ? No, sir, I am a Havanese. That philosophaster is a despicable (man). ^That young lady is very amiable, but very changeable. EXPLANATION. 242. Derivative Nouns. — These nouns constitute one of the chief sources of the richness of the Spanish language ; we have already introduced some of them in previous lessops, when treating of augmentative and diminutive terminations. 268 LESSON XLIX. These terminations are very numerous, both for the sub- stantives and adjectives, and each one of them determines the general signification of the derivative noun. As it would be impossible to give in this place a complete list of all these terminations, we shall endeavor to lay before the student such of them as are to be found in most common use. 243. The terminations aco, acho^ alia and wza, denote in- feriority; as Libraco. Pajarraco. Vinac/io. GentuaZ/a. Carnwsa. A contemptible old book. An ugly bird. Bad wine. Rabble. Bad meat. The termination acho is sometimes augmentative ; (is, Ricac^. I Very rich. HombracAo. | A big (or corpulent) man. 244. Ajo implies meanness, and the consequent contempt inspired by it ; as, Escobo/o. j An old stump of a broom. Latino/o. | Dog Latin. 245. The terminations a?, ar, ego^ ico, il, iscOy in adjectives, commonly denote the quality of the thing ; as, ArtificiaL Familiar. Gigantic Ros:uish. Artificial. Familiar. Gigantesco. Picaresco. Cliisico. Chinesco. Classic Chinese. 246. In substantives the same terminations, aZ, ar^ and also eda and edo, serve to form collective nouns ; as, Arholcda. Grove. Arena/. Sandy ground. Manzanar. Apple orchard. Pinar. Pine grove. 247. The terminations ante, ario, ente, ero, ista and or are LESSON XLIX. 259 for the most part expressive of use, sect, profession, trade, or occupation; as, Estndiante. Boticario. Zapatero. Organtsto. Trotestante. CaXvinista. Pintor. Student. Druggist. Shoemaker. Organist. Protestant Calvinist. Painter. 248. The termination astro signifies inferiority in a super- lative degree ; as, Jilosof astro, a despicable philosopher ; poetas- tro, poetaster ; and it is curious to observe that it also serves to express the degrees of relationship existing between those persons who more generally hate than love each other ; as, Hermanos^ro. Hijos^ro. Fsidrasiro. Ms^drastra. Step-brother. Step-son. Step- father. Step-mother. 249. £le corresponds to the same termination in English ; as, AborreciJ^e. Creible. 'J Hateful. MudaftZe. Credible. Changeable. Amiable. 250. Ismo corresponds to the English termination isni; as, Catolicismo. I Catholicism. Protestantismo. | Protestantism. 251. The names of nationalities are also derivatives, and have their terminations in ero, es, eno ; as, Habanero. I Havanese. Frances. French, Frenchman. Madrile;io. I Madrilenian. 252. Many patronymic, or family, names are also deriva- tives ; for instance, Alvarez, Dorainguez, Fernandez, Rodriguez, Sanchez, &c., were the names that were given to the sons of the Alvaros, Domingos, Fernandos, Rodrigos, Sanchos, &c., changing the final o into ez. 260 LESSON XLIX. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. ^Es neccsario para hablar una lengua aprender todas las palabras que contieue dicha lengua ? De ningun modo, ademas, 70 no creo que exista un horabre, por instruido que sea, que las sepa todas. 2. ^ Cuantas palabras piensa V. que sean suficientes para poder hablar el espafiol corrienteraente ? De tres k cuatro mil palabras primitivas con sus derivados es todo lo que se requierc, para hablar una lengua fliiida- mente. 3. Si, pero probablemente los derivados seran en tanto 6 mayor mimero que los primitivos. — Asi es, pero una vez que se conocen las terminaciones, es muy facil el formarlos, aunque nunca se hayan visto an- teriormente. 4. I Es posible ! ent6nces esto debe facilitar mucho el estudio de la lengua. — Mucbisimo, porque, como ya hemos diebo, sabiendo los primi- tivos no tiene mas que ailadirseles las terminaciones, segun el significado que qui era darseles. 5. ^Quiere Y. hacerme el favor de formar algunos derivados? Si, seflor, con mucbo gusto ; d6me V. los primitivos. 6. I Cuales son los derivados de cielo ? Celeste y celestial. 7. }, De tierra ? Terrestre, terreual, y otros. 8. g Porqu6 no me los da V. todos ? Porque me parece mejor que aprenda V. primeraraente los de mas uso, pues sobre haber muchos, los hay de poco uso comparativamente. 9. Cuales otros se pudieran formar de cielo y tierra ? C61ico ; terroso, terron, y otros muchos. 10. gSe pueden formar derivados de los verbos? Si, sefior, y d estos se les da el nombre de verbales. 11. ^Cuales se derivan del verbo amar? Amador, amante, amado, amable. 12. ^De ascender? Ascenso, ascension. 13. ^Decreer? Creyente, creencia, creible, crMulo, crMito. 14. I De estudiar ? Estudiante, estudio ; pudiendo agregar ademds los anraentativos y diminutivos que tambien son derivados, como estudian- tillo, estudianton, etc. 15. I De qu6 se derivan los norabres de familia Gonzalez, Dominguez, etc.? Se derivan de los nombres propios Gonzalo, Domingo, etc. 16. ^Cuantas palabras cree V. que contendni esta gramdtica? Mas de tres rail palabras primitivas y un gran niimcro de derivadas. 17. ^En acabando la gramatica podre traducir y hablar sobre cual- quiera materia que se ofrezca? Podra V. liablar de todo y seguir una conversacion en general como V. ve que ya lo hacemos ; pero para tra- LESSOR?- XLIX. 261 ducir J hablar de cualquiera ciencia, arte li oficio en particular, tendra V. que acudir al dicciouario, porque es imposible introducir en una gramatica todas las palabras necesarias para poder hacer esto. 18. Y en cuanto a los idiotismos de la lengua, ^se hallaran todos en esta gramatica? Tampoco, puesto que se podrian componer tres 6 cuatro volumenes como este j quiza no incluirian todos los de la lengua. 19. gComo los aprendere ent6nces? En la conversacion de personas instruidas y en la lectura de buenos libros. EXERCISE. 4l. Did Charles go to another regiment at the time of his promotion? Yes, he left the 71st and went to the Tth. 2. What do you know about the names Sanchez, Dominguez, and all those ending in ez ? That they mean son of Sancho, son of Domingo, and are formed from those names by adding the termination you have just mentioned. y 8. To whom does that magnilScent pine grove belong ? To the step- son of the gentleman who owns that pretty little house you see over there in the distance (d lo lejos). \^ 4. What contemptible old book is that you are reading so attentively ? It is no contemptible old book at all {ninguno\ it is the dictionary ; I always go to the dictionary for a word of which I do not know the meaning. 4 5. Do you know the names of all the heavenly bodies ? No, nor you either ; the science of astronomy is stiU. imperfect, and there are besides many of the heavenly bodies hidden from human sight. 6. Is not that young gentleman a great lover of the sciences ? Yes, but most particularly of the exact sciences. 7. Why do you sweep with that old stump of a broom? It is the best I have. 4 8. Did you say he was a philosopher ? No, on the contrary, I said, he was but a miserable philosophaster. 9. How does that rich fellow amuse himself? Beading history in general, and that of his own country in particular. 10. I observe that you speak German very fluently now; have you changed your book? No, I have still the same one, but I myself study more than I did formerly. 11. Do you know whether your cousin speaks as fluently as your sister? Mrs. Alvarez says that in familiar conversation they speak equally fluently. /12. Do you do any compositions ? Yes, our father requires us to do two compositions a week on the idioms of the language. 262 LESSON L. 13. Is it not a despicable habit to offer to do things we never intend to perform (llevar a cabo) ? 1 should say it is more than despicable, it is even hateful. >/ 14. Does not the study of grammar considerably facilitate the acquisi- tion of a language ? Yes, but that alone is not sufficient : something more is required. 15. Have you much fruit at your house in the country ? We have a very fine orchard of apples. 16. What language was that your young friend spoke in a moment \ago ? What he takes for Latin ; but what is not in reality any thing but dog Latin. ^17. Would not that letter have been better if you had not added that last word ? It appeared to me to be necessary to add that to what I had ah'eady said, so that the meaning might be more easily understood. LESSON L. Amenazar. Apoyar. Disgustar. Recurrir. Sacar. A pesar de. Y diciendo y haciendo. J Todo sea por Dios ! Tomar las de villadiego. Sobre todo. Desproporcionadisimamente. Adverbial. Antisocial. Antepentiltima. Iniitil. Componente. Izquierdo. Derecho. Pentiltima. Superlativo. To threaten, to menace. To lean upon, to support. To displease, to disgust, to grieve. To recur, to have recourse. To take out. I In spite of. And suituag the action to the word. I hope all will be for the best I To take to one's heels, to make offi Above all. Without any proportion. Adverbial. Antisocial. Antepenultimate. Useless. Component. Left. Right. Penultimate. Superlative. J LESSOK L, 263 Anteojos. Aguardiente. Barbilampiiio. Correveidile. Bienhechor. Director. Dolor de muelas. Dentista. Disgiisto. Hazmereir. Condiscipulo. Pisaverde. Pormenor. Pnntapi^. Parasol. Paraguas. Quitasol. Socialism o. Sacamuelas. Pueblo. Vicerector. Spectacles. Brandy. Beardless. Tell-tale. Benefactor. Director. Toothache. Dentist. Disgust, grief. Laughing-stock. Schoolmate. Pop, coxcomb. Detail. Kick. Parasol. Umbrella. Parasol. Socialism. Tooth-drawer. People, town. Vice-rector. Equivocacion. Ganapierde. Barberia. La derecha. La izquierda. Sinrazon. Particula. Quijada. Las damas. Mistake. A game in check- ers. Barber-shop. The right hand. The left hand. Injustice. Particle. Jaw. Draughts, check- COMPOSITIOIT. V No le esta bien k un anciano el ser pisa- verde, eso es propio de barbilampinos. ^iQuien ha dado un puntapie a aquel muchacho ? VYo se lo he dado, porque es un corre- veidile. Este hombre juega muy bien a las da- mas, sobre todo a la ganapierde. , I Tiene V. un quitasol 6 un paraguas ? vTengo 4mbos. V^se joven bebe mucho aguardiente y no . hace case de los consejos de su bien- ' heehor. y Esa es la razon porque es el hazmereir de todo el mundo. V i Tiene V. buena vista ? V^o, senor, y esta es la razon porque USD anteojos. Mi condiscipulo Manuel me ha ayuda- do a hacer la coraposicion. It is not becoming to an old man to be a fop ; that belongs to beardless boys. Who gave that boy a kick ? I did, for he is a tell-tale. This man plays very well at draughts, and especially at ganapierde (give away). Have you a parasol or an umbrella ? I have both. That young man drinks a great deal of brandy, and pays no heed to the ad' vice of his benefactor. That is the reason why he is the laugh- ing-stock of every one. Have you good sight ? No, sir, and that is the reason why I / use spectacles. my school-fellow Emanuel has helped , me to do my composition. 264 LESSON L, s/ Es inutil que me cuente V. los parrae- nores. JSl director y el vicerector de la escuela son hombres excelentes. ^Me disgustan las sinrazones. El socialismo, 4 pesar de la opinion de los que lo apoyan, es antisocial 6 im- posible. It is useless for you to tell me the de- tails. The director and sub-director of the school are excellent men. Unreasonableness disgusts me. Socialism, in spite of the opinion of those who support it, is antisocial and impossible. EXPLANATION. 253. Compound !N"ouns. — These are very numerous in the Spanish language ; some are formed of two nouns, as harhilam- pino^ beardless ; puntapU, a kick ; aguardiente, brandy ; others are formed of a noun and a verb, as quitasol, parasol ; saoor muelas, tooth-drawer; others of an adjective and a verb, as pisaverde, coxcomb ; others of a noun and an adverb', as bien- hechor, benefactor ; others of a noun and a preposition, as an- teojos, spectacles ; others of two verbs, as ganapierde, a mode of playing draughts ; others of two verbs and a pronoun, as hazrnereir, laughing-stock ; three verbs, a pronoun and a con- junction enter into the formation of correveidile, tale-bearer ; and, finally, others are composed of a noun and some one of the following component particles : «, ah, abs, ad, ante, anti, circum or circun, cis, citra, co, com, con, contra, de, des, di, dis, e, em, en, entre, equi, es or ex, extra, im, in, infra, inter, intro, o, oh, per, por, pos, pre, preter, pro, re, retro, sa or za, se, semi, sesqui, sin, so, sohre, son, sos, sii, sub, s^per, sus, tra, trans or tros, ultra, and vice or vi; as. ^n^isocial. Composicion. Co^idiscipulo. DiveQ.iOT. Disgusto. /A/iposible. /nutil. Pormenor. Pospuesto. iSiwrazon. T'ecfirector. Antisocial. Composition. School-fellow. Director. Displeasure. Impossible. Useless. Detail. Post-fixed. Unreasonableness. Sub-director. LESSON L. 265 We call tliem component particles, because the majority of them — although they are true Latin and Greek prepositions — have no signification in Spanish, except as prefixes, in which case they serve to augment, diminish, or modify the significa- tion of the simple word in proportion to the strength or value they have in the languages from which we have taken them. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. Don Jose, i sabe V. el significado de las palabras penultima y ante- peniiltima? Si, seiior, porque correspondeu alas palabras m^QnaiS) penul- timate y antepenultimate. 2. Pues bien, ahora, que hablamos de "cafionazos," quiero decir, ahora que hablamos de estas palabras, le contar6 a V. un cuentecito. — Muy bien, a mi me gustan muclio los cuentos, sobre todo cuando no son largos y vienen a pelo. 3. Pues este viene a pelo y no es largo. — ^Ent6nce3 cuenteraelo V., Don Pedro, escucho con la mayor atencion. 4. Pues vaya de cuento : Un cabaUero tenia un fuerte dolor de muelas, y fu6 d un sacamuelas para que le sacase una. 5. I Hombre ! ^ y porque no fue a casa de un deutista ? Porque en aquel pueblecito no habia dentistas y tuvo que ir a una barberia, cuyo barbero unia a su oficio el de sacamuelas. 6. J Pobre hombre ! adelante. — Este barbero, 6 sea sacamuelas, pero que de ningun modo era dentista, le pregunto : 7. " I Que muela le duele a Y. ? " " La penultima del lado izquierdo de la quijada inferior." 8. " Muy bien," y diciendo y hacieudo le sac6, no la peniiltima, sino la ultima. 9. " J Huy ! 2 que ha hecho V., hombre? yo le dije a Y. que me sacase la penultima, y Y. me ha sacado la i^tima." — " j Calle! pues yo creia que pemiltiraa y ultima era todo una misma cosa." 10. " No, hombre, no ; la penultima es la que esta antes de la Ultima." — " J Diantre ! Mil perdones, y si6ntese Y. que esta vez no me equivocare." IL " ; Yamos, y todo sea por Dios! " "jAy! ay! hombre dado a Barrabas ! " 12. "iToma! ^y ahora porqu6 se queja? ^ no vengo de sacarle la que estaba antes de la tiltiraa?" "Si ; pero Y. olvid6 contar la que me sac6 anteribrmente, de modo que ahora me ha sacado la antepenultimay — La ante .... ^que? Pero no importa, dejemos estos malditos nom- bres, que han sido causa de mi equivocacion, y sientese Y. que yo le aser guro a Y. que." .... 12 266 LESSON L. 13. Pero el parroquiano, dandolo d todos los diablos, tom6 las de villa- diego, y se cree que nunca mas recurrio a un sacamuelas para que le sa- case la peniiltima inuela. 14. ^Cual es la palabra coinpuesta mas larga en espafiol? Despro- porcionadisimamente. 15. ^De qu6 palabras se compone? De la particula componente des^ el nombre proporcion^ la terminacion superlativa sima j la termininacion adverbial mente, EXERCISE. 1. Do you nse spectacles because it is fashionable with some people to wear {gastar) them, or because you cannot see without them ? Because I cannot see without thejn. 2. My toothache is not any better yet. Then you had better go to the dentist's and get him to extract (sacar) the tooth. 3. Do you often see the beardless youth who came to walk with us without being asked * last evening ? Not often, nor do I care to see him very often, he is too mucti of a fop for ray taste. 4. Which way do I turn here to go to the new hotel ? Turn to the right ; it is not more than two streets to the hotel. 5. What did he do when you said that ? He took to his heels, and I have neither heard of nor seen him since. 6. What were your two school-fellows doing at the door a few minutes ago ? One of them had told the director of a mistake in the other's exercise, and this one threatened to punish him for his trouble (molestia) ; so, suiting the action to the word, he gave him a kick, and called him a despicable tell-tale. 7. Has your brother bought the house yet that he intended to buy ? No ; when he came to examine the details he found the price of th^ house entirely out of proportion to the value. 8. Do you always take an umbrella when it rains ? I seldom use an umbrella ; when it rains I never go out, if I can avoid it. 9. What a strange man that is ! Yes, he is the laughing-stock of every one who knows him. JO, What kind of wine do they give you in your hotel ? They give us very poor wine, and so I drink very little of it ; I prefer water. 11. Do you often play at draughts (or checkers)? Very often; but I prefer the losing game. 12. What is that man^^ business? He keeps a barber's shop in Sixth or Seventh Avenue. 13. I want you to be good enough to translate this letter for me. Oh 1 LESSON LI. 267 it is useless to talk to me of translating any thing just now {'por ahora\ for I have a headache. 14. Where is that family living now ? In a small town in the westerq part of the State. LESSON LI. Atravesar. To traverse, to croes. Atropellar. To run over, to hurry one's self too much. Causar. To cause. Correr. To riin. Calcular. To calculate. Dividir. To divide. Exponer. To expose. Extrafiar. To wonder at. Hospedar. To lodge and entertain. Incendiar. To set fire to. Llorar. To cry, to weep. Manifestar. To manifest, to show, to inform. Ordenar. To order, to arrange. Oponer. To oppose. Proponer. To propose. Parar. To stop. Procurar. To procure, to try. Eesistir. To resist. Hivalizar. To rival. Simpatizar. To sympathize. ISTi con mucho. Far from, far from it. A decir verdad. To say the truth. En lo que respecta. With respect to. En march a. Let us go, let us start. A lo largo. Lengthwise. A esta parte. Within the last. Api^. On foot. En frente. In front, opposite. Continuamente. Continually. Perpendicularmen te. Perpendicularly. Alrededor. Around. 268 LESSON LI. Admirable. Admirable. Apto. Apt. Curioso. Curious. Desocupado. Disengaged, unoccupied. Directo. Direct. Indirecto . Indirect. Figurado . Figurative. Inepto. Unsuit?able. Gramatical. Gramatical Oomplemento. Complement. Academia. Academy. Cosmopolita. Cosmopolite. Admiracion. Admiration, won- Carruaje. Carriage. der. Delito. Crime./ Arquitectura. Architecture. Dibujo. y^ Drawing. Construccion. Construction. Individuo. Individual, mem- Belleza. Beauty. ber. Frase. Phrase. Literate. Man of letters. Distancia. Distance. Gozo. Enjoyment. Esquina. Corner, v Museo. Museum. Ldgrima. Tear. Paseo. Promenade. Laboriosidad. Industry. ^ Panto. Point, place. Marcha. March. Edificio. Edifice. Metr6poli. Metropolis. Peligro. Danger. Madurez. Ripeness, maturi- Omnibus. Omnibus. ty, prudence. Soltero. N/ Bachelor. Permanencia. Permanence, stay. Publico. Public. Sorpresa. Surprise. Trascurso. Course (of time). Vista. Sight, view. Rincon. Corner. Orilla. Bank, border. 1/ Tablero de da- Checker-board. Batalla. Battle. mas. COMPOS Remuneracion. 3ITI0N. Remuneration. Oriente y Occidente. Cielo y tierra. ViEl hombre discrete ordena siempre las cosas con madurez. La casa de Juan se ha incendiado. ^^n individuo inepto para escribir pucde ser apto para otraa cosas. v/EI reo, k quien se castiga, ha cometido grandes dclitos. East and West. Heaven and earth. The sensible man always arranges his affairs with prudence. They have set fire to John's house. An individual that is unsuited for wri- ting may be apt at other things. The culprit that is being punished has committed great crimes. LESSON LI. 269 Un hombre pobre es muy diferente de un pobre hombre. Hemos dado un gran paseo. Hemos dado un paseo grande. Lo que V. dice es una cosa cierta. Yo he observado cierta cosa. Madrid, a 23 de Agosto de 1866 {or Madrid, Agosto 23 de 1866, or Ma- drid y Agosto 23 de 1866). Yo soy quien probare que tu te equi- vocas. / Dios es admirable en todas sus obras, pues todas ellas manifiestan su poder y su bondad {or admirable se muestra Dios en todas sus obras ; su poder y su bondad manifiestan todas ellas). Solo Dios es grande, hermanos mios. Adios, Juan ; ^ que tal ? Hasta manana. Buenos dias. Nueva York, ciudad de los Estados TJnidos. Yo mismo le vl Uorar Idgrimas de gozo. v' Pronto se calmaran las borrascas que agitan la nave del Estado. ^ Ha estado V. alguna vez en el Museo de Nueva York ? A poor man (a man in poverty) is very different from a poor fellow. We have had an excellent walk. We have taken a long walk. What you say is certain. I have observed a certain thing. Madrid, August 23d, 1866. It is I who shall prove that you are ^ mistaken. God is wonderful in all His works, for they all set forth his power and His goodness. ^od only is great, my brethren. Good morning, John ; how do you do ? I shall see you to-morrow. New York, a city of the United States. ^ I myself saw him shed tears of joy. The tempests by which the ship of State is tossed shall soon be calmed. Have you ever been in the New York Museum ? EXPLANATION. Notwithstanding we have already made some general ob- servations relative to the place each part of speech occupies in sentences, we deem it expedient to add here a few rules which the learner will find of considerable utility in composition. 254. The natitkal coitstruction demands that the sub- stantive be placed before the adjective, because the thing is before its quality ; that the governing word precede the one governed, for it is natural that the former should present itself to the mind before the latter; that the subject precede the verb ; that the verb precede the adverb by which it is modi- fied ; that the complement come after the verb and the adverb, if there be one ; and that when two or more things are to be 270 LESSON LI. expressed, of which one, from its nature, comes before the other, this order be preserved ; as, Oriente y Occidente. Cielo y tierra. Norte y Sur. Este y Oeste. East and "West. Heaven and earth. North and South. East and West. 255. FiGUEATTVE CONSTRUCTION. — The gcnius of the Span- ish language, and, above all, use, allow us to depart in some cases from the above rules ; thus avoiding the monotonous uni- formity which would otherwise take place, and leaving the writer more latitude for the construction and arrangement of his periods. So long as sense and perspicuity do not suffer, there is ordinarily no fixed position for any of the parts of speech. Therefore : 1st. Personal pronouns subjects of verbs may, with a few exceptions, be expressed or suppressed at will. 2d. When the pronoun subject is expressed, it may be placed either before or after the verb. 3d. The same liberty exists with respect to the verb, adverb and complement. 4th. Nevertheless, for the sake of clearness in our sentences, it is essential that certain words which together form a whole (such as adjectives with the substantives they qualify, or parts of sentences, acting the part of subject or complement) should be arranged in the same order as that in which the ideas they ex- press are naturally presented to the mind. 6th. There are also certain words which, when placed bc^ fore certain others, have a signification very different from that which they have when placed after them. Of all the modem languages the Spanish is certainly the most flexible ; indeed, in no other can the same idea be ex- pressed with the same words in so endless a variety of con- structions. Let the following sentence serve as a proof of the truth of this assertion : Esta sefiorita era hijc. de Don Manuel I This young lady was the daughter of S4nchez. I Mr. Emanuel Sanchez. LESSOI?^ LI. 271 256. Words which, from their nature, cannot be separa- ted : Esta senorita. Ue Don Manual Sanchez, Natural Construction. Esta senorita era hija de Don Manuel Sanchez. Isi inversion. Era esta senorita hija de Don Manuel Sanchez, 2d " Era hija esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez. Bd " Era de Don Manuel Sanchez hija esta senorita. 4:th " De Don Manuel Sanchez era hija esta senorita. 6th " Hija era esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez. 6tk " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez era esta senorita. ^fh " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez esta senorita era. 8th " De Don Manuel Sanchez hija era esta senorita. 257. The natural construction is, of course, the most gram- matical, but the best writers generally give preference to the figurative, as being more easy and elegant, and as giving at the same time more freedom to imagination and genius, and finally, as being better suited to express the grand emotions of the souL CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. jOh! amigo mio, Y. por Nueva York! jCuanto lo celebro! Si, seiior, aqui me tiene V., Don Fernando, no he podido resistir la tentacion de venir a ver la America. 2. j Me alegro infinito ! i Pero porqu^ no se vino Y. a hospedar a mi casa ? En primer lugar, porque llegu6 anoche muy tarde ; y en segundo, porque a los solteros nos gusta la libertad y la vida del hotel. 3. Bien, no me opongo, a condicion de que vendra Y. a pasar con nosotros algunos dias. — Lo har6 asi con mucho gusto, ademas, Don Fernando, que, como no se hablar ingles y esta ciudad es tan grande, tengo miedo de perderme si salgo solo, y quisiera que, durante mi per- manencia en ella, tuviese Y. la bondad de ser mi cicerone, de modo es que me propongo, pasar la mayor parte del tiempo en su compafiia. 4. En eso me hara Y. mucho placer, ademas de que yo gozard tanto como Y. con la sorpresa y adrairacion que le causaran a Y. las vistas de esta metr6poli. gHa estado Y. jamas en L6udres 6 en Paris? No, se- fior, jamas he sal; do de EspafSa hasta ahora. 5. I Cuando qiiiere Y. que principiemos nuestros paseos ? Cuando Y. guste ; ahora mismo si esta Y. desocupado, porque, a decLr verdad, tengo una gran curiosidad. 6. I Quiere Y. que vayamos a pi6 6 en coche ? A pie, si Y. gusta ; me parece que podr^mos ver mas c6modamente ; pero toraar^mos un coche cuando hay a que salir de la ciudad. 272 LESSON LI. 7. Pues en marcha, vcnga el brazo. — Yo temo que voy a molestar a V^ Don Fernando, porque soy muy curioso, como dicen los franceses, soy un Jidneur^ y me llaraan la atencion hasta las cosas mas peqiiefias. 8. Entonces siuipatizaremos, porque a mi me gusta observarlo y criti- oarlo todo. — i Qu6 calle es esta en que estamos ahora ? Esta es la Cuarta Avenida, y esa que la atraviesa es la calle Veinte y tres. 9. ^Como es eso? Las calles en Nueva York estan divididas en avenidas, que son las que atraviesan la ciudad a lo largo, y en calles, que la atraviesan de occidente a oriente, cortando las avenidas en 4ngulos rectos y formando toda la ciudad como un tablero de damas, de modo que sabiendo el numero de la calle 6 avenida y el de la casa a donde se va, puede calcularse facilmente la distancia. 10. Y este edificio de arquitectura tan curiosa de la esquina, iqu6 es? Esta es la nucva acaderiiia de dibujo, donde se exponen al ptiblico moy buenas pinturas. 11. ^Hay aqui tan buenas pinturas como en el musbo de Madrid? No, ni con mucho ; este pais es aun nuevo, y aunque puedan hacerlo en otras cosas, todavia no pueden rivaJizar en lo que respecta a las bellas artes con Europa. 12. ; Ilombre, qu6 herraosa plaza ! Esta es la plaza de Madison y todos estos bellos edificios que V. ve d su alrededor, y la plaza misma, han side hechos de veinte aflos a esta parte. 13. g Qu6 edificio es aquel de enfrente que es tan grande como nn pala- cio ? Ese es el hotel de la Quinta Avenida, y en efecto V. tiene razon en compararlo a un palacio, porque los hoteles son en realidad los palacios de los Estados Unidos, y se dice que son los mejores del mundo. 14. I Cuidado ! hombre, por poco se deja V. atropellar por el 6mnibus. — j Caspita ! j qu6 mujer tan hermosa ! 15. Si ; pero no debe V. pararse a adrairar las bellezas, en medio de Broadway en su punto de reunion con la Quinta Avenida, porque corre Y. peligro de ser atropellado por los carruiges de todas especies que conti- nuamcnte lo atraviesan. 16. Don Fernando, i son todas las sefloras en Nueva York tan hermo- sas como esa que acaba de pasar ? No s6, porque yo solo mir6 d6nde ponia los pi6s, procurando escapar al mismo tiempo de los carrutyes; pero si podr6 decirle a Y. que mujercs mas hermosas que las que he visto yo en Nueva York no creo que se encuentren en ninguna parte del mundo. 17. jOiga Y. ! ^no hablan espafiol csos que van delante de nosotrosi Eso no debe Y. extrafiarlo ; esta es una ciudad cosmopolita ; en ella hay gentes do todas las naciones y Y. oird en el trascurso de poco tiempo hablar aleman, espafiol, frances y otras muchas lenguas. LESSON LI. 273 EXERCISE. 1. What do you understand by the complement of a verb? It is a phrase or a part of a phrase that serves to complete the idea expressed by the verb. 2. Can you tell me what a cosmopolitan jg ? A cosmopolitan is one who is not a stranger in any country, a citizen of the world. 3. Where does that gentleman live ? In Fifth Avenue, on the corner of Twenty-second Street. 4. How long has your uncle been a member of the Royal Academy of Madrid ? He is not a member of the Royal Academy of Madrid ; but he has been a member of the Academy of Sciences for the last ten years. 5. Take that book from Charles and give it to Peter. I will give him some other book, because if I took that one from Charles he would cry. 6. Is your friend a married man ? No, sir, he is a bachelor. 7. Have you ever seen Da Vinci's celebrated painting of " The Last Supper" ?* No; but I have seen the engraving of that painting, made by Morghen, and it is a truth admitted by every one, that, notwithstanding the absence of coloring, that engraving is a happy expression of the original. 8. How long does it take to go from here to the Central Park ? But a short time ; the distance is not very great. 9. Could you run there in as short a time as one could go in a car- riage ? I do not doubt that I could, if I started from the same place and ut the same time as the carriage. 10. How are the several States of the Union divided ? Into Northern, Southern, Eastern, and Western. 11. Is that not the tallest man you have ever seen? Far from it; I have seen several much taller. 12. Have they been able to fill that oflBce (or position) yet ? I beheve not; I understand that one of our friends was about to apply for it {pre- tenderlo\ but his father was opposed to his doing so, and so he would not persist. 13. How far did you go before you found him? I walked about half an hour by the river side, inquiring of every one I met whether he had seen a young man on horseback ; and at last an old man told me he had seen him cross the river, nearly opposite the new building they are put- ting up (erecting), at a short distance from the entrance to the public promenade. 14. Are there any fine public walks in the metropolis ? About seven or eight beautiful ones, the most of which have been made within the last five years. . _ •' , * La cena. 274 LESSON LII. LESSON LII. Aconsejar. To counsel, to advise. Aprovechar. To profit, to embrace (profit by). Consistir. To consist. Oolorir. To color (paintings). Citar. To quote, to cite. Costar. To cost. Comimicar. To communicate. Deraostrar. To demonstrate, to point out. Deteriorar. To deteriorate. Expresar. To express. Freir. To fry. (ory Grabar. To engrave, to fix (in the mem- Tomarse (el trabajo). To take the trouble. Prender. To take up, to arrest. Perfeccionar. To perfect. Merecer. To merit, to deserve. Eeunir. To gather, unite. to assemble, to re- Eemunerar. To remunerate. Visitar. To visit, to seai-ch. Por ejemplo. For instance Que yo sepa. For all I know. List of the Irregular Past Participles of all the Verhs already introduced. Abierto. Opened. Frito. Fried. Bendito. Blessed. Hecho. Done. Contradicho. Contradicted. Impuesto. Imposed. Oonvicto. Convicted. Muerto. Died. Compuesto. Composed. Manifiesto. Manifested. Dicho. Said, told. Oculto. Ilidden, con- Devuelto. Given back, re- cealed. turned. Opuesto. Opposed. Dispuesto. Disposed. Preso. Taken, arrested. Escrito. Written. Puesto. Placed, put Electo. Elected. Provisto. Provided. Expreso. Expressed. Roto. Broken. Expuesto. Exposed. Satisfecho. Satisfied. Visto. Seen. Vuelto. Returned. LESSON LII. 275 Amplio. Ample. Actual. Present. Antiguo. Ancient, old. Contemporaneo. Contemporary. Enemistado . At variance, on bad terms. Dramatico. Dramatic. Moderno. Modern. Honroso. Honorable. Politico. Political. Coofnero. Cook. Amenidad. Agreeableness, Capitan. Captain. amenity. Acierto. Success. Biblioteca. Library. Oolorido. Coloring. Cena. Supper. Grabado. Engraving. Comedia. Comedy, play. Fresco. Cool, refreshing Costumbre. Custom, habit. air. Erudicion. Erudition. Empleo. Employment. Fuente. Fountain, source. Drama. Drama. Existencia. Existence. Estilo. Style. Elegancia. Elegance. J6ven. Youth. Instruccion. Instruction, learn- Mercader. Dealer. ing. Paisano. Countryman. Ignorancia. Ignorance. Hecho. Action, fact. Mencion. Mention. Siglo. Century. Literatura. Literature. Verso. Verse. Mediania. Moderation, me- Soldado. Soldier. diocrity. Prosa. Prose. Novela. Novel. Pohtica. Politics. Tragedia. Tragedy. Vasija. Vase, vessel. COMPOJ 3ITI0N. \iEst4 enemistado con su priino. Colocado en vasijas. Ha cantado una cancion espaiiola. Los caballos que ban comprado los mercaderes no son buenos. V Los caballos que fueron coraprados per los mercaderes son buenos. ^^Estan {or quodan) demostradas estas verdades. He is on bad terms with his cousin. Placed in vases (or vessels). He has sung a Spanish song. The horses the dealers have bought are not good. The horses that were bought by the dealers are good. These truths are (or remain) demon- strated. 276 LESSON HI. \J La cocinera habia frito (or freido) el pescado. Han prendido (or preso) al culpable. No s6 si babran ya proveido (or pro- visto) el empleo. Has roto el va30. V ;Ha visto V. un caballo muerto ? No, pero he visto un caballo matado. i Qui6n ha muerto 4 ese caballo ? Un paisano le ha muerto. ^ El capitan fue muerto por sus soldados. El se ha matado. El se ha muerto. \^8e es un joven muy leido, muy apro- vechado y muy callado. J Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci est& felizmente expresada en el grabado de Morghen, no obstante que le falta el colorido de la pintura. Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho por da Vinci, est4 mal colorido y deterio- rado, ha sido grabado con acierto por Morghen. The cook had fried the fish. They have arrested the ofifender. I do not know whether they have al- ready provided (a person to fill) the oflBce. You have broken the glass. Have you seen a dead horse ? No, but I have seen a h^rse with a sore back. Who killed that horse ? A countryman killed it. The captain was killed by his soldiers. He killed himself. He died. That young man is well read, makes the most of his opportunities, and talks little. It is a fact that Da Vinci's " Last Sup- per " is happily expressed in Morg- hen's engraving, notwithstanding the latter lacks the coloring of the paint- ing. Although the fresco of the " Last Sup* per," made by Da Vinci, is badly colored, and deteriorated, it has been engraved with success by Morghen. EXPLANATION. 258. Past Participles. — Some past participles retain tbe regimen of their verbs ; as, Enemistado con su primo. | On bad terms with his cousin. 259. The past participle must agree in gender and number with the subject or determining verb, except when that de- termining verb is haber ; in which case the past participle is indeclinable, whatever be the gender and number of the sub- ject; as, Ha cantado una cancion. Los caballos que ban comprado ]os mercadercs. He has sung a song. Tlie horses that the dealers bought. have But the past participle, if it comes after the auxiliaries ser, LESSON LII. 277 BStar^ quedar^ or any other, except haber^ agrees with the subject in gender and number ; as, Los caballos que fueron comprados por los mcrcaderes. Estaii {or quedan) demostrados estas verdades. The horses that were bought by the dealers. These truths are (or remain) deraon- strated. 260. Some verbs have two past participles, one regular and the other irregular. These are used very differently, since the irregular one, being a true noun, is employed in an absolute sense only, and never signifies motion, whether in the active or in the passive form. For this reason the latter may be accompanied by the verbs ser^ estar^ quedar, and others, but never by the auxiliary haher ; inasmuch as it would be im- proper to say : huho convictOj he coniracto, instead of, hubo converirndo, he contraido. 261. The irregular participles frito, fried; preso, taken prisoner; provisto, provided, and roto, broken, are the only ones that can be used with the verb haber, to form the com- pound tenses ; as. La cocinera habia friio (or freido) el pescado. Han prendido (or preso) al culpable. No se si habran ya proveido {or pro- visto) el empleo. The cook had fried the fish. They have taken (or arrested) the offender. I do not know whether they have already provided (a person to fill) the office. You have broken the glass. Has roto el vaso {sounds better than has rompido el vaso). 262. The verb matar, in the sense of to take away life, has the extraordinary irregularity of appropriating for its past par- ticiple that of the verb morir ; the participle matado being used to express wounds or sores in animals, resulting from the rubbing of the harness, or from cruel treatment; as, Un caballo matado. Un caballo muerto. Un ptLisano le ha muerto. El capitan fue muerto por sus soldados. A horse with a sore back. A dead horse. A countryman killed him. The captain was killed by his soldiers. But in speaking of a person that has committed suicide, we must say : Se ha matado (and not Se \x^muerLo). \ He has killed himself. 278 LESSON LII. 263. Some past or passive participles take an active signifi- cation, but only referring to persons ; as, Un joven leido, aprovechado, ccUloflo. \ A well read, thrifty and silent youth. 264. Past participles may sometimes take the place of substantives, and the difference can be known only by the ante- cedents and subsequents, as in this sentence : Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci esta felizmente expresada en el grahado de Morghen, no obstante que le falta el cohrido de la pin- tura. It is a fact, that " The Last Supper" by Da Vinci is happily expressed in the engraving of Morghen, not- withstanding the latter lacks the coloring of the painting. Where the words hecho, grahado and colorido, are substan- tives. The same words appear as participles in the following phrases : Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hccho por da Vinci, esta mal cohrido y deteriorado, ha sido grahado con acierto por Morghen. Although the fresco of "The Last Supper," made by Da Vinci, is badly colored and deteriorated, it has been engraved with success by Morghen. 265. Other grammarians add one more tense in the infini- tive mood ; as, Haber de amar. I To have to love. Habiendo de amar. | Having to love. But such a classification is no longer essential, nor even correct. In early Spanish literature that form frequently occurs, per- forming the office now almost exclusively filled by the regular terminations of the tenses, and chiefly those of the future indic- ative and the imperfect of the subjunctive. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. I Qu6 le gusta k Y. mas, la conversacion 6 la lectnra ? Ambas cosas me gustan mucho. 2. I Qu6 g6nero de lectura le giista u V. mas ? La historia, la come- dia, y la novela. 3. I Prefiere V. la prosn al verso ? No, sefior, la poesia me gasta mas ; pero ha do ser muy buena, porque en poesia no me gusta la rae- diania. 4. Que autvires, cu la literatura modema, me riConseja V. que lea LESSON LII. 279 para perfeccionarme en el espafioL— En historia j politica lea V. a La- ftiente, j a Minano. 5. I Y para la comedia ? A Moratin, Breton de los Herreros y Don Ventura De la Vega. 6. I No tienen Yds. otros ? Si, sefior ; pero yo le cito a V. solamente los mejores y solamente a los contemporaneos. 7. gY poetas? Zorrilla, Espronceda, Hai'tzenbuscli, y otros mu- chos. 8. I Tienen Yds. algun buen critico contemporaneo por el estilo del antiguo Quevedo ? Yo creo que no pueden encontrarse dos Quevedos ; pero, sin embargo, tenemos criticos de costumbres muy buenos, tales como Larra (Figaro), Don Ramon de Mesonero Romanos, Pelegrin, y otros. 9. I Tienen Yds. buenos autores para la tragedia y el drama ? Si, sefior, muy buenos, por ejemplo, Martinez de la Rosa, Garcia Gutierrez, Gil y Zarate, etc., etc. 10. Yo no sabia que tuviesen Yds. tantos autores buenos en la litera- tura actual. — Yo pudiera citarle a Y. otros muchos ; pero si Y. reune las obras de los catorce mencionados lograra Y. tener una pequefiita libreria de literatura moderna, que le ensefiara 4 Y. mas espafiol que todas las gramaticas y m6todos que se ban compuesto para ensefiar esta lengua hasta el dia, y que le remuneraran a Y. ampliamente por el tra- bajo que le ha costado el aprenderla, con el placer y la instruccion que le comunicaran. 11. jEs posible ! Yo habia oido decir, y asi lo habia Uegado a creer yo mismo, que Espafia no poseia nada que mereciese mencion en su litera- tura moderna, y a decir verdad, los linicos libros buenos que creia que Yds. poseian eran el Don Quijote de Cervantes y las obras dramaticas de Calderon de la Barca. — Asi lo he oido yo decir tambien, y en verdad que es una cosa que no puedo coraprender, esa general ignorancia de la existencia de una literatura espafiola contemporanea, que ha producido mas y mejores obras que las que se han producido en algun os siglos no solamente en Espafia sino en otras naciones. 12. gSe conocen en Espafia nuestros autores ingleses contemporaneos? Se conocen mucho mas de lo que aqui son conocidos los espanoles ; la prueba es que la mayor parte estan traducidos al castellano, y Yds. no tienen ningima traduccion, que yo sepa, de todos esos autores que acabo de citarle a Y. 13. Probablemente consiste en que los Americanos e Ingleses no apren- den mucho el espafiol. — Entre los Americanos debo hacer tres honrosas excepciones, que son : Washington Irving, Prestcott, y Ticknor. Estos distinguidos escritores no solo aprendieron el espafiol, sino que viajaron en Espafia, visitaron nuestras mejores biblioteoas y quiza adquirieron en 280 LESSON Lll. aquellas fuentes mucho del saber, la erudicion, el gusto y la elegancia en el decir que comunican a sus obras tanto interns y amenidad. EXERCISE. 1. Oiiglit we not to make the most of (profit by) every occasion that offers for acquiring knowledge ? That is the only way to arrive at the possession of knowledge. 2. Tell the cook I do not wish that fish to be fried. It is too late to tell her so ; she has already fried it. 3. Has that work been translated into Spanish ? Not that I know ; but it was translated with success into French, by M. de I'Orme, a few years ago. 4. Is not that gentleman to whom you introduced me a short time since a dramatist? He is, and his plays might serve as a model of ele- gance for many dramatists of higher pretensions (pretensiones) than he. 5. Have they found out yet who set fire to your uncle's house ? Yes; and the offender has been arrested and convicted of the crime. 6. Would you be good enough to lend me that novel of which you read a chapter to me the day before yesterday ? I would with great pleasure if it were mine; but it belongs to Alexander; and, as we are on bad terms at present, I should not like to ask him for any favors. 7. Would that painting be deteriorated* by being exposed to the heat of the sun (sol) ? Certainly; and the heat of a strong fire would produce the same effect upon it. 8. Did your friend, the captain, return with his regiment from the war ? No ; he was killed in the first battle that took place after his arrival at the seat {teatro) of war. 9. I saw no mention made of his death in the newspapers. No ; I believe his name did not appear in the list {liata) of the killed ; but the sad news was communicated to his brother by an officer of the same regiment. 10. Do you like to walk in the garden in the morning before breakfast? I generally go to the garden every morning and evening to read and emoke in the cool air. 11. I wish you had bought that work on English literature. So do I; it would have been very useful to Louisa, who is so desirous of becoming I)erfect in that language. 12. Did your father think Peter merited the remuneration he received? I do not know whether he did or not ; but, at all events, Peter must hav« merited some remuneration, or else ho would have got none. Deteriorar. LESSON LIII. 281 13. Are you going to have voiir name engraved on your watch? I shall only have my initials (inicial) engraved on it. 14. What kind of literature does your aunt hke best ? Ha ! you ask me more than I can tell you ; I really cannot say whether she has any taste in the matter ; for the fact is, never having taken her for a woman of much erudition, I have not taken the trouble to ask her. LESSON LIII Agradar. To please. Aguantar. To bear with, to put up with, to suffer. Alcanzar. To reach, to overtake, to catch. Ahmentar. To feed. Armar. To arm. Bajar. To go (or come) down. Corretear. To run about. Conceder. To concede, to grant. Distar. To be distant. Descomponer. To decompose, to put out of order. Determinar. To determine, to induce. Echar. To throw, to put (in). Exceder. To exceed. Hinchar. To swell. Nadar. To swim. Prohibir. To prohibit. Quitar. To take off, to take away. Contrario. Contrary. Descompuesto. Decomposed, out of order. Dotado. Endowed, gifted. Excelente. Excellent. Indigno. Unworthy. Improviso. Improvised, unexpected. Terrible. Terrible. Antojo. Desire, longing, Alabanza. Praise. whim. Apariencia. Appearance. Alcance. Eeach. Estocada. Thrust. 282 LESSON LIII. Consejo. Counsel. Busca. Search. Discurso. Speech, discourse. Comida. Dinner. GatiUo. Pincers (dentist's). Custodia. Keeping, Juicio. Judgment, trial. Edad. Age. Juramento. Oath, affidavit. Ilermosura. Beauty. Mar. Sea. Obligacion. Duty. Navio. Ship. Vela. Sail, candle. Piso. Floor, story. Travesura. Trick, pertness. Tiro. Shot. Corrida de toros. Bull-fight. Precopto. Precept. Oposicion. Opposition. Torero. Bull-fighter. Toro. Bull. Tribunal. Tribunal, court. COMPOS 5ITI0xV. Corrcr por las calles. Hablo de {or sobre) ese negocio. ^ Qu6 esta V. haciendo ? Estaba para decirselo a V. No alcanzo a comprenderlo. «/Hace las cosas a su antojo. Xba en busca de un amigo. Me opuse a ello. ^-A lo largo del rio. ^Venga V. conmfgo. »^^o s6 qu6 determinar. De ningun mode. Esta comiendo. Entrd por la ventana. Delante de mi ventana. Ante el juez. Antes de ahora. v/ Tales acciones son indignas de un ballero. •■ Pareeia fuera de sf. /--Excede k toda alabanza. C Sin duda alguna. De dia. Uno & uno. y i Per d6nde Ic vino a V. ? Luego. Per mar. A la mano. To run about the streets. He spoke about that affair. What are you about ? I was about to tell it to you. It is above my comprehension. /\~B.e does things after his own fancy. f I was in search of a friend, ^-*' I set my face against it. By the river side. Come along with me. I am at a loss how to act. Not at all. He is at dinner. a He came in by the window. Before my window. Before the judge. Before now. Such actions are beneath a gentleman He appeared to be beside himsel£ / "It is beyond all praise. (_, Beyond all doubt. By day. One by one. How did you come by It f ^^ By and by. — — By sea. At hand. LESSON LIII, 283 -Eclielo V. en tierra. En cuanto a mi. Digaselo V. de mi parte. A eonsequencia de eso. De acuerdo con. ^Tenia esperanza de que serviria. Bajar al jardin. Todos nosotros. Le pido a V. I Cuanto dista ? De improviso. Quitese V. el sombreo. Se la llevo. Le deje ir. Por ese motivo. Adelante. Sobre mi palabra. Al contrario. No se tratan. Les impuso esa obligacion. Alimentarse de esperanzas. Venga V. el doce de Mayo. Al {or del) otro lado. Se acabo. Vuelva V. 4 leerlo. De miedo. Fuera de peligro. Fuera de casa. Est4 sin dinero. Descompuesto. Perdio el juicio. Por curiosidad. Estar de mal humor. Pasare a su casa de V. Pasamos por Francia. Le atraveso de parte 4 parte. Por el. Por medio de el. De dia en dia. Segun las apariencias. Eso esta aun por venir. Diez contra uno. Hasta boy. El navio esta a la velx Throw it down. As for me. Tell him that from me. In consequence of that. In accordance with. I was in hopes that it would do. To go down to the garden. ([All of us. I beg of you. How far is it ? Off-hand. Take off your hat. He carried her off. I let him off. On that account. Go on. On my word. On the contrary. They are not on good terms. He imposed that duty upon them. To live on hope. Come on the 12th of May. Over the way, on the other side. It is all over. Read it over again. From fear, for fear. Out of danger. Out of doors. He is out of money. Out of order. She is out of her mind. Out of curiosity. To be in bad humor. I wiU go round to your house. "We passed through France. He ran him through. Through {i. e., on account of) him. Through {i. e., by means of) him. From day to day. By all appearances. That is yet to come. Ten to one. To this day. The ship is under sail. 284 LESSON LIII. Es men or de edad. Bajo de juramento. Placia all4. i Estan levantados ? Al segundo piso. Que suban la comida. Le pusieron en custodia. Eincharse de soberbia. No la puedo aguantar. Armese V. de paciencia. Su hermosura me sorprendio. No la conozco. Dotado de virtudes. Me agrado su discurso. A tiro de pistola. A mi alcance. No hay nadie en casa. Asomado & una ventana. He is under age. Under oath. Up that way. Are they up ? Up two flights of stairs. Let them bring up the dinner. He was taken into custody. To be pufifed up with pride, I cannot put up with her. Arm yourself with patience. I was struck with her beauty. I am not acquainted with her. Endowed with virtues. I was pleased with his discourae. Within pistol-shot. With my reach. There is nobody within. I At a window. EXPLANATION. 266. Idioms are certain peculiar modes of expression which cannot be translated literally into another language. We have already introduced some Spanish as well as English idioms ; but they are very numerous in all languages, and it would be as unnecessary to give within the compass of a grammar all those peculiar to the Spanish language, as it would be to intro- duce all its words. The learner will find them in the several dictionaries, and principally in the works of good writers. However, we have introduced in the "Composition" of this lesson as many as the limits of this book would allow ; giving examples of phrases in which the English preposition differs in meaning from that which most generally constitutes its proper signification, and consequently must be translated by words corresponding to those in whose place it stands ; as, No s6 qu6 determinar. j I am at a loss how to act. De ningun modo. | Not at all. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. J En d6n(le estd Alejandro? Estti corriendo per las calles. 2. iPorqu6 no me lo dijisto antes? Estaba para docirselo d V. LESSON LIII. 285 3. Yo no quiero que ande correteando calles. — Creo que iba en busca de SQ amigo. 4. Se lo tengo probibido ; pero el no me obedece, j hace las cosas d su antojo. — Yo me opuse a ello, y le dije que V. queria ir a paseo con todos nosotros. 5. Don Carlos, si Y. quiere, ire a buscarlo. — ^De ningun modo, Y. no lo encontraria ; lo que teuio es que haga alguaa travesura que le cueste cara. 6. Yo creo que subiendo a lo largo del rio lo encontrar6, porque si no me engano le oi decir que queria ir a nadar. — No s6 qu6 determinar, pero no, mejor sera dejarlo, vamonos nosotros a paseo (or vamos). 7. Su hermano Manuel es muy diferente, excede a toda alabanza 'J siempre obedece los preceptos de su papa. — Sin duda alguna Manuel es un excelente mucbacho. 8. jHolal aqui viene Juanito. ^YieneY. al campo con nosotros? Con mucho gusto ; pero antes tengo que pedir a Y. un favor. 9. Delo Y. por concedido. — i Palabra de honor ? — Sobre mi palabra. I Que es ? 10. Que perdone Y. d Alejandro. — j Yaja ! sea asi, puesto que di mi palabra; ^pero donde esta? Se escondio y no se atreve a presentarse de miedo, pero abora lo veo asomado a una ventana en el segundo piso de su casa de Y. 11. Yo creo que ha perdido el juicio ese mucbacho ; venga Y. aca, sefior mio, j cu6ntenos que ha hecho en todo este tiempo que ha estado fuera de casa. — Papa, perdoneme Y., que no lo volver6 4 hacer otra vez. 12. Bien, bien, dejeraoslo asi por esta vez. 13. I Don Jos6, corao esta su hermana de Y. ? Esta mejor y esperamos que ya esta fuera de peligro. 14. I Mat6 el torero al toro a la primera estocada ? Si, sefior, a la primera estocada lo atraves6 de parte a parte. 15. gNo se trata Y. con su vecino? No, sefior, es un hombre lleno de soberbia, d quien no puedo aguantar. 16. ^Se di6 el navio a la vela para la Habana? Si, sefior, el navio esta a la vela. 17. jPusieron al culpable en custodia? No, sefior, le dejaron bajo juramento de que se presentaria en el tribunal. 18. ^ Conoce Y. d la Sefiorita Sanchez ? Hace poco tiempo que bice su conocimiento, su hermosura me sorprendi6 y es una sefiorita dotada de grandes virtudes. 19. ^, Yiaj6 Y. el verano pasado por mar 6 por tierra? Por supuesto por mar, puesto que fui a Europa. 286 LESSON LIII. 20. ^Pasaron Yds. por Francia? Si, Beflor, pasaraos por Francia, y el docc de Mayo entramos en Paris. 21. ^Esta V. de mal humor? Si, senor, malisimo, porque tengo un terrible dolor de muelas. 22. Le aconsejo d V. que se arme de paciencia.— Mil gracias, per su buen consejo, pero creo que sera mejor armarse de un buen gatillo. EXERCISE. 1. How does that man spend his time ? He seems to do nothing but run about the streets. 2. Is your uncle's sight not good ? No, sir ; and that is the reason why he wears spectacles. 3. Is that the way you spell (escribir) that word ? Oh, no, of course not ; I must take out one of the ^'s. 4. Does your watch keep good time {amda/r bien)l Yes, when it goes, which occurs very rarely*; it gets out of order about twice a month. 5. Did you see the Spanish man-of-war (ship of war) that came into port (puerto) last month ? Yes, I saw it the day it set sail {darse d lu xiela) to return to Spain. 6. Did you go to see a bull-fight during your stay at Madrid ? I did ; and although I do not like it myself, yet I could not help {no poder menos de) admiring the amazing dexterity of the men (bull-fighters) who dared to expose their lives attacking the furious animal. 7. How many stories are there in the house you live in ? Tliree ; I generally sleep on the third floor. 8. Can you not induce him to stay at home ? No, he wants to go ; it is a whim of his, and he wiU not bear with any opposition. 9. Were you in court at the time of the trial ? No, I could not go down town that day. 10. How far had he gone before you overtook him ? I caught up with him at the corner of the street. 11. How is your cousin getting on ? Pretty well ; but his arm is stiU swollen, and to all appearance it pains him very much. 12. I wonder how he can bear up under so much sulSering. Ho lives in the hope of getting better one day or other. 13. Did that man swear he had not been there ? He made (prestar) affidavit that ho had never set (put) his foot in the house. 14. What a beautiful young lady that is 1 That is true ; but her learn- ing by far exceeds her beauty. Rara tm. LESSON LIV, 287 LESSON^ LIY Apegarse. Criar. Concebir. Continuar. Encerrar. Guardar. Pintar. Presidir. Ponderar. Combatir, Eedncir. Eodar. Sacudir. Tirar. Llenar. Entiisiastoar. Al cabo. De repente. No obstante. Si acaso. Si bien. Atnarillo. Azul. Anaranjado. Atento. Oonfuso. Feroz. Bondadoso. Pavorito. Griego. Afiil. Ligero. Lleno. Montaraz. Vistoso. Colorado, rojo. To adhere to, to be attached. To raise (breed), to bring up. To conceive. To continue. To shut up. To guard, to tftke care, to keep. To paint. To preside. To make much of, to praise. To combat. To reduce. To roll. To shake, to shake off. To pull, to draw, to throw, to throw out (or away). TofiU. To render enthusiastic. After all, finally, at the end. Suddenly, on a sudden. !N"otwith standing. If at all, in case. Although. Yellow. Blue. Orange. Attentive. Confused. Pierce. Kind. Favorite. Greek. Indigo. Liglit, slight, speedy. Full. Mountaineer, wild. Conspicuous, showy. Eed. I 288 LESSON LIV. Romano. Roman. Particular. Particular, private, rare. Picante. Pungent. Temerario. Daring, rash , Violado. Violet (color). Verde. Green. Prismatico. Prismatic. Oabo. End. Algazara. Shouts (of joy). Oirco. Siege, circus. Autoridad. Authority. Color. Color. Confusion. Confusion. Bullicio. Rumpus, noise, Carcajada. Burst of laughter. bustle. Corrida. Fight (bull), race. Ceremonial. Ceremony. Violeta. \/ Violet (flower). Espeotro solar. Solar spectrum. Diversion. Diversion. Goce. w Delight, joy. Clase. Class. Dicho. Saying. Infancia. Infancy. Desierto. ^Desert. Idea. Idea. Interns. Interest. Fiesta. Feast, festival Guante. Glove. Guifiada. Wjnk, Leon. Lion. Ocupacion. Occupation, Local. Situation. Corrida de toros. Bull-fight. Entusiasrao. Enthusiasm. Pelota. Ball. Enemigo. Enemy. Plaza de toros. »/Arena. Lloros. Tears, cry. Proeza. Prowess, exploits. Paso. Step, pace. Sonrisa. Smile. Prisma. Prism. Valentia. Bravery. Rumor. Rumor. Jaula. \/ Cage. S6r. Being. Traje. Dress, costume. Recibimiento. Reception. Suelo, Ground. Grito. Shout, cry. COMPO SITION. V^Los vlmoB cuando entrabamos. We saw them as we were gobg in. ^ Si no hubiera sido por mi, le habrian But for me, they would have killed him. matado. v^Yo iria si no creyera que fuese inutil. I would go, but that I think it useless. Diga V. si vendri 6 no. Say whether you will come or not Que venga 6 que no vcnga. Whether he come or not. Dudo que lo sepa. I doubt whether she knows it LESSON LIV. 289 t*or atentos y bondadosos que sean {or no obstante lo atentos que son) y por bondadosos que sean. *^Es menester que se cuide V., porque si no se enfermara. Es menester que obedezca V. las orde- nes ; de lo contrario sufrira las con- secueneias. yo tengo razon 6 el la tiene. v^'i prometas ni obres sin pensar. ^ No lo haria si me importara la vida (e. ose of them as quickly as you can. 13. Would you like to taste this dish ? No, thank you, I am not fond of it. 14. Is he not of your opinion ? Not at all ; he always goes (sides) with his father. LESSON LYIII Notar. To note, to observe, to perceive. Cazar. To hunt, to chase. Chancear. To jest. Combinar. To combine. Concertar. To concert, to agree. Concluir. To conclude, to finish. Enfriarse. To cool, to get (or grow) cold. > Eucargar. To charge, to commission, to order. Flotar. To float. Iraprovisar. To improvise. Inspirar. To inspire. Repartir. To divide. Saltar. To leap, to jump. Trinchar. To carve, to cut. Cobrar. Brindar. To collect To toast. LESSON LVIII 313 A lo 16J03. A cuestas. A la espafiola. Atras. Abanico. Apetito. Aficionado. Baul. Buey. Brindis. Carro. Canasto. Conductor. Pretexto. Pefiasco. Embarcadero. Piropos (pi.). Sitio. Salon. Vooabulario. Fan. Appetite. Amateur, one fond of. Trunk. Ox. Toast. Car, cart. Basket. Conductor. Pretext. Eock. Ferry. Sweet things. Fare. Place, spot. Saloon. Vocabulary. At a distance, in the distance. On one's back, on one's shoulder. In the Spanish fashion. Backward, ago, behind. Blanco. White. Bonito. Pretty. Durable, duradero. Durable. Elocuente. Eloquent. Galante. Gallant Bello sexo. Fair sex. Magnifico. Magnificent. Negro. Black. Rodeado. Surrounded, Vacio. Empty. Ala. Botella. Gaza. Chanza, Oima. Colina. Dama. Imaginacion. Llave, clave. Milla. Pechuga. Fuerza. Suerte. Tarea. Vocal. Voz. Sombra. Elocuencia. Wing. Bottle. Hunt. Jest. Top, summit. HiU. Lady. Imagination. Key. Mile. Breast (of fowl). Force, strength. Luck, sort. Task. Vowel. Voice, word. Shade, shadow. Eloquence. COMPOSITION. Quedamoa en qae saldriamos a las cinco. Este canasto es superior k mis fuerzas. A la salud de las senoras. 14 We agreed (or appointed) to set out (or start) at five o'clock. This basket is more than I am able to manage. To the health of the ladies. 314 LESSON LVIII. Decir piropos & las sefioritas. Sirvase V. pagar al conductor, i Mire V. qu6 gracia ! (, Que tal le gusta a V. ? Pongamos los canastos k la sombra. La subida de la colina con un gran canasto 4 cuestas, me ha abierto el apetito. Me alegro de ver 4 V. Se alegro de la noticia. Lo siento mucho. Me pesa mucho saberlo. I Cu^ntas personas caben en esta igle- sia? No cabiamos todos en el salon. ^Puede caber en tu imagmacion tal cosa? Cabe mucho en este haul. No caber de pi 69. A mi me cupo en suerte venir 4 la America. No caber de gozo. To say sweet things to the young ladiea Please pay the conductor. Only think ! How do you like ? Let us set the baskets in the shade. Coming up the hill with a large basket on my back has sharpened my appe- tite. I am glad to see you. He was rejoiced at the news. I am very sorry for it (i. «., I feel it much). I am very sorry to know it [i. c, it grieves me much to know it). How many persons does this church hold? The saloon could not hold us all. Can such a thing enter your imagina- tion ? This trunk holds a great deal To have no room to stand. It was my lot to come to America. To be overjoyed. EXPLANATION. IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN VERBS. 272. Alegrarse. — The verbs to be glad and to be rejoiced at are translated by the reflective verb alegrarse ; as. Me aleffro de ver & V. I I am glad to see you. Se aleffrd de la noticia. j He was rejoiced at the news. 273. Sentir and pesar. — To be sorry and to grieve^ are translated by these verbs ; as, Lo siento mucho. Me pesa mucho saberlo. I am very sorry for it (t. «., I feel it much). I am very sorry to know it (t. e., it grieves me much to know it). 274. Caber, to be capable of containing, f him, notwithstanding it rained in torrents. 12. You may be at ease in your mind on that score ; I shall manage to get rid of him very soon. 13. I wish you would come to the point, for up to the present I have been unable to find out what you mean. 14. One would have said, from the manner in which he was (viendolo) decked out, that he was going to the theatre or to a ball instead of to the office. LESSON LXV. Aventurarse. Apretar, Cobrar. Desafiar. Escaldar. Enhebrar. Enzarzar. Enfadarse. Hilar. Juntar. Madrugar. Prevenir. Relucir. Sustentar. Trasquilar. Tapar. Trampear. Tragar. To venture. To tighten, to urge. To collect. To challenge. To scald. To thread (a needle), to link. To sow discord. To get angry. To spin. To join. To rise early. To warn, to infonu. To shine. To sustain. To shear. To cover up, to close up. To impose upon, to deceive. To swallow. LESSON LXV. 349 Trasnochar. To sit up all night. Terminar. To terminate. Tolerar. To tolerate. Tornar. To return, to do over again. Tranquilizar • To tranquillize, to make any one's mind easy. Tutear. To address any one in the second person singular, to speak fa- miliarly to. Expresivo. Expressive. Justo. Just. Duro. Hard. Necio. Silly, foolish. Practico. Practised, experienced. Ciego. Blind. Tuerto. Blind of one eye. Trigueflo. Dark (of the complexion). Tin to. Colored, red. Tonto. Foolish. Tramposo. Deceitful, swindling. Terminante. Decided. Tranquilo. Tranquil, quiet. A borbotones. Bubbling, hurriedly, confusedly. Palabras mayores. Offensive words or expressions. No ser rana To be able and expert. J Caramba ! Dear me ; Hah ! Asador. Spit (for roasting). Cola. Tail. Copo. Flake (of snow). Danza. Dance. Entendedor. One who under- Divisa. Motto. stands. Familiaridad. Familiarity. Herrero. Blacksmith. Miel. Honey. Menosprecio. Scorn, contempt. Mona. Monkey. Hortelano. Gardener. Fama. Fame, notoriety. Dado. Dye. Moderacion. Moderation. Proverbio. Proverb. Oveja. Sheep. Sayo. Sort of loose coat Kecesidad. Necessity. or jacket. Pareja. Pair. Pecbo. Breast. Rana. Frog. 350 LESSON LXV. Raton. Mouse. Yiga. Beam. Tio. Uncle. Tenacidad. Tenacity. Bebedor. Toper, tippler. Tos. Cough. (All these are masculine.) Soliloquio. Soliloquy. Tirabuzon. Corkscrew. Suegro. Father-in-law. Trineo. Sleigli. Sugeto. Person, indi- Tacto. Touch. vidual. Talento. Talent. Sobrino. Nephew. Tel6grafo. Telegraph. Sin6nimo. Synonjme. Tenedor. Fork. Silencio. Silence. T6rraino. Term. Sentido. Sense. Trigo. Wheat. Semblante. Countenance, Term6metro. Thermometer. looks. Torno. Lathe. Secreto. Secret. Toque. Touch, ringing Trato. Intercourse, (of bells). treatment. Titulo. Title. Trav6s. Breadth (of a thing). COMPOJ Trago. 3ITI0N. Draught, drink. A buena gana no hay pan dure. A Id hecho pecho. A quien se hace do miel las moscas se lo comen. A quien madruga Dies le ayuda. Al buen entendedor con media palabra basta. Al fin se eanta la gloria. Antes que te cases mira lo que haces. Antes cabeza de raton que cola de leon. Aunque la mona se vista de seda mona se queda. Bien vengas mal si vicncs solo. Cada oveja con su pareja {or Dies los cria y ellos se juntan). Cada uno juzga por su corazon el agcno. Cada uno hacc de su capa un sajo. Hunger is the best sauce. What is done cannot be helped. Smear yourself with honey, and you ■will be devoured by flies. The early bird catches the worm. A word to the wise is sufficient. Boast not till the victory is won. Look before you leap. Better be the head of a mouse than the tail of a lion. A hog in armor b still but a hog. Misfortune never comes alone. Birds of a feather flock together. Every man measures other people's com in his own bushel. Every one may do as he likes with his own. LESSON LXV. 351 Cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el za- pato. Cobra buena fama y Achate k dormir. Como el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni deja comer. Cuenta y razon sustentan amistad. Del mal el menos. Debajo de una mala capa se encuentra un buen bebedor. Dime con quien andas, y te dire quien eres. Donde fueres haz como vieres. Lo mejor de los dados es no jugarlos. En boca cerrada no entran moscas. En casa del herrero asador de palo. En tierra de ciegos el tuerto es rey. Gato escaldado del agua fria huye. Ir por lana y volver trasquilado. Hombre prevenido nunca fue vencido. La caridad bien ordenada empieza por uno mismo. La mucha familiaridad es causa de me- nosprecio. La necesidad carece de ley. La tenacidad es divlsa del necio. Lo que no se puede remediar se ha de aguantar. Mas vale tarde que nunca. Mar vale pajaro en mano que ciento volando. Mientras en mi casa estoy rey soy. Nadie puede decir de esta agua no be- hevL No es oro todo lo que reluce. No hay mal que por bien no venga. No la hagas no la temas. Poquito a poco hilaba la vieja el copo. Quien bien te quiere te hara Uorar. Quien mucho habla mucho yerra. Every one knows where the shoe pinch- es him. Get the name of early rising, and you may he a-bed all day. Like the dog in the manger. Short reckoning and long friends. Of two evils, the lesser. We should not judge the book by the cover. Tell me your company and I will teU you what you are. When at Rome, do as Rome does. The best throw at dice is to throw them away. A close mouth catches no flies. No one goes worse shod than the shoe- maker's wife. In the land of the blind, the one-eyed man is king. A burnt child dreads the fire. The biter bit. Forewarned, forearmed. Charity begins at home. Too much familiarity breeds contempt. Necessity has no law. A wise man will change his mind ; a fool never. What can't be cured must be endured. Better late than never. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. A man's house is his castle. No one can tell what is to happen to him. All is not gold that glitters. It's an ill wind that blows nobody good. Do no evil, and fear no harm. Rome was not built in a day. Spare the rod, and you will spoil the child. Who speaks much often blunders. 352 LESSON LXV, Quien no sc aventura no pasa la mar. Ya que la casa se quema caleatemonos. Vemos la paja en el ojo ageno y no la viga en el nuestro. Tu enemij]ro es de tu oficio. Never ventjjre, never win. Let us make the best of a bad job. We see the mote in our neighbor's eye, and not the beam in our own. Two of a trade never agree. CONVERSATION AND VERSION. 1. J Hay muchos proverbios en espafiol ? Hay muchisimos ; en todas las lenguas los hay, pero en la espafiola creo que hay tantos que si se reu- niesen todos formarian varies voldmenes. 2. iLe gustan 4 Y. los proverbios? Si, sefior, son muy expresivos, pero debemos usarlos, como decia D. Quijote, con moderacion y no a borbotones como Sancho Panza. 3. En eso tiene Y. razon, porque quien mucho habla mucho yerra.— Y. acaba de aplicar ese muy bien ; pero es imposible que practiquemos con todos los que trae esta leccion, en este ejercicio. 4. Sin embargo, al que madruga Dios le ayuda. — Y. dice bien, y quien no se aventura no pasa la mar. 5. Espero que quien nos oiga conversar introduciendo tanto refran, no diga de ellos lo que se dice de los males. — i Qu6 dicen de los males ? Bien vengas mal si vienes solo. 6. I Oh ! no, selior, en primer lugar los proverbios no son males, y en segundo lugar a nosotros nos gustan, y queremos practicar con ellos, para aprenderlos. — Y. esta en lo justo, y ademds, cada imo hace de su capa un sayo. 7. i Ola, amiguito 1 Y. me parece practice en la materia, pero no piense Y. quo yo soy rana, porque deb^yo de una mala capa se encuentra un buen bebedor. — Caramba jque no me deja Y. meter bazal no se dir4 de Y. aquello de, en boca cerrada no entran moscas. 8. Yamos amigo, ese refran vino por los cabellos. — Pues si vino per los cabellos, d pelo vino, ademds, que Y. me parece ser de aquellos-que ven la paja en el ojo ageno y no la viga en el suyo. 9. No se enfade Y., amigo, que quien bien lo quiere le hard llorar.— No, sefior, no me enfado, pero ya veo que no es oro todo lo que reluce. 10. j Bravo I bravo! ya va Y. aprendiendo d enzarzar refranes, lo hace Y. cual otro Sancho Panza, y yo, con toda mi prdctica, he ido pot lana y he vuelto trasquilado. — Su ejemplo de Y. me ird enseCando; pa* quito d poco hilaba la vieja el copo, y dime con qui6n andas y te dir6 qui6n eres. 11. iQu6 hombrel si Y. va d ganar d su maestro 1 pero no hay mal que por bien no venga; Y. me hace reir con sus refranes.— Bien, del mal cl m6nos, pero D. Manuel, i cs posible que lo haya de ganar su discipulo ? LESSON LXV. 353 12. No se, no puedo decir de esta agua no bebere, y lo que no se puede remediar se lia de aguantar, y al fin se canta la gloria.— jZape, como los enhebra ! pero yo no me doy por vencido, seiior maestro, porque yo ya s6 aquello de cobra buena fama y echate a dormir. 13. La tenacidad es divisa del necio, y al buen entendedor con media palabra basta. — Si, pero esas ya son palabras mayores, y a quien se hace de miel las moscas se lo comen, y mientras en mi casa estoy, rey soy. 14. Espero, D. Carlos, que no me quiera Y. poner fuera de su casa.— ^ No hombre, pero estos refranes son tan expresivos que le hacen decir a uno mas de lo que quiere ; pero a lo hecho pecbo y ya que V. me desa- ii6, siga la danza. 15. Bueno, si Y. lo quiere, ya que la casa se quema calent^monos ; pe- ro bien haria Y. antes que se case en mirar lo que hace, porque cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el zapato. — Amigo mio, Y. no sabe de la misa la media ; yo nunca doy mi brazo a torcer, y antes quiero ser cabeza de raton que cola de leon. 16. Si, sellor, pero aunque la mona se vista de seda, mona se queda, no sea Y. como el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni deja comer, y acu6r- dese Y. que cuenta y razon sustentan amistad y lo mejor de los dados es no jugarlos. — Basta, basta, bombre me doy por vencido. 17. No la hagas no la temas ; tu enemigo es de tu oficio. — Pero, D. Carlos, le repito. . . . 18. La caridad bien ordenada entra por si misraa. — Pero si repito que. . . . 19. Donde quiera que fucres baz como vieres. — Sefior, me rindo. — ^Mas vale tarde que nunca. EXERCISE. 1. Well, Charles, so you have come at last. Yes, better late than never, you know ; but if it had continued raining I would not have come at all. 2. Are you going out ? I thought we were going together to the theatre this evening. — I must go out now ; but should I get back as soon as I expect, we shall still have time to go to the theatre. 3. If you undertake that journey, I should like to be your companion. It is rather doubtful at present whether I shall ; but if I do, I would be delighted to have your company. 4. If the directors establish that as a general rule, very many persons will sufi'er great loss. 5. The conditions were, that if he did not discover the error, or if, after having discovered it, he could not rectify it, he should lose his place. 354 LESSON LXV. 6. lie said he would have no rest until he should hear some news of that poor young man. 7. He promised that I should have the place, if it were in his power to procure it for me. 8. In case his efforts should not he attended with success, you may rely upon me to do all in my power to advance {proinover) your interests. 9. Their embarrassments will not cease so long as they do not intro- duce some system of reasonable economy. 10. Peter tells his stories so well, and with such an appearance of truth, that one is actually tempted to believe them. 11. They made so many conditions, that it was clear they had no wish to help us. 12. Why did you not take that book? I would not take it because some leaves were wanting. 13. If there is any thing within (in) my reach with which I can serve you, ju8t* let me know. 14. Whatever he may have been in his youth, he is now a respectable man, and beloved (loved) by everybody that knows him. * English words In italics, not to be translated. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATICAL PECULIARITIES OP THE SPANISH LAN- GUAGE, NOT HITHERTO TREATED OF LN THE GRAMMAR. In order to acquire a thorough knowledge of a language, it is necessary to compare carefully the different uses of the several parts of speech in the native language and in the one proposed to be learned. The sense of a whole passage is very often changed by the undue suppression or omission of an article, a preposition, or a conjunction; by using one tense of a verb for another; placing an adjective before its noun when, in order to convey the idea intended, it should go after it ; and not unfrequently by trans- lating a certain part of speech by a word which, although its appearance would lead us to take it for the equivalent of the word to be interpreted, bears in reality no relation to the sense designed to be expressed. We have deemed it convenient, therefore, to devote a few pages of our Combined Method to such general remarks as are necessary to guide the learner, and which, if attentively observed, will, after the study of the Spanish exercises con- tained in the preceding lessons, enable him to compose purely and idiomatically in the Castilian language. The Definite Article. 1. It has already been observed in previous lessons, which are the most usual cases where the definite article is ex- pressed in the Spanish language ; but there are many others in which it would be altogether incorrect to express or omit it 366 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES, in Spanish, as in English, as may be seen from the following examples, which may serve as a general rule for all those of the same kind : 6 Est4 el rey en palacio ? Es costumbre en Espana. Su tio firmo por 61, en ausencia de su padre. Decia verdad. A tres de junio. Tuvo valor para responder. A mediado3 de agosto. Is the king in the palace ? It is the custom in Spain. His uncle signed for him, in the absence of his father. He told the truth. On the 3d of June. He had the courage to answer. In the middle of August. 2. In Spanish the article is at times accompanied by a preposition not required in English ; as, Hace del caballero. ( He plays Oie gentleman. Indefinite Article. 3. The so-called indefinite article (more properly adjective) is, as has been observed in one of the early lessons, frequently employed in English; and when translating from the latter language into Spanish, we either suppress it entirely or render it by some other part of speech ; as, Tiene derecho sobre este caudal A distancia de . . . C&diz es puerto de mar. Es otro Alejandro. En medio siglo {or dentro de medio siglo). Volver6mos dentro de media hora. Las obras de otro {or obras agenas). Hubo tiempo en que . . . He has a right to (or a claim upon) this capital. At a distance of , . , Cadiz is a seaport (town). He is another Alexander. In half a century. We shall return in half an hour. The works of another (or another's works). There was a time in which , . . Personal and Possessive Pronouns. 4. The use and repetition of the personal and possessive pronouns are more frequent in English than in Spanish ; and that seeming redundance is essential to the clearness and pre- cision of the English language ; but Spanish syntax does not GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 357 submit to such encumbrances, and they are, therefore, generally suppressed, as will be seen from the following examples : Es verdad. Llueve. Hace frio. i Porque es menester ? El mismo principe. Su misma madre. ]S1 mismo lo vio. It is true. It is raining (or it rains). It is cold. Why is it necessary ? The prince him&elt His mother herself. He saw it Aimself. 5. Before leaving the pronouns, it is proper to remark that one and ones, so often used in English composition, to avoid the unpleasant repetition of nouns, have no equivalent what- ever in Spanish, and are hence to be left out in translating from the former language to the latter ; as, f, Tiene V. caballos ? I Have you horses (or any horses) ? Tengo dos buenos. | I have two good ones. 6. Personal pronouns, when used redundantly in Englisli, as in the following example, are never expressed in Spanish : Ambos perecieron. | Both of them perished (or were lost). 7. Even whole members of sentences are, not unfrequently, suppressed in translating from English into Spanish ; as, Todo no podia entrar en un elogio, I All could not find place in a eulogy, mas 81 en una satira. j but all could ^nd place in a satire. Observe that the repetition of the words italicized in the English sentence is avoided by means of the adverb si in Span- ish, which serves to correct the negation expressed in the first member of the phrase, thus rendering the latter at once shorter and more elegant. Ellipsis. 8. There are certain short modes of expression, certain grammatical laconicisms, peculiar to the English language, w^hich are not admissible in Spanish ; the ellipses must in such cases often be filled up ; as, Jamas hubo orador qiie hablase mejor. De ahi dimanan estos errores. Never did orator speak better. Hence these errors. 358 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES, No puede pensar en hactr mal. La ciudad reducida k cenizas. No va mal para »er nino. Su madre banada en lagrimas. Aungne todos estuviesen juntos. Esto €s por lo que toca d su persona. En pro y en contra. Con la espada en la mano. He cannot think of evil. The city in ashes. Not bad for a child. Her mother in tears. They were all together. So much for his person (or personal appearance). For and against. Sword in hand. N. B. — ^It is also correct to say, Espada en mano. Inversion. Although we have spoken at some length, in Lesson LI., on the subject of inversion, we imagine the learner will not be displeased to meet here a few well-chosen examples which will give him a still clearer idea of the order observed in Spanish for the expression of ideas, and the consequent difference of construction between that language and the English. 9. The substantive often precedes its adjective ; as, Es el hombre mas perfect© del mundo. Llave falsa. ) Testigo falso. Su hijo mas joven. He is tho most perfect man in the world. False key. False witness. Her youngest son. 10. Instances occur, however, of the inversion talcing place in English, while the natural construction is followed in Span- ish ; especially in the case of past participles acting as verbal adjectives ; as, Una vez destruido este fundamento, todo se viene abajo. Admitida esta libortad, puede . . . el hombre This foundation being once destroyed, the whole (edifice) comes to the groimd. This liberty (being) once admitted, roan may . , . 11. In all cases similar to that of the following example, the possessives mio, tuyo^ suyo are placed after the substantive, and then, of course, they retain their final syllable ; as. El otro hijo suyo. ( His other son. 12. The same ideas are in not a few instances presented in GBAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 359 Spanish in an order very different from that followed in Eng- lish : It is not to destroy that he has come, but to build up. I see (very) well that . . . If you had an agreement to make. {If you had to make an agreement would, of course, also be an allowable construction in English.) No ha veuido para destruir, sino para edificar. Bien veo que , . . Si tuviese V. que hacer una contrata. No tenia razon aquel filosofo que decia que . . . Toea remunerar los servicios al que los recibio. Entre los Griegos, los que . . . £l que mas hablaba. Cien veces mas quisiera yo que . . . Solo Dios es inmutable. That philosopher who said that . , , was wrong. It is for him who received the services to reward them. Those amongst the Greeks, who . . . He who spoke the most. I would prefer a thousand times that . . God alone is unchanging. Nouns. 13. There is a striking difference to be observed in the use of nouns in the two languages; we sometimes meet nouns in the singular in English, while in Spanish they are used in tlie plural only, and vice-versd : FluraL Mirar con malos ojcs. Puso los ojos en mi. Dar oidos k , » , Prestar oidos. Depies a cabeza. Por todas partes. Juego de manos. Se present© con los ojos en el suelo. Singular. A pie descalzo. Estar en pie. A rerru) y vela. En toda stierte de negocios. No son dueiios de si. Singular. To look with evil eye. He set his eye on me. To give ear to , . . To lend an ear. From head to foot. In every direction. Sleight of hand. He came forward with downcast eye. Plural. With bare/«o oT CQ 1 'C a> :s ■£^ !S 'S ;g •c *S 'C !S ^ '3 *3 '3 '3 *E '3 •3 '3 •3 '3 =? 1 '^ CT' cr cr cr sy cr" o^ cr a* CT- S 'O 'O '^ 13 '^ t3 -13 13 •rj ■73 C3 03 :3 03 03 03 03 03 c3 ^ 1 o g 1 ^2 1 1 § oT o o a .2 ri "C •a ;c *c •c •§ *C •3 •3 "3 '3 *3 f3 •3 '3 •3 *3 a< o^ a* cr' ^ & c o^ a* a* n3 TJ 'a 'O •^ •73 T3 13 '^ -a L •a •a •a '3 •=5 *3 9 rf* a* o^ rf T3 'O ■73 Tl 03 a 03 e3 .s" 2" ►5 o pui 3 <1 n3 I ■73 I ii •J •a iS :s '3 3 '3 '3 'p. cr" a- o* a* o- -o 13 13 13 '^ ^ -< <1 -< <1 si l! tJ ^ ^ ^ 1 2 ^ sf 1 V / s •P9/U,9dwj p? e4 H t^ B » t3 fri n 400 CONJUGATIONS. 1' g '1 e T z/l W 03 P^ k ^ 1-3 U) O .ii w ^ IRR to W( 1* 3 1 1 a 1 1 1 A ^ ^ i H g Pm 5 i 1 1 i ^ .2 .o .2 43 1 oT o 1 1 f^ ^ ^ ^ 09 -13 3 '2 73 Ts -a S fl c c « es 08 eS O 4 ef rQ ea •E >► ► k Sis S S <=> 03 08 eS i s, -s- 5 < ^ ti; (? I I ^ 'P9/J9dwj Sf I CONJUGATIONS 401 i.2" ¥ 1 *3 •73" & g s i ei 1 U ^ s es m es 1 « n oT rr- m - a s § )js S i 1 s a ^ •3 -< < ^ 1 < ^ 4 » •> 2 i . a f C g J C 1 be •IN 1 a .2 1 a g g 9 4^ Si fl fl CJ r] «2 -S D Q a> « « « « • • ea • 9 ^2 ei ?*' ,2 fe I »•! 1 ? 1 4f tf 5 1 ? i* 4> c fj fl fl ca fl fl fl O) s •^ J2 ^ Z ^ ^ •O •^ -^ ^ •" 1 1 «3 i 1 i aT n 4) 73 "a 'O '3 s t3 *mr -3 'O a a rt d fl fl fl ^ ^ ja 1 ^ ^ Z ^ •< 4 5 •> vcT .^ g i 2 .2^ o n3 4^ T3 1 1 E 1 4> 5» 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 fl 1 ^ <^ ^ 'pifj^mj CONJUGATIONS. 403 ? I 5< g '2 ft 9 I I S v' 2 tS •'^ 'N 58 .2 •1^ '^ 4) •N I •pdfxddwj fc^ 404 CONJUGATIONS. I I i" 6 6 6 •s -c %< en § S 1 o i i 1 • : 1 o g u § •3 o 1 O o o O 6 8 i 5 ^ I I I ^ fti ^ ■p^/u^wj C^ ^ CO CONJUGATIONS. 405 cc eg (M ^ as i o § a § § g a C ^ ^ r^ rS "S .N "O 'O rO 'O .2 -I c3 XI ^ OS 1 o o 2 ti 9 V if s s s •g 53 ^ ^ iS •c -i5 o ^ U2 » ^ e8 •a i 2 4^ 9 Is VN gj «r eS M •N •N o P Q ft ft ft ft §3 ft ^ ^ Eh H H 1 I ci 1 1 2 'C3 CO 1 •pifMdmi ^ 1 t s >- E P 5 t-H ^ 406 CiONJUGATIOXS, ^3 rs -a I 11 I I t eS J2 ^ as u I s 5* =? =? ■X3 'O no 173 ry Q 1 i O) CJ 5» » s» Q « « g g 4J o 1 1 1 • V .2 d ? CO •!5 h ^ ^ M ■§ J OOP I C3 5 2 S £ bi t ^ .Si j: 2 5 5* 5* :? if s 5» 5» » cf < 2 S 2^ .N .3 S» S* I? O P O ft Q 'p^/u^uij CONJUGATIONS, 407 I 1 I 1 •I ^ § I (5 ■73 'O no -^ I •SI ^ i i i t p o S <: I 1 1 1 i a BS 5^ GQ f s i g •ii^ o < 1 '^ *& Cl t g -^ ^ •0 4 i d; pq H I I 'p9fjusdmi 18 410 CONJUGATIONS. 1 T •p4 e« OS 0) o4 g -3 « fa o . a a fa Gi 'C V V g c9 a m* m m ^ A M ^ M o i ti a a H K R •S 1 o» w ►5 O •3 *S "•» 'o V fa ^ K! ^ ana III ►^ fti ^ ^ ^ .a S 8 ef J- i J ' ^ ^12 2 2 a a a a a t^ E-l Eh r-1 (N TO K V r ' "jj 1 CONJUGATIONS 411 81 a CS es ^ ^ es 63 ^ <► a 2 « « « •5 «rt 'N IB . I' I 2 4) £ K oT c> 4> 4) :s •§ S s ^ *E C C c ^ « T? m e e 9 n 1 S 1 ss ;^ » {u K 1 2 4^ &) 4> s d n ^ 2 fa fa fa ^ s I I C3 « « !» es « §^ h % ti^ « « $ ^ ^ i CS 4) fa fa E « ^ .25 C5 (l4 I ^ f^ R, fe, -^ -g 13 -rS 5> ^ " . ' I 412 CONJUGATIONS. • fciD CO g 2 I gill <^» tc I 1 bo bO 3 S s 1 S a s 1 o a ^•l t 1 to s •s 3 s 3 3 3 •-5 •rs •-8 •-» •-s »-5 •-» *g '§ I S) go §3 to 3 •-8 « pjj M > M -tl ^ P 1 > t— I >i i* 1 o i i 1 H ■s o" i 1 1 3 3 3 S *-z •-5 g4 i g g Plh &5 OS C5 1 . S) -S o eo I S) ^ to So §D 3 3 3 bo Id d ^ 9 bo bo bO 3 3 3 3 1-5 *-5 l-S 1-8 I. «• " 4 ! I V & 3) U) U3 3 3 3 3 3 CONJUGATIONS 413 2 i O O i .2 s ^2 o O o o k K k o o o § § 8 o o o 1 ^ S^ 1 >> o o o o O O i 4 1 ^ '^ •< 5 el - ^ o o o o o » ^ 5 5 &! S I 23 ^ O t^ o -o .2 K o o i>% .2 o o . o o ^ t^ ?? o o o o o (^ -pB/uddtuf (^ 414 CONJUG ATIONS. C3 a c v c e3 -i a »5j S3 "5 n o « S .2 Ji .1 .2i s S A 'o "o "o .4 .a o o o o .2 -n o o J s § 1 a o o o "o "o "o o i CO fli u a ^ ej e) s i I pfl "o "o ►2 o B o o o IV, 'J99/U9duiJ I CONJUGATIONS, 416 2 ^ 3 o 1=5 V5S o 3 s &4 CLi 'CJ 'O t3 EJ IS P< S=U p4 ■2 J O '3 .2 ^ '-S ^ '3 o 3 o p. p* P« § 2 o • I § a o o S CL, f^ Ph •1 03 •s '73 O 1 1 1 p. eu & p. p. m m «r ./* O o o ~ s a 2 g OQ g a 03 .2 V o ^ 'Eh 'S ''3 'S P^ ^3 5 £ s •§ ^ '^ -^ Ph Ph CM O) d 3 p. O P, o » 4 3 o <^ p-t p-( 3 p- 3 p< O P. U o P4 T3 3 p. p. p. o 3 p. p^ ^ '3 p. p> »5 O f^ 4 f^ {^ 'psfjLddwj ^ 416 CONJUGATIONS I T g « O . 2 .23 ^3 O P4 03 1 •E O o o a 12 •c no o > I- ? I ^ S I H g s I »3 O Cu 73 O P. Pep i" I I a 73 73 POO Oi O. P. 5 £ I, ^ I g p a. •T3 I I -S -S fill P4 P. a, p. 5 I 2J -S I ^ i I Rj ')^/u9dtui 3 I « li CONJUGATIONS, 417 a o (N fl a o o u o P4 I I P o Ai a. at I i I a o II4 I 1 ! . S .2 2 S £ 4} a> V 'S 1 % PI El A A p. oT rfT oa" Q a g s £ 2 4> 0} 'in 1 1 1 1 1. ^ 1 S (S ^ 1 H ^ ^ g g Ph s & H s g 5 t5 &4 r CO fl o p* o &1) r «> I •E o p. 1 Pi I 1 ■§ I S PL( PL| pL, p^ Ph O 0) O) H H H 'ps/u&dwi ^ 18* 418 CONJUGATIONS, «p4 (M tpt 3 3 3 3 3 D* O" O' O? O' ftj jog/Mdwf CONJUGATIONS. 419 •2 I . d d d g QJ g OJ 'C (^ 02 fr. eS 1 1 g 5 3 ^ s 422 CONJUGATIONS •I a T a > I i i r I o . 5 p-t ^- ri « ^« ^ & .2 2 ^ e « "• i I ? I I f I ^ ^ 9 1 .2 *d M I ? ? ■? o CO c3 a J 6 i ^ S 2 1 1 H H H t^ E-t 2 $' .2 5 7 I ^ f f •E ? ? ? 4f .3 ^ s I- ? I 4 «i; ^ i f i i rl 1 Trae TraJ TraJ ?f H 01 Ter. Ter. Ter. 1 1* t2 (N CO 5> .S o fi; 'P9/j9dtUJ ^ 1 H 1 1 C9 c3 CONJUGATIONS. 423 > > > tl) '^ .2^ s^ ^ ui a C3 e3 83 > t*- t> "3 'rt I a S -III "d '3 'S fc> > k :d O o 51) .2 ^2 'w 'eS "eS "^ > > t* ^2 ,2 ~ ''^ ^ 's t» > > '3 [3 ^ > ^ ^ ^ 1. •^' 6i 5 ^ CO >3 f- *■ •^ 424 CONJUGATIONS. CO a 'a O CO I I I i ^ i i> > I a > 2 g ft ►5 O Ph 5» CO o) £3 •2 © fl 2 to JJ 'a '3 t 2? T! & «r «^ -i ^ '3 a (S (S 1 ! 1 < -w t1 I « I 3 -3 I § i I I i I 3 > > ^ t> 'p9fM)dxuj CONJUGATIONS, 425 o d i i .S <1> .?5 'r> V cj o) a> «8 T •? a B H S I ^ 5 o (5 05 «4 « *S ^r w? >- k P> >• ^ ^ ^ (^ 'P9/U9diuj ftj I 426 CON JUG ATI ONS. CONJUGATION OF A VEEB IN THE EEFLECTIVE FORM. Lavarse. INFINITIVE. I To wash one's self. Lavaadose. GEEIJND. Washing one's self. Lavadose. PAST PARTICIPLE. I Washed one's self. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. 1. Me lavo. I wash myself. 2. Te lavas. 3. Se lava. 1. Nos lavamos. 2. Os lavais. 3. Se la van. IiMPKRFECT. 1. Me lavaba. I was washing, washed, or used to wash myself. 2. Te lavabas. 3. Se lavaba. 1. Nos lavabamos. 2. Os lavabais. 8. Se lavaban. PRETERIT DEFINITE. 1. Me lave. I washed myself. I 1. Nos lavdmos. 2. Te lavaste. 2. Os lavasteis. 3. Se lav6. I 3. Se lavaron. FUTURE SIMPLE. 1. Me lavar6. I shall wash my- self. 2. TelavarAs. 3. Se lavard. 1. Nos lavar^mos. 2. Os lavar^is. 3. Se la varan. 2. LAvate. 3. Lavese. Wash thyself. IMPERATIVE. 1. Lav^raonos. 2. Lavaos. 3. Ldvense. CONJUGATIONS. 427 SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. 1. Me lave. 2. Te laves. 3. Selave. I may wash my- self. 1. Noslavemos. 2. Oslaveis. 3. Se laven. IMPERFECT. — First Termination. 1. Me lavaria. I would wash my- self. 2. Te lavarias. 3. Se lavaria. 1. Nos lavariamos. 2. Os lavariais. 3. Se lavarian. Second TermiTiation. 1. Me lavara. I might, could, would, or should wash myself. 2. Te lavaras. 3. Se lavara. 1. Nos lavaramos. 2. Os lavarais. 3. Se lavaran. Third Termination. 1. Me lavase. 2. Te lavases. 3. Se lavase. I might, could, would, or should wash myself. FUTURE. 1. Me lavare. I might or should wash myself. 2. Te lavares. 3. Se lavare. 1. Nos lavasemos. 2. Os lavaseis. 3. Se lavasen. 1. JSTos lavaremos. 2. Oslavareis. 3. Se lavaren. Ayudarse. Ayuddndose. Ayudddose. INFINITIVE. I To help each other. GKETJND. j Helping each other. PAST PARTICIPLE. I Helped each other. 428 CONJUGATIONS, INDICATIVE. PRESENT. 1. Nos ayuda- We help eacli mos. other. 2. Oa ajudais. 3. Se ayudan. IMPERFECT. 1. Nos aynda- We used to help bamos. each other. 2. Os ajudabais. 3. Se ayudaban. PRETERIT DEFINITE. 1. Nos ayuda- We helped each mos. other. 2. Os ayudasteis. 3. Se ayudaron. FUTURE 8IMPLB. 1. Nos ayuda- We shall help r^raos. each other. 2. Os ayudar^is. 3. Se ayudaran. 1. Ayud^monos. 2. Ayudaos. 3. Aytidense. IMPERATIVE. Let us help each other. Help each other. Let them help each other. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. 1. Nos ayude- We may help each mos. other. 2. Os ayudeis. 8. Se ayuden. Second Termination. 1. Nos ayuda- We might, could, ramos. would, or should help each other. 2. Os ayndarais. 8. Se ayudaran. IMPERFECT. — First Terminxition. 1. Nos ayudaria- We would help mos. each other. 2. Os ayudariais. 3. Se ayudarlan. Third Termination. 1. Nos ayudase- We might, cou!d, mos. would, or should help each other. 2. Os ayudaseis. 3. Se ayudasen. FUTURE. 1. Nos ayudaremos, 2. Os ayudareis. 3. Se ayudaren. We might or should help each other. CONJUGATIONS. 429 IMPERSONAL VERBS. Amankoes. I To grow light. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Present. Amanece. It grows light. Imperfect. Amanecia. It was growing light. Pret. Def. Amaneci6. It grew light. Fut. Simple. Amanecera. \ It will grow light. Compound Tenses. Ha amanecido. [ It has grown light. It had grown light. It had grown light. It will have grown light. Habia amanecido. Pret. Indef. Pluperfect. Anterior. Hubo amanecido. Gomp. Future. Habra amanecido IMPERATIVE. Amanezca. 1 Let it grow light. SUBJUNCTIVE. Simple Tenses. ient. Amanezca. ' Amaneceria. erfeet. \ Amaneciera. Amaneciese. J It may grow light. r might, "^ It \ should, or I grow liglit. 1 [ would ure. Amaneciere. 1 It should grow light. Compound Tenses. Perfect, Haya amanecido. i It may have grown light. r might have, 1 It ^should have, or U^^^^'^ [ would have J ^'^^^^• It should have grown light. fHabria 1 jHubiera l^^"^"^" [Hubiese J ^^^«- Gomp. Future. Hubiere amanecido. Pluperf. N. B. — Anochecer, to grow dark, is conjugated in the same maimer, and has the same irregularity. 430 Nktar, CONJUGATIONS. I To 871010. Present. Imperfect. Fret. Def. Future. Nieva. Nevaba. Nev6. Nevara. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. It snows. It was snowing. It snowed. It will snow. Pret. Indef. Ha nevado. Pluperfect. Habia nevado. Anterior. Hubo nevado. Comp. Future. Habra nevado. Compound Tenses. It lias snowed. It had snowed. It had snowed. It will have snowed. Nieve. IMPERATIVE. I Let it snow Present. Imperfect. Future. Nieve. Nevada. Nevara. Nevase, Nevare. SUBJUNCTIVE. Simple Tenses. It may snow. r might, It \ should, or \ snow. I would It should snow. Perfect. Pluperfect. Compound Tenses. Ilaya nevado. i It may Iiave snowed. Ilabria 1 | f might have, ^ Ilubiera I nevado. It -{• should have, or Isnowed. IlubieseJ [ would have J Comp. Future, llubiere nevado. It should have snowed. N. B. — Helar.^ to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner, and haa the same tenses irregular. Tronae. CONJUGATIONS. I To thunder. 431 Present. Imperfect. Pret. Def. Future. Truena. Tronaba. Troii6. Tronara. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. It thunders. It was tlnmdering. It thundered. It will thunder. Compound Tenses. Pret. Indef. Ha tronado. Pluperfect. Habia tronado. Anterior. Hubo tronado. Comp. Future. Habra tronado. It has thundered. It had thundered. It had thundered. It will have thundered. Truene. IMPERATIVE. I Let it thunder. Present. Imperfect. Future. Truene. f Tronaria. ■I Tronara. [Tronase. Tronare. SUBJUNCTIVE. Simple Tenses. It may thunder. r might, 1 It J should, or I thunder. [ would J It should thunder. Compound Tenses. Perfect. Haya tronado. f Habria 1 Pluperfect. J Hubiera I tronado. [Hubiese J Comp. Future. Hubiere tronado. It may have thundered. ( might have, 1 It J should have, or I thundered. [ would have J It should have thundered. N". B. — Lloter^ to rain, is conjugated like this verb, and changes also the into ue in the same tenses. Escarchar., to freeze ; granizar, to hail ; lloviznar, to drizzle ; and relampaguear, to lighten, are all regular. 432 CONJUGATIONS. Haceb, to he (when employed in reference to time and weather), INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Present. Hace. It is. Imperfect. Hacia. It was. Pret. Def. Hizo. It was. Future. Hara. It will be. Compound Tenses. Pret. Indef. Ha hecho. It has been. Pluperfect. Habia hecho. It had been. Anterior. Hubo hecho. It had been. Comp. Future. Habra hecho. It will have been. Haga. IMPERATIVE. ) Let it be. Present. Imperfect. Future. IIa2:n. r Ilaria. 1 J Hiciera. I [lliciese. J Hiciere. SUBJUNCTIVE. Simple Tenses, It may be. r might, It -j should, or [ would It should be. Compound Tenses. be. Perfect. Haya hecho. fHabria 1 Pluperfect. \ Hubiera I hecho. [llubiese J Comp. Future. Hubiere heclio. It may have been. r might have, 1 It J should have, or j-been. (^ would have J It should have been. Haber, when signifying there to he. Hay. Ilabia. Huba HabrA. ( There is, ( There are. ( There was. I There were. There will be. Ha habido. Habia habido. Hubo habido. Habrd habido. J There has been. J There have been. There had been. There had been. There shall have been. CONJUGATIONS. 433 Haya. Let there be. Haya habido There may have Haja. There may be. been. Habria. 'There might, Habria habido. 'There might, Hubiera. could, would, or Hubiera habido. could, would, or Hubiese. . should be. Hubiese habido. should have been. Hubiere. There might or should be. Hubiere habido. There might or should have been. DEFECTIVES, The following verbs are found used only in the tenses and persons giv^n in the annexed examples : Placer. To please. INDICATIYK Present, dd pera. sing., Place. Imperf. " *' Placia. Fret Def " " Plugo. It pleases. It was pleasing. It pleased. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. 2>d pers., sing., Plegue. Imperf. " " J PJ°g"i«™- { Plugmese. Comp. Future. " Pluguiere. SOLEE. It may please. It would please. It might please. It should please. To he wont. Suelo. Sueles. Suele. Solemos, Soleis. Suelen. INDICATIYE. PEESENT. I am wont. Thou art wont. He is wont. We are wont. You are wont. They are wont. 19 434 CONJUGATIONS. IMPEEFECT. Solia. Soli as. Solia. Soliaraos. Soliais, Soliaa. Tacer. I was wont Thou wast wont. He was wont. We were wont. You were wont. They were wont. To lie dead. No part of this verb is made use of except the third persons of the present indicative, yace and yacen^ which are generally inscribed on tombstones. CONJUGATION OF A VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. Ser perdonado. INTINITIVE. I To be pardoned. GEEUND. Siendo perdonado. | Being pardoned. PAST PARTICIPLE. Habiendo sido perdonado. j Having been pardoned. 1. Soy perdona- I am pardoned. do. 2. Eres perdo- nado. 8. Es perdonado, INDICATIVE. PRESENT. 1. Somos perdonados. 2. Sois perdonados. 8, Son perdonados. IMPERFECT. 1. Era perdona- I was or used to do. be pardoned. 2. Eras perdonado. 8. Era perdonado. 1. Eramos perdonados. 2. Erais perdonados. 8. Eran perdonados. CONJUGATIONS. 435 PEETERIT DEFINITE. 1. Fui perdona- I was pardoned. do. 2. Fuiste perdonado. 3. Fue perdonado. 1. Fuimos perdonados. 2. Fuisteis perdonados. 3. Fueron perdonados. FUTUEE SIMPLE. 1. Sere perdo- I shall be par- nado. doned. 2. Seras perdonado. 3. Sera perdonado. 1. Seremos perdonados. 2. Sereis perdonados. 3. Seran perdonados. IMPERATIVE. 2. S6 perdonado. Be pardoned. 3. Sea perdonado. 1. Seamos perdonados. 2. Sed perdonados. 3. Sean perdonados. SUBJUNCTIVE. PEESENT. 1. Sea perdonado. I may be par- doned. 2. Seas perdonado. 3. Sea perdonado. 1. Seamos perdonados. 2. Seals perdonados. 3. Sean perdonados. iMPEEFEOT. — First Termination. 1. Seria perdona- I would be par- do. doned. 2. Serias perdonado. 3. Seria perdonado. 1. Seriamos perdonados^ 2. Serials perdonados. 3. Serian perdonados. Second Termination. 1. Fuera perdona- I might, could, do. would, or should be par- doned. 2. Fueras perdonado. 3. Fuera perdonado. 1. Fueramos perdonados. 2. Fuerais perdonados. 3. Fueran perdonados. 436 CONJUGATIONS Third Termination. 1. Fuese perdona- I might, could, do. would, or should be par- doned. 2. Fueses perdonado. 8. Fuese perdonado. 1. Fuesemos perdonados. 2. Fueseis perdonados. 3. Fuesen perdonados. FUTUEE. 1. Fuere perdona- I might or do. should be par- doned. 2. Fueres perdonado. 3. Fuere perdouado. 1. Fueremos perdonados. 2. Fuereis perdonados. 3. Fueren perdonados. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PEETERIT INDEFINITE. 1. He sido perdo- nado. 2. Has sido per- donado. 8. Ha sido perdo- uado. I have been par- doned. 1. Hemos sido perdonados. 2. Habeis sido perdonados, 3. Han sido perdonados. PLUPERFECT. 1. Habia sido perdonado. 2. Habias sido perdonado. 8. Habia sido perdonado. 1. Ilube sido perdonado. 2. Hubiste sido perdonado. 8. Hubo sido perdonada I had been par- doned. 1. Habiamos sido perdonados. 2. Habiais sido perdoandos. 8. Habian sido perdonados. ANTERIOR. I had been par- doned. 1. Hubiraos sido perdonados. 2. Hubisteis sido perdonados. 8. Hubieron sido perdonados. CONJUGATIONS. 437 1. Habre sido perdoDado. 2. Habras sido perdonado. 3. Habra sido perdonado. 1. Haja sido perdonado. 2. Hayas sido perdonado. 3. Haya sido perdonado. 1. Habria sido perdonado. 2. Habrias sido perdonado. 3. Habria sido perdonado. 1. Hubiera sido perdonado. 2. Ilubieras sido perdonado. 3. Hubiera sido perdonado. 1. Hubiesesido perdonado. 2. Hubieses sido perdonado. 3. Hubiesesido perdonado. COMPOUND FUTIJEE, I sball have been pardoned. 1. Habr^mos sido perdonados. 2. Habr^is sido perdonados. 3. Habran sido perdonados. - SUBJUNCTIYE. PERFECT. I may have been pardoned. 1. Hayamos sido perdonados. 2. Hayais sido perdonados. 3. Hayan sido perdonados. PLUPERFECT. — First Termination. I would have been pardoned. 1. Habriamos sido perdonados. 2. Habriais sido perdonados. 3. Habrian sido perdonados. Second Termination. I might, could, would, or should have been pardoned. 1. Hubieramos sido perdonados. 2. Hubierais sido perdonados. 3. Hubieran sido perdonados. Third Termination. I might, could, would, or should have been pardoned. 1. Hubiesemos sido perdonados. 2. Hubieseis sido perdonados. 3. Hubiesen sido perdonados. 438 CONJUGATIONS. FUTURE COMPOUND. 1. Habiere sido I might or should perdonado. have been par- doned. 2. Hubieres sido perdonado. 8. Hubiere sido perdonadoi 1. Hubieremos sido perdonadi 08. 2. Ilubiereis sido perdonados. 8. Hubieren sido perdonados. LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS IN THE SPA:JfISH LANGUAGE. TS ^.— The figures jUaced after each verb refer to the page at which the model conjugatUm for that verb is to be found. For instance., the number 398 shows that Aducib is conjugated like Cothx>vcvel, found at page 398. Absolver, 394. Abstraer, 422. Acertar, 392. Acordar, 893. Acostar, 393. Acrecentar, 392. Adestrar, 392. Adherir, 395. Adquirir, 399. Advertir, 395. Aducir, 398. Aj?orar, 393. Alentar, 392. Almorzar, 393. Amolar, 393. Andar, 400. Apacentar, 392. Apostar, 393. Aprobar, 393. Aprctar, 392. Arrecirse, 396. Arrendar, 392. Arrepentirse, 395. Ascender, 394. Asentar, 392. Asentir, 395. Aserrar, 392. Asestar, 392. Asir, 401. A solar, 393. Asoldar, 393. Atender, 394. Atentar, 392. Aterrar (echar por tier- ra), 392. Atestar (rellenar), 392. Atraer, 422. Atravesar. 392. Aventar. 392. Aventarse, 392. Avergonzar, 393. Bendecir, 402. Caber, 403. Caer, 422. Calentar, 392. Cegar, 392. Ceilir, 390. Cemer, 394. Cerrar, 392. Cimentar, 392. Cocer, 404. Colar, 393. Colegir, 396. Colgar, 393. Comedirse, .396. Comenzar, 392. Competir, .396. Concebir, 390. Concernir, 395. Concertar, .392. Concordar. 393. Condescender, 394. Condolerse, 394. Conducir, 398. Conferir, 395. Confesar, .392. Conocer, .398. Consesfuir, .396. Consentir, .395. Consolar, 393. Constrefiir, 396. Contar, 393. Contener, like Teneb. (See auxiliary verbB.) Contender, 394. Contradecir, 406. Controvertir. 395. Contraer, 422. Convertir, .395. Corregir, 396. Dar, 405. Decaer, 422. Decentar. 392. Decir, 406. Deducir, 398. Defender, 394. Deferir, 395. Degollar, 393. Demoler, 394. Demostrar, 393. Denegar, 392. Denostar, 393. Derrengar, .392. Derretir, 390. Desavenir, 424. Descender, 394. Descollar, 393. Descordar, 393. Descomedirse, 31 Desfiocar, 393. Deshacer, 410. Deshelar, C02. Desteir, 396. Desembrar, 392. Desolar, 393. Desollar, .393. Desovar, ,393. Despedir, 396. Despernar, 392. Despertar, 392. Desterrar, 392. Desplegar. 392. Desvergonzarse, Dezmar, ,392. Discemir. 395. Diferir, 395. Digerir. 395. Discordar. 39,3. Disolver, ,394. Divertir. ,395. Doler. .394. Dormir, 407. Elegir. 396. Embestir, 396. Empedrar, 392. 440 LIST OF IKREGULAB VERBS. Empezar, 392. Einporcar, S93. Encendcr, 3t>4. Enceuaar, 392. Encerrar, 392. Encomcndar, 392. Eua)ntrar, 393. Encordar, 393. Engreirse, 396. Eiigrosar, 39;i Eniueiidar, 3J^ Enrodar, 393. Ensangreutar, 392L Enteiulur, 394. Euterrar, 392. Envestir, 39(V. Erguir, 408. Errar, 409. Escarmentar, 3^ Escocer, 404. Esforzar, 393. EsTAB. {iicQ auxiliary verbs.) Estrenir, 39C. Expedir, 39G. Exteader, 394. Forzar, 39!I. Fregar, 3^ Gemir, .396. Gobernar, 3SS. Hakek. ^See auxiliaries and impereonals.) Ilacer, 410. Heder, 394. Helar, 392. H^nchir, 396, Header, 394. Henir, 396. Herir, 395. IJerrar, 392. Hervir, 395. Holirar, ;i93. HoHar, 393. hnpedir, 806. Incensar, 392. Tndudr. 398. Infcrir, 395. Ingcrir, 396. Tnqnirir, 399. Introdncir. 398. Invemar, 392. Invertir, 395. Invest ir, 396. Ir, 411. Llover, 394. Maldeclr, 402. Manifestar, 392. Maulencr, like Tenkb. (See auxiliary verbti.) Medir, 396. Mentar, 392. Mentir, 395. Merendar, 392. Moier, 394. Morder, 394. Morir, 407. Mostrar, 392, Mover, 396. Jngar,412. Negar, 392. Nevar, 392. Oir, 413. Oter, 414- Pedir. 396. Pensar, 392. Perder, 394. Pervertir, 39&. Placer, 433. Pleirar, 392. Poblar, 393. Poder 415. Podrir, 416. Poner, 417. Preferir, 395. Probar, 393. Producir, 398. Proferir, 395. Quebrar, 392. Querer, 418. Raer, 422. Eecomendar, 893L Recordar, 393. Rccostar, 393. Reducir, 398. Rcfcrir. 395. Repar, 392. Regir, .396. Regoldar, 392. Reir, 419. Rcmendar, 392. Rendir, 396. Renovar, 893. Refiir. 396. Repctlr, 396. Requobrar, 392. Reqiierir, .SJ)5. Reacoutrar, 393. Resollar, 393. Retentar, :i92. Reventar, 392. Revolcar. 393. Rodar, 393. Rocr. Rogar, 393. Saber, 420. Saiir, 421. SatiBfacer, 410. Segar, 392. Seguir, 396. Sembrar, 392. Sentar, 392. Betir, 395. Seb. (See auxiliarj verbs.) Servir, 396. Berrar, 392. Boldar, 393. Soler, 4.33. Soltar, 39.3. Solver, 394. Sonar, .393. Soflar, S), s. m., year. L. 1*^. Apariencla, ah-pm-ri-oin'-thl-a, s. f., ap. pearancc, L, 53. VOCABULARY 443 Apegar, ah-pai-gar^ to adhere, to attach. L. 54. Apenas, ah-pai'-nas, adv., scarcely, hardly. L. 29. Aplicar, ah-pl^-car\ to apply. L. 62. Apostar, ati-pbs-tar\ to bet, to wager. L. 63. Apoyar, ah-po-yar\ to lean, to support, to protect. L. 50. Apreciable, ah-prah-the-ah'-Uai, apprecia- ble, respectable. L. 56. Apremiar, ak-prai-me-ar' , to press, to urge. L. 43. Aprender, ah-prain-dair' . L. 6. Apretar, alc-prai-tar\ to tighten, to press, to urge. L. 65. Aprisa, ah-pre'-sa^ adv., quickly. L. 6. Aprobacion, ali-prd-bak-Uie-one\ 6. f., ap- probation. L. '2A. Aprobar, ah-pro-bar\ to approve. L. 35. Aprovechar, ah-pro-v(d-cltar\ to progress, to make the most of. L. 52. Aproximar, ak-prd-kse-mar\ to approxi- mate, to approach. L. 44. Apto, ap'-to, adj., apt, fit. L. 51. Apurado, ak-poo-ratt'-do, adj., embarrassed. L. 44. Aquel, ah-TcaU\ pron., that one, he; the tormer. L. 18. Aqui, ah-ke\ adv., here. L. 18. Arbol, ar'-bol^ s. m., tree. L. 49. Arboleda, ar-bo-lai'-da, s. f., grove, L. 49. Arenal, ah-rai-nai\ s. m., sandy ground. L. 49. Arguir, ar-goo-eer' ^ to araue. L. 34. Anstocracia, ah-rees-tb^rah' -thl-a^ 6. f., aristocracy. L. 60. Aristocratico, adj., aristocrat. L. 35. Aritmetica, ah-reet-mai'-te-ka^ s. f., arith- metic. L. 21. Armar, ar-mar\ to arm. L. 59. Arpa, ar'-pa^ s. f., harp. L. 15. Arquitecto, ar-kl-taik' -to^ s. m., architect. L. 48. Arquitectura, ar-ke-taik-too'-ra^ s. f., archi- tecture. L. 51. Arreglar, ar-rai-glar\ to regulate, to ar- range, to settle. L. 60. Arrepentirse, ar-rai-pain-teer'-sai, to re- pent. L. 38. Arrcstar, ar-rais-tar' , to arrest. L. 37. Arriba, ar-re'-ba^ adv., above, up-stairs. L. 33. Arte, s. ar'-tai, m. and f., art. L. 31. Articulo, ar-te'-coo-lo^ s. m., article. L. 43. Artificial, ar-te-fe-the-al' . adj., artificial. L. 49. Artista, ar-tees'-ta, s. m., artist. L. 36. Asador, s. m., spit (for roasting). L. 65, Ascender, af!-thain-dair\ to ascend, to amount. L. 37. Ascension, as-tham-s?-one\ 8. f., ascension. L. 49. Asegurar, ah-sai-goo-rar', to secure, to as- sure. L. 38. Asesino, ah-sai-s^'-no^ s. m., assassin. L. 59. Asi, ah-sl\ adv., so, thus. L. 20.— ^^.a caida, to be crestfallen. L. 60. Capacidad, kah-pah-the-dath' , s.f., capacity, capability. L. 36. Capaz, kah-path', adj., capable. L. 59. Capitan, kah-pe-tan', s. m., captain. L. 62. Capricho, kah-prl'-clw, s.m., caprice, fancy, whim. L. 60. Cara, kah'-ra, s. f, face.— Dar a alguno con la puerta en la cara, to shut the door in any one's face. L. 60. Caracter, kah-rak'-fair (pi. caracteres), s. m., character, disposition. L. 40. Caramba ! kah-ram'-ba, inter., strange 1 zounds ! L. 65. Carcajada, kar-kah-hah'-da, s. f., loud laugh, burst of laughter. L. 54. Ciircel, kar'-thail, s. f , prison. L. .34. Carga, kar'-ga, s. f., load, burden, charge. L. 60. Cargar, kar-gar\ to charge, to load, to heap. L. 47. Cargo, kar'-go, s. m., load, employment, charge, office. L. 60. Caridad, kah-re-dath' , s. f., charity. L. 41. Cariredondo, kah-rl-rai-done' -dx>^ adj., roundfaced. L. 59. Carne, kar'-nai, s. f., flesh, meat. L. 7. Carnero, kar-nai'-ro, s. m., mutton, sheep. L. 40. Carniceria, kar-nMhai-r^'-a, s. f., butcher's shop, meat market. L. 11. Carnicero, kar-ne-thai'-ro. s. m., butcher. L. 11. Carnuza, kar-noo'-tha, b. f., bad, disgust- ing, spoiled meat. L. 49. Caro, kah'-ro, adj., dear, at a high price. L, 13. Carpintero, kar-peen-tai'-ro, s. m., carpen- ter. L. 33. Carrera, kar-rai'-ra, s. f., career, course, race, profession. L. 48. Carro, kar'-ro, s. m., car, wagon. L. 58. Carruage, kar-roo-ah'-hai, s. m., carriage. L. 51. Carta, kar'-ta, s. f., letter. L. 7. Cartilla, kar-teel' -ya, s. f., primer.— Cosa que no esta en la cartilla, something strange or uncommon. L. 61. Casa, kah'-sa, s. f., house. L. 9. Cascaras ! kas'-kah-ras, int., oh ! dear me I L. 63. Casero, kah-sai'-ro, adj., domestic, house- hold. — Comedia casera, parlor play. L. 59. Casi, kah'-se, adv., almost. L. 32. Caso, kah'-so, s. m., case, event.- No haga V. caso de eso, take no notice of that. L. 60. Castaiia, kas-tan'-ya, s. f., chestnut. L. 40. Castellano, kas-tail-yah'-no, s, m., Castiliau languagij. L. 55. Castellano, adj., Castilian. L. 55. Castillo, kas-teel' -yo, s. m., castle. — Hacer castillos en el aire, to build castles in the air. L. 48. Casualidad, kah-soo-ah-U-dath' , s. f., casual- ty, chance, hazard. L. 60. Casucha, kah-soo'-cha, s. f., contemptible old house. L. 44. Catolicismo, ka-to-le-thcess'-mo, s. m., Ca- tholicism. L. 49. Catorce, kah-tor' -thai, num. adj., fourteen, —Luis Catorce. Louis the Fourteenth. L. 14. Causa, kah'-oo-sa, s.f., cause. — A causa de, on account of. L. 40. Causar, kah-oo-sar', to cause. L. 51. Caza, kah'-tha, s, f., chase, hunt, hunting. — Ir a la caza, to go hunting. L. 58. Cazar, kah-thar', to chase, to hunt. L. 58. Celebracion, thai-lai-brah-the-one' , s. f., celebration. L. 39. Celebrar, thai-lai-brar' , to celebrate. — Cele- bro que V. haya venido, I am glad you have come. L. 39. Celeste, thai-lais' -tai, adj., heavenly, celes- tial.— Los cuerpos celestes, the heavenly bodies. L. 49. Celestial, thai-lais-te-al' , adj., celestial, heavenly. (See Celeste.) L. 49. Celico, thai'-ll-ko, adj., heavenly (used in poetry only). L. 49. Celo, ^^a«'-to, s.m., zeal. L. 55. Cena, thai'-na, s.f., supper, Last Supper. L. 52. Cenar, thai-nar', to sup, to take supper. L. 39. Centavo, thain-tah'-vo, s.m., cent. L. 14. Centella, thain-taU'-ya, s. f., flash, spark.— Echar rayos y centellas, to foam with rage. L. 62. Centena, thain-tai'-na, s.f., about a hun- dred. L. 40. 446 VOCABULARY Ccntenar, thainrtai-nar\ s. m., a hundred, L. 40. Cerca, thair'-ka^ adv., near, close by. Cer- ca dc 8u casa, near his house. L. 31. Ceremonial, thai-rai-md-ni-al\ adj., ceremo- nial, ceremonious. L. 54. Cerrar, ttiair-rar\ to shut, to close. L. &4. Cerrojo, thair-ro'-ho^ s. m., bolt. L. 59. Cerveza, thair-vai'-tka^ s. f., ale, beer. L. 7. Chaleco, chak-lai'-ko, s. m., vest. L. 10. Chaucear, chan-thai-ar' , to jest, to joke. L. 58. Chanza, chan'-tha, b. f., jest, joke. L. 58. Charla, char'-la, s. f., chit-chat, prattle. L. 60. Charlar, char-lar\ to chat, to prattle. L. 37. Chasco, chas'-ko, s. m., disappointment. — Llevarse un chasco eolemne, to be greatly disappointed. L. 46. Chelin, chai-leen\ s. ra., shilling. L. 61. Chico, che'-ko, adj., little, small. L. 44. Chiquirritico, che-keer-rMl'-ko, adj., very small, very little. L. 44. Chito ! che'-to, int., hush ! silence 1 L. 46. Chocolate, clio-ko-lak'-tai, s. m., chocolate. L. 14. Cic^o, thl-ai'-QO, e. m. and adj., blind.— A ctegas^ blindly, in the dark. L. 48. Ciclo, thl-ai'-lo^ s. m., heaven, sky.— Tomar cl cielo con las manos, to be transported with joy, grief, or passion. L. 45. Clen, the-ain' num. adj., a hundred. — (See ClENTO.) L. 14. Cioncia, thl-ain' -thl-a^ s. f., science. L. 49. Ciento, thl-ain'-to^ num. adj., a hundred. — (Sec CiEN.) L. 14, Cierto, thl-air'-to^ adj., certain. L. 48. Cimiento, the-me-ain'-to, s. m., foundation. L. 51). Cinco, theen'-h)y num. adj., five, fifth. L. 14. Cincucnta, )!/i6(?n-^wa2'/i'-to, num. adj., fifty, fiftieth. L. 14. Circunspeccion, tlieer-koonss-paik-tfil-dne' , 8. f., circumspection. L. 34. Circunstancia, Uteor-koonsn-ian'-th^-a, s. f., circumstance. 1^ 40. Cita, ihe'-ta, 8. f., appointment, quotation. L. 00. Citar, tM-tar', to make an appointment (with any one), to quote. L. 52. Ciudadano, i/ii-oo-dah-ciah'-no, citizen. L. 47. Civilizacion, thZ-vl-lMhah-thl-one\ b. f., civilization. L. 60. Claridad, klaJi-rc-dath\ s. f., clearness, per- spicuity. L. 36. Claro, klah'-ro, adj., cle^r, bright. L. 59. Clase, klah'-sai, s. f., class. L. 54. Cliisico, klah'-nl-ko, adj., classic, classical. L. ;«. Clasificacion, klah-sl-fl-ka-thl-one\ b. f., classification. L. 24. Clima, kW-via^ s. m., climate. L. 40. Cocer, ko-thair', to boil, to cook. L. 42. Coche, kd'-c/iai, b. m., coach, carriage in general.— Ir en coc/ie, to go in a carriage. L. 42. Cocincro, ko-tM-nai'-ro^ b. m., cook. L. 11. Coft-e, ko'-frai, 8. ni., chest, trnnk. L. 60. Coger, kd-hair\ to catch, to take, to pick up. L. 46. Cojcar, kO-hat-ar\ to limp, to walk lamo. L. 39. Cojo, W-ho, a4). and s. m., lame. L. 44. Colada, k54ah'-da, s.f., etifiening of clothes — Todo saldra en la colada, all will be brought to light. L. 65. Colectivo, ko-laik-tl' -vOy adj., collective, L. 40. Colgar, kdl€-gar\ to hang, L. 59. Colina, ko-le'-na, s. f. hill. L. 58. Colocacion, kd40-kah-thi-l^e\ b. f., em- ployment, place, eituation, L. 00. Colocar, ko-W-kar', to put, to arrange, to place, to employ. L. 46. Colorado, ko-lo-rah' -do, adj., red. L. 54. Colorido, ko-lb-rl' -do, s, m,, coloring (paint- ing). L. 52. Color, ko-Wr', 8. m., color, L. 52. Combatir. kdnie-bah-teer' , to combat, to fight. L. 54, Combinacion, kome-bl-nah-thZ-dne' , s. f., combination. L. 24. Combinado, kome-bl-nah'-do, p.p. and adj., combined. L. 58. Combinar, kovie-bl-nar' , to combine. L. 58. Comedia, ko-mai'-d?-a, b. f., comedy, L. 52, Comer, ko-mair', to eat, to dine. L. 7. Comerciante, ko-mair-thl-an'-tai, 8. m., merchant. L. 5. Cometa, ko-mai'-ta, s. m., comet; s. f., kite (toy). L. 60. Cometer, ko-mai-lair' , to commit. L. 43. Comico, ko'-me-ko, s. m., actor, comedian. L. 63. C6mico, atlj., comic, comical. L. 35. Como, ko'-tno, adv., how, as,—/ Corno eeta V. ? how are you ?— Yo sere tan rico coi/io 61, I shall be as rich as he, L. 15, Comodidad, ko-md-de-dath', s, f., commodi- ty, convenience, comfort. L. 29. C6modo, ko' -mo-do, adj., commodious, com- fortable. L. 29. Compaflero, kome-pan-yai'-ro, s. m., com- panion, comrade. L. 60. Compailia, konie-pan-yl'-a, s. f., company. L. 60. Comparativo, kdme-pah-rah-ii'-ro, adj., comparative. L. 61. Compasion, kome-pa/i-sl-Dne' , s. f., compas- sion. L. 45. Complacencia, kdme-plah-thain'-Uiz-a, 8. f., complacency, pleasure. L. 39, Complemento, kOnie-plai-main'-to, B. m,, complement. L. 51. Componente, kd7iie-pd-nain'-tai, part., com- ponent. L. 49. Componer, kome-pd-nair' , to compose, to mend, to arrange, to compound. L. 49. Compotticion, kdffie-j)d-ftl-(hi4}tie', e. f., com- position, mending, arranging, compound- ing. L. 2t. Comprar, kdme-prar\ to buy, to purchase. L. 4. Comprender, kdme-pratn-dair', to compre- hend, to understand, to comprise. L. 60. Con, kdtie, nrep., with, by. L. 10. Coucebir, Kone-ihai-beer' , to conceive of. L. 54. Conceder, kdm-thal-dair' , to grant, to con- cede. L. 5.3. Concertar, kdne-thair-tar' , to concert, to agree. L. 58. Conciencia, kdne-t/il-ain'-t/iha, b. f., con- Bcieuce. L. 40. VOCABULARY. 44^ Coacierto, kdne-the-air'-to., s. m., concert, agreemeut. L. 17. , , ^ Couciair, kone-doo-eer , to conclude, to fin- ish, to be over. L.58. ^ , ^^_ Coiicordaacia, kone-lcore-dan' -the-a, s. f., concordance, agreement. L. 50. Condescender, kone-daia-tham-dair' , to con- descend, to agree. L. 48. Condicion, kone-de-the-oae', s. f., condition. Condicional, Tcone-de-the-one-al' , adj., con- ditional. L. 59. Conducir, kdm-doo-theer\ to conduct, to convey, to lead, L. 40. Confeiar, kdne-fai-sar\ to confess, to ac- knowledge, to avow. L. 34. Confaso, koiie-foo' -so^ adj., confused, con- founded. L. 54. Conjugacion, kdae-hoo-ga?i-the-dne\ 8. f., coajugatioa. L. 43. Coajugar, k5iie-lioo-gar\ to conjugate. L. 43. Coajuncion, kdm-hoon-the-one\ s. f., con- juactioa. L. 43. Connaigj, kone-mV -go^ pron., with me, witlx myself. L. 26. Coaocer, kono4hair\ to know, to be ac- qaainted with. L. 25. Cjnociiniento, ko-no-tM-m^-aiii'-to, s, m., kaowledge, bill of lading (commerce). L. 43. Consecuencia, kone-sai-kwain'-t/iS-a, s. f., coa^e:iiience. L. 31. Consegair, kdiii-sal-gheer\ to obtain, to get, to succeed. L. 42. Coasejo, kjiie-sai' -Iw, s. m., counsel, ad- vice. L. 53. Conseatir, kjns-sairi-teer', to consent, to agree (to). L. 3S. Coaiistir, koris-seess-teer\ to consist. L. 52. Consular, kons-sd4ar\ to console. L. 35. Constaacia, kans-tan' -t/iS-a, s. f., constancy, steadiness. L. 40. Coastruocioa, kdns-trook-thd-dne\ construc- tioa. L. 51. Coataate, kjm-tan'-tai, s. m. and adj., reaiy moaey. L. 38. Coutar, kd.is-iar'y to count, to relate, to tell. L. 35. Coateaer, Wm-t!ii-nair\ to contain, to re- strain, to stop, to cliecv. L. 49. ConteaiJo, kone-tai-nee'-do, s. m., contents. L. 4). Conteatar, kdm-tain-tar' , to content, to make glal. L. 33. Conteato, kom-tam'-to. adj., content, con- tented, glal, satisfied. L. 3-3. Conti^o, k)iie-f^'-go^^Toa., with thee. L. 26. Coatiaaar, kom-t^-aoo-ar' , to continue. L. 54. Contra, klm'-tra, prep., against. L. 41. Coatradecir, koiX2-trah-d(d-tlieer\ to contra- dict. L. 41. ■Coatrario, kom-trah' -rl-o, adj., contrary.— AI Oiitrario, on the contrary. L. 53. Cou veneer, kom-vain-thair' , to convince. L. 43. Coavenir, kone-vai-mer', to suit, to be con- venient, to agree. L. 30. Conversacion, kone-vair-sah-thl-dne'^ s. f., coaversation. L. 24. Conversar, kdne-vair-sar\ to converse. L. 53. Convertir, kone-vair-teer', to convert. L. 45. Couvicto, kOne-veek'-to, irr. past part, (of CoNVENCEB), convicted. L. 52. Convite, kone-vee'-tai, s. m., invitation, feast or banquet to which any one is invited. L. 5b. Copulativo, ko-poo-la/i-te'-vo, adj., copula- tive. L. 59. Coqueta, ko-kai'-ta, s. f., coquette. L. 32. Corazou, kd-ra/i-t/iom', s. m., heart. L. 56. Corbata, kOre-baJi'-ta, cravat. L. 10. Corona, ko-rO'-na, s. 1'., crown. L. 56. Correcto, kor-raik'-to, adj., correct. L. 29. Corredor, kor-rai-dore', s. m,, corridor, broker. L. 49. Corregir, kor-rai-heer\ to correct. — Corre- girse^ to mend. L. 59. Correo, kor-rai'-o^ s. m., courier, post.— Ca- sa de correos, post-office. L. 29. Correr, kor-rair\ to run.— Co/rer^g, to be ashamed or confused, to blush. L. 51. Corretear, kdr-rai-tai-ar\ to run about. L. 53. Correveidile, kor-rai-vai-e-d^'-lai^ s.m., tale- bearer, tattler. L. 50. Corriente, kor-re-ain' -tai^ adj., current; 6. m., al coiTiente de, aware of; s. f., cur- rent, stream. L. 56. Corrientemente, kor-rl-ain-tai-mcdn'-tai^ adv., currently, fluently. L. 49. Corro, kor'-ro^ s. m., circle of people col- lected together for talking. L. 44. Cortante, kore-tan' -tai, adj., cutting, sharp, edged. L. 38. Cortaplumas, kdre-tah-ploo'-mass^ penknife. L. 9. Cortar, kore-tar\ to cut. L. 33. Corto, kore'-to, adj , short. L. 21. Cosa, ko'-sa, s. f., thing.— A cosa de las seis, about six o'clock. L. 11. Coser, ko-scur', to sew. L. 24. Cosmopolita, kos-rno-po-lee'-ta, s. m., cos- mopolite. L. 51. Costa, kdce'-ta^ s. f,, cost, coast.— A costa mia, at my expense.— A casta de, at the expense of. L. 60. Costado, kos-tah'-do, s. m., side. L. 61. Costar, kds-tar\ to cost. L. 61. Costumbre, kos-ioom'-brai, s. f., custom, habit. L. 54, Creacion, krai-ah-tM-one', s. f., creation. L. 41. Crear, krcu-ar\ to create. L. 41, Credito, krai'-de-to, s. m., credit, credence. L. 57. Creencia, krai-ain'-thl-a, s. f., credence, be- lief. L, 49, Creer, krai-/i-7/ah'-do, da, s. ra. and f., brother-in-law, sister-in-law. L. 64, Curioso, koo-1'l-o' -80, adj., curious, worthy of note, L, 51, Curso, koor'-so, s, m., course, L. 64. Custodia, koos-tO'-dl-a, s, f., custody. L, 53, Ctitis, koo'-tees8, s, m, and f., skin, L, 64. Cuyo, koo'-yo, pron., of whom, of which, whose, which. L. 17. Dale I dah'-lai, int., have at It ! L. 64. Dania, da/i'-tna, s. f., lady, dame. — Uanias, draughts, or checkers. L. 58. Danza, dan'-tha, s. f., dance. L. 64, Dailar, dan-yai-', to damage, to hurt, to harm, L, 47. Dailo, dan'-yo, s. m., damage, hart, harm. L. 42. Dar, to give.— Z)arcv ytomarcB, disputes, ifs and ands.— X'a/ve a la vela, to set sail. L. 26, Pc, rfrti, prep., of, ttom.—De dla, by day.— J)e intcnto, on purpose. L. 4, Bcbcr, dcU-bair\ s. m. , duty. L, 28. Dcbcr, to owe, muf^t.—Deben eer las ocho, it must be eight o'clock. L. 26. Decena, dai-iJiai'-na, s. f., about ten. L. 59. , UeciUif, dai-thl'detr' , to decide, L, 60, ; Decimo, dai'-Uii-mo^ ord. adj., and s. m., I tenth. L. 15. Dccir, dai-tlieer' , to say, to tell. L. 27. Declarar, dai-claJc-rar' , to declare, L. 48. Dedal, dai-dai', s. m,, thimble, L, 24. Dedo, dai'-do, s. m., finger, L. 59, Defectivo, dtU-fuik-tZ'-vo, adj,, defective. L, 63, Defecto, dai-faik'-to, b. m,, defect, failing. L, 55, Defender, dai-fain-dair' , to defend, L, 37. Delinicion, dai-jS-ud-i/ii'dne', b, f,, defini- tion, L. 59, Definir, dui-fi-neer' , to define, L, 59. Dejar, dai-har', to leave, to let, to allow. L. 44. Delante, dai-lan'-tai, prep. — Ddante de, be- fore, in the presence of, L, 16, Dcleitar, dai-lcd-e-tar' , to delight, L, 47, Delicado, dai-U-kali'-do, adj,, delicate, L, 39. Delicioso, dai-li-ihS-d'-so, adj., delicious. L. 35. Delincuente, dai-leen-cwain'-fai, b. m., de- linquent, transgressor, L, &4, Delinquir, dai-leen-keei'' , to transgress. L. 34. Delito, dai-W-to, s. m., crime, transgres- sion. L. 51, Demas, dai-mass', adv., over and above, too much; adj. (generally used with lo, los, las), the rest, the others, others, L, 43, Demasiado, (lai-mah-sl-ah'-do, adj. and adv., too much, too. L. 25. Dentro, dain'-t?v, prep., in, within, inside (always followed by de). L. 31. Derecho, dai-rcd'-c/io, acy., right, even, straight. L. 50. Desafiar, dai-sah-fl-ar', to challenge. L. 65. Desafio, dai-saJi-fl'-o, s.m., challenge, duel. L. 63, Desanimar, dai-sah-n^-mar', to dishearten, to discourage, L, 38, Descansadamente, dais-kan-sah-dah-main'' tai, adv., easily, at one's ease. L, 33, Descansado, dais-kan-sah'-do, adj,, easy, quiet, refreshed, L, 33, Descansar, dcUs-kan-sar' , to rest. L, 33. liescanso, dais-kan'-so, s. m., rest, repose, ease. L. 33. Descaro, dcUs-kah'-ro, b. m., bare&cedness. L, (U, Descender, dais-thain-dair', to descend. L. 87. Descomponcr, dais-kiHne-pd-nair', to disar- range, to discompose, to put out of order. L.53. Descompuesto, dais-kHme-pwaifs'-to, adj., disarranged, discomposed, out of order, disorderly, L. 5.3, Desconfiar, dau-kOne-fi-ar'^ to distrust, to mistrust. L. 43. Dcsgracia, dais-grah'-thl-a^ B. f., misfor- tune, ill-luck. L, 48, Deshacer, dais-ah-thair', to undo, to de- stroy, to take or put asunder, L. 57. Desierto, dai-^-aii-'-to, s, m,, desert, wil- derness, L. 64, Desigual, dai-^l-gwal\ adj,, unequal, uii even. L. 65. ■VOCABULARY. 449 Desocupar, dai-sd-Jcoo-par' , to quit, to evacuate, to empty, h, 56. Despacio, dais-jjati' -tlie-o, adv., slowly. L. 6. Despedir, dapi-jjui-deer' , to dismiss, to send or put away, to discharge. L. 59. Despertar, aaiii-pair-tar' , to awake, to awaken, to arouse, to rouse. L. 'M. Despierto, daiii-2)e-air' -to, adj., awake, brisk, sprightly, lively. L. 5:;i. Desproporcionadisimamente, d«w-^r5-j95r€- tiil-dne-ah-Ue'-se-mah-main-tai, adv., out of all proportion. L. 50. Despues, dais-pwaiss', prep, and adv., after, atterward. L. 16. Determinante, dai-tair-rvl-nan'-tai, adj., de- termining.— Verbo detenninante, deter- mining verb. L. 53. Determinar, dai-tair-ml-nar' , to determine. L. 53. Detras, dcu-tras8\ prep, and adv., behind. L. 33. Deudor, dai-oo-dore\ s. m., debtor. L. 45. Devolver, dai-vole-vaii'\ to return, to give back. L. 43. Dia, de'-a, s. m,, day.— De dia, by day. In the daytime.— Dar los dias, to say good morning (to any one). L. 9. Diablo, dl-ah'-blo, s. m., devil. L. 65. Dialecto, de-ah-laik'-to, s. m., dialect. L. 55. Dialogo, dl-ah' -Id-go, s.m., dialogue. L. 59. Diautre, de-an'-trai, s. m,, deuce. L. 46. Dibujo, de-boo'-ko, s. m., drawing, design. L. 51. Diccionario, deek-the-o-nali' -rl-o, s. m., dic- tionary. L. 49. Dicha, de'-cha, s. f., happiness, good luck, good fortune. L. 64. Dicho, de'-dio, s. m., saying. L. 54. Diciembre, de-the-aim' -brai, s. m., Decem- ber. L. 34. Diente, de-am'-iai,B.m., tooth.— Hablaren- tre dientes, to mumble, to mutter. L. 63. Diez, dd-aith', num. adj., ten. L. 14. Diferencia, de-fai-rain'-the-a, b. f., differ- ence. L. 48. Diferenciar, de-fai-rain-the-ar', to differ. L. 48. Dificil, de-fl'-theeJ., adj., difficult. L. 21. Dificultad, de-fe-kool-tath' , s. f., diiliculty. L. 36. Dimio, deeg'-no, adj., worthy, deserving. L. 53. Diluviar, dl-lco-vl-ar' , to rain like a deluge, to pour. L. 30. Dimes, rfe'-m«m.— Andar en dimes y dire- tcs, to use ifa and auds, to quibble. L. 47. Dimiuutivo, dl-ml-noo-te' -vo, s.m., diminu- tive. L. 44. Dinero, de-nai'-ro, B. m., money. L. 13. Dios, de-oce', s. m., God. L. 31. Diptongo, deep-tone' -go, s. m., diphthong. L. 57. Direccion, d?-raik-the-dne\ b. f., direction, address. L. 24. Dirccto, dl-raik'-to, adj., direct. L. 51. Director, dl-raik-tar' , director. L. 50. Dirigir, dl-rl-heer\ to direct.— Dirigirse, to apply. L. 63. Discipulo, dees-tM'-poo-lo, s. m., pupil, dis- ciple. L. 18. Discrete, deess-krai'-to, adj., discreet, cir- cumspect. L. 39. Disculpa, deess-kool'-pa, s. f., apology, ex- cuse. L. 60. Discurso, deess-koor'-so, s. m., diecotirse, speech, course. L. 53. Disgustar, deess-goos-tar' , to disgust, to displease. L. 50. Disgusto, deess-goos'-to, s. m., disgust, dis- pleasure, unpleasantness. L. 5U. Disponer, deess-po-nair' , to dispose, to lay out, to arrange, to prepare. L. 48. Disposicion, deess-po-se-the-one' , b. f., dis- position, arrangement, distribution. L. 33. Distancia, deess-tan'-the-a, B. f., distance. L. 51. Distante, deess-tan'-tai, adj., distant. L. 88. Distar, deess-iar', to be distant, far from. L. 53. Distinguir, deess-teen-gheer' , to distinguish. L. 43. Divertir, de-vair-teer' , to divert, to amuse. L. 89. Dividir, dd-ve-deer', to divide. L. 51. Divisar, de-ve-sar', to descry, to perceive, to catch a glimpse of. L. 42. Doble, do'-blai, adj., double. L. 40. Doble, 8. m., double. L. 40. Doce, do' -thai, num. adj. and s. m., twelve, twelfth. L. 14. Docena, do-thai' -na, s. f., dozen. L. 40. Doler, do-lair' . — Dolerle. a uno la cabeza, los dientes, to have a headache, tooth- ache. L. 36. Dolor, do-lore', B. m., pain. L. 50. Domingo, do-meen'-go, s. m., Sunday. Donde, done'-dai, adv., where. L. 9. madam. Mrs. Dona, done'-ya, s. f., lady, ±j. 2. Dormir, dore-meer', to sleep. L. 41. Dos, doce, num. adj. and s. m., two, second. L. 14. Drama, drah'-ma, b. m., drama. L. 52. Dramatico, drah-mah' -te-ko, adj., dramatic. L. 52. Duda, doo'-da, s. f., doubt. L. 43. Dudar, doo-dar', to doubt. L. 28. Durable, doo-rak' -blai, adj., durable. L. 58. Durante, doo-ran' -tai, pres. part., during. L. 59. Durar, doo-rar', to last, to continue. L. 59. Duro, doo'-ro, adj. and s. m., hard; dollar. L. 60. E. Ea ! ai'-a, int., eay ! hollo ! L. 46. Echar, ai-char\ to throw, to put, to cast.— Echar de ver, to notice, to observe.— Echar a correr, to run ei\i&y.— Echar a perder, to spoil. L. 53. Econ6mico, ai-ko-no' -me-ko, a^., economi- cal. L. 35. Edad, s. f., affe. L. 53. Edicion, ai-de-thl-one' , b. f.. edition. L. 60. Edificar, ai-d'e-fe-kar' , to edify. L. 48. Efecto, ai-faik'-to, s. m., effect. L. 47. Ejecutar, ai-hai-koo-tar' , to execute^ to put into execution, to put into practice. L. 60. Ejemplo, ai-haim'-pU), s. m., example. L. 32. Ejercer, ai-hair-thair' , to exercise, to prac- tise. L. 60. 450 VOC ABULAEY, Eyercicio, ai-kair-thi'-thi-o, s. m., exercise. L. 8. El, la, lo, los, las, def. art., the. L. 1. EI, ella, ail^ aU'-j/a, pers. pron., he, bhe, it. L. 1. Eleccion, ai-laitikd-o/ie', s. f.. election, choice. L. 21. Elegancia, ai4ai-gan' -Ihl-a, s. f., elegance. L. 5;i. ElcLrante, ai-lai-gan'-tal, adj., elegant. L. 65. Ele;,'ir, ai-lai-heer\ to elect, to cnoose. L. Eleraento, ai-lai-main'-to, s. m., element, constituent part. L. fW. Elena, ai-lai'-na, s. f., Helena, Ellen. L. 19. Elipticq, ai-kep'te-kOy adj., eliiptic, ellipti- cal. L. GO. Embarcadero, aim-bar-kah-dai'-w, B. m., landing, ferry. L. 58. Embargo, aiin-bar'-go, s. m., embargo.— Sin embargo^ notwithstanding, however. L. Erapeflar, aim-pain-yar\ to engage, to pledge, to hind.—Empenarfie, to bind one's self, to persist, to desire eagerly. L. 45. Eiupero, aim-jjai'-ro, conj., yet, however, but. L. 60. -^ w , Emplear, ai/n-p!al-ar\ to employ. L. 44. Empleo, airn-plai'-o, s. m., employ, em- ployment, omce. L. 57. En, aia^ prep., in, at, on. L. 8. Enamorar, ai-nah-mo-rar\ to court, to make love {.o.—Enamararse de, to be enamoured of, to fall in love with. L. 30. Encargo, ain-kar'-go, s. m., charge, com- mis:?ion, command. L. 57. Encarga •, a a-kar-gar', to charge, to com- mi-sion, to order. L. 58. Encender, aiii-thaia-dair\ to light, to kin- dle. L. 37. Encerrar, am-thair-rar\ to shut up, to con- tain, to comprehend. L. 05. Encima, ain-thl' -ma^ prep, and adv., above over. L. ;i3. ' Encontrar, ala-kdne-trar\ to meet, to find. L.. 35. Enemigo, a2-na/-m2'-«7o, 8. m., enemy. L 51 Lnemistar, ai-/iai-mees.s-tar\ to set at ca- m\ty. —Erie/zmfar a alguno con olro to put any one at enmity with, or aga net another. L. GO. ' » Energia, ai-nair-hd'-a, s. f., energy. L 61 Enfermar, ain-f air-mar' , to become or tret Enfermo, ain-fair'-tm, adj.. sick, ill. L 48 Enfrente, uin-frain'-tai, adv., opposite, iii ftont. L. 51. ' Engailar, aingan-yar\ to deceive, to take in. L. 32. Enhebrar, ain-aibrar\ to thread, to link L. 65. Enhorabuena ai-nd-rah-bwai'-na b f congratulation, felicitation. L. 39 ' '' EnrKjuc, uin-re'-kai, s. m., Henry L 15 EMscilar, a*n-sain-ijar\ to show, to teach Li. 27. ^'to"d!Uib ^^£-**2f '^^-«^'' to dirty, to soil, Entondedor, (Un-tain-dai-ddre', s. m ho who undcrstand8.-A buen entmdedcyr Entender, ain-tain-dair', to understand. L. 37. Eutonces, ain-tOne'-thaiss., adv., tlien. L. 23. J:.uirambos, aiu-lra7n'-0bai, pron. pi., bock. L. GO. Eulrar, ain-trar\ to enter, to begin, to commence, to come or go lu, to got in, L. 28. Entre, ain'-trcd, prep., between, in the course of. Li. lu. Eutreiauto, ain-trai-tan'-to^ adv., in th» mean lime. JL. GO. Eutreteuer, aiii-iraitai-nair', to entertain, to amuse, to iii\(irL—Jii/itrete/t£rtte, to spend one's time, to be engaged m. L. 46. Euiusiasmo, ain-too-s't-asa -uu>, 8. m., en- thusiasm. L. 54. Enviar, aiii-vl-ar\ to send. L. 14. Envidiar, airirOi-al-ar\ to envy. L. 40. Equivocacion, ai-ke-vd-kaJi.-tki-one\ 8. £,, mistake, misconception. L. 50. Equivocar, ui-kl-vo-kar' ., to mistake.— .£^J/*- vocarse, to be mistaken. L. 47. Erguir, air-gheer\ to hold erect (as the head, &c.). L. 42. Errar, air-rar\ to err, to miss. L. 41. Erudicion, ai-ivo-de thl-dfUi\ 8. f., erudi- tion. L. 52. Escaldar, aiss-kal-dar\ to scald. L. 65. Escena, aiss-thai'-na, s. f., scene. L. tJS. Esceptico, aiss-thaip'-ti-ko, adj., skeptical. L. 45. Escoba. als8-kd'-ba, s. f., broom. L. 49. Escobajo, aiss-ko-bah'-ho, s. m. (augmenta- tive of EscoBA), stump of a broom. L. 49. Esco^er, aiss-kd-hair\ to choose. L. 65. Escribano, aiss-krS-bah'-no, s. m., notary. L. 19. ' Escribiente, aijfs-kr?-b?-ain'-tai, s. m., amanuensis, clerk, writer (in an office). L. 38. Escribir, aiss-krl-beer\ to write. L. 8. Escritor, al<)s-krS-tOre\ s. m., writer, au- thor. L. 19. Escritura, aiss-krStoo'-ra, 8. f., writing, document, conveyance. L. 19. Escuchar, aiss-koo-ckar' , to hearken, to lis- ten. L. 60. Escuela, aiss-kioai'-la, s. f., school. L. 21. Escultor, aiss-kool-Wre', s. m., sculptor. L. Escultura, aiss-kod-too'-ra, s. f., sculpture. i-i. 31. Esforzar, ai^s-fdre-thar\ to etronirthpn, to exert.— ^orsa;*^, to make effort, to en- doavor. L. 60. Esfiierzo, aisf>-firair'thn^ p. m., effort, en- doavor (pi.), conra-c. bravery. L. 47. Espacio, aiss-pak'-m-o, s. m.,Vpace. L. 48. ^spada, atAs-pa/i'-da, p. f., sword. L. 57. Espadachin, avff^pah-dah-cheen\ s. m.. bully, L. 63. ' bS""' ^'"'^^'-^^^ 8- '•' shoulder, (pi.) Kspafla aii'i.p^n'-i/a. b. f., Spain. L. 9. J-spanol, am-pan-ydlf\ g. and a^i.. Spanish anonia-o : Spanish.-.\ la wpo^oto, m the Spanish fishion. L. 2 sort'^^'L^'To'"^^'''''^""'' P. f., species, kind, ^ J?.'g5*"^' ^i^t./Mti-Wa-o/'-ro, s. m., grocer. VOCABULAKY 451 flspejo, aiss-pai'-JWy s. m,, looking-glass. L. «JU. Esperanza, aiss-pai-ran'-tha, s. f., hope. L. Esperar, azss-pai-rar\ to hope, to await, to wait lor. L. ii2. Espiritu, aiss-pe' -rl-too, s. m,, spirit. L. 45. Esposa, am-po-m, a. f., spouse, wile. L. ay. Esposo, aiS6-po'-so, s. m., spouse, husband. Esqueia, aiss-kai'-la, s. f., note. L. 56. Esquma, aias-lce'-na^ s. f., corner. L. 51. EsLuDiecer, (ma-ta/i-Olai-t/iuir' , to establish. L.42. Estacion, aiss-tah-the-oiie' , s. f,, station, season. L. tiU. Estado, aiss-ia/i'-do, s. m., state, State. — Los j£titados Unidos, the United btates. L. 19. Estar, aiss-tar\ to be, to understand.— Estar para saiir, to be about to set out.— Esiar por alguno, to be lor, or in favor of, any one.— ^' J^sta V. ? do you understand '/ L. 22. Este, aiss'-tai, s. m., east. L. 22. Este, esta, esto, deni. pron., this, this one. L. 18. Estilo, aiss-te'-lo, s. m., style. L. 52. Estimable, aiss-te-7nah'-0lai, a^., estimable. L. 39. Estimar, aiss-te-mar', to esteem, to esti- mate. L. 39. Esto, aiss'-lo. (See Este.) L. 18. Estocada, aiss-W-kah' -da^ s. f., stab, thrust. L. 53. Estrafio, aiss-tran'-yo, adj., strange, foreign. L. 48. Estratagema, aiss-trah-tah-hai'-ma^ s. f., stratagem, ruse. L. 44. Estrechar, aiss-irai-char' , to tighten, to make narrow, to squeeze, to press. L. 60. Estrecho, aiss-trai' -cho, adj., narrow, tight, close, miimdXQ.— Estrecho, s. m., strait. L. 60. ^ ^ Estribo, aiss-trW-bo, s. m., stirmp. L. 38. Estudiante, aiss-too-de-an'-tai, s. m., stu- dent. L. 38. Estudiar, aiss-foo-d^-ar', to study. L. 3. Estudio, iuss-too'-dl-o, s. m., study. L. 25. Etemidad, ai-tair-ne-dath' , s. f., eternity. L. 36. Etenio, al-tair'-no, ad]., eternal. L. 41. Evidencia, ai-ve-dain'-the-a, s. f., evidence. L. 59. Evitar, ai-r?-tar', to avoid, to help (do otherwise than has been dene). L. 47. Exageracion, aik-sah-hai-rah-the-dne\ s. f., exaggeration. L. 48. Exa^erar, aik-sah-hai-rar' , to exaggerate. L.'60. . ,. Examen, aik-sah'-main, b. m., examination. L, 38. . _ Examinar, aik-sah-ml-nar' , to examine. L.. 41. Exceder, alk»-thai-dair\ to exceed, to over- step, to surpass. L. 53. Excelente, aiks-thai'lain'-tat, adj., excel- lent. L. 53. Excepcion, aiks-thaip-thl-dne' , s. f., excep- tion. L. 45. ^ ^ _ Exceptuar, aiks-thaip-ioo-ar\ to except. L. Exclamacion, aiks-Mah-mah-thl-dm\ s. f., exclamation. L. 24. Exciamar, ailcs-ktak-7nar\ to exclaim. L. UU. Excusa, aiks-koo'-sa, s. f., excuse, apology. L. bO. Excufcar, aiks-koo-sa?'', to excuse, to apolo- gize. L. xl. Exuibiciou, aik-sl-be-the-dne\ s. f,, exhibi- tion. L. 46. Exhibir, aik-ae-beer' , to exhibit. L. 60. Exigir, aik-sl-heer' y to exact, to require, to demand. L. 38. Existeucia, aik-seess-tain' -thl-a, s. f., exist- ence, (pl.) stock. L. 52. Existir, aik-seess-teer' , to exist. L. 40. Exito, aik'-se-to, s. m., result, issue.— Con buen exito, successfully. L. 46. Experieucia, aiks-pai-?e-azn'-the-a, s. f., ex- perience. L. 41. Expiicacion, aiks-ple-kah-thl-dne\ s. f., ex- planation. L. 48. Explicar, aiks-ple-kar\ to explain. L. 45. Exponer, aiks-pd-nair\ to expose, to ex- pound, to explain. L. 51. Expresar, aiks-irrai-sar', to express. L. 52. Expresion, aiks-prai-se-dne\ s. f., expres- sion. L. 56. Expresivo, aiks-pj-at-s^'-vo, adj., expressive. L. 65. Exterior, aiks-tai-re-ore\ exterior. L. 48. Extra, aiks'-tra, adv., extra. L. 60. Extrangero, aiks-tran-hai'-ro, s. m., foreign- er. L. 60. Extrafiar, aiks-tran-yar' , to wonder at, to find (a thing) strange, L. 60. Extrano, aiks-tran'-yo, adj., strange. L. 48. Extraordinario, aiks-trah-dre-de-nah'-re-o, adj., extraordinary. L. 46. Extremado, aiks-trai-mah'-do, adj., ex- treme. L. 55. F. Fabricar,/a^-5re-Aar', to make, to manu- facture, to build. L. 48. YaccioM, fak-the-one\ s.f., feature; faction. L. 35. Facilfah'-iheel, adj., easy. L. 21. Facilidad, fah-the-le-daih' , s. f., facihty, ease. L. 36. „ .,. . x Facilitar, fah-the-le-tar' , to facilitate, to make easy, to procure. L. 49. Facilmente, fah'-theel-main-tai, adv., easi- ly. L. 49. ¥acti\ral fa'k-too'-ra, s. f., invoice. L. 63. FacuUad, fah-kool-iath', s. f., faculty, power of doing any thing, liberty to do anv thing. L. 63. Falso, /a^'-so, adj., false. L. 45. Falta,/ar-^a, s. f., fault, want L. 27. FaUar, fai-tar\ to want, to lack, to be lack- iner. L. 31. ^ ,. Fama, fah'-ma, s. f., fame, reputation, re- FamUia, fah-rk^ '-l?-a, s. f family. L. 23. FamiMar, fah-m€-le-ar\ adj., familiar L. 40. Fammaridad, fah-me-lhah-re-dat/i , s. I., ia- miliarity. L. 65. Famoso^fah-md'-ro. adj., famous. L. 45. Fanatico,/a/t-na/i'-^e-Ao, adj., fanatical. L 35. 452 VOCABULARY. Fas, fai^s.— Par fas 6 por nCfas, right or wrong ; juhtly or unjuatly. L. 63. Faslidio, J(u>s-lS'-iiS-o, a. m., trouble, annoy- ance. L.. 47. Fsi\or, fak-VM'e'^ a. m., favor, mercy, help. —Ajavor de, m bcliall' ol'. L. yj. Favorecer, Ja/i-vO-rai-thair' , to favor. L. 50. Fa\orito,fah-vd-7-^'-fo, adj., favorite. L. 54. ¥6.fai, 8. f., faith. L. 45. YchrGTO, fai-brai'-ro^ 8. m., February. L. 2i. Fccha., fai'-cha, b. f., date. L. 20. Felicidad, fai-lS-tM-daih\ s. f., happiness, felicity. L. 48. Feiicitar,/a^/2-^AS-tor', to felicitate, to con- gratulate. L. (U. Feliz, j'ai-lee(h\ adj., happy, fortunate, lucky. L. 21. Felizmente, fai-leetk-main'-tai, adv., happi- ly, fortunately, luckily. L. 49. Femenino, fai-rnai-nS'-nOy a^j., feminine. L. 47. rco,/ae'-o, adj., ugly, unbecoming. L. 7. Feroz, /ai-ro(h\ adj., ferocious, herce, rav- enous. L, 54. FGrrocaiTil, fair-r5-car-red\ s. m., railroad. L. 60. Fia(io,fS-ah'-do, adj., confident, trusting. — Al Jlado, on credit, on trust. L. 61. Fiar,/g-ar', to trust, to bail. L. 61. Ficl,/t'-ai;', adj., faithful. L. 21. Fi(iiita,/i-aiss'-fa, s. f., feast, festival.— Dia de Jlesla, holiday. L. 62. Figura, /?-.^oo'-ra, s. f., figure, form, shape. — Ilacer Jigura, to make, to cut a figure. L. 63. Fi-'urado, fi-goo-rah'-do^ adj., figurative. L. 51. FWoaoiasiro J'^-ld-sd-fass'-tro, s. m., philoso- phastcr. L. 49. Filosofo, fl-lO'-sO-fo, 8. m., philosopher. L. 49. Fin, feen, s. m., end, object, point.— A fin de, in order to. L. 45. Final, /?-/ta^', s. m. and adj., end, termina- tion ; final. L. 61. F'miiimQniCy fi-nal-main'-taiy adv., finally. L. 49. Fino,/?'-no, adj., fine. L. 56. Firnia, /^6r'-;/ia, s. f., signature. L. 56. Fisonomia,/S-«5-w5-we'-a, b. f., physiogno- my. L. 45. Flaqueza, flah-kai'-tha, b. f., leanness, wiakncss, foible, frailty. L. (54. Fondo, tone' -do, b. ni., bottom, ground (of colored articles); pi., funds, cash, money. L. 60. Formal, fore.-mal\ adj., fonnal, reliable, respectable. L. 45. FonnaIidad,/3re-ma/i-^-rfa)!7i', s. f, formali- ty, reliabiluy, respectability. L. 45. Formar,yc>?'c-7/jar', to form, to yhapc. L. 43. Fort una, fdre-too'-na, B. f., fortune, luck. L. 42. Fra.!j:ata,/m^-7a^'- Fumar,y tor ; gallant. L. 58. Galante, gak-lan' -tai, adj., gallant, courtly. L. 58. Galicismo, gah-lS-theess'-mo, b. m., galli- cism. L. 61. Gallcgo, gal-yai'-go, b. m., Galician. L. 55. Gallina, gal-ye'-na, s. f., hen. L. 5. Gana, ga/i'-na, s. f., desire, will, appetite. L. 59. Ganapierde, gah-nah-pl-air'-dai, b. m., game of draughts, or checkers, at which the loser wins. L. 50. Ganar, gah-nnr', to gain, to win. L. 27. Ganso, gan'-so, s. m., goose.— Hablar por boca de ganso, to eciio what has been said by others. L. 6Ji. Garrotazo, gar-rd-tah' -tJiO, 8. m., blow with a cudgel. L. 44. Garrote", gar-rv'-(ai, b. m., cudgel. L. 44. Gastar, gaas-iar', to waste, to use, to spends to expend. L. 50. Qatillo, gah-tM'-yo, b. m. (dim.), little cat, trigger of a gun. L. 53. GatOj qah'-to, s. m., cat. L. 46. Gemido, hai-tni'-do, s. m., groan, lamenta- tion, moan, howling. L. 59. General, hai-nai-ral\ s. m. and an-'k7in.e-vni.n7-rtin'-taf, b. m., difficulty. obst<»c1e. obioction. L. Rl. Increlble, een-krai-i'-blai. adj.. Incredible. L.61. Indeflnido, f>m-dai-n-ni'-do, adj., indefi- nite. L. 01. IndependoTicia, e^n-dai-nain-daln'-tM-ay B. f. . indopendencf'. L. 35. Indlcatlvo, p.en-dl-kah-tl'-vo, ad}., indica- tive. L. 43. Indice, een'-dS-tkai, 8. m., index. L. 61. ludigno, een-deeg'-nOy adj., unworthy, un« deserving. L. 53. Indigo, een'-dS-go, e. m. L. 54. (See ARil ) Indirecto, eeu-dl-rcUk' -to, adj., indirect. L. 51. Individuo, een-di-vl' -doo-d^ s. m., individu- al, member (of academies, universities, &c.). L. 51. Industrioso, een-doos-tri-d'-so, adj., indus- trious. L. 35. Inepto, een-aip' -to, adj., inept, unfit. L. 61. Inexplicable, een-cukti-pli-kuJi' -blai, adj., in- explicable. L. 61. Infaucia, een-fan'-tli^-a, s. f., infancy. L. 54. Inferior, een-fai-ri-ore' , «dj., inferior. L. 21. Iniimo, een'-jl-nu), adj., lowest. L. 21 . Intinidad, een-fl-nl-daUi\ s. f., infinity. L. 40. Infinitivo, een-fi-nl-tZ'-vo, adj., infinitive. L. 43. Intinito, een-fi-riS'-to, adj., infinite. L. 39. Inlluir, een-jloo-eer\ to influence. L. 48. Infortunio, een-jore-too'-ne-o^ s. m., misfor- tune. L. 41. Ingenio, een-hai'-nl-o, s. m., genius. L. 61. Ingeuioso, eeiirhai-nl-o'so, tulj., ingenious. L. 01. Inglaterra, een-glah-tair'-ra, s. f., England. L. 9. Ingles, een-glaiss'. b. m. and a^., English. L. 2. Inicial, ?-nUh?-(il\ a_4j., initial. L. 56. Injusticia, een-hooss-te'-ihe-a, b. f., injustice. L. 45. Inmediato, een-mai-dl-ah'-tOy a4j., immedi ate, near, next. L. 01. Inmemorial, een-nuU-md-ri-al', a^., imme* morial. L. 66. Inocente, l-nd tJiain'-tcU. adj., innocent. L. 34. Inquietar, een-kZ-ai-tar' . to make uneasy. L. 01. Inquicto, een-k^-ai'-to, adj., uneasy, restless. L. 01. Insecto, eensaik'-fo, b. m.. insect. L. 61. Tnspirar, eens-pl-rar', to inspire. L. 68. Instante. eena-fav'-ffi. 8. m., instant.— Al iv.ofar)fe. immedintely. L. 49. Tnstinto. eem-icen'-fo, p. m., instinct. L. 61. InPtniccion, eenx-trook thp-7>ne\ s. f., In- Ptrnotion. leamin?. L. 52. Instniido, een.<>,<>-fTVO^'-do. a<^.. Instructed, learned, educated. L. 49. luBtruir, eem-troo-eer' , to instruct, to teach. L. 47. Instrumento, ^enxfroo-main'-fo, b. m., in- strnmont. L. 61. Intacbnblp. een-fah-rhnh'-Nai. nf^l., anlnv- ponchnble. irropronrhnble. I., c-l. Intencion, e€n-tain-thl-dne\ s. f., intention. L. 61. Tntentar, fen-fafn-far'. to attempt. L. 61 . Interfp. ffin-faj-rahx'. p. m.. interepf. L. M. Interepanto. efin-tai-rai-san'-tai, adj., inter- cptiner. L. 47.. Interesar, een-tai-rai-sar'. to Interest. L. 61. Interln, een'-tai-reen, adv.. In the Interim L. 61. Interior, een-tat-rl-dre', acH., Interior. L 4«. Interior, s. m., interior. L. 46. VOCABULAEY 456 Interjeccion, een-tair-haik-thl-one' , s. f., in- terjection. L. 43. Interrogacion, een-tair-ro-gah-the-one\ s. f., interrogation. L. 61. Interrogante, een-tair-ro-gan'-tai^ s.m., note of interrogation. (Pres. part, of Inter- BOGAR.) L. 61. Interrogar, een-tair-rd-gar\ to interrogate, to question. L. 61. Interrumpir, een-iair-room-peer\ to inter- rupt. L. 64. Intimidad, een-te-m^-dath', s. f., intimacy. . L. 56. /Intimo, een'-tl-mo, adj., intimate. L. 56. lutroducir, een-trd-doo-tlieer\ to introduce. L. 40. Inutil, een-oo'-teel^ adj., useless. L. 50. Invariable, een-vah-re-alt' -blai, adj., uivari- able. L. 56. Inversion, een-vair-sl-dne'^ s. f., inversion. L. 61. Invertir, een-vair-teer\ to invert. L. 61. Invierno, een-ve-air'-no, s. m., winter. L. S4. Invitar, een-vl-tar\ to invite. L. 56. Ir, eer, to go. L. 18. Iris, e'-reess^ s. f., rainbow. L. 61. Irlanda, eer-lan'-da, s. f., Ireland. L. 40. Irregular, eer-rai-goo4ar\ adj., irregular. L. 43. Lregularidad, eer-rai-goo-lah-r1-dath\ b. f., Irregularity. L. 55. Isabel, l-sah-baU\ s. f., Isabella, Elizabeth. L. 55. Isla, eess'-la^ s. f,, island. L. 61. Italia, e-tah'-m-a, s. f., Italy. L. 40. Italiano, l-tah-le-ah'-no^ s. m. »nd adj., Ital- ian. L. 61. Izquierdo, eeth-kl-air'-do^ adj., left-handed. — Mano izquierda^ left hand. L. 50. Jabon, hah-bdne\ s. m., soap. L. 5. Jamas, hah-mass\ adv., never. L. 25. Jaque, hah'-kaU check (at chess).— Jogwe y mate, checkmate. L. 42. Jarrlin, har-deen\ s. m., garden. L. 18. Jardinero, har-dl-nai'-ro, s. m., gardener. L. 34. Jose. k5-.oai\ s. m., Joseph. L. 43. J6ven, ho'-vain, adj. and s. m. and f., young; young: man, youii'? woman. L. 13. Jnan, whan. s. m., John. L. 17. Juana, whah'-na, s. f., Jane. L. 17. Jueeo, whai'-go^ s. m., game, play, set. L. 6i: Jn^ves. vfhai'-vaiss, s. m., Thursday. L. 9. Jnez, whaifh, s. m.. iuflge. L. 9. Jncror, hon-'^nr'. to play. L. 41. Juido, v^M'-fhl-o, s. m., judgment, sense, trial. L. 53. Julio. hoo'-T?-n. s.m., July, (prop, name) Julius. L. 24. Juntar, ho(m-tar\ to join, to place together. L. 65. Junto, hoon'-to, adv., near, close to. L. 39. Juramento, hno-ra-main'-to, s.m., oath, affi- davit. L. 53. Justicia. hoofn^-tl' -fM-a. s. f. justice. L. 61. Ju«to. hooas'-to, adj., Inst. nVht. L. 61 . JHventnd, 7ioo-ven-tooth' , s. f., youth. L. 48. L. La, def. art. f. sin^., the. L. 5. La, pron. f. sing., ner, it. L. 8. Laconico, lah-ko'-nS-ko, adj., laconic. L. 38. Laboriosidad, lah-bo-re-o-ie-daih' , s. f., in- dustry. L. 51. Lacre, lah'-krai, s. m., sealing-wax. L. 5, Lado, lah'-do, s. m., side. L. 18. Ladron, lah-drone', s. m., tliief. L. 44. Lago, lali'-go. s. m., lake. L. 40. Lagrima, lah' -gre-ma, s. f., tear.. L. 51. Lapiz, lah'-peeth, s. m., pencil. L. 51. Largo, lar'-go, adj., \ong.— Largo tiempo, a long time.— A lo largo, alongside. L. 21. Lastima, lass'-ie-ma, 8. f., pity. L. 25. Lastimar, lass-te-mar\ to hurt, to wound, to ofl'end. L. 61. Latin, lah-teen', s. m., Latin. L. 61. Latinajo, lah-ie-nah'-ho, 8. m. aug., Dog- Latin. L. 49. Latitud, lah-il-tcoth\ 8. f., width, latitude. L.61. Lavandera, lah-van-dai'-ra, s. f,, washer- woman. L. 5. Lavar, lah-var\ to wash. L. 24. Le, lai, pron., him, it; to him, to it. L. 10. Leccion, laik-thl-one\ s. f., lesson, L. 8. Leche, lai'-chai^ s. f., milk. L. 7. Lectura, laik-too'-ra, s. f., reading. L. 38 Leer, lai-air\ to read. L. 7. Legua, lai'-gu-a, s. f., league. L. 61. Leido, lai-e'-do, adj.— Hombre bien Mdo, a well-read man. (Past pt. of Leer.) L. 52. Lejos, lai'-hoce, adv., far ofl".— A lo l^os, in the distance. L. 31. Lengua, lain'-gwa, s. f., tongue, language. L. 23. Lenguage, lain-gwa'-Jiai, s. m., language, manner of speaking or writing. L. 66. Lento, lain'-to, adj., slow, lardy. L. 61. Leon, lai-dne\ s. m., Hon. L. 54. Letra, lai'-tra, s. f., letter (character), hand- writing, letter (of credit) ; pi., letters, lite- rature.— Bellas letras, Belles-lettres. L. 61. Levantar, lai-van-tar\ to raise, to lift up.— Levantarse, to rise, to get up. L. S3. Levita, lai-ie'-ta, s. m., Levite.— ZcteYa, s. f., frock-coat. L. 61. Ley, lai'-S, s. f., law. L. 8. Liberal, U-bai-ral\ adj., liberal. L. 62. Libertad, le-bair-tath\ s. f., liberty. L. 40. Libra, te'-bra. s. f., pound.— X?6m esterlina, pound sterling. L. 47. Librar, U-hrar'l to free, to deliver : (com- mercial) to draw. L. 45. Libre, Ve'-hraL adj., free. L. 59. Libren'a, U-brai-rl'-a, s. f., bookstore, book- seller's shop, book -trade. L. 11. Llbrero. l?-brai'-ro, s.m., bookseller. L. 11. Libro, ir-bro, s. m., book. L. 4 Lieero, l?-?>a)/-ro, adj., light, swift. -A la ligera, lin-htly. L. 46. Limosna, U-moce'-na, s. f., alms. L. bi. Limpiar, leem-pl-ar', to clean ^- ?^j, Limpieza, leem-p^-ai' -tha, s.f., cleanliness. Limpio, leem'-pS-d, adj., clean, cleanly. L. 20. Lfnea, W nai-a, s. f., line. L. 61. Lisboa. l^^.ta-bd'-a. s. f., Lisbon. L. 55. Lisonja, U-sone'-ha, s. f, flattery. L. 61. 456 VOCABULARY, Lisonjear, lS-sdne-kal-ar\ to flaftter. L. 61. Litioujero, IS-KO/ie-hai'-ro, adj. and s. m., flattering, flatterer. L. 01. Lista, leess'-ta, s. f., list. L. 61. Listo, leess'-lo^ adj., ready, Bliarp, quick. L. 46. Literato, R-tai-rah' -to, s. m., man of letters, literatus. L. 51. Literatura, U-tcU-rah-ioo' -ra, s. f., literature. L. 52. Litro, «'-. often. L. 25. Mequetrefe, mai-kai-trai' -fed, s. m., trifler, jackanapes. L. 63. Mercader, mair kah-dair' . 8. m., dealer, trader, shopkeeper. L. 52. alercado, mair-kah' -do, s. m., market. L. 17. 20 Mercantil, mair-kan-teel' , adj., mercantile. L,. 56. Merecer, mai-rai-lhair' , to merit, to de- serve. L. 52. Mercndar, mai-rain-dar' , to lunch, L, 34. Meridiano, mai-re-de-ah'-no, s. m., merid- ian. L. 62. Merino, mai-re'-no, s, m., merino (sort of Spanish sheep). L. 40. Merito, mcu'-re-to, s. m., merit. L. 55. Mes, maiss, s. m., month.— Al mes, by the month. L. 16. Mesa, mai'-sa, s. f., table, L. 14, Metal, mai-ial', s. m., metal. L. 62. Meter, mai-tair', to put, to -^iacQ.— Meter ruido, to make noise. L. 46. MetOdico, mai-to'-de-ko, adj., methodical. L. 35, Metodo, mai' -to do. s. m., method. L. 47. MelrOpolt, mai-tro' po-le, s. f., metropohs, L. 51. Mi, me, pron., me. L. 25. Mi, poss. pron., my. L. 5. Miedo, me-ai'~do, s. f., fear.— Tener miedo, to be afraid. L. 25. Miel, me-ail', e. f., honey. L. 65. Miembro, me-aim'-bro, s. m., member, limb. L. 62. Miercoles, m6-air'-kd-laiss, s. m., Thursday. L. 9. Mil, 7neel, num. adj. and s. m., a thousand, one thousand. L. 14. Mi 11a, meel'-ya, s. f., mile. L. 62. Millar, med-yar', s. m., the number of a thousand, thousand. L. 40. Millou, meel-yoae', num. adj. and s. m., mil- lion.— J/eYto/i^ de pesos, millions of dol- lars. L. 40. Mineral, me-nai-ral' , s. m., mineral. L. 62. Miniiscula, me-nooce'-koo-la, . adj., small (said of letters), as opposed to capital. L. ()2. Minuto, ml-noo'-to, s. m., minute, L. 23. Mio, mia, m'e'-d, me.' -a, poss. pron. and poss, adj., mine, (As a poss. adj., mio is al- ways placed after the substantive.) L. 13. Mirar, me-rar', to look, to look at, to ob- serve. L. 29. Mismo, rmess'-mo, adj., same, self, self- same.— El mismo, he himself. L. 27. Mitad, ml-tath', s. f., half. L. 40. Moda, mb'-da, s. f., fashion. L. 25. Modelo, mo-dai'-lo, s. m., model. L. 55. Moderacion, md-dai-rah-the-one' , s. f., mod- eration. L. 65. Modemo, mo-dair' -no, adj., modern. L. .52. Modificar, mo-de-fe-kar', to modify. L. 61, Modismo, mo-deess'-mo, s. m., peculiar manner of expressing the same ideas in the same language. L. 64. Modo. mo'-do. s. m., mode, manner.— De ningun modo. by no means.— De modo one. so that. L. 42. Molestar, mo-laiss-tar' . to molest, to dis- turb. to trouble. L. 43. Momento, mo-main'-to, s. m., moment. L. 62. Mona. mo'-na. s. f., female monkey.— Aun- que la mona se vista de seda. rnxma se queda, a hog in armor is still but a hog. L. 65. Monarouico. mo-var'-kl-ko, adj., mooarchi- cal. L. 35. 458 VOCABULARY. Moneda, md-nai'-da, s. f., money, coin.— Papt'l moneda^ paper money. L. 55. Mouuir, mdiie-tar\ to mount, to ascend, to ride (on horseback). L. Ga. Monturaz, mbm-tah-ratk\ adj., mountain, wild. L. 54. Monte, inane' -lai, s. m., mountain.— ifa/ii^ dc piedad, pawn-office. L. 40. Morder, /nore-dair', to bite, to nip.— No se rnuerde \oa labios, he epeaks out hie mind. L. ;3G. Moribundo, rm-ri-boon'-do, adj., dying. L. 47. Morir, md-reer\ to die. L. 41. Mosca, moce'-ka, s. f., fly. L. 44. Mostrar, 7ndce-irar\ to show. L. 35. Motivo, mo-tl'-vo^ e. in., motive. L. 34. Mover, md-vair\ to move. L. ;j6. Mozo, rnO'-tho, s. m., youth, young man, waiter. L. G2. Muchacha, nioo-chah'-cha, b. f., girl. L. 6. Muchaclio, moo-chali'-cho^ s. m., boy. L. 6. Mucho, inoo'-clio, adj. and adv., much, a great deal, very. L. 8. Mudablc, nwo-dah'-blai, adj., mutable, changeable, fickle. L. 49. Mudar, moo-dar', to change.— 3/Mrfars(?. to move (from one place to another). L. (iS. Mucla, moo-ai'-la, s. f., back tooth.— Dolor de muelas^ toothache. L. 50. Muerte, moo-air' -tai, s. f., death. L. 38. Muerto, moo-air'-lo^ past part, (of Mobik), dead, killed. L. 52. Muestra, moo-aiss' -tra, s. f., sample, sign. L. 02. Mujcr, moo-hair', s. f, woman, wife. L. 6. Multitud, mool-tl-tooth\ s. f., multitude. L. 40. Mundo, mwn'-do, s. m., world.— Todo el innndOy everybody. L. 35. Murmuracion, moor-moo-rah-th'S-dne' ^ b. f., murmuring, backbitinc:. L. C2. Murinurar, mwr-moo-rar', to munnur, to backbite. L. 02. Mupco, moo-sai'-d, b. m., museum. L. 51. Musica, 7noo'-s?-ka, s. f., mneic. L. 15. Mu'^ico, moo'-sZ-ko^ a. m., musician. L. 15. Muy, moo'-H^ very. L. 0. N. Nacer, nahthair', to be horn.— Xaeer de pies, to be born to good luck. L. 62. Nacion, na/i-f/i?-one', p. f., nation. L. 24. Nada, nah'-da. adv., in no degree.— iVarfa menos, nothing less. L. 11. Nada, 8. f.. nothinsr. nononlitv. L. H. Nadar, nah-dar', to swim. L. 53. Narlie, vnh'-df-aU Ind. pron., nobody, no one. L. 11. Njipolof«. vnh'-pd-lnifm, b. f, Naples. L. 47. Nnrnnja, vnh-ran'ha, e. f.. orange. L. 31. Natnr.nl. r>nh-ton-raJ\ 8. m. and adj., natu- rnl : native. T,. 44. Natiirale7a, nah-too-rali-Iai'-tJia, b. f., na- ture, li. 40. Naturaliflta, nah-too-rah-leeM'-ta, s. m., na- turalist. L. SO. Navarra, nah-var'-ra, 8. f.. Navarre. L. m. N^vnrm. nnh.vnr'-ro. « ti., Xfudire-t' dm- Uve of Navarre). L. .'i^. Navegacion, nah-vai-gah-thi-dne' , b. f, navi- gation. L. '^. Navidad, naJt-i£-dat/i\ 8. f., nativity, Chriat- mas. L. 43. Navio, nah-ti'-d. 8. m., chip. L. 53. Necesario, nai-l/iai-m/i'-te-6, adj., necea- sary. L. 27. Necesidad, nai-thai-(>l-dalh\ b. C, neceesity need, want. L. 44. Necesitar, nai-t/iai-tS-tar', to be necesBary to neceseilate, to require, to want. L. 5*. Necio, nai'-tke-o, adj. and s. m, foolit^h • fool. L. 05. ' Nefas, nai'-fass.—Por fas 6 per n^of, right or wrong. L. 63. Negacion, nai-gahthl-dne', s.f., negation. L. 02. Negar, nai-gar'^ to deny, to refuse. L. 34. Negativa, nai-qahte'-ia, b. I., negation, neg- ative, refuea'l. L. 62. Negligente, nai-glhhain'-tai, adj., negli- gent. L. 50. Negocio, nai-gd'-t/iS-d, b. m., buBincBS, ahair, matter, L. 27. Negro, nai'-gro, b. m. and adj., negro,- black. L. 02. Neutro, nai'-oo-tro, adj., neuter. L. C2. Ncvar, nai-var', to Know. L. 80. Ni, 7?2, conj.. neither, nor.—Ni mas ni m6- no8, ncitlier more nor less. L. 8. Nieve, itl-ai'-tai, b. f., enow. L. 30. Ninguno, neen-gco'-no, prcn.j no one. no- hody. —AingvTia coea. nothing. L. 11. Nifia, neen'-ya, B.f., little girl, young girl, maiden. L. 17.- Nifio, neen'-yo, s. m., child, infant. L. 17. No. adv., no, not. L. 1. Noble, Jio'-Uai, adj., noble. L. 02. Nobleza, iio-blai' tha, b. f., nobieneeB, no- bility. L 65. Noche, nd'-cfiai, b. f., evening, night.— Pue- nas hccfifs, gcod evening, good ni^iht.— Aoc/ie buena, Chrisimab eve. — AiiUhe, last night. L. 23. Nombrar, 7iotne-l/i'ar\ to name, to appoint. L. 48. Nombre, nome'-brai, b. m.. name, noun.— h'cvibre propio, proper name, proper noun. L. 40. Nominativo, iw-ml-nah-tl'-tOy s. m., nomi- native. L. 62. Nono. (See Novzno.) L. 15. No obstante, voZtc-dan' -tai, adv., never- theless, notM'ithelanding, however. L. 54. Nolle, ndre'-iai, s. m., north. L. 22. Nop. noce, pers. pron., ub. to us. L. 26. Nosotros, nd-sD'-troc(, pron., we, oureelvee. L. 1. , ^ Nota, nd'-ta. p. f., note. L. 62. Notar. n^-tar', 1o note, to observe. L 58 Noticia, vr-tr-thha, s. f., notice, nev^e, pi., NoveciontoP. vti-rai-fhi-ain'-tOce, num. adj., nine hundred. I-. 14. , ♦rnnble Novoriad, v^vat-datfi', ex, novelty, trouble. NoVc'la', nd-vai'-ia. e. f., novel, romance. L. R2 J in Novono, nd-rai'-no, ord. a^. and s. m- ninth. L. 15. . ♦„ T Noveuta. nd-vatn'-ta, num. adj., ninety, i^ 14. VOCABULARY. 459 Noviembre, nd-v^-aim'-brai, s. m., Novem- ber. L. 24. Nue.4ro, noo-aiss'-tro. pose, pron., our, ours. L. 13. Nueva, noo-at'-va, s. f., news (generally used in the pi). L. 60. Nueva York, noo-ai'-va, s, f., New York. L. 9. Nueve, noo-ai'-vai, num. adj., nine. L. 14. Nuevo, noo-ai'-vo, adj., new.— De nuevo, anew. L. 21. Nuez, noo-aith\ s. f., walnut. L. 40. Numeral, noo-mcd-rcU', adj., numeral. L. 14. Numero, noo'-mai-ro, a.m., number.— i Que numero tiene su casa de V. ? what is tlie number of your house ? L. 14. Nunca, noon'-ka, adv., never. L. 25. O. O, conj., or, either. L. 8. O ! inter., oh ! L. 39. Obedecer, o-bai-dai-thair' , to obey. L. 48. Objetivo, obe-hai-te' -vo, adj. and s, m., ob- jective. L. 62. Objeto, obe-hai'-to^ s. m., object. L. 48. Obiiijacion, o-bll-gah-lh^-dite' , s. f., obliga- tion, duty. L. 24. Obligar, d-ble-gar\ to oblige, to force, to compel. L. 61. Obra, o'-bra, s. f., work (any thing made, as a book, a house, &c.). L. 15. Obrar, d-brar\ to work,' to act, to operate. L 40. Ob3c?rvar, dbe-sair-var\ to observe, to re- mark. L. 48. Obstante, obestan'-tai, present part.— No obstante. (See no obstante.) L. 54. Obvio, obe'-vl-o, adj., obvious. L. 43. Ocasion, o-kah.-se-bm\ s. f,, occasion, oppor- tunity.— Tomar isiocasion por los cabsllos, to take time by the forelock. L. 39. Occidente, oke-the-dain'-lai, s. m., the west. L 51. Ochenta, 5-cAam'-^a, num. adj., eighty. L. Ocho, o'-cho, num. adj., eight. L. 14. Ochocientos, o-cho-thl-ain' -toce^ num. adj., ei'.?ht hundred. L. 14. Octavo, oke-tah'-vo, ord. adj., eighth.— Eu octavo, 8vo. L. 15. Octubre, oke-too' -brai^ s. m., October. L 24. Ocultar, b kool-tar', to hide. L. 48. Oculto, b-lcool'-to, adj., hidden. L. 52. Ocupacion, bkoo-pah-thl-bne\ s. f., occupa- tion, business, concern. L. 54. Ocupar, b-koo-par', to occupy, to engage, to fill (a post). L. 47. Ocurrir, b-koor-reer\ to occur, to strike.— - Le ocurre una idea, an idea strikes him. L. 62. Oeste, b-aiss'-tai, s. m., west. L. .51. Ofender, b-Jam-dair', to offend. L. 27. Oficio, b-je'-tM-o., s. m., office, employ, trade. L. 38. Ofrecer, b-frai-lJiair\ to offer L. 49. Oido, b-l'-do, s. m., hearing, ear.— Hablar al oido, to whisper in one's ear. L. 61. Oir, b-eer\ to hear.— (Jeja ! just listen ! L. 41. Ojalal bhah4a\ inter., would to God I L. 37. Ojo, b'ho^ s. m., eye. L. 29. Oler, b-lair\ to smell. L. 41. Oll'ato, ble-fah'-lo, s. m., the sense of smell. L. 61. 011a, bte'-ya, s. f., earthen j^oi.— OUa podri- da, Spanish mixed dish of meats, vegeta- bles, &c., cooked together. L. 62. Olor, b-lbre\ s. m., odor, scent, smell. L. 62. Olivar, b-ll-var\ s. m., olive ground. L. 63. Olvidar, ble-ve-dar', to forget. L. 40. Omnibus, brne' -nl-hooce., s. m., omnibus. L. 51. Once, bm'-thai, num. adj., eleven.— Hacer las orice, to lunch about noon. L. 14. Opera, b'-pai-ra, s. f., opera. L. 25. Opinion, b-pe-ne-bm' , s. f., opinion. L. 42. Oponer, b-pb-nair\ to oppose. L. 51. Optimo, bpe' tS-mo, adj., best, extremely good. L. 21. Opuesto, b-pwaiss'-to, adj., opposite, op- Eosed. (Irreg. past. part, of Oponer.) .52. Oracion, b-rah-the-bne\ s. f., prayer, speech, discourse. L. 45. Orden, bre'-dain, s. m. and f., order.— A la orderi de V., at your service. L. 39. Ordenar, bre-dai-iiar' , to order, to com- mand. L. 51. Organista, bre-gah-neess' -ta, s. m., organist. L. 36. Oriente, b-rl-aia' -tai, east. L. 51. Oro, 5'-ro, 8. m., gold.— No es oro todo lo que reluce, all is not gold that glitters. L. 8. Os, bee, pron., you (objective of verbs). L. 26. 0%\Aah'-hai, b. m., passage, fare. L. .'iS and 63. Pasar, pah-sar', to pass, to go (from place to place). L 16. Pascua, j)af^s' kwa, s. f., Easter. L. 59. Paseante, pah sai-an'-iai. s. m., passerby, walker, promenader. (Pres. part, of Pa- sear.) L. :58. Pascar, jmh-sai-ar' , to walk, to promenade. L. M. Paseo, pah-sai'-o, ». m., walk, promenade. J.. 51. Pasiva, pah-sl'-va, b. f., the passive voice L. 50. Pasivo, pah-cd'-vo, adj., passive. L. 63. Paso, pah'-so, s. m., step, pace. L. 54. Patio, pah'-tl-o, s. m., yard, pit (in theatres). L. 46. Patronimico, pah-trO-nl'-mi-ko, adj., patro- nymic. L. 49. Paz, path, s. f., peace. L. 43. Pecho, pai'-cho, s. m., breast.— A lo hecho pecho, what is done cannot be he'ped. L. 65. Pechuga, pai-choo'-ga, s. f., breast of fowl L. 58. Pedazo, pai-dah'-tlw, s. m., piece, morsel. bit. L. 63. Pedir, pai-deer', to ask, to demand, to ask iov.—A.pedir dc boca, as well as could be desired. L. 39. Pedro, pai'-dro, s. m.j Peter. L. 19. Pegar, pai-gar', to stick, to paste, to beat L. 63. Peinar, pai-Z-nar', to comb. L. 46. Peine, pai-e'-nai, s. m., comb. L. 46. Peligro, pai-lS'-gro, sr. m., danger, peril. L. 51. Pelo, pai'-lo, s. m., hair.— A pelo, to the purpose. L. 33 and 44. Pelota, pai-lO'-ta, s. f., ball (for playing). L. 54. Pena, pai'-na, s. f., pain, penalty.— A duras pcnOr", with mnchdifiicult}-. L. 59. Pensamiento, pain-saJi-vi6-ain'-to, s. m., thought. L. 48. Pensar, /?ai/?-sar', to think, to intend. L. 31. Ponultimo, pai-noot' -ti-mo, adj., penulti mate, last but one. L. 50. Penasco, pain-yass'-ko, s. m., a large rock. L. 5(). Pcor, pai-Ore', adj. and adv., worse. L. 20. Pepa, pai'-pa, s. f., (contraction of Fean- ciscA, Frances), Fanny. L. 44. Pepe. (See Pepito.) L. 44. Pepito, pai-pi'-to, s. m. (contraction of JcsE, tfoseph), Joe. L. 44. Pequeilo, pai-kain'-yo, adj., Bmall, llttl", youn^. L. 7. Per, jHiir, Latin prep, used in Spanish as a prefix only ; as, jxrtitrbar. L. 50. Pera. pai'-ra, s. f., pear. L. 59. PcraJ, pai-ral', s. m., pear-tree. L. 59. Perder, pair-dair', to lose. L. 37. Perdonar, pair-do-nar' , to pardon. L. 27. Perczoeo, pai-rai-lho'-so, adj., lazy, sloth fUl. L. 38. Perfeccionar. pair-faik-thi-d-nar', to per- fect, to improve. L. 38. Perfecto, patr-faik'-to, nc\j., perfect. L. 29. Perilla, pai-reel'-ya, s. f.. small pear.— Ve- nir de pertUa, to suit exactly. L. 64. Peri6dico, pai-ri-O'-ili-ko, s. m., newspaper. L. 8. Permanecer, pair-mah-nai-thair' , to re- main, to stop, to stay. L. 45. Permanoncia, pair-mah-nain'-th?-a, b. f., permanence, duration, stop. stay. L. 51. Permitir, pair-mi-teer' , to permit, to allow. L. 44. Pcro, /xti'-ro, conj., but. L. 3. Perpendicular, jxiir-pain-di-kochlar' , adj. perpendicular. L. 51. Perro, pair'-ro, s. m., dog. L. 03. VOCABULARY. 461 Perseverancia, pair-sai-vai-ran'-thl-a, s. f., perseverance. L. 63. Persistir, pair-seess-teer' , to persist. L. 50. Persona, pair-so'-na, s. f., person. L. 38. Personal, pair-sd-nal\ adj., personal. L. 63. Pesa, pai'-sa, s. t, weight (for weighing). L. 55. Pesame, pai'-sa/i-mal, s. m., condolence. Jj. — . Pesar, pai-mr\ to weigh, to regret.— No le pesa de haber nocido, he has an excellent opinion of himself. L. 31. Pesar, s. m., regret, grief, sorrow.— A ^jesar de, in spite ot, notwithstanding. L. 31. Pescado, paiss-kah'-do, s. m., fish. L. 7. Pescar, pcUss-kar\ to fish. L. 63. Pesimo, pai'-se-mo, adj., worst, very bad. L. 21. Peso, /?a^'-so, s. m., weight, heaviness, dol- lar. L. 14. Pianista, pl-ah-neess' -ta, s. m,, pianist. L. 15. Piano, pe-ah'-no, s. m., piano. L. 15. Picante, pe-kan'-tai, adj., piquant, high- seasoned, pungent. L. 54. Picar, pe-kar\ to prick, to bite, to pique. L. 46. Picaresco, pe-kah-raiss'-ko, adj., roguish, L.-19. Picaro, pe'-kah-ro, adj., rogue, rascal, scoundrel. L. 32. Pico, pe'-ko^ 8. m., beak, bill.— Callarse el pico, to hold one's tongue. L. 61. Pie, pS-ai\ s. m., foot.— A pie, on foot.— Nacer de pies, to be born to good luck. L. 39. Pierna, pS-air'-na, a. f., leg. L. 33. Picza, pe-ai'-tha, s. f., piece. L. 64. Pinar, pe-nar\ s. m., pme-^rove. L. 49. Pino, pe'-no, s. m., pine. L, 40. Pintar, peen-iar\ to paint, to represent. L. 54. Pintor, peen-tore\ s. m., painter. L. 31. Pintura, peen-ioo'-ra, s. f., painting. L. 31. Pipa, pe'-pa, s. f., pipe. L. 42. Pique, pe'-kai, s. m., pique, oflence.— Esta- bia piqi/e de perderse, he was on the brink of ruin. L. 62. Piropos (Decir) pS-ro'-pdce, to say soft things (to the ladies). L. 58. Pisaverde, pe-safi-vair'-dai, s. m., fop, cox- comb. L. 50. Piso, pe'-so, 8. m., floor, story (of a house). — Tercer plso, third floor. L. 53. Pistola, peess-to' -la, s. f., pistol. L. 44. Pistoletazo, mess-io-lai-tah'-tho, s. m., pis- tol-shot. L. 44. Placer, plah-thair', to please. L. 31. Placer, s. m., pleasure. L. 31. Plata, plah'-ta, s. f., silver. L. 8. Plato, plah'-to, s, m., plate, dish (of viands). Li. 57. Plaza, plah' tha, s. f, place, situation, square, market-place.— Pto^a de toros. Arena (for bull-fights). L. 17 and 54. Plazo, plah'-tho, s. m., term (of payment). L. 63. Plomo, ptb'-mo, 8. m., lead. L. 63. Pluraa, ploo-wa, s. f., pen, feather. L. 5. Plural, ploo-rnl', adj., plural. L. 57. Plnscuamperfecto. ptooce-ktvam-pair-faik'- to, 8. m,, pluperfect. L. 43. Pobre, pd'-t^rai, adj., poor, needy, wretched. L. 13. Pobreza, po-brai' -tha, s. f., poverty. L 59 Poco, po'-ko, adv., little ; pi., few.— Poco a poco, gently, softly. L. 32. Poco, 8. m., little. L. 6. Poder, po-dair', to be able.— No poder mas, to be exhausted. L. 32. Poder, 8. m., power, possession. L. 35. Podrir, po-dreer' , to rot. L. 41. Poesia, pc-ai-se'-a, s. f., poesy, poetry, L. Poeta, po-ai'-ta, s. m., poet. L. 31. Poetastro, po-ai-tass' -tro, s. m., poetaster. L. 44. Poetico, po-ai'-il-ko, adj., poetic, poetical. L. 35. Polca, pote'-ka, s. f., polka. L. 23. Politica, po-te'-tl-ka, s. f., politics ; polite- ness. L. 52. Politico, po-le'-f^-ko, adj., political; polite. L. 52. Politico, s. m., man of politics. L. 52. Polio, pole'-yo, s. m., chicken. L. 5. Polvo, pole'-vo, s. m., powder, dust. L. 62. Polvora, pole'-vo-ra, s. f., gunpowder, h. 63. Ponderar, pone-dai-rar' , to exaggerate, to cry up. L. 54. Poner, po-nair', to put, to place, to lay, to set (as the s\m).—P(merse, to become, to get.— Se puso serio, he became serious. L. 41. Por, pore, prep., by, for, in behalf of, in fa- vor of, about, through.— Por las calles, through the streets.— Ir por pan, to go for bread.— Por si acaso, in case, if by any chance. L. 19. Porcion, pore-lhl-one' , s. f., portion, part, lot, number, quantity. L. 63. Pormenor, pore-mai-nore' , s. m. (generally used in the plural).— Por»^moreA^ details, particulars. L. 50. Porque, pore'-kai, conj., because. L. 18. Porque, pore-kai', conj., why ? for what reason V- s. m., reason wherefore. L. 18. Portarse, pore-tar' -sai, to behave, to conduct one's self. L. 55. Portugal, pdre-too-gal\ s. m., Portugal. L. 60. Portugues, pdre-too-ghaiss' ^. m. and adj., Portuguese (language), Portuguese (na- tive of Portugal). L. 34. Poseer, po-sai-atr', to possess. L, 34. Posesivo, po-sai-sl'-vo, adj., possessive. L. 63. Posible, po-se'-blai, adj., possible. L. 31. Positivo, po-fMe'-vo, adj., positive. L. 48. Posponer, poce-po-nazr' , to postpone, to place after. L. 63. Potencial, po-iain-ihe-at' , adj., potential. L. 63. Practica, prak'-tl-la, s. f., practice. L. 23. Practicante, »ra^-iente, to bear in raind. L. 43, Presidente, prai-sS-dain'-tai, s. m., presi- dent. L. 4G. Presidio, prai-s?'-dS-d, s. m., state prison. L. 59. rrc-«idir, prai-s^-deer\ to preside. L. 54. Preso, prai'-sOy irre^. past part, (of Pren- der), taken. L. 52. Prestar, pram-tar\ to lend. L. 59. Presto, praiss'-to, adj., quick, ready, prompt. L. 20, Presto, adv., soon, quickly. L. 20. Pretender, prai-tam-dair', to pretend, to lay claim to, to claim, to solicit, L. 48. Pretension, prai-fain-s^-dne', s. f, preten- sion, claim, thins? solicited. L. 57. Prcterito, lyrai-tai' -rl-to, adj., preterit, L. m. Pretesto, prai-talss'-to, s. m., pretext. L. 58. Prevenir, prai-vai-neer\ to prevent, to fore- see, to warn, to prepare. L. 65. Prever, prai-vai>-\ to foresee. L. 39. Prlmavera, pri-mah-vai'-ra, b. f., Spring. Primcro, pr^-mai'-ro. adj., first.- De buenas dprimef'os, all at once, rashly.— adv., first, rather, sooner. L. 15. Primo, prd'-mo, ». m., cousin. L. 13. Principal, preen-tM-pal\ adj., principal, cliief. L. 36. Principiante, preen-(M-p^-an'-fai, s. m. and pres. part, (of Principiar), beginner. L. ;J8. Principiar, preen-tM-phar\ to begin, to commence. L. 23. Principio, preen-fhF-pS-o, s. m., be':!:inning, commencement, principle. L. 63. Prisa, pr?'-sa, a. f. haste, hurry.— Tener prh'a, to ba in a hurry. L. 30. Prisionero, pri-ol-d-tuii'-ro, s. m., prisoner. L. 48. Prisma, preefn'-ma, p. m., prism. li. 54. Probable, prd-bah' -blaL adj., probable. L. 29. Probar, prd-bar\ to try, to prove, to taste. —El clima de es>te palsle prueba blen, the climate of this country agrees well with him. L. 35. Vrocti^'ion, irrd-thai-sl-dne' , 8. f., processioa L. 46. Procurar, pro-koo-rar\ to procure, to en- deavor, to try. L. 51. Produccion, prb-'iook-Uil-bn£\ s. f., produc- tion, L. 4U. Prcjducir, pro-doo-theer', to produce. L. 40, Proeza, prb-ai' -Ika, s. f, prowess. L. 54. Profccia, prb-fai-tkl' -a^ b. f,, prophecy, L. 45. Profesion, pro-fai-8l-dne\ s, f. , profession. L. 38. Profesor, pro-fai-8dre\ s, m,, professor, JL 18. Prohibir, prb-l-beer\ to prohibit. L. 53. Pr6jimo, prb'-hl-mo^ s, m., neighbor (fellow- creature). L. 28. Promesa, prb-mai'-sa, b, f., promise. L. 57. Prometer, pr5-mai-tair\ to promise. L. 25. Pronombre, prb-nJbme' -braU s, m,, pronoun. L. 43. Pronominal, pr5-nd-Tru--nal\ adj., pronomi- nal, L. 61. Prontitud, prbne-tMooth\ s. f., promptness, promptitude, quickness. L. 4.3. Pronto, j!7r5M^'-to,adj., prompt, quick, ready; —adj., soon, promptly, quickly. L. 20. Pronunciacion, prb-noon-thl-ah-lM-bm\ b. f., pronunciation. L. 63. Pronunciar, prb-ivoon-th^-ar' . to pronounce, L. 15. Propiedad, prd-pi-ai-dath\ s. f., propriety, property. L. 6;3. Propio, pro'-pi-b, adj., proper, own, self- same, same. L. 49. Proponer, prd-pb-nair\ to propose, L. 51, Prosa, pro -sa, s. f., prose. L. 31. Proporcionar, pro-pdre-thl-b-nur\ to pro- portion, to procure, to offer. L. 48. Protcstante, pro-taiss-tan'-tai, s. m., Prot- estant. L. 49. Protestantismo, prb-taiss-tan-teess'-mo, s. m., Protestantism. L. 49. Provecho, prb-vai'-cho, s. m., profit, benefit. L.W, Proveer, pr5-vai-air' to provide. L. 34. Proverbio, prb-vair -bi-d. s. m., proverb. L. 6.5. Provincia, prd-veen'-tM-a, s. f., province. L. 19. Provisto, prb-veess'-to, past part, (of Pro- veer), provided. L. 52. Pr6ximo, prbke' -si-mo, adj., proximo, next, nearest.- El mhado proximo, next Satur- day. L. 2.3. Pnidencia, proo-dain'-tfii-a, s. f., prudence. L. *1. Pnidente, proo-dain'-tal, adj., prudent. L. 20. Prueba, proo-ai'-ba, s, f.. proof, L. 46. Prnsln. proo'-s?-a, s. f , Prussia. L. 46. Pn))licar, poo-ftti-kar' , to publish. L. 48. Pfiblico, poo'-bti-ko, s. m. and adj., publi L. 51. Pueblo, pwni'-bh, s. m., town, people, L. :. Piierta. pwair'-ta. s. f . door. L. 27. Puos. piraisn, coni., then, therefore, in ' much as, since, because :— inter., well :— Pwft*, qud ? well, what of it ? L. 41. Pucsto que. ptraif^'-fo. adv., since, inas- much as, supposing that. L. 87. VOCABULARY. 463 Pulgada, pool-gah'-da, s. f. inch. L. 63. Puntapie, pooii-tah-pe,-ai\ s. m., kick. L. 50. Puuta, poon'-ta, poiut, stitch. L. 50. Puntilla, poan-teel' -ya^ s. f., small point.— Do puntiUas, on tiptoe. L. 44. Punio, poon'-to^ s. m., point (of time or space), spot, place.— Al punto, at once. L. 51. Punluacion, poon-too-ah-the-dne\ s. f., punc- tuation. L. 63. Puutual, poon-too-aV ^ adj., punctual, exact, accurate. L. 63. Puntualidad, poon-too-ah-U-dath\ s. f., punctuality. L. 63. Purista, poo-reess' -ta^ s. m., purist. L. 36. a. Que, Jcai, rel. pron., that, which, who.— ;Que bueno ! how ^ood \—jQue desgracia ! what a misfortune!— §wo,rai-the'-bo, s. m., receipt. L. 63. Reciproco, rai-thl' -prb-ko, adj., reciprocal. L. 63. Recitar, rai-ihe-tar' , to recite. L. 64. Recomendacion, rai-ko -main-dah-tlil-dne' , s. f., recommendation. L. 60. Recomendar, rai-k^-main-dar' , to recom- mend. L. 64. Reconocer, rai-ko-no-thair' , to recognize, to acknowledge. L. 39. Recordar, rai-kore-dar' , to remember, to remind. L. 35. Recto, raik'-to, adj., right.- En angulos rectos, at right angles. X. 55. Rector, raik-tore', s. m., rector, director. L. 63. Recurrir, rai-koor-reer' , to recur, to have re- course. L. 50. Recurso, rai-koor'-so, s. m., recourse, re- source. L. 40. Reducir, rai-doo-theer' , to reduce. L. 54. Referir, rai-fai-reer', to refer, to relate. L. &4. Reflexivo, rai-flaik-sl'-vo, adj., reflective. L. 63. Reflexionar, rai-flaik-se-o-nar' , to reflect. L. 48. Reforma, rai-fore'-ma, s. f., reform, refor- mation. L. 63. Reformar, rai-f ore-mar' , to reform, to form anew, to discharge (from an employment or ofl^ce). L. 48. Refran, rai-Jran', s. m,, refrain, proverb. L. 63 and 65. Resralar, rai-gah-lar' , to regale, to present with, to make a present of. L. 63. Recralo, rai-gah'-lo, s. m., gift, present. L. 63, Regimen, ro,i' -M-main, s. m., regimen, gov- ernment, object (of verbs). L. 57. 464 VOCABULARY. Rcgimiento, raiM-mZ-ain'-to, s. m., regi- meut. L. 19. Regir, rai-heer\ to govern. L. 57. Regla, raig'-la, s. f., rule, ruler. L. 63. Rei,'ular, rai-goo-lar' , adj., re^^ular, tolera- ble, moderate, ordinary ;— adv., tolerably, middling ;— v., to regulate. L. 27, 67, and 01. Regularidad, rai-goo-lah-rl-dath\ b. f., regu- larity. L. 55. Regularizar, rai-goo-lah-rl-thar\ to regu- late. L. 48. Rehusar, rai-oo-sar'. to refuse. L. 61. Reina, rai-S'-na, e. f., queen. L. 63. Reinante, rai-l-nan'-tai^ pres. part., reign- ing. L. 38. Reinar, rai-l-nar\ to reign. L. 15. Reino, rai-l'-no, s. m., kingdom. L. 45. Reir, rcu-eer\ to laugh. L. 41. Relacion, rai-lah-the-om' , s. f., relation, ac- count, recital. L. 43. Relampago, rai-lam' -pah-go, e. m., flasli of lightning. L. 63. Relanipaguear, rai-lam-pah-gai-ar\ to lighten, L. 30. Rclalar, rai-lah-tar' , to relate. L. 45. Religion, rai-lS-M-one', s. f., religion. L. 35. Religioso, rai-H-hl-o'-so, adj., religious. L. 35. Reloj, rai-lo\ s. m., watch, clock. L. 28. Relojcro, rai-lo-hai'-ro, b. m., watchmaker. L. 63. Relucir, rai-loo-theer' , to sparkle, to glitter. —No es oro todo lo que reluce, allis not gold that glitters. L 65. Remcdiar, rai-mai-d^-ar\ to remedy. L. 64. Remedio, rai-mai'-dS-o, s. m., remedy. L. 53. Remendar, rai-main-dar\ to repair, to mend. L. 64. Remunerar, rai-moo-nai-rar\ to remuner- ate. L. 52. Rendir, rain-deer', to render, to subdue.— Rendivfie, to surrender. L. 39. ReRir, rain-yeer\ to quarrel, to dispute, to scold. L. 39. Reo, rai'-o, s. ra., culprit, offender. L. 53. Repartir, rai-par-teer, to divide. L. 58. Rcpasar, rai-pah-sar\ to repass, to reex- amine, to glance over again. L. 64. Repaso, rai-pah'-so, s. m., revision, act of going over anew. L. 61. Repente, rai-nain'-tai.—'De repenie, sudden- ly, on a sudden. L. 5"!. Repeticion, rai-pai-te-thl-dne' y b. f., repeti- tion, L. 63. Repetir, rai-jmi-teer', to repeat. L. 39. Reposar, rai-pO-8ar\ to repose, to rest. L. 39. Rcposo, rai-pd'-80, e. m,, repose, rest. L. 63. Rcprendcr, rai-prain-dair\ to reprehend, reprimand. L. 42. Roprescntar, rai-jrrai-min-tar' , to repre- sent, to make appear ; to perform (a part), to enact. L. 64. Rcprobar, rai-prb-bar\ to reprove, to up- braid. L. 60. Ropfiblica, rai-poo'-Mi-ka, b. f., republic. L. 35. I Repiitacion, ra?.-])oo-tah-thS-One\ 8. f., repa tation. L. 24. Resarcir, rai-sar-t7ieei'\ to indemnify, to compensate, to make up for. L. 59. Resentirse, rai-saiii-teer' -mi, to feel the effects (of), to resent. L. 59. Reafriado, raU>i-frl-ah' -do, s. m., cold (dis- ease caused by cold). L. 03. Resfriarse, rains-frl-ar' -sai. to catch cold. L. 63. Residente, rai-Hl-dain' -tai, adj. and papt Eart. (of Residlb), resident, residing. I. 38. Residir, raUl-deer\ to reside. L. 9. Resistir^ rai-seess-teer' , to resist. L. 51. Resolucion, rai-sd-loo-thl-dne' , b. f., resola- tion. L. 63. Resolver, rai-sole-vair', to solve, to resolve. L. 64. Respecta, raiss-paik'-ta. — En lo que respecta, with respect to. L. 51. Respetable, raiss-pai-iah'-blai, adj., re- spectable. L. 39. Respetar, raiss-pai-tar\ to respect. L. 36. Respeto, raies-pai'-to, b. m., respect, regard. L. 56. Responder, raiss-pone-dair' , to respond, to answer. L. 33. Respondon, raiss-pdne-done', adj., always ready to reply. L. 33. Respuesta, raiss-pivaiss'-ta, b. f., response, reply, answer. L. 30. Restante, raiss-tan' -tai, b. m., and pres. part, (of Restar), remainder, rest; re- maining. L. 46. Resultar, rai-sool-iar\ to result, to turn out, to occur. L. 43. Retirar, rai-tl-rar', to retire, to withdraw, to retreat. L. 63. Retrato, rai-trah'-to, B. m., portrait, like- ness. L. 17. Reumatismo, rai-oo-mah-teess'-mo, e. m., rheumatism. L. 63. Reunir, rai-oo-neer' , to reunite, to assem- ble. L. 52. Reves, rai-vaiss', b. m., back part, wrong side.- Al reves, on the contrary; upside down. L. 63. Revoltoso, rai-vdk-td'so, ac^j., tiubulent, rebellious. L. 44. Rey, rai'-d, s. m., king. L. 15. Reyezuelo, ral-mi-thwai'-lo, s. m. (dim. of Key), pettv kin";. L. 44. Ricacho, re-mh'-cho, adj., very rich. L. 49. Rico, r^'-ko, adj.. rich. L. 13. Ridiculez, rl-dl-koo-laith\ b. f, ridicule. L. 45. Ridiculizar, rl-di-koo-H-thar', to ridicule. L. 48. Ridiculo, rl-dl'-koo-lo, adj. and b. m., ridicu- lous, reticule (sort of lady's bas^kct). L. 5. Rigodon, rl-gd-ddne\ b. m., rigadoon, coun- try dance. L. 23. Rincon, reen-kSne', s. m., comer. L. 61. Rio, r2'-5, s. m.. river. L. 40. Riqueza, rl-kai'-tfia, s. f., riches. I:. 48. Rlsa. ri'-sa, s. f.. laugh, laughter. L. 48. Rivalizar, ri-mh-ti-lMr', to rival, to ^ie with. L. 51. Robar. rd-bar\ to rob, to steal. L. 4i. Rodar, rd-dar', to roll. L. 54. Rodear. ro-dai-nr\ to surround, to go round, to revolve. L. 64. Rodoado, rd-dai-ah'-do, adj. and past part, (of RoDEAR), surrounded. L. 58. VOCABULARY, 465 Rodilla, ro-ded'-ya, s. f., knee.— De roddlas, on one's knees. L. 59. . Rodriguez, ro-drl-gaith' , 8. m., Rodriguez. L 49 Rogar,'?o-f7«^', to pray, to beg of. L. 35. Rojo, ro'-luo, adj., red. L. 54. Romano, ro-7tiati'-m. adj., Roman L. 54. Romper, rome-vair\ to break, to tear.- Romper el silencio, to break the silence. Ropa,'/5'-iJa, s. f., clothes, wearing apparel. L. 28. Rosa, rb'-sa, s. f., rose. L. 63. Roto, 7-5'-i!o, irr. past part, (of Rompeb), broken. L. 53. Rubio, roo'-hl-o, adj., fair (of the complex- ion), ruddy. L. 63. Ruido, roo-e'-do^ s. m., noise. L. 46. Rum, roo-een\ adj., mean, churlish. L. 63. Ruindad, roo-een-dath\ s. f., meanness, churlishness. L. 48. Ruisenor, roo-l-saln-yore\ s. m,, nightin- gale. L. 63. R'.imor, roo-more', s. m., rumor. L. 54. Rutina, roo-tl'-na, s. f., routine. L. 63. S. Sabado, sah'-bah-do, s. m., Saturday. L. 9. Saber, sak-dair', to know, to have knowl- edge of, to hear from ; to savor, to taste ; —8. m., learning, knowledge. L. 42 and 21. Sabio, sah'-bl-o, adj., wise, sage, learned. L. 21. Sabor, sah-bore', s. m., savor, taste.— A su saoor, at his pleasure, taste. L. 62 and 66. Sacacorchos, sah-kah-kore'-choce, s. m., corkscrew. L. 64. Sacamuelas, sah-kah-mwai' -lass^ s. m., tooth-drawer, dentist. L. 50. Sacar, sah-kar', to take or draw out, to pull out. L. 50 and 66. Saco, mh'-ko, s. m., sack, bag. L. 61. Sacudir, sah-koo-deer\ to shake off, to shake. L. 51. Sal, s. f., salt, wit. L. .5.5. Saldo, sal' -do, e. m., balance (of accounts, &c.). L. 64. Salida, sah-ld'-da, s. f., going out, departure, start. L. 63. Saliente, sah-le-ain'-tai, adj. and pres. part. (of Salir), projecting, salient. L. 38. Salir, sah-leer', to go or come out, to set out, to leave, to start, to go out, to end or finish, to rise (said of the sun, &c.) : to turn out, to turn w(i.—Sali6 a su padre, he resembled his father. L. 20. Salon, sah-loiie\ s. m., saloon, large hall. L. 58. Saltar, sal-tar\ to jump, to leap, to bound, to spring. L. 58. Salto, $al'-(o, s. m., leap, jump, bound, spring. L. 59. Salud, sah-looth' s. f., health.— A '[^salud de las seiioras, to the good health of the ladies. L. 25. Saludar, sah-loo-dar\ to salute. L. 64. Sanchez, san' -chaith, s. m., Spanish family name, signifying son of Sancho. L, 49. Sansrc, san'-f/rai, s. f., blood. L. 64. SantiScar, sah-td-jf?-kar\ to sanctify. L. 45. 20* Santo, san'-to, adj., holy, saintly.— /Santo y bueno, well ana good. L. 64. Sastre, sass'-trai, a. m., tailor. L. 11. feastreria, sa^s-Li ai-re' -a, s. 1"., tailor's shop. Satirico, sah-ie' -rl-ko, adj., satirical. L. 85. Satisfacer, sah-teess-jati-UMtr', to saiisly. L. 42. Satisiecho, sah-teess-fai' -clw, adj. and past part, (of bATisFACEB), satisued. L. 4-i and 52. „ . ^ Sayo, sah'-yo, s. m., sort of loose coat or jacket. L. 65. Sazonar, sah-iho-nar\ to season. L. 62. Se saL pers. pron. (instead of Le, les, to him to her, to them). L. 26.— Pron. (used to form the passive voice). L. 32.— Ke- flective pron. L. 33.-lmper8. pron., we, they pe»Pl«' Ac-'Se dice, they say.->I^ cree ' it is believed. L. 36. Se prep., used as a prefix m composition. L. 50. "' Secreto, mi-krai'-to, s. m., secret, secrecy. Sed" saith, s. f., thirst.-Tener sed, to be thirsty. L. 25. Seda. sai'-da, s. f., silk. L. 5. Seguir, sai-gheer\ to follow; to continue. L. 39. Segun, sai-goon\ prep., accordinc: to.— 513- gun y como, just as. L. 40 and 66. Segundo, sai-goon'-do, ord. adj. and s. m., second. L. 15 and 23. Seguro, mi-goo' -ro. adi., sure, secure. L. 43. Seis, sai'-eess, num. adj., six. L. 14. Seiscientos, sai-eests-the-ain'-toce, num. adj., six hundred. L. 14. Semana, sai-mah'-na. s. f , week. L. 8. Semblante, saim-Uan' -tat s. m-. counte- nance, face, aspect, appearance, look. L. Sentar, min-lar\ to set down, to enter (in a book) ; to fit, to become. L. 34. Sentencia, sain-tain'-tM-a, s. f., sentence, phrase. L. 43. Sentido, sain-t^'-do, s. m., sense. L. 65. Sentir, sain-teer', to feel; to be sorry for. L. 38. Sefior. sain-yore', s. m.. Lord, sir, Mr.— Muy senor mio, my dear sir. L. 1. Senora, sain-yo'-ra, s. f., lady, madam., Mrs. L. 2. Seiiorita, sain-yd-rd'-fa, s. f., young lady, miss. L. 2. Senorito, sain-j/o-r^'-fo, s. m., young gentle- man, sir (used generally by servants), Mr. L. 2. Septimo, saip'-tS-mo, ord. adj., seventh. L. 15. Ser, sair, to be, to exist. (Not to be con- founded with EsTAR, which see.) L. 11 and 22. Ser, s. m., bdnpi-, existence. L. ,54. Servidor. sair-i:?-dbre' , s. m., servant.— >Si?r- vidor de V., your servant. L. P^. Servir, sair-veer'. to serve, to oblige, to do a ^Qr\\ce.—Serrirse. to be good enough, kind enough, to please.— 5f?T^<"' V. to- mar asiento, please to take a ^eQ,t.—Ser' virf^e de, to use. L. 39. Sepenta, sai-frtin'-ta, num. adj.. sixty. L. 14. Setenta, sai-tain'-ta, num. adj., eeventr. L. 14. 466 VOCABULARY Setecientoe, sai-tai-tM-ain'-tdce, num. adj., Bcveu liuudred. L. 14, Setiembre, nai-le-aim'-Orai, s. m., Septem- ber. L. HA. Sexo, sailc'-sOy s. m., sex.— El bello sexo, the fair sex. L. 5». Sexto, aaiks'-tOy ord. adj. and s. m., sixth. L. 15. Si, nee, adv., yes. L. 1. Si, iiidet. prun., self, one's self.— Habl6 para «{, he spoke to himtself. L. 26. Si, coiij., il; OMt.—tii no viene, hombre, but he is not comin<^, my dear lellow. L. Siempre, si-aim' -prai^ adv., always. — Por sieinpre 'yjunuHy lor ever and ever. L. 25. Siecita, se-ui^n'-ta, b. 1"., Bieata, afternoon nap. L. m. Siete, sd-ai'-iai, num. adj., seven. L. 14. Siglo, seeg'-lo, s. m., century. L. 52. Signiticado, seeg-m-J'd-ka/i'-Uo, s. m., signi- lication, meaning. L. 49. Siguilicar, seeg-ni-/S-kar'. to signify. L. 64. Silaba, si'-lah-ba, s. f., syllable. L. 63. Silencio, sS-lain'-thS-o, s. m., silence. L. 65. Silencioso, s?-/awi^/i2-i/'-so, adj., silent. L. 04. Silla, fteel'-ya, s. f., chair. L. 14. Simpatizar, s.ee7n-pah4S- thar\ to sympa- thize. L. .51. Simple, seem'-p?al, adj., simple, single; simple, silly. L. 43. Sin, f:eer), prep., without.— -Sin embargo, notwithsfandinir, howcver.—Sin que ni para que, without any cause or reason. L. 10. Sinceridad, seen-thai-rl-dath' , s. f., sinceri- ty. L. 45. Siricero. aeen-thai'-m. adj.. sincere. L. 40. Singular, seev-noolar' . adj.. singular. L. .57. Sine, fl'-no. conj., but: if not.— No es el. nino su hormano, it is not he, but his brother. I.. 3. Sin6nimo, sl-nO' -nl-mo, s. m., synonyme. L. 65. Sinrazon, aeenrdh-thdne'^ b. f., wrong, in- justice. L. .50. Siquiera, sZ-kl-ai'-ra, conj., even, at least. L. 40. Sitio. «2'-/2-5, s. m., place, pos^ition, siege. L. 68. Situado, si-too-ah'-do, past. part, of Situab. L. 20. P.!tnar, f'i-tco-ar' , to situate. L. 64. So, .»<5. prep., under.— *Sl9 pretesto de, under pretext of. L. 41 . Sobrar, sd-brar', to be over and above, to have more of any thing than one needs. L. 64. Sobre. nd'-hrai^ prep., upon, above, over, about.— Vino unf/re las ocho, he came fibout pile, 8. m., sun. L. 46. Solas (A;, so'-lass, all alone. L. 64. Soldado, HoLe-dak' -dOy b. m., soldier. L. 52. Soledad, so-lai-datk' , s, f., solitude, loneli- ness. L. 63. Soiemne, so-laim'-nai, adj., eolenin; thor- ough, downright. L. 61. Soler, 6o-lair\ lo be accustomed to, to be wont. L. 41. Solicitar, no-ll-thl-tar' ^ to solicit. L. 47. Soliloyuio, bO-ll-io'-m-Oy s. m., soliloquy. L. 65. Solo, hO'-Io^ adj., alone;— adv., only. L. 25. Soitar, sole-tar', to untie, to loose, to liber- ate, to let go, to let free. L. 64. Soltero, soktai'-ro, s. m., bachelor, un- married man. L. 51. Sombra, saim'-bra, s. f., shade, shadow L. 58. Sombrero, sdme-brai'-ro, s. m., hat. L. 10. Son, sOne, s. m., sound.— bin ton y sin son^ without rhyme or reason. L. 47. Sonar, sd-ruir', to sound. L. 45. Souido, so-nd'-do, s. m., sound. L. 47. Soureirse, sdne-rai-eer'-sai, to smile. L. 64. Sonrisa, sone-re'-sa, s. f., smile. L. .54. Sonrojar, sone-ro-har' , to malie one blush. L. W. Sofiar, sdne-yar'. to dream. L. 35. Sopa, sd'-pa, s. r., soup. L. 44. Sopeton, 85-pai-(dne' . — De sopeton, nnez pectedly. L. 44. Soplar, sd-plar\ to blow ; to prompt. L. 64. Sordo, H/re'-do. adj., deaf. L. 64. Sorprender, sore-prain-dair' , to surprise. L. 42. Sorpresa. adre-prai'-sa, b. f., surprise. L. 51. Sospcchar, fai-char' , to suspect. L. 60. Su. Roo, poss. adj., his, her, its, their. L.5. Sub, soch, Latin prep, used in Spanish as a prefix only. L. 50. Subida, soo-bd-da, s. f., rising, rise: ascent. L. m. Subir, Koo-beer', to eo or come up, to ascend, to mount, to rise. L. .50. Subjuntivo, soob-hoon-d'-vo. adj., subjunc- tive. L. 43. ' •-- ' Suceder, soo-thaf-dair'. to happen, to take place, to succeed (come after). L. 45. Sucesivo, soo-fhai-sl'-vo.— En lo sucesivo, in future. L. 32. Sucio, soo'-th^-d, adj.. diriy. L. 64. Sud, sood, 8. m., south. L. 26. Suegra, swai'-gra, s. f., mother-in-law. L. 63. Suegro, sttai'-gro, 8. m., fether-in-Iaw. L. m. Suela, fiimi'-Ia, s. f., sole. L. 61. Suelo, fncai'-lo, b. m., ground, floor, soil. Snelto, ftivail'-fo, adj. and past part, (of SoT.TAR), loose, free.— A rienda mielta, with loose rein. L. 64. Supflo, sirain'-yo, s. m.. sleep, dream.— Te- ner siiefw, to be sleepy. L. 25. Suerte. swair'-tai, s. f.."lnck, chance, sort Echar tn/crffiR, to cast lots. L. 58. Snflcionte, .ooa-fH-l/if-oin'-fai, adj., sufBcient. L. 49. Suft-ir, f!oo-fTver'. to suffer, to bear M-lth, to undergo. L. (V4. Sugeto, soo-fiai'-fo, 8. m.. Individual, pe^ eon ; topic, matter, subject. L. 27. VOCABULARY 467 Sujeto, soo-hai'-to, adj. and past part, (of buJETAR), subject ; subjected, tied, fast- ened. L. 65. Suma, soo'-ma, s. m., sum.— En mma^ in short. L. 68 and 64. Superior, soo-pai-rl-ore' ^ adj., superior. L. iil. Superlativo, soo-pair-lah-te'-vo, adj., super- lative. L. 5U. Supersticioso, soo-pairss-te-the-o'-so, adj., su- perstitious. L. 45. Suplicar, soo-pll-kar\ to supplicate, to beg, to crave. L. 64. Suponer, soo-pd-nair\ to suppose. L. 64. Supremo, soo-prai'-mo, adj., supreme, high- est, most excellent. L. 21. Supuesto, soo-pwaiss'-to, past part, of Supo- ner.— For supuestx)^ of course. L. 64. Sur. (See Sud.) L. 66. Sus ! sooce, inter., holla ! L. 46. Suspirar, sooce-pe-rar\ to sigh. L. 64. Sustancia, sooce-iati'-the-a, s. f., substance. L. 63. Sustantivo, sooce-tan-te'-vo, s. m. and adj., substantive. L. 64. Sustentar, sooce-tain-tar' , to sustain. L. 65. Sutil, soo-ied', adj., subtle, thin, slender. L. 64. Sutileza, soo-te-lai'-tha, s. f., subtlety, cun- ning, thinness, slendemess. L. 63. Suyo, soo'-yo, his, hers, its, theirs, one's. L. 13. T. Tabaco, tah^ah'-Tco, s. m., tobacco, cigar. L. 42. Tablero. tah-blai'-ro, s. m., a smooth board. — TaUero de ajedrez, chess-board. L. 51. Tacto. tak'-to, s. m., the sense of touch. L. 65. Tal, adi.. such, ^o.— Tal cital, middling, so ■^o.— Tal vez. perhaps. L. 32. Talento, tah-lain'-to, s. m., talent, abilities. L. 65- , , Tambien, tam-M-ain', conj. and adv., also, as well, morever. L. 29. Tampoco, tam-po'-ko, adv., neither, not either, nor. L. 29. Tan, adv., so, so much, as, as much. L. 20. Tanto, fan'-fo. adj., so, in such a manner.— Tanto mejor, so much the better.— For lo tanto, therefore. L. 20. Tapar, tah-par', to cover up, to stop up (with a cover). L. 65. Tapete, iah-pai'-tai, s. m., table-cover. L. Tardar, tar-dar', to delay, to put off. L. 60. Tarde, tar'-dai, s. f , afternoon ;— adv., late. — Algo tarde, rather late. L. 20. TsLxaSi^tah'-rai-a, s. f., task. L. 58. Tarjeta, tar-hai'-ta, s. f , card, visiting card. L. 64. Tate ! tah'-tai, inter., easy ! take care ! L. 4<>. Taza, tah'-tha, s. f., cup. L. 55. To, tai, 8. m., tea. L. 55. Te, pron., thee, to thee. L. 26. Teatro, tai-ah'-tro, s. m., theatre. L. 17. Teja, tai'-ha, e. f., tile.— De tejas abajo, hu- manly spealdnc:. L. 61. Telegrafico, tai-lai-grah'-fl-lco, adj., tele- graph. L. 65. Telegrafo, tai-lai'-grah-fo, b. m., telegraph. L. 46. Tema, tai'-ma^ s. m., theme, exercise; — s. f , dispute, contention. L. 57. Temer, tai-mair' , to fear. L. 28. Temerario, tai-mai-rali'-re-o, adj., rash, in- considerate. L. 54. Temor, tai-more' .—Fov temor de, for fear of. L. 42. Temprano, taim-prah'-no, adv., early, soon. L. 20. Tenacidad, tai-nah-thl-dath\ e. f., tenacity.' L. 65. Tenedor, tai-nai-dore\ s. m., fork. L. 65. Tener, tai-nair\ to have, to hold; to be, to take (place).— Te/ier hambre, frio, sed, to be hungry, cold, thirsty.— Tener lugar, to take place.— Tener que hacer, to have something to do.— Yo tengo para mi, it is my opinion.— Tew(/a V. la bondad de de- cirme, be good enough to tell me. L. 10. Tentacion, tain-tah-thl-one', s. m., tempta- tion. L. 61. Tefiir, tain-yeer', to dye. L. 39. Teoria, tai-o-re'-a, s. f,, theory. L. 23. Tercero, tair-thai'-ro, ord. adj., third. L. 15. Tercio, tair'-tTil-o, s. m., third, third part. L. 40. Terminacion, tair-nie-nah-the-one' , s. f., ter- mination. L. 49. Terminante, tair'-ml-nan'-tai^ aaj., conclu- sive. L. 65. Terminar, tair-me-nar' , to terminate. L. 65. ^ . ^. Termino, tair'-me-no, s. m., termination, end ; term. L. 65. Termometro, tair-mo'-mai-tro, s. m., ther- mometer. L. 60. Terrenal, tair-rai-nal\ adj., terrestrial. L. 49. Terreno, tair-rai'-no, s. m., ground. L. 55. Terrible, tazr-re'-blai, adj., terrible. L. 53. Terron, tair-rone\ s. m., turned up earth. L. 49. Terroso, tair-ro'-so, adj., terreous, earthy. L. 49. Terrestre, tair-raiss' -trai, adj., terrestrial, earthly. L.49. Tertulia, tair-too'-le-a, s. f., party. L. 39. Tl, te, pron., thee (governed by a prep.). L.26. Tiempo, tl-aim'-po, s.m., time, weather.— Con el tiewpo, in the course of time. L. 23 Tienda, te-ain'-da, s. f., store, shop. L. 64. Tierra, td-air'-ra, s. f., earth, land, native soil. L. 45. ^ T C4 Tijeras, ie-hai'-ras, s. f. pi., scissors. L. 64. Tinta, i;ee??/-to, s. f, ink. L. 5. Tintero, teen-tai'-ro, s. m., inkstand.-DeJ jaree algo en el tintero, to forget to eay something. L. 4. ,_-..,„„\ t Tinto, teen'-tx), adj., red (said of wines), h. Tio, i!2'-o, s.m., uncle. L. 65. Tirabuzon, tl-rah-boo-thone' , s. m., cork- screw. L. 65, • „i T Tiranico, tl-rah' -nl-ko, adj., tyrannical. L,. Tirar t:^-rar', to throw, to cast, to take (speaking of a road).-T?re V. por aqm, take this way. L. 54. 468 VOCABULARY, Tiro, ti'-ro^ s. m., throw, cast. — A tiro de pistola, within a pistol-shot. L. 53. Titulo, tl'-too-lo, B. m., title. L. 55. Tocante a, tu-kan'-tai a, prep., concern- in;?, relatin;,' to, touching. L. 38. Tocar, to-kar', to touch, to play (on an in- strument). L. 15. Todavia, W-dah-ve'-a., adv., yet, still. L. 25. Todo, to' -do, adj., aW.— Todos loa diaa, every day.— Del todo, entirely.— Con todo, how- ever, notwithstanding. L. 11. Todo, s. m., the whole. L. 61. Tolerar, tO-lai-rar\ to tolerate. L. 65. Toma! to' -ma, inter., indeed! L. 45. Tomar, td-mar', to take. L. 14. Tomo, to' -mo, s. m., volume.— Un libro de tres tomx)s, a book in three volumes. L. 15. Toncl, to-naW, s. m., cask, barrel. L. 60. Tonto, tdne'-to. adj., foolish.— A tontas y a locas, at random. L. GO. Tontera, tone-tai'-ra, s. f., foolish action. L. 00. Toque, to'-kai, s. ra., roll (of a drum), ring- ing (of bells).— Ahi esta el toque, that is where the difficulty lies. L. 65. Torero, td-rai'-ro, s. m., bull-fighter. L. 53. Tornar, tore-nar', to return, to begin anew. L. 65. Torno, t5re'-no, s. m., lathe.— En tomo, round about. L. 65. Toro, t5'-ro, s. m., bull. L. 53. Tos, toce, B. f., cough. L. (55. Trabajador, trah-bah-hah-ddre' , adj. and s. m., hardworking, worker. L. 17. Trabajar, trah-baJi-har' , to work, to labor. L. 17. Trabajo, trah-bah'-ho, s. m., work, labor, occupation. L. 47. Traauccion, trah-dook-thl-5ne\ s. f., trans- lation. L. 6t. Traducir, trah-doo-theer\ to translate. L. 40. Traer, trah-air', to bring, to carry, to wear. L. 42. Tragar, trah-gar', to swallow. L. 65. Tragedia, trdh-hai' -dl-a, s. f., tragedy. L. 52. Tragico, trah'-M-ko, adj., tragic. L. 35. Trago, trah'-go, s. m., draught, drink.— Echar un trago, to take a dram. L. 59. Traje, trah'-hdi, b. m., dress, costume. L. 54. Trampa, tram' -pa, s. f., trap, swindle.— Caer en la trampa, to fall into the snare. L. 64. Trampeais tram-pai-ar' , to swindle, to im- pose upon. L. 65. Trampoao, tram-j^'-so, adj., deceitful, swindling;— 8. m., cheat, swindler. L. 65. Tranqullidad, fran-kS-K-dath', s. f., tran- quillity, peace, quietness. L. 46 Tranqullizar, tran-kUMhar' , to tranquil- lize. L. 65. * Tranquilo, tran-kl'-lo, adj., tranquil, quiet, peaceful. L. 60. ^ ' i Trapo, trah'.po. s' m., rag. L. 64 rras, prep., behind, after. L. 41. Xrascnrao. tnm-koor'-w, b. m., course, pro- cess (of time). L. 51. Trasnochar, frass-nd-ckar', to sit up all night. L. 05. ^ Trasquilar, trass-k^-lar', to shear (sheep).— Ir por lana y volvcr tmsquilado, the biter bit. L. 05. Trastienda, trass-iS-ain'-da, b. f., back shop. L. 01. Tratado, trah-tah'-do, s. m., treatise, treaty. L. 40. Tratante, trah-tan' -tai, b. m., dealer. L. 38. Tratar, trah-tar', to treat, to have inter- course or relations with, to trade, to deal, to traffic, to try. L. 32. Trato, trah'-to, s. ni., treatment, dealings, intercourse. L. 65. Traves, trah-vaiss', prep.— Al traves de, through. L. 65. Travesura, trah-vai-soo'-ra, s. f., trick, mis- chief, naughtiness. L. 53. Travieso, trah-ve-ai'-so, adj., tricky, naugh- ty, mischievous. L. 52. Traza, trah'-tha, s. f., trace.— Tener buena traza, to look well. L. 64. Trece, trai'-thai, num. adj., thirteen. L. 14. Treinta, trai-een'-ta, num. adj., thirty. L. 14. Tres, traiss, num. adj., three. L. 14. Tribunal, tre-boo-nal' , s. m., tribunal, court of justice. L. 53. Trigo, tre'-go, s. m., wheat. L. 65. Triguefio, trl-gaiii' -yo, adj., brown, dark (complexion). L. 05. Trinchar, treen-cJiai'', to cut up, to carve. L. 58. Trineo, trl-nai'-d, s. m., sleigh. L. 65. Trinidad, irhriS-dath', s. f.. Trinity. L. 21. Triptongo, treep-tdne'-go, s. m., triphthong. L. 57. Triple, treess'-tai, adj., sad, mournful, dull. L. 21. Tristeza, treess-tai'-tha, s. f., sadness, dul- ness. L. 41. Tronar, tro-nar', to thunder. L. 30. Tropa, tro'-pa, s. f., troop. L. 40. Trueco, trwai'-ko, s. m., barter, exchange. —A trueco, provided that. L. 61. Tnieno, trwai'-no, b. m., thunder, clap of thunder. L. 30. Trueque. (See TRtrECO.) L. 48. Tu, too, pers. pron., thou ;— poss. adj.,' thy. L. 1. Tuerto, twair'-to, a4)., blind of one eye. L. 65. Tutear, too-tai-ar', to speak familiarly (In the second person singular). L. r>5. Tuteo, ioo-tai'-d. s. m., thoning. L. 65. Tuyo, too'-yo, poss. pron., thine. L. 13. U. 00. conj., used instead of p, before words beginninir with o or ho. L. 8. Ff! w/; inter.. u?h! L. 46. Ultimo, ool'-f7>-mo. adi., last.— Por {tlllmo at last, flnally. L. 61. Un. ooTt. adj. and indef. art., one. a (always used before, never nfler. words). L. 4. Una. oo'-nn. fern, of Uno. which see. L. .'5. Universidad. on-n^-vnir-s^-dafh', a. f., uni- versitv. L. .'>5. Uno. oo'-no. indof. art. and adj., a, one.— Un/) i\ ■uno. one bv one. L. 14. Ufla. oon'-ya. s. f.. flnger-nnil. L. 33. Usar, oo-mr', to use. L. 02. VOCABULARY, 469 TJso, oo'-so, s. m.j use. L. 61. TJsted, coss-tait/i\ s. m. and f., you. (Con- traction of VuBSTRA MERCKD, your Wor- ship.) L. 1. TJtil, co'-ted^ adj., useful. L. 13. Uva, oo'-va^ s. f., grape. L. 40. Vaca, vah'-ka, s. f., cow, beef. L. 55. Vacio, vah-the'-o, adj., empty. L. 58. Valencia, vah-lain'-the-a, s. f., Valencia, L. 55. Valentla, vah-lain-ie'-a, s. f., valor, bravery. L. 54. Valer, vah-lair\ to be worth, to be good for.— Mas vcUe tarde que nuuca, better late than never. — Vulgame DiosI bless met L. 41. Valiente, vah-le-ain'-tai, adj., valiant, brave. L. 47. Valor, vah-ldre\ s. m., valor, bravery; worth, value. L. 25. Vals, valce, s. m., waltz. L. 23. Vamos ! vah'-moce, inter., come 1 come sxloncr I L. 46. Vapor, vah-pore\ s. m., steam, steamboat, steamer. L. 37. Vara, vah'-ra. s. f., rod ; yard measure. L. 47. Vario, vah'-re-o, adj., various, variable;— pi., several. L. 43. Varon, vah-rdp.^\ s. m., man, male human being. L. 62. Vascongadas, (Las Provincias), vass-kone- gah'-dass, s. f. pi., the three Spanish pro- vinces of Alava, Guipuzcoa, and Biscay. L. 55. Vascuence, vass-kwain'-thai, s. m., the Bis- cayan dialect. L. 55. Vasija, vah-se'-ha^ s. f., cask for liquors. L. 52. Vaso, vah'-so, s. m., vase, glass (for drink- ing), tumbler. L. 61. Vaya ! vah'-ya, inter., come now I indeed I L. 42. Vecino, vai-thl'-no, s. m., neighbor. L. 28. Veinte, vai'-een-tai, num. adj., twenty. L. 14. Vela, vai'-la, s. f., sail (of a ship), candle. L..53. Veneer, vain-thair\ to vanquish, to over- come, to conquer. L. 59. Vender. rain-dair\ to sell. L. 6. Venlr. rai-neer', to come ; to fit, to suit.— Venir i\ pelo, to be just the thing.— No hay mal que por bienno mnqa. it's an ill wind that blows trood to nobody. L. 18. Ventaja, vain-tah'ha, s. f., advantage. L. 43. Ventana. vain-tah'-na. s. f., window. L. 28. Ver, vair, to see. to look. — A vr. let us 9.ee.— Verse negro, to be in great distress, L. 29. Verano, vai-rah'-vo. s. m.. summer. L. 24. Verbal, vair-hnl\ adj., verbal. L. 49. Verbo. vair'-ho, s. m., verb. L. 41. Verdad, rnir-dath'. s. f, truth.— A la ver- dad. truly : indeed. L. 43. Verdaderamente. vair-dah-dat-rah-main'- frii, adv.. trulv. veritablv. I-. s^. Verde, valr'-dai, adj, green. L. 54. Verdura, vair-doo'-ra., s, f., verdure; vegeta- bles. L. 34. Vergiienza, vair-gwain' -tha^ s. f., shame, — Teuer vergiienza., to be ashamed. L. 25. Version, vair-se-dne\ s. f., version. L. 64, Verso, vair'-so, s. m,, verse; line of poetry, L, 52. Vestido, vaiss-te'-do, s. m,, dress, wearing apparel. L. 39. Vestir, vaiss-teer\ to dress, to clothe. L. 25, Vez, vaith, s. f., time.— Una vez, once.— Dos veces, twice. — En vez de, instead of, — llacer las veces de, to act as, serve as. — Tal vez, perhaps.— A mi vez, in my turn. —A veccfi, at times. L. 25. Viajar, ve-ah-liar', to travel. L. 21. Vicerector, ve-tfiai-raik-tore' , s. m., vice- rector. L. 50. Vice versa, ve'-thai vair'-sa, vice versa. L. 47. Vicio, v^'-i/iS-o, s. m., vice. L. 41. Victoria, veek-to'-re-a, s. f., victory. L. 46. Vida, ve'-da, s. f., life. L. 50. Vicjo, ve-ai'-ho, adj., old. L. 13. Viena, ve-ai'-na, s. f., Vienna. L. 12. Vieuto, ve-ain'-to, s. m., wind. L. 30. Viernes, ve-air'-naiss, s. m., Friday.— Vier- nes santo. Good Friday. L. 9. Viga, ve'-ga, s. f., beam. L. 65. Villadiego, veel-rjah-de-ai' -go, s. m.— Tomar las de Villadiego, to run away ; to take to one's heels. L. 50. Vinacho, ve-nah'-cho, s. m., bad wine. L. 49. Vino, ve'-no, s. m., wine. L. 7. Violado, ve-o-lah'-do, s. m. and adj., violet (color). L. 54. Violeta, ve-o-lai'-ta, s. f., violet. L. 54. Violin, vl-o-Uen', s. m., violin. L. 15. Violinista, ve-o-ll-neess'-ta, s. m., violinist. L. 36. Virtud, veer-tooth', s. f., virtue.— En vlrtud de, by virtue of. L. 41. Visita, ve-se'-ta, s. f., visit. L. 28. Visitar, ve-sd-iar', to visit ; to examine. L. 52. Vista, veess'-ta, s. f., view, sight. -A vista, at sight.— Perder de vista, to lose sight of. L. 29 and 51. Visto, veess'-to, past part, (of Vek), seen, L. 52. Vistoso, veess-to'-so, adj., conspicuout showy L. 54. Viva! ve'-va, inter., long live! hurrah 1 huzza ! L. 46. Vivionte, ve-t^-ain'-tai, s. ra. andpres. part., living bein.T; living, animated. L. 38. Vivir, vl-reer'. \<^ live. L. 9. Vivo, ve'-vo, adj., alive, lively, sprightly. L. 90. Vizcaino, ree^'h-l-n'h-l'-no, s. m. and adj., Biscayan. L. t^'S. Vizcnva. rMh-i-nh'-iin. s. f. F-iacay. L. .^.'>. Vocabulario. ro-lmh-boo-lah'-rl-d, s. m., vo- cabulary. L. f-^. Vocal. vo-kaV, adj. and s. m., vocal ; vowel. L. .58. Volar, vo-lnr'. to fly. L. 45. Voliimpn, vo-Joo'-main. s. m., volume. L. 15. Voluntad. rd-lom-ta.tJi' . s. f.. will. L. 45. Volver, vole-^'air', to come or ^o 'hfick. to return, to do atrain. to turn.— Fo'rvr on sf, to recover one's senees.— Ferrer Alas 470 VOCABULARY, andadas, to retam to one's old habits. L. 36. VoB, voce, pers. pron., you. L. 66. Vosotros, vO-so'-trOce, pers. prou., you, ye. L. 1. Voz, vdth, 8. f., voice; word; rumor; re- port.— Corre la voz que . . . , it is rumored that . . . L. 58. Vuelta, vwaU'-ta, s. f., return, turn, trip.— A vuella de correo, by return mail.— Dar una vuelta, to take a walk.— Dar la vv^lta al parque, to go round the park. L. 46. Vuelto, vwaU'-to, past part, (of Volvek), returned. L. 52. Vuestro, vwaiss'-tro, poss. adj., your. L. 13. Vulgar, vool-gar', adj., vulgar. L. 59. Y. Y, e, conj., and. L. 3. Ya, adv., already, yet; eometimes.- Fo lo lino, ya lo otro, sometimes one, some- times the other. L. 25 and 37. Yaccr, yah-thair\ to lie. L. 41. Ycrba, yair'-ba, s. f., herb, grass. L. 60. Yemo, yaiT'Tio^ s. m., son-iu-law. L. 60. Yo, pers. pron., l.—To mismo, I my Belt L. 1. Yugo, yoo'-go, b. m., yoke. L. 64. Z. Zafarse, thah-far' -sai, to escape, to get rid Zaga, thah'-ga, s. f., rear.-No irlc a uno en zaga, not to be liar behind any ont-, L. 44. shoo Zapateria, thah-vah tai-il'-a, b. f., trade ; shoemaker's thop. L. 17. Zapatero, thahjiuh-lai'-io, s. m., shoe- maker. L. 8. Zapato, thah-pah' -to, s. m., shoe. L. 10. Zape! thah' pai, inter., used to frighten away the cats ; God forbid I L. 46. Zas I zas 1 thass, inter., used to imitate the sound of repeated knocks or blows. L. 62. Zeca en Mcca (Andar de), thai'-la ain mai'-ka, to wander about from pillar to post. L. 61. Zutano, thw-tah'-no, s. m., such a one. X.. 55. Ollendorff's New Method of Learning Languages. s:E>.A.isrisia:. A NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, Write, and Speak the Spauish Language, after the System of OllenJ dorff. By Mno. Velazquez and T. Simonne. 1 vol., 12mo. 500 pages. Price, $1.30. KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN THE NEW METHOD of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff. By M. Velazquez and T. Simonne. 1 vol., 12mo. 174 pages. Price, 85 cents. NUEVO MfiTODO PARA APRENDER 1 LEER, Hablar, y Escribir el espanol, segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Para uso de los Alemane. Arreglado por D. H. Wrage y H. M. Mon- santo. (Neue Methode die Spanische Sprache lesen, sprechen und schreiben zu lernen, nach dem OUendoiff schen System.) 1 vol., 12mo. Price, $1.50. CLAVE DEL ANTERIOR. Price, $1.00. M£tODO para APRENDER X LEER, ESCRIBIR y Hablar el Ingles, segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Por Ramon Palenzuela y Juan de la C. (Darrefio. Un tomo de 45*7 paginas, en 12°. Price, $1.50. CLAVE DE LOS EJERCICIOS DEL M^TODO Para aprender a Leer, Escribir y Ha]3lar el Ingles segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Por Ramon Palenzuela y Juan de la C. Carreuo. Un tomo de 111 paginas, en 12°. Price, $1.00. UN M£T0D0 para APRENDER 1 LEER, ES- cribir y Hablar el Frances segun el Sistema de Ollendorflf. Por Teo- doro Simonn^. Un tomo de 341 paginas, en 12°. Price, $1.50. CLAVE DE LOS EJERCICIOS DEL M^TODO Para aprender a Leer, Escribir y Hablar el Frances segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Por Teodoro Simonne. Un tomo de 80 paginas, en 12°. Price, $1.00. D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, 1, 3, & 5 Bond Street, N. Y. SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. SPANISH. AHN. A New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Language, after the System of F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy and Professor at the College of Neuss. 12mo. 85 cents. Key to Spanish Grammar. 25 cents. BUTLER. The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-Book: An Easy and Agreeable Method of acquiring a Speaking Knowledge of the Spanish Language. By Francis Butler. 293 pagea 18mo. 50 cents. DE BELEM. The Spanish Phrase-Book; or, Key to Spanish Con- versation : containing the Chief Idioms of the Spanish Language, with the Conjugations of the Auxihary and the Regular Verbs — on the Plan of the late Abb6 Bossuet. By E. M. de Belem. 88 pages. 18mo. 30 cents. DE TOR NOB. The Combined Spanish Method. A New, Prac- tical, and Theoretical System of Learning the Castilian Language, embracing the most advantageous Features of the bpst known Methods. With a Pronouncing Vocabulary. 12mo. $1.25. y\.^ Key to the Combined Spanish* Method. 75 cents. DE VERE. Grammar of the Spanish Language, with a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By Schele de Verb. 12mo. $1.00. \ DICTIONARY. See Meadows and VelXzqukz. MEADOWS'S Spanish-English and English-Spunish Dictionary. 18rao. Half roan, $2.20. MORALES. Progressive Spanish Reader, with an Analytical 8tudy of the Spanish Language. By Augustin Jose Morales, A. M. H. M., Professor of the Spanish Language in the New York Free Academy. 886 pages. 12mo. $1.25. School and College Text-Books. — (Continued.) OLLENDORFF. A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff. By Mariano Velazquez and T. Simonne. 12mo. $1.00. Key to the Exercises in the New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff By M. Velazquez and T. Simonne. Hi pages. 12mo. 75 cts. TOLON. The Elementary Spanish Reader and Translator. With Spanish and English Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the Lessons. By Miguel T. Tolon. 12mo. 15 cents. VELAZQUEZ. New Spanish Reader; consisting of Extracts from the Works of the most approved Authors, in Proee and Verse, arranged in progressive order, with Notes explanatory of the Idioms and most difficult Constructions, and a copious Vocabu- lary. By Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena. 12mo. $1.25. Seoane's Nemnan and Baretti. By M. Velazquez. A Pronouncing Dictionary of the Spani-sh and English Languages: composed from the Spanish Dictionaries of the Spanish Academy, Terreros, and Salva, upon the Basis of Seoane's edition of Neuman and Baretti, and from the English Dictionaries of Webster, Worcester, and Walker ; with the addition of more than 8,000 Words, Idioms, and Familiar Phrases, the Irregularities of all the Verbs, and a Grammatical Synopsis of both Languages. In Two Parts, I. Spanish-English; IL English-Spanish. 1,310 pages, large 8vo. $5.00. Seoane's Neuman and Baretti, abridged. By M. Velazquez. A Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, abridged from the author's larger work. 84V pages. 12mo. $1.50. An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conversation. By Mariano Vei az- QUEZ DE LA Cadena. 100 pages. 18mo. 35 cents. £>. APFLETON & CO., Publishers, 1, S, db 5 Bond Street, New York, D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. SPANISH GEAMMAES. Ollendorff s Spanish Grammar. A New Method of Learning to Read, "Write, and Speak the Spaiuah Language, with Practical Rules for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models of Social and Commercial Correspondence. By M. VE. LASQUEZ and T. T. SIMONNE. 12rao, 5G0 pages. The admirable system introduced by Ollendorff is applied in this vol> ume to the Spanish language. Having received, from the two distinguished editors to whom its supervision was intrusted, corrections, emendations, and additions, which specially adapt it to the youth of this country, it is believed to embrace every possible advantage for imparting a thorough and practical knowledge of Spanish. A course of systematic grammar underlies the whole ; but its development is so gradual and inductive as not to weary the learner. Numerous examples of regular and irregular verbs are presented : and nothing that can expedite the pupil's progress, in the way of explanation and illustration, is omitted. KEY to the Same. Separate volume. Grammar of the Spanish Language : With a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By M. SCHELE DE VERE. 12mo, 273 pages. In this volume are embodied the results of many years' experience on the part of the author, as Professor of Spanish in the University of Virginia. It aims to impart a critical knowledge of the language by a systematic course of grammar, illustrated with appropriate exercises. The authoi has availed himself of the labors of recent grammarians and critics ; and, by condensing his rules and principles and rejecting a burdensome suptt* fluity of detail, he has brought the whole within comparatively small conv pass. By pursuing this simple course, the language may be easily asd quickly mastered, not only for conversational purposes, but for reading i% Quently, and writing it with elegance. B. APPLETON db C0:8 PUBLICATIONS. Elementary Spanish Reader : By M. F. TOLON. 12mo, 156 pages. This is one of the best Elementary Spanish Readers, not only for th* purposes of self-instruction, but also as a class-book for schools, that has e^er been published. A full Vocabulary of all the words employed is ap- pended, rendering a large dictionary unnecessary. Progressive Spanish Reader : With an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By AUGUSTIN JOSE MORALES, A. M., Prof, of the Spanish Language and Litera- ture in the College of the City of New York. 12mo, 336 pages. The prose extracts in this volume are preceded by an historical account of the origin and progress of the Spanish Langurge, and a condensed, scholarlike treatise on its grammar ; the poetical selections are introduced with an Essay on Spanish versification. Prepared in either case by the preliminary matter thus furnished, bearing directly on his work, the pupil enters intelligently on his task of translating. The extracts are brief, spirited, and entertaining ; drawn mainly from writers of the present day, they are a faithful representation of the language as it is now written and spoken. The arrangement is progressive, specimens of a more difficult ciiaracter being presented as the student becomes able to cope with them. New Spanish Reader : Consisting of Extracts from the Works of the Most Approved Authors in Prose and Verse, arranged in Progressive Order ; with Notes explanatory of the Idioms and Most Difficult Constructions, and a Copious Vocabulary. By M. VELAZQUEZ BE LA CADENA. 12mo, 351 pages. This book, being particularly intended for the use of beginners, has been prepared with three objects in view : First, to furnish the learner with pleasing and easy lessons, progressively developing the beauties and diffi- culties of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their minds with valu- able knowledge ; and thirdly, to form their character, by instilling correct principles into their hearts. In order, therefore, to obtain the desired ef- fects, the extracts have been carefully selected from those classic Spanish writers, both ancient and modem, whose style is generally admitted to be a pattern of elegance, combined with idiomatic purity and sound morality. D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLIC A TIONS. Grammar for Teaching English to Spaniards. Gramatica Inglesa : Un Mctodo para Aprender a Leer, Escribir, y Habler el Ingl6s, segun el Sisteraa de Ollendorff. Acompanado de un Apendice que com- prende en Compendio las Reglas contenidas en el Cuerpo Princi- pal de la Obra ; un Tratado sobre la Pronuneiacion, Division y Formacion de las Palabras Inglesas ; una Lista de los Yerbos Kegulares e Irregulares, con sus Conjugaciones y las Distintas Preposiciones que rigen ; Modelos de Correspondencia, etc., todo al Alcance de la Capacidad mas Mediana. For RAMON PALEN- ZUELA y JUAN DE LA C. CARRENO. 12mo, 457 pages. Key to Exercises. Separate volume. Spaniards desirous of learning English will find in this volume all that is needed for its speedy and thorough acquisition. The system adopted is clear, simple, philosophical, and practical. Grammar for Teaching French to Spaniarda Gramatica Francesa : Un M6todo para Aprender a Leer, Escribir, y Hablar el Frances, seguD el Verdadero Sistema de Ollendorff. Ordenado en Lecciones Pro- gresivas, consistiendo de Ejercicios Orales y Escritos; enrique- cido de la Pronuneiacion Figurado corao se Estila en la Conver- sacion ; y de un Apendice, abrazando las Reglas de la Sintaxis, la Formacion de los Verbos Regulares, y la Conjugacion de los Irregulares. For TEODORO SIMONNE. 12rao, 341 pages. Key to Exercises. Separate volume. M. Simonn6 has done a good work in bringing the French language within the reach of Spaniards by this application of the Ollendorff system. A few weeks' study of his " Gramatica Francesa " will impart a knowl- edge of the more common conversational idioms, and a thorough mastery of it will insure as perfect an acquaintance with French as can be deeired. With the aid of the Key the study can be pursued without a master ; for the illustrative exercises at once show whether the grammatical rules and principles successively laid down are properly understood. D. AFPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS. The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase- Book. An Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowledge of the Spanish Language. By Professor BUTLER. ISmo, 293 pages. The object of the author is to make the Spanish language a living, speaking tongue to the learner ; and the method he adopts is that of na- ture. He begins with the simplest elements, and progressively advances, applying all former acquisitions as he proceeds, until the learner has mas- tered one of the most perfect languages of modern times. From the New York Jouimal of Commerce. "This is a good book, and well fitted for the purposes for which it is designed. The Spanish language is one of great simplicity, and more easily acquired than any other modern tongue. For a beginner, we recommend this little book, which is small and de- signed to be carried in the pocket." An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conver- sation. By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 18mo, 100 pages. This little work contains all that is necessary for making rapid prog- /ess in Spamsh conversation. It is well adapted for schools, and for persons who have little time to study or are their own instructors. Spanish Grammar. Being a New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Language ; after the System of A. F. AHN, Doctor of Philoso- phy, and Professor at the College of Neuss. First American Edition, revised and enlarged. 12mo, 149 pages. Prof. Ahn's method is one of peculiar excellence, and has met with great success. It has been happily described in his own words : " Learn a foreign language as you learned your mother tongue " — in the same sim- ple manner, and with the same natural gradations. This method of the distinguished German Doctor has been applied in the present instance to the Spanish Language, upon the basis of the excellent Grammars of Les* **pada and Martinez, and it is hoped that its simplicity and utility will pro- cure for it the favor that its German, French, and Italian prototypes have already found in the Schools and Colleges of Europe. 1). ArPLETON dt CO:S PUBLICATIONS. Seoane, Neuman^ and Baretti's Spanish- and-English and English-and-Span- ish Pronouncing Dictionary. By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, Professor of the Spanish Language and Literature in Columbia College, N. Y., and Corresponding Member of the National Institute, Washington- Large 8vo, 1,300 pages. Neat type, fine paper, and strong binding. The pronunciation of the Castilian language is so clearly set forth in this Dictionary as to render it well-nigh impossible for any person, who can read English readily, to fail of obtaining the true sounds of the Span- ish words at sight. In the revision of the work, more than eight thousand words, idioms, and familiar phrases, have been added. It gives in both languages the exact equivalents of the words in gen> eral use, both in their literal and metaphorical acceptations. Also, the technical terms most frequently used in the arts, in chemistry, botany, medicine, and natural history, as well as nautical and mercantile terms and phrases — most of which are not found in other Dictionaries. Also many Spanish words used only in American countries which were formerly dependencies of Spain. The names of many important articles of commerce, gleaned from the price currents of Spanish and South American cities, are inserted for the benefit of the merchant, who will here find all that he needs for carryuig on a business correspondence. The parts of the irregular verbs in Spanish and English are here, for the first time, given in full, in their alphabetical order. The work likewise contains a grammatical synopsis of both languages; arranged for ready and convenient reference. The new and improved orthography sanctioned by the latest edition of the Dictionary of the Academy — now universally adopted by the press — is here given for the first time in a Spanish-English Dictionary. An Abridgment of Velazquez's Large Dictionary, Intrnded koe Schools, Collbgbs, ajhv> Tbavellkrs. In Two Parts :— I. Spanish -Eng-lish : H. Engrlish-Spanish. By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 12mo, 888 pagesL En el lAhro Primero de Zoologia, del Curso de Hisioria Natural, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, obra dedicada a hacer conocer la Historia Natural a los ninos, el autor no se limita a hacer una relacion de lo con- cerniente a aquella materia, sino que, con especial habilidad pedagogica, ha conscuido armonizar los adelantos de la ciencia, con el desarroUo intelectuai de los nifios, haciendo la obra sumamente interesante. — Los Avisos, Revista Cienttjica, 1886 (Madrid). El Libra Primero de Zoologia, correspondiente al Curso de Historia Natural, por el Dr. D, Juan Garcia Puron, que hemos leido con deteni miento, puede considerarse como una de las mejores obras de su clase hasta hoy publicadas.— ii7 Magisterio Toledano, IBS'? (Toledo, Espana). El Curso de Historia Natural, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, es una obra de relevante merito, tanto considerada desde el punto de vista cientifico y literario, como del artistico.— A'^ Clamor del Magisterio, 1885 (Barcelona, EspaiiaJ. El Lihro Primero de Zoologia, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, co- rresponde 4 un importante Curso de Historia Natural, debido a la pluma de dicho Sr. El metodo que sigue en dicha obra es intuitive y deduc- tivo, y la exposicion de doctriua, clara y breve, ayudando a la interpreta- cion de las ideas una serie de grabados de una ejecucion tan exacta como esmerada. Recomendamos la adquisicion de tan importante obra, que considera- mos de la mayor utilidad para propagar el conocimiento de las ciencias fisico-naturales entre la juventud. — El Pro/esorado, 1886 (Barcelona, Espana). * * El Libro Primero de Mineralogia y Geologia, del Curso de Historia Natural, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, viene a llenar el vacio que se observa en las obras destinadas a las Escuelas Normales, Superiores, e Institutos de segunda enseiianza. — El Clamor del Magisterio, 1889 (Bar- celona, Espana). El Libro Primero de Zoologia, per el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, es verdaderamente un libro util, lleno de interns y de amenidad, que cautiva la atencion del nino enseiiandole los raedios de observacion sencillos, y lo eleva a la contemplacion de la naturaleza y de su Creador, haciendole adquirir insensiblemente un caudal de conocimientos provechosos para estudios superiores. No vacilamos en recomcndarlo como utilisimo para la enseiianza primaria. — Aiuiles de Instruccion Publica de la Republica de Colombia, 1887 (Bogota). El Libro Primero de Zoohgia^ por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Pur on, es un libro verdaderamente util, no solo come obra de texto en un curse ele- mental de Ilistoria Natural, slno como libro de Icctura en las Escuelas. — El Inslructor, 1886 (Aguascalicntes, M6jico). ' En el Curso de Historia Natural, per cl Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, las explicaciones estan puestas al alcance de las mks, tiernas inteligencias, y es una obra que ha tenido la mas favorable acogida en la America espanola, algunos de cuyos paises la ban adoptado como de texto en sua escuelas. — El Diario de la Marina, 1887 (Habana). Recomendamos vivamente cl Libro Primero de Mineralogia y Geo- logia, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, obra que se distingue por ru buen estilo y sus exceleutes grabados. — II. VVieghardt, Profesor de cien- cias naturales y Geografia de la Escuela Normal de Preceptores de Santiago. — La lievista de Lnstruccidn Primaria^ 1889 (Chile). Nuestras escuelas y colegios carecen de un texto tan apropiado para la ensenanza elemental, como el Curso de Historia Natural debido k la pluma del Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron. — Biario ^e Centro-America, 18St> (Guatemala). '^' El Libro de Zoologla del Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron es utillsimo, ameno y muy instructive, porque en un Jenguaje claro se dan nociones complctas de Zoologla, pareciendo incrcible que en tan pocas paginas haya condensado el autor tan prcciosaa 6 iutcresantes lecciones.— ii7 Tiempo, 1886 (M6jico). El Libro Primero de Zoologia, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, es la mcjor obra que para la cnscMliinza se ha publicado en nuestros dias. — El Protector de la Lnfancia, 1887 (Barcelona, Espafia). El Libro Primero de Zoologla del Dr. D. Juan Garcia Pur6n. Esta obra en nucstro jiilcio estii llamada i\ resolver para la ensenanza de esta asignatura, cl diflcil probloma de facilitar su conocimiento, atcndiendo & las especiallsiif as condiciones que en la misma concurren por su m6todo y e:*posici6n, por cl orden y claridad que en cUa jiresidc, sin que decaiga un momento ol inter6s que despicvta. — Lm. Scr/ni^da Ensenanza, ^rgaoo General de los Establccimicntos de la Enscfiauza, 1886 (Cordoba, Espafia). t ^■■^ca^t f m 3570 /v 1,1,^4/ tfic